TENDER NO.

MOT/05/2018-2019

PROPOSED REGENERATION OF
JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH
FOR

MINISTRY OF TOURISM AND WILDLIFE

STATE DEPARTMENT OF TOURISM
IN

MOMBASA COUNTY
APROXIMATE
BILLS OF QUANTITIES
(MAIN WORKS ESTIMATE)
Planning Systems Services Ltd.,
Architects,
P.O. Box 188 - 00606,
Nairobi.

Planning Project Management Ltd., Davson & Ward,

Project Managers, Quantity Surveyors, Building
P.O. Box 188 - 00606, Economists & Project Managers,
Nairobi. P.O. Box 46611 - 00100 GPO,
Nairobi.

APRIL, 2019
 CONTENTS

Section Title Page No.

- Signature Page -

- TENDER INVITATION NOTICE 1 - 2

Section A: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS …………………. 1 - 25

Section B: CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ………………………. 26 - 47

Section C: APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT …… 48 - 49

Section D: BILLS OF QUANTITIES (ALL PROVISIONAL) -

Bill No. 1 Preliminaries and General Conditions 1/1 - 1/18
Bill No. 2 Gateway 2/1 - 2/15
Bill No. 3 New ablution Block (3 No) 3/1 - 3/19
Bill No. 4 Enabling Works for Kiosks 4/1 - 4/10
Bill No. 5 Refuse Collection Area 5/1 - 5/5
Bill No. 6 Hard Landscape Areas 6/1 - 6/8
Bill No. 7 Stormwater Drainage 7/1 - 7/5
Bill No. 8 Foul Drainage 8/1 - 8/2
Bill No. 9 Electrical Installation Works 9/1 - 9/12
Bill No. 10 Mechanical Installations 10/1 - 10/21
Bill No. 11 Dayworks 11/1 - 11/6
Bill No. 12 Provisional Sums 12/1 - 12/1
Bill No. 13 Schedule of Rates 13/1 - 13/5
-- Final Summary FS/1

SECTION E: DRAWINGS ……………………………………….. E/1 -

SECTION F: SPECIFICATIONS:
• Architects Specification ………………… F/1 - F/23
• Structural Engineers Specification ……….. F/24 - F/51
• External Works Specification ……………… F/52 - F/55
• P.C. & Provisional Sums Preambles ……. F/56 - F/57

SECTION G: SAMPLE FORMS………………………………………. G/1 - G/15

SECTION H: SUMMARY OF EVALUATION CRITERIA…………. H/1 - H/5

SECTION I: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL…. I/1 - I/42

SECTION J: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUBMING &

DRAINAGE …………………………………….………. J/1 - J/60

COPYRIGHT

The whole of the contents of the drawings, Bills of Quantities and all other
documents used in connection with this Contract are copyright and must not be
reproduced either in full or in part without the prior written consent of the Architect
or Quantity Surveyor.
 BILLS OF QUANTITIES

FOR

PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH

FOR

MINISTRY OF TOURISM AND WILDLIFE

STATE DEPARTMENT OF TOURISM

Prepared by: Davson and Ward,

Quantity Surveyors and
Building Economists,
P.O. Box 46611,
NAIROBI.

April, 2019

The Contract for the above-mentioned works, entered into on the ................day
of............................20…….….... by the undersigned parties refers to these Bills of Quantities
comprising 360 pages numbered ‘Contents’, Signature Page, Tender Invitation
Notice, Instructions to Tenderers 1 – 25, Conditions of Contract 26 – 47, Appendix to
Conditions of Contract 48 – 49, 1/1 - 1/18, 2/1 – 2/15, 3/1 – 3/19, 4/1 – 4/10, 5/1 – 5/5,
6/1 – 6/8, 7/1 - 7/5, 8/1 – 8/2, 9/1 – 9/12,10/1 – 10/21, 11/1 – 11/6, 12/1 – 12/1, 13/1 –
13/5, FS/1, E/1, F/1 – F/57, G/1 – G/13, H/1 – H/5, I/1 – I/42, and J/1 – J/60 inclusive,
which shall be read and construed as part of the said Contract.,

...................................................................... .......................................................................
EMPLOYER CONTRACTOR

Date: .............................................................. Date: ...............................................................

SPECIAL NOTE

The Contractor is required to check the numbers of the pages of these Bills of
Quantities and should he find any missing or in duplicate or the figures indistinct he
must inform the Quantity Surveyor at once and have the same rectified.

Should the Contractor be in doubt about the precise meaning of any items or
figures for any reason whatsoever he must inform the Quantity Surveyor in order
that the correct meaning may be decided before the date for submission of
tenders.

No liabilities will be admitted nor claim allowed in respect of errors in the

Contractor's tender due to mistakes in the Bills of Quantities which should have
been rectified in the manner described above.

SIGNATURE PAGE
 REPUBLIC OF KENYA

MINISTRY OF TOURISM & WILDLIFE

STATE DEPARTMENT FOR TOURISM

TENDER INVITATION NOTICE

The Government of Kenya Through the Ministry of Tourism & Wildlife, State Department for Tourism intends to undertake
construction works to the PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH AND MAMA NGINA
DRIVE WATERFRONT IN MOMBASA COUNTY and invites tenders from contractors who will carry out the following works: -

N TENDER NO. DESCRIPTION CATEGORY TENDER BID CLOSING DATE

O FEE BOND
1 MOT/05/ Proposed Regeneration of NCA 1 & 2 Ksh.1000 2% 30th April, 2019
2018-2019 Jomo Kenyatta Public Beach only
in Mombasa County– Main
Works

2 MOT/06/2018- Proposed Regeneration of NCA 1-6 Ksh.1000 2% 30th April, 2019

2019(a) Mama Ngina drive
waterfront and cultural
District in Mombasa County-
Electrical Installation works
3 MOT/06/2018- Proposed Regeneration of NCA 1-6 Ksh.1000 2% 30th April, 2019
2019(b) Mama Ngina drive
waterfront and cultural
District in Mombasa County-
Plumbing, Drainage and
firefighting &protection
Equipment
4 MOT/06/2018- Proposed Regeneration of NCA 1-6 Ksh.1000 2% 30th April, 2019
2019(c) Mama Ngina drive
waterfront and cultural
District in Mombasa County-
HVAC Installation works

Interested Contractors who are registered in relevant trades and categories, (proof of registration required) may obtain revised Tender
Documents from The Supply Chain Management Office, 6th Floor Room 631, Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife, (State Department
for Tourism), Utalii House in person, upon payment of a non-refundable fee of Kshs. 1000/- in cash office on 15th floor, NSSF Building
Block A. before 4.00pm on normal working days or in banker’s cheque payable to The Principal Secretary, State Department for
Tourism, Nairobi or downloaded from State Department for Tourism website www.tourism.go.ke and Treasury portal
www.supplier.treasury.go.ke. Those who download should send their contact details including email addresses, telephone numbers and
contact name to [email protected] for registration.

There will be a mandatory pre-tender site visit on 23rd April 2019 for tender no. MOT/05/2018-2019 [Jomo Kenyatta Public Beach in
Mombasa] bidders will assemble at Jomo Kenyatta Public Beach, next to KWS Offices, Mombasa at 1O.30AM. For those bidders
who attended the last pre-tender site visit may opt not to attend.

On 24th April 2019, there will be a Mandatory pre- tender site visit for all bidders for tender no MOT/06/2018-2019(a -c) Mama Ngina
drive. Bidders will assemble at the parking lot of the Galaxy Chinese restaurant [ next to Florida club] along mama Ngina drive, Mombasa
at 10.30 am

Interested bidders should note that only those meeting the criteria indicated below as a minimum, supported by relevant documents at
submission will be considered for further evaluation, detailed technical evaluation criteria will appear in the tender documents.

1. The Bid Bond must be in form of Bank Guarantee from a reputable bank or approved insurance company.

2. List of Directors with respective shareholding and citizenship details (CR 12)

3. Confidential Business Questionnaire

4. Tax Compliance Certificate.

5. Audited Accounts for the Last two years

1
6. Certificate of company registration
7. Current Business permits from relevant local authority
8. Current category of Licence with the relevant statutory bodies Energy Regulatory Commission, County Governments, and Water
Management Boards etc

Tenders in plain sealed envelopes, marked tender number on the right-hand side corner and bearing no indication of the tenderer should
be addressed to: -

THE PRINCIPAL SECRETARY

MINISTRY OF TOURISM AND WILDLIFE
STATE DEPARTMENT OF TOURISM
P. O. Box 30027-00100
NAIROBI

and placed in the Tender Box on 6th Floor at the Utalii House Nairobi or sent by post so as to reach the above address on or before
Tuesday, 30TH April, 2019 at 11.00 a.m.

Submitted bids will be opened publicly in the 7th floor Conference room, Utalii House soon after the above stated closing date and time
in the presence of the tenderers or their representatives who choose to attend. Late bids will be returned unopened.

Prices quoted must be net inclusive of VAT and all Government Taxes and must remain valid for one hundred twenty (120) days from the
opening date of the tender.

The Bid Security in the right format must be from a reputable bank or from a PPRA accredited insurance company, shall be valid for
one hundred fifty (150) days from tender opening date.

The Government reserves the right to reject any tender giving reasons for the rejection and does not bind itself to accept the lowest or any
tender.

PRINCIPAL SECRETARY,
MINISTRY OF TOURISM AND WILDLIFE
STATE DEPARTMENT FOR TOURISM.

2
 SECTION A

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

CONTENTS PAGE

CLAUSE PAGE

1. General ……………………………………………………… 2

2. Tender Documents ……………………………………….. 4

3. Preparation of Tenders ……………………………………. 5

4. Submission of Tenders ……………………………………… 8

5. Tender Opening and Evaluation …………………………. 9

6. Award of Contract …………………………………………… 11

7. Stages of Evaluation…………………………………………... 13

1
 INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

1. General

1.1 The Employer as defined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract invites tenders
for Works Contract as described in the tender documents. The successful tenderer
will be expected to complete the Works by the Intended Completion Date specified
in the tender documents.

1.2 All tenderers shall provide the Qualification Information, a statement that the
tenderer (including all members of a joint venture and Contractors) is not
associated, or has not been associated in the past, directly or indirectly, with the
Consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design, specifications, and
other documents for the project or being proposed as Project Manager for the
Contract. A firm that has been engaged by the Employer to provide consulting
services for the preparation or supervision of the Works, and any of its affiliates,
shall not be eligible to tender.

1.3 All tenderers shall provide in the Form of Tender and Qualification Information, a
preliminary description of the proposed work method and schedule, including
drawings and charts, as necessary.

1.4 In the event that pre-qualification of potential tenderers has been undertaken,
only tenders from pre-qualified tenderers will be considered for award of contract.
These qualified tenderers should submit with their tenders any information
updating their original pre-qualification applications or, alternatively, confirm in
their tenders that the originally submitted pre-qualification information remains
essentially correct as of the date of tender submission.

1.5 Where no pre-qualification of potential tenderers has been done, all tenderers
shall include the following information and documents with their tenders , unless
otherwise stated:

(a) copies of original documents defining the constitution or legal status, place
of registration, and principal place of business; written power of attorney of
the signatory of the tender to commit the tenderer:

(b) total monetary value of construction work performed for each of the last five
years:

2
 (c) experience in works of a similar nature and size for each of the last five years,
and details of work under way or Contractually committed; and names and
addresses of clients who may be contacted for further information on these
contracts;

(d) major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract
and an undertaking that they will be available for the contract.

(e) qualifications and experience of key site management and technical

personnel proposed for the Contract and an undertaking that they shall be
available for the contract.

(f) reports on the financial standing of the tenderer, such as profit and loss
statements and auditor’s reports for the past five years;

(g) evidence of adequacy of working capital for this Contract (access to line(s)
of credit and availability of other financial resources);

(h) authority to seek references from the tenderer’s bankers;

(i) information regarding any litigation, current or during the last five years, in
which the tenderer is involved, the parties concerned and disputed amount;
and

(j) proposals for Sub-Contracting components of the Works amounting to more

than 10 percent of the contract Price.

1.6 Tenders submitted by a joint venture of two or more firms as partners shall comply
with the following requirements, unless otherwise stated:

(a) the tender shall include all the information listed in clause 1.5 above for each
joint venture partner;

(b) the tender shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all Partners;

(c ) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract
in accordance with the Contract terms;

(d) one of the partners will be nominated as being in charge and authorized to
incur liabilities, and receive instructions for and on behalf of all partners of the
joint venture; and
(e) the execution of the entire Contract, including payment, shall be done
exclusively with the partner in charge.

3
 1.7 Each tenderer shall submit only one tender, either individually or as a partner in a
joint venture. A tenderer who submits or participates in more than one tender
(other than as a Contractor or in cases of alternatives that have been permitted
or requested) will cause all the proposals with the tenderer’s participation to be
disqualified.

1.8 The tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of
his tender, and the Employer will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs.

1.9 The tenderer, at the tenderer’s own responsibility and risk, is encouraged to visit
and examine the Site of the Works and its surroundings, and obtain all information
that may be necessary for preparing the tender and entering into a contract for
construction of the Works. The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the tenderer’s
own expense.

2. Tender Documents

2.1 The complete set of tender documents comprises the documents listed below
and any addenda issued in accordance with Clause 2.4.

(a) These Instructions to Tenderers

(b) Form of Tender and Qualification Information

(c ) Conditions of contract

(d) Appendix to Conditions of contract

(e) Drawings

(f) Bills of Quantities

(g) Specifications

(h) Forms of Securities

2.2 The tenderer shall examine all Instructions, Forms to be filled and Specifications in the
tender documents. Failure to furnish all information required by the tender
documents, or submission of a tender not substantially responsive to the tendering
documents in every respect will be at the tenderer’s risk and may result in rejection
of his tender.

4
 2.3 A prospective tenderer requiring any clarification of the tendering documents
may notify the Employer in writing or by cable, telex, facsimile or e-mail at the
address indicated in the letter of invitation to tender. The Employer will only
respond to requests for clarification received earlier than seven days prior to the
deadline for submission of tenders. Copies of the Employer’s response will be
forwarded to all persons issued with tendering documents, including a description
of the inquiry, but without identifying its source.

2.4 Before the deadline for submission of tenders, the Employer may modify the
tendering documents by issuing addenda. Any addendum thus issued shall be
part of the tendering documents and shall be communicated in writing or by
cable, telex or facsimile to all tenderers. Prospective tenderers shall acknowledge
receipt of each addendum in writing to the Employer.

2.5 To give prospective tenderers reasonable time in which to take an addendum into
account in preparing their tenders, the Employer shall extend, as necessary, the
deadline for submission of tenders, in accordance with Clause 4.2 herebelow.

3. Preparation of Tenders
3.1 All documents relating to the tender and any correspondence shall be in English
language.

3.2 The tender submitted by the tenderer shall comprise the following:

(a) These Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of Contract,

Appendix to Conditions of contract and Specifications;

(b) Tender Security – 2% of tender amount from a reputable bank valid for an
additional 30 days beyond the 90 days tender validity period.

(c ) Priced Bill of Quantities:

(d) Alternative offers where invited; and

(e) Any other materials required to be completed and submitted by the

tenderers.

3.3 The tenderer shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the
Bill of Quantities. Items for which no rate or price is entered by the tenderer will not
be paid for when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and
prices in the Bill of Quantities. All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the
Contractor under the Contract, or for any other cause relevant to the Contract, as
of 30 days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders, shall be included in the
tender price submitted by the tenderer.

5
 3.4 The rates and prices quoted by the tenderer shall only be subject to adjustment
during the performance of the Contract if provided for in the Appendix to
Conditions of Contract and provisions made in the Conditions of Contract.

3.5 The unit rates and prices shall be in Kenya Shillings.

3.6 Tenders shall remain valid for a period of 90 days from the date of submission.
However in exceptional circumstances, the Employer may request that the
tenderers extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. The
request and the tenderers’ responses shall be made in writing. A tenderer may
refuse the request without forfeiting the Tender Security. A tenderer agreeing to
the request will not be required or permitted to otherwise modify the tender, but
will be required to extend the validity of Tender Security for the period of the
extension, and in compliance with Clause 3.7 - 3.11 in all respects.

3.7 The tenderer shall furnish, as part of the tender, a Tender Security for the amount
specified in the invitation to tender. This shall be in the form of a bank draft or a
bank guarantee from an established and reputable bank approved by the
Employer.

3.8 The format of the Tender Security should be in accordance with the form of
Tender Security included in Section G – Sample forms or any other form
acceptable to the Employer. Tender Security shall be valid for 30 days beyond
the validity of the tender.

3.9 Any tender not accompanied by an acceptable Tender Security shall be

rejected. The Tender Security of a joint venture must define as “Tenderer” all joint
venture partners and list them in the following manner: a joint venture consisting
of”…………”,”…………”,and “…………”.

3.10 The Tender Securities of unsuccessful tenderers will be returned within 28 days of the
end of the tender validity period specified in Clause 3.6.

3.11 The Tender Security of the successful tenderer will be discharged when the
tenderer has signed the Contract Agreement and furnished the required
Performance Security.

6
3.12 The Tender Security may be forfeited

(a) if the tenderer withdraws the tender after tender opening during the period
of tender validity;

(b) if the tenderer does not accept the correction of the tender price, pursuant
to Clause 5.7;

(c ) in the case of a successful tenderer, if the tenderer fails within the specified
time limit to

(i) sign the Agreement, or

(ii) furnish the required Performance Security.

3.13 Tenderers shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the tendering
documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the Drawings and
Specifications. Alternatives will not be considered, unless specifically allowed in
the invitation to tender. If so allowed, tenderers wishing to offer technical
alternatives to the requirements of the tendering documents must also submit a
tender that complies with the requirements of the tendering documents, including
the basic technical design as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. In
addition to submitting the basic tender, the tenderer shall provide all information
necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternative, including design
calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, proposed construction
methods and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the
lowest evaluated tender conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be
considered.

3.14 The tenderer shall prepare one original of the documents comprising the tender
documents as described in Clause 3.2 of these Instructions to Tenderers, bound with
the volume containing the Form of Tender, and clearly marked “ORIGINAL”.

3.15 The original shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person
or persons duly authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer, pursuant to Clause 1.5
(a) or 1.6 (b), as the case may be. All pages of the tender where alterations or
additions have been made shall be initialled by the person or persons signing the
tender.

7
4. Submission of Tenders
4.1 The tenderer shall seal the original and all copies of the tender in two inner
envelopes and one outer envelope, duly marking the inner envelopes as
“ORIGINAL” and “COPIES” as appropriate.
The outer and inner envelopes shall:-
(a) be addressed to the Employer at the address provided in the invitation to
tender which is :- The Principal Secretary,
Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife,
State Department of Tourism,
P.O. Box 30027 – 00100,
Nairobi
bear
(b) have the name and identification number of the Tender as defined in the
invitainvitation to tender; and
(c ) provide a warning not to open before the specified time and date for tender
opening.
4.2 Tenders shall be delivered to the Employer at the address specified above not
later than the time and date specified in the invitation to tender. However, the
Employer may extend the deadline for submission of tenders by issuing an
amendment in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.5 in which case all rights and
obligations of the Employer and the tenderers previously subject to the original
deadline will then be subject to the new deadline.
4.3 Any tender received after the deadline prescribed in clause 4.2 will be returned to
the tenderer un-opened.
4.4 Tenderers may modify or withdraw their tenders by giving notice in writing before the
deadline prescribed in clause 4.2. Each tenderer’s modification or withdrawal
notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked, and delivered in accordance with clause
3.13 and 4.1, with the outer and inner envelopes additionally marked
“MODIFICATION”and “WITHDRAWAL”, as appropriate. No tender may be modified
after the deadline for submission of tenders.

4.5 Withdrawal of a tender between the deadline for submission of tenders and the
expiration of the period of tender validity specified in the invitation to tender or as
extended pursuant to Clause 3.6 may result in the forfeiture of the Tender Security
pursuant to Clause 3.11.

4.6 Tenderers may only offer discounts to, or otherwise modify the prices of their
tenders by submitting tender modifications in accordance with Clause 4.4 or be
included in the original tender submission.

5. Tender Opening and Evaluation

5.1 The tenders will be opened by the Employer, including modifications made
pursuant to Clause 4.4, in the presence of the tenderers’ representatives who
choose to attend at the time and in the place specified in the invitation to tender.
Envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and read out first. Tenderers’
and Employer’s representatives who are present during the opening shall sign a
register evidencing their attendance.

8
5.2 The tenderers’ names, and presence or otherwise of Envelopes A and B will be
announced and recorded. Envelope A shall be opened, the total amount of
each tender, completion periods for phases one and two and of any alternative
tender (if alternatives have been requested or permitted), any discounts, tender
modifications and withdrawals, the presence or absence of Tender Security, and
such other details as may be considered appropriate, will be announced by the
Employer at the opening. Minutes of the tender opening, including the
information disclosed to those present will be prepared by the Employer.

5.3 Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation, and comparison

of tenders and recommendations for the award of Contract shall not be disclosed
to tenderers or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until
the award to the successful tenderer has been announced. Any effort by a
tenderer to influence the Employer’s officials, processing of tenders or award
decisions may result in the rejection of his tender.

5.4 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of tenders, the Employer
at his discretion, may ask any tenderer for clarification of the tender, including
breakdowns of unit rates. The request for clarification and the response shall be in
writing or by cable, telex or facsimile but no change in the price or substance of
the tender shall be sought, offered, or permitted except as required to confirm the
correction of arithmetic errors discovered in the evaluation of the tenders in
accordance with Clause 5.7.

5.5 Prior to the detailed evaluation of tenders, the Employer will determine whether
each tender (a) meets the eligibility criteria defined in Clause 1.7;(b) has been
properly signed; (c) is accompanied by the required securities; and (d) is
substantially responsive to the requirements of the tendering documents. A
substantially responsive tender is one which conforms to all the terms, conditions and
specifications of the tendering documents, without material deviation or reservation.
A material deviation or reservation is one (a) which affects in any substantial way
the scope, quality, or performance of the works; (b) which limits in any substantial
way, inconsistent with the tendering documents, the Employer’s rights or the
tenderer’s obligations under the Contract; or (c) whose rectification would affect
unfairly the competitive position of other tenderers presenting substantially
responsive tenders.

5.6 If a tender is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected, and may not
subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of the
nonconforming deviation or reservation.

5.7 The tenders determined to be substantially responsive will be checked for any
arithmetic errors. Errors will be corrected as follows:

(a) where there is a discrepancy between the amount in figures and the
amount in words, the amount in words will prevail; and

(b) where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item total
resulting from multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as
quoted will prevail, unless in the opinion of the Employer, there is an obvious
9
 typographical error, in which case the adjustment will be made to the entry
containing that error.

(c ) In the event of a discrepancy between the tender amount as stated in the

Form of Tender and the corrected tender figure in the main summary of the
Bill of Quantities, the amount as stated in the Form of Tender shall prevail.

(d) The Error Correction Factor shall be computed by expressing the difference
between the tender amount and the corrected tender sum as a
percentage of the corrected Builder’s Work (i.e. Corrected tender sum less
P.C. and Provisional Sums)

(e) The Error Correction Factor shall be applied to all Builder’s Work (as a rebate
or addition as the case may be) for the purposes of valuations for Interim
Certificates and valuation of variations.

(f) the amount stated in the tender will be adjusted in accordance with the
above procedure for the correction of errors and, with concurrence of the
tenderer, shall be considered as binding upon the tenderer. If the tenderer
does not accept the corrected amount, the tender may be rejected and
the Tender Security may be forfeited in accordance with clause 3.11.

5.8 The Employer will evaluate and compare only the tenders determined to be
substantially responsive in accordance with Clause 5.5.

5.9 In evaluating the tenders, the Employer will determine for each tender the
evaluated tender price by adjusting the tender price as follows:

(a) making any correction for errors pursuant to clause 5.7;

(b) excluding provisional sums and the provision, if any, for contingencies in the
Bill of Quantities, but including Dayworks where priced competitively.

(c) making an appropriate adjustment for any other acceptable variations,

deviations, or alternative offers submitted in accordance with clause 3.12;
and

(d) making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price

modifications offered in accordance with clause 4.6

5.10 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any variation, deviation, or
alternative offer. Variations, deviations, and alternative offers and other factors
which are in excess of the requirements of the tender documents or otherwise
result in unsolicited benefits for the Employer will not be taken into account in
tender evaluation.

5.11 The tenderer shall not influence the Employer on any matter relating to his tender
from the time of the tender opening to the time the Contract is awarded. Any
effort by the Tenderer to influence the Employer or his employees in his decision on
tender evaluation, tender comparison or Contract award may result in the
rejection of the tender.

10
 5.12 Firms incorporated in Kenya where indigenous Kenyans own 51% or more of the
share capital shall be allowed a 10% preferential bias provided that they do not
Contract work valued at more than 50% of the Contract Price excluding Provisional
Sums to a non-indigenous Contractor.

5.13 Stages of Evaluation- see details in clause 8 page 12 hereinafter.

6. Award of Contract

6.1 Subject to Clause 6.2, the award of the Contract will be made to the tenderer
whose tender has been determined to be substantially responsive to the tendering
documents and who has offered the lowest evaluated tender price, provided that
such tenderer has been determined to be (a) eligible in accordance with the
provision of Clauses 1.2, and (b) qualified in accordance with the provisions of
clause 1.7 and 1.8.

6.2 Notwithstanding clause 6.1 above, the Employer reserves the right to accept or
reject any tender, and to cancel the tendering process and reject all tenders, at
any time prior to the award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the
affected tenderer or tenderers or any obligation to inform the affected tenderer or
tenderers of the grounds for the action.
6.3 The tenderer whose tender has been accepted will be notified of the award prior
to expiration of the tender validity period in writing or by email or facsimile. This
notification (hereinafter and in all Contract documents called the “Letter of
Acceptance”) will state the sum (hereinafter and in all Contract documents
called the “Contract Price”) that the Employer will pay the Contractor in
consideration of the execution, completion, and maintenance of the Works by
the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract.
The notification of award will constitute the formation of the Contract, subject to the
tenderer furnishing the Performance Security in accordance with Clause 6.5 and
signing the Agreement in accordance with Clause 6.4., if the award is not
challenged within 14 days of notification.
6.4 The Agreement will incorporate all agreements between the Employer and the
successful tenderer. It will be signed by the Procuring Entity and sent to the
successful tenderer, after 30 days following the notification of award. Within 14
days of receipt the successful tenderer will sign the Agreement and return it to the
Employer.
6.5 On expiry of 14 days after receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the successful
tenderer shall deliver to the Employer a Performance Security in the amount
stipulated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract and in the form stipulated in
the Tender documents. The Performance Security shall be in the form of a Bank
Guarantee, and shall be issued at the tenderer’s option, by a reputable bank
located in Kenya and acceptable to the Employer.
6.6 Failure of the successful tenderer to comply with the requirements of clause 6.5
shall constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award and forfeiture of
the Tender Security.

6.7 The Employer will simultaneously notify the successful tenderer and unsuccessful
tenderers of the fate of their tenders.
11
 6.8 Preference where allowed in the evaluation of tenders shall not be allowed for
contracts not exceeding one year (12 months)

6.9 The tender evaluation committee shall evaluate the tender within 30 days of the
validity period from the date of opening the tender.

6.10 The parties to the contract shall have it signed within 30 days from the date of
notification of contract award unless there is an administrative review request.

6.11 Contract price variations shall not be allowed for contracts not exceeding one
year (12 months)

6.12 Where contract price variation is allowed, the valuation shall not exceed 15% of
the original contract price.

6.13 Price variation request shall be processed by the procuring entity within 30 days of
receiving the request.

6.14 The procuring entity may at any time terminate procurement proceedings before
contract award and shall not be liable to any person for the termination.

6.15 The procuring entity shall give prompt notice of the termination to the tenderers
and on request give its reasons for termination within 14 days of receiving the
request from any tenderer.

6.16 A tenderer who gives false information in the tender document about its
qualification or who refuses to enter into a contract after notification of contract
award shall be considered for debarment from participating in future public
procurement.

7 Corrupt and Fraudulent practices

7.1 The procuring entity requires that tenderers observe the highest standards of ethics
during procurement process and execution of contracts. A tenderer shall sign a
declaration that he has not and will not be involved in corrupt and fraudulent
practices.

8. Stages of Evaluation

PRELIMINARY EVALUATION:
ENAME…………………………………………………………………….

Bidder
No.
Tax Compliance Certificate from KRA
1
List of Directors with respective shareholding and citizenship details (CR12 and copies of
2 National IDs)

12
Bidder
No.
Confidential Business Questionnaire
3
Audited Accounts for the Last two years
4

5 Certificate of Company Registration

Class 2 and above Contractor for National Construction Authority (copy of registration
6 certificate to be attached)
Current Business permits from relevant local authority
7
Bid Bond/Tender Security of 2% of the Tender amount from a reputable Bank or approved
8 Insurance Company
The proposed Domestic sub-contractors to submit (Electrical
9 a)Tax Compliance Certificate from KRA

b)Certificate of Company registration

c)National Construction Authority registration and NCA category 3 or higher (copy of
certificate to be attached
d)Electrical sub-contractor to provide ERC category A-1 and be licensed with
Communications Authority of Kenya

The proposed Domestic sub-contractors to submit (Mechanical

10 a) Tax Compliance Certificate from KRA

b)Certificate of Company registration

c) National Construction Authority registration and NCA category 3 or higher (copy of
certificate to be attached
REMARKS

NOTES;
1. Tenders which do not satisfy any of the above requirements shall be rejected
2. Responsive
3. X Non Responsive

STAGE 2 TECHNICAL EVALUATION

CRITERIA MAX
POINTS
A Documents fully completed/ compliance with pricing instructions 4
Duly filled/Completed Documents or Rejection under Clause 2.2 of instructions to
Tenderers 4
No Errors 2
Up to 15% error 1
Above 15% error NR
Consistency in Price Distribution 1
Not consistent 0
SUB TOTAL SECTION A
B Personnel 28
Contract Manager to have at least University Degree in Architecture, Quantity Surveying or Civil 10
Engineering with at least five years’ experience as a Contract Manager in works of an equivalent
nature and Volume OR Higher National Diploma in Building Construction/Engineering with 15
years’ experience as a Contract Manager in works of an equivalent nature and Volume
• Qualification (5 points) and experience for the Period Indicated ( points) – (total 10 Points)

13
 • With the required qualification but less experience than the period indicated (Pro-rate)

• Less Qualifications than stated above (0 Points regardless of experience)

Site Manager to have at least Higher National Diploma in Building Construction/Engineering with 8
10 years (if degree holder 5 years) experience as a Site Manager in works of an equivalent nature
and Volume OR Certificate holder in Building Construction/Engineering with 15 years’ experience
as a Site Manager in works of an equivalent nature and Volume

• Qualification (4 points) and experience for the Period Indicated (4 points) – (total 8Points)

• With the required qualification but less experience than the period indicated (Pro-rate)

• Less Qualifications than stated above (0 Points regardless of experience)

Construction Supervisors (at least 2 No.) to have at least Ordinary National Diploma in Building 6
Construction/Engineering with 10 years (if degree holder 5 years) experience as a Construction
Supervisor OR Certificate holder in Building construction/Eng with 15 years experience as a
Construction Supervisor in works of similar nature.

• Qualification (2 points each) and experience for the Period Indicated (1 point each) – (total 6
Points)

• With the required qualification but less experience than the period indicated (Pro-rate)

• Less Qualifications than stated above (0 Points regardless of experience)

Detailed curriculum vitae of the above personnel certified and signed by both employee and 2
bidding company representative to be attached

• Submission for all the above staff (2 Points)

• Submission for less ( Pro-rata

Copies of employment letters for the above personnel on permanent or contract terms to be attached 2

• Submission of employment letters for all staff (2 Points)

• Submission for less ( Pro-rata)

SUB TOTAL SECTION B

C Relevant Experience and Capacity 30

Details of experience and past performance on at least five completed projects as a main contractor 30
(builders works) within the past ten years each with a value of a lesser magnitude including names
of clients/firms, clear physical address and contact persons [At least three (3) of these projects must
be located in Kenya]. (Attach Contract agreements and Certificates of completion)

Completed projects to include the following name of project, address of client, contact persons.
Providing evidence of such contracts(attach contract agreements and practical completion
certificates. (6 Points on each project)

• Any project submitted as above which of a lesser magnitude or not accompanied by

evidence of contract i.e. Contract agreement and Completion Certificate shall not be
considered for scoring of the assigned points. • Projects that are at least 70% complete with
evidence in regard to (1) above would be considered for scoring
SUB TOTAL SECTION C
D Machinery & Equipment 13
Provide a list of Major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract
including, but not limited to the listed items as shown in page 23 and 24 hereinafter {tenderers are
expected to complete this table as necessary, failure to do so may attract nil points for this item}.
State if own or lease and an undertaking letter that they will be available for the Contract. (Provide
Proof of ownership e.g. copies of log books, receipts, letters of insurance e.t.c. or lease agreements
14
 or a firm commitment letter on its availability for inspection by Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife,
State Department of Tourism at any time) – 10 points.
Concrete mixing & placing plant/ Equipment (3 Points) 3
Vertical Transport Equipment (3 Points 3
Vehicle Transport(2 Points 2
Earthmoving & Compaction Equipment (5Points 5

- All the listed Equipment (10 Points) - Less than the listed items (Pro-rata
SUBTOTAL SECTION D
E Business Support 19
Availability of Liquid assets (5 points) and access to lines of credit or other financial resources (5 10
points) - (total 10 Points)
Proof of Financial stability (current ratio of 2:1) – (4 Points) 4
Information regarding any litigation, current or during the last five years, in which the tenderer is 5
involved, the parties concerned and disputed amount. If none, state so. (5 Point)
SUB TOTAL SECTION E
F At least 3 referees List below (attach copies of referees). 3

Three referees (3 points 3

Less or none(0) 0
SUBTOTAL SECTION F
G Completion programme for the works – 3
Realistic shortest contract period (3 Points) 3
Any other period (Pro-rata) 0
SUB TOTAL SECTION G
GRAND TOTAL 100

Cut off – 75% to qualify for financial evaluation.

STAGE 3 – FINANCIAL EVALUATION

Price comparison and checking for arithmetic errors.

RECOMMENDATION
THE LOWEST EVALUATED TENDER TO BE RECOMMENDED FOR CONSIDERATION OF
AWARD SUBJECT TO THE STATED CONDITIONS OF AWARD.

15
 EVALUATION QUESTIONAIRE

A. Documents to be duly filled in accordance with instructions to tender

B.Personnel

1. Qualification and experience of key personnel proposed for administration

and execution of the Contract. Attach biographical data.

Position Name Academic Professional Years of Years as

Qua. Qualification experience manager
in
Construction
1.1 Contract
Manager

1. 2 Site Manager

2 Proposed Technical Staff (attach relevant certificates)

Name Academic Professional Years of

Qualification Qualification Experience
2.1 Construction/Site
supervisor I

2.2 Construction/Site
Superviser II

FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF

Proposed Position: ______Contract manager_________________________________________________

Name of Firm: ______________________________________________________________________

Name of Staff: ______________________________________________________________________

Profession: _________________________________________________________________________

Date of Birth: ______________________________________________________________________

Years with Firm: _________________________________ Nationality: ________________________

Membership in Professional Societies: ___________________________________________________

Detailed Tasks, which will be assigned;

16
i) …………………………………………………………………………………………………

ii) …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

iii) …………………………………………………………………………………………………...

Key Qualifications:

(Give an outline of staff member's experience and training most pertinent to tasks on assignment.
Describe degree of responsibility held by staff member on relevant previous assignments and give
dates and locations).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Education:

(Summarise college/university and other specialised education of staff member, giving names of
schools, dates attended and degree(s) obtained).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Employment Record:

(Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held. List all positions held by
staff member since graduation, giving dates, names of employing organisations, titles of positions
held, and locations of assignments.)
___________________________________________________________________________________

Certification:

I, the undersigned, certify that these data correctly describe me, my qualifications, and my
experience.

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of staff member)

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of authorised representative of the firm)

Full name of staff member: ____________________________________________________________

Full name of authorised representative: __________________________________________________

CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF

Proposed Position: ______Site manager_________________________________________________

Name of Firm: ______________________________________________________________________

Name of Staff: ______________________________________________________________________

Profession: _________________________________________________________________________
Date of Birth: ______________________________________________________________________

Years with Firm: _________________________________ Nationality: ________________________

17
Membership in Professional Societies: ___________________________________________________

Detailed Tasks, which will be assigned;

iv) …………………………………………………………………………………………………

v) …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

vi) …………………………………………………………………………………………………...

Key Qualifications:

(Give an outline of staff member's experience and training most pertinent to tasks on assignment.
Describe degree of responsibility held by staff member on relevant previous assignments and give
dates and locations).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Education:

(Summarise college/university and other specialised education of staff member, giving names of
schools, dates attended and degree(s) obtained).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Employment Record:

(Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held. List all positions held by
staff member since graduation, giving dates, names of employing organisations, titles of positions
held, and locations of assignments.)

___________________________________________________________________________________

Certification:

I, the undersigned, certify that these data correctly describe me, my qualifications, and my
experience.

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of staff member)

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of authorised representative of the firm)

Full name of staff member: ____________________________________________________________

Full name of authorised representative: __________________________________________________

CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF

Proposed Position: ______Construction Superviser___________________________________________

Name of Firm: ______________________________________________________________________

Name of Staff: ______________________________________________________________________

18
Profession: _________________________________________________________________________

Date of Birth: ______________________________________________________________________

Years with Firm: _________________________________ Nationality: ________________________

Membership in Professional Societies: ___________________________________________________

Detailed Tasks, which will be assigned;

vii) …………………………………………………………………………………………………

viii) …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

ix) …………………………………………………………………………………………………...

Key Qualifications:

(Give an outline of staff member's experience and training most pertinent to tasks on assignment.
Describe degree of responsibility held by staff member on relevant previous assignments and give
dates and locations).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Education:

(Summarise college/university and other specialised education of staff member, giving names of
schools, dates attended and degree(s) obtained).
___________________________________________________________________________________

Employment Record:

(Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held. List all positions held by
staff member since graduation, giving dates, names of employing organisations, titles of positions
held, and locations of assignments.)

___________________________________________________________________________________

Certification:

I, the undersigned, certify that these data correctly describe me, my qualifications, and my
experience.

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of staff member)

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of authorised representative of the firm)

Full name of staff member: ____________________________________________________________

Full name of authorised representative: __________________________________________________

CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF

Proposed Position: ______Construction Supervisor___________________________________________

19
Name of Firm: ______________________________________________________________________

Name of Staff: ______________________________________________________________________

Profession: _________________________________________________________________________

Date of Birth: ______________________________________________________________________

Years with Firm: _________________________________ Nationality: ________________________

Membership in Professional Societies: ___________________________________________________

Detailed Tasks, which will be assigned;

x) …………………………………………………………………………………………………

xi) …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

xii) …………………………………………………………………………………………………...

Key Qualifications:

(Give an outline of staff member's experience and training most pertinent to tasks on assignment.
Describe degree of responsibility held by staff member on relevant previous assignments and give
dates and locations).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Education:

(Summarise college/university and other specialised education of staff member, giving names of
schools, dates attended and degree(s) obtained).

___________________________________________________________________________________

Employment Record:

(Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held. List all positions held by
staff member since graduation, giving dates, names of employing organisations, titles of positions
held, and locations of assignments.)

___________________________________________________________________________________
Certification:

I, the undersigned, certify that these data correctly describe me, my qualifications, and my
experience.

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of staff member)

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

_______________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(Signature of authorised representative of the firm)

Full name of staff member: ____________________________________________________________

20
Full name of authorised representative: __________________________________________________

C. Relevant Experience

1. Constitution or legal status of tenderer (attach copy or Certificate of

incorporation);
Section 1.01 Place of registration: ___________________________

Principal place of business ____________________________

Power of attorney of signatory of tender _____________________(In case of

Joint venture or if signatory is non-director)

2. Ten Years Experience as Contractor in Construction ….…Year of

Commencement of Business ………….(attach certificate of Registration as
Contractor).

Schedule of works for the last 10 years:-

Name and Type of Location Contact Contract Contract

address of construction & Person Year sum
Client contract (KShs.)
period

Total (KShs.)

3. Total monetary value of construction Works performed for each for the last five
years.
Year Specify the year Name of Address of Value (KShs.)
(2014-2019) Client(s) Client(s)

Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
Year 5
Total (Kshs)

21
4. List of Works of similar nature and value not less than 200 Million for the last five
years. Also list details of works under way or committed, including expected
completion.

a) Completed similar Projects

Name and Contact Project Name Contract Value of Status of

address of Person and Brief Dates Contract(KShs.) Project
client Description of
Works

b) Works under way or committed [Tenderer to list current contracts, Contract

Values, name of client and contact person giving addresses and telephone
numbers]
Name and Contact Project Name Contract Value of Expected
address of Person and Brief Dates Contract(KShs.) date of
client and Description of completion
Telephone Works

6. Estimated monthly cashflow for this project in Kenya Shillings (Kshs.)

……………………………….. per month.

D Machinery and Equipment

Major items of Contractor's Machinery, Tools and Equipment proposed for carrying
out the Works. List all information requested below. Indicate whether owned and
/or lease, or give proposals for purchase.

22
 Item of No. Available Description, Condition Owned and/
Equipment Make and (new, or leased
age (years) good, (attach lease
poor) agreement
copy)
Tools & Plant

1 Concreting Plant

- Offsite Weight
batching plant
- Truck mixers
- Weigh mixers
- concrete pump
- water pumps
- poker vibrators

2. Vertical Transport
Equip

- Tower crane
- Mobile cranes
- Hoists (Alimack or
equiv.)

3. Vehicle Transport
Equip

- Tipper lorries
- Dumpers
- pick-up trucks
- Saloon cars

4.Earthmovers/Comp
actors

- Compactors
(Dynapac or
equiv.)
- Motor Graders
- Excavators

- Water Bourses
- Compressors
- Buckets
- Rollers

5. Steel
cutters/bending
machine
23
6. Power tools/equip.

- Generating Set
- Welding Machine
- Grinders
- Cutting tools
- Floor sanding
machine

7. Metal Formwork
capacity

8.Workshops

- Metalwork
- Electrical
- woodwork
- Mechanical

9. Set of Survey
Equipment

E. Business support

1. Evidence of insurance cover for equipment and indemnity list below and attach
certified copies

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

2. Financial reports for the last three years: balance sheets, profit and loss
statements, auditor's reports, etc. List below and attach copies.

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

3. Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the qualification requirements:

cash in hand, lines of credit, etc. List below and attach copies of supportive
documents.

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

24
4. Name, address and telephone, email and facsimile numbers of appointed
bankers that may provide reference if contacted by the Employer. List below and
attach copies.
Attach bankers' letter of authority to seek reference.

_______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

5. Statement of compliance with the requirements of Clause 1.2 of the Instructions

to Tenderers

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

6. Names of legal advisors and a statement and nature of any litigation in the last 5
years. (If none state so.)

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________

F. At least three referees. Give names, company/firm, contact addresses of

Clients/consultants for whom the Contarctor has worked.

1.

2.

3.

G. Proposed program for of works

Task/Activity Delivery period Commissi Total Defects liability

Description (weeks) on/ contract period
handover period (weeks)
(weeks) (weeks)
6 months
(27 weeks)

25
 SECTION B
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

CONTENTS PAGE
CLAUSE PAGE
1. Definitions ……………………………………………………… 28
2. Interpretation …………………………………………………. 30
3. Language and Law …………………………………………. 30
4. Project Managers Decisions ………………………………… 31
5. Delegation ……………………………………………………… 31
6. Communication ………………………………………………. 31
7. Sub-Contracting ………………………………………………. 31
8. Other Contractors …………………………………………….. 31
9. Personnel ……………………………………………………….. 31
10. Works ……………………………………………………………. 32
11. Safety and Temporary Works ………………………………. 32
12. Discoveries ……………………………………………………… 32
13. Work Program ………………………………………………… 32
14. Possession of Site …………………………………………….. 33
15. Access to Site …………………………………………………. 33
16. Instructions …………………………………………………….. 33
17. Extension or Acceleration of Completion Date ………… 33
18. Management Meetings ……………………………………… 33
19. Early Warning ………………………………………………….. 34
20. Defects ………………………………………………………….. 34
21. Bills of Quantities ………………………………………………. 34
22. Variations ……………………………………………………….. 35
23. Payment Certificates, Currency of payment and
Advance payments …………………………………………. 36
24. Compensation Events ……………………………………….. 38
25. Price Adjustment ……………………………………………… 40
26. Retention ………………………………………………………. 41
27. Liquidated Damages ………………………………………… 41
28. Securities ……………………………………………………….. 42
29. Dayworks ………………………………………………………. 42
30. Liability and Insurance ………………………………………. 42
31. Completion and taking over ………………………………. 44
32. Nominated SubContractors ………………………………… 44
33. Final Account ………………………………………………….. 45
34. Termination ……………………………………………………... 46
35. Payment upon Termination …………………………………. 46
36. Release from Performance ………………………………….. 47
37. Corrupt gifts and payment of commission ……………….. 48
38. Settlement of Disputes ………………………………………. 48

26
 SECTION B:

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1. Definitions

1.1 In this Contract, except where the context otherwise requires, the following
terms shall be interpreted as indicated;

“Bill of Quantities” means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part
of the tender.

“Compensation Events” are those defined in Clause 24 hereunder.

“The Completion Date” means the date of completion of the Works as certified by
the Project Manager, in accordance with Clause 31.

“The Contract” means the agreement entered into between the Employer and the
Contractor as recorded in the Agreement Form and signed by the parties including
all attachments and appendices thereto and all documents incorporated by
reference therein to execute, complete, and maintain the Works,

“The Contractor” refers to the person or corporate body who’s tender to carry out
the Works has been accepted by the Employer.

“Other Contractors” shall refer to persons or corporate bodies whose tenders to

carry out the works have been accepted by the Employer, working under the
Contractor.

“The Contractor’s Tender” is the completed tendering document submitted by the

Contractor to the Employer.

“The Contract Price” is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter
as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

“Days” are calendar days; “Months” are calendar months.

“A Defect” is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the
Contract.

“The Defects Liability Certificate” is the certificate issued by Project Manager upon
correction of defects by the Contractor.

“The Defects Liability Period” is the period named in the Contract Data and
calculated from the Completion Date.

“Drawings” include calculations and other information provided or approved by

the Project Manager for the execution of the Contract.

“Dayworks” are Work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for labour and the
associated materials and plant.

27
“Employer”, or the “Procuring entity” as defined in the Public Procurement
Regulations (i.e. Central or Local Government administration, Universities, Public
Institutions and Corporations, etc) is the party who employs the Contractor to carry
out the Works.

“Equipment” is the Contractor’s machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the

Site for the execution of the Works.

“The Intended Completion Date” is the date on which it is intended that the
Contractor shall complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date may be revised
only by the Project Manager by issuing an extension of time or an acceleration order.

“Materials” are all supplies, including consumables, used by the contractor for
incorporation in the Works.

“Plant” is any integral part of the Works that shall have a mechanical, electrical,
chemical, or biological function.

“Project Manager” is the person named in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract (or
any other competent person appointed by the Employer and notified to the
Contractor, to act in replacement of the Project Manager) who is responsible for
supervising the execution of the Works and administering the Contract and shall be
an “Architect” or a “Quantity Surveyor” registered under the Architects and Quantity
Surveyors Act Cap 525 or an “Engineer” registered under Engineers Registration Act
Cap 530.

“Prime cost sum” – Means a sum included in the contract bills for works or services to
be executed by a nominated sub-contractor, statutory or other authority or for
materials or goods to be obtained from a nominated supplier.

“Provisional sum” – Means a sum included in the contract bills for the execution of
work which cannot be entirely foreseen, defined or detailed at the time the tender
documents are issued.

“Site” is the area defined as such in the Appendix to Condition of Contract.

“Site Investigation Reports” are those reports that may be included in the tendering
documents which are factual and interpretative about the surface and subsurface
conditions at the Site.

“Specifications” means the Specifications of the Works included in the Contract and
any modification or addition made or approved by the Project Manager.

“Start Date” is the latest date when the Contractor shall commence execution of the
Works. It does not necessarily coincide with the Site possession date(s).

“A Contractor” is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with the Contractor
to carry out a part of the Work in the Contract, which includes Work on the Site.

“Temporary works” are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the
Contractor which are needed for construction or installation of the Works.

“A Variation” is an instruction given by the Project Manager which varies the

Works.
28
 “The Works” are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install,
And turnover to the Employer, as defined in the Appendix to Conditions of
Contract.

2. Interpretation

2.1 In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male
also means female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings have no
significance. Words have their normal meaning in English Language unless
specifically defined. The Project Manager will provide instructions clarifying
queries about these Conditions of Contract.

2.2 If sectional completion is specified in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract,

reference in the Conditions of Contract to the Works, the Completion Date
and the Intended Completion Date apply to any section of the Works (other
than references to the Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works).

2.3 The following documents shall constitute the Contract documents and shall
be interpreted in the following order of priority;

(1) Agreement,
(2) Letter of Acceptance,
(3) Contractor’s Tender,
(4) Appendix to Conditions of Contract,
(5) Conditions of Contract,
(6) Specifications,
(7) Drawings,
(8) Bill of Quantities,
(9) Any other documents listed in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract as
forming part of the Contract.

Immediately after the execution of the Contract, the Project Manager shall
furnish both the Employer and the Contractor with two copies each of all the
Contract documents. Further, as and when necessary the Project Manager shall
furnish the Contractor [always with a copy to the Employer] with three [3] copies
of such further drawings or details or descriptive schedules as are reasonably
necessary either to explain or amplify the Contract drawings or to enable the
Contractor to carry out and complete the Works in accordance with these
Conditions.

3. Language and Law

3.1 Language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract shall be
English language and the Laws of Kenya respectively

29
4. Project Manager’s Decisions

4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Project Manager will decide
Contractual matters between the Employer and the Contractor in the role
representing the Employer.

5. Delegation

5.1 The Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to
others after notifying the Contractor.

6. Communications

6.1 Communication between parties shall be effective only when in writing. A

notice shall be effective only when it is delivered.

7. SubContracting

7.1 The Contractor may Sub-Contract with the approval of the Project Manager,
but may not assign the Contract without the approval of the Employer in
writing. SubContracting shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations.

8. Other Contractors

8.1 The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other Contractors,
public authorities, utilities etc. as listed in the Appendix to Conditions of
Contract and also with the Employer, as per the directions of the Project
Manager. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them.
The Employer may modify the said List of Other Contractors etc., and shall
notify the Contractor of any such modification.

9. Personnel

9.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Qualification
Information, to carry out the functions stated in the said Information or other
personnel approved by the Project Manager. The Project Manager will
approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if their relevant
qualifications and abilities are substantially equal to or better than those of the
personnel listed in the Qualification Information. If the Project Manager asks
the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractor’s staff
or work force, stating the reasons, the Contractor shall ensure that the person
leaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the Work
in the Contract.

30
10 Works

10.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the
Specifications and Drawings. The Works may commence on the Start Date
and shall be carried out in accordance with the Program submitted by the
Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Project Manager, and
complete them by the Intended Completion Date.

11 Safety and Temporary Works

11.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of temporary works.
However before erecting the same, he shall submit his designs including
specifications and drawings to the Project Manager and to any other relevant
third parties for their approval. No erection of temporary works shall be done
until such approvals are obtained.

11.2 The Project Manager’s approval shall not alter the Contractor’s responsibility
for design of the Temporary works and all drawings prepared by the
Contractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent Works, shall be
subject to prior approval by the Project Manager before they can be used.

11.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.

12. Discoveries

12.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly

discovered on Site shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor shall
notify the Project Manager of such discoveries and carry out the Project
Manager’s instructions for dealing with them.

13. Work Program

13.1 Within the time stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract, the
Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval a program
showing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all the
activities in the Works. An update of the program shall be a program showing
the actual progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the progress
achieved on the timing of the remaining Work, including any changes to the
sequence of the activities.

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval an updated
program at intervals no longer than the period stated in the Appendix to
Conditions of Contract. If the Contractor does not submit an updated
program within this period, the Project Manager may withhold the amount
stated in the said Appendix from the next payment certificate and continue
to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which the
overdue program has been submitted. The Project Manager’s approval of
the program shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations. The Contractor may
revise the program and submit it to the Project Manager again at any time. A
revised program shall show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events.

31
14. Possession of Site

14.1 The Employer shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the Contractor. If
possession of a part is not given by the date stated in the Appendix to
Conditions of Contract, the Employer will be deemed to have delayed the
start of the relevant activities, and this will be a Compensation Event.

15. Access to Site

15.1 The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager and any other person
authorised by the Project Manager, access to the Site and to any place
where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended
to be carried out.

16. Instructions

16.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Project Manager which are
in accordance with the Contract.

17. Extension or Acceleration of Completion Date

17.1 The Project Manager shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a
Compensation Event occurs or a variation is issued which makes it impossible for
completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the
Contractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining Work, which would cause
the Contractor to incur additional cost. The Project Manager shall decide
whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within 21
days of the Contractor asking the Project Manager in writing for a decision upon
the effect of a Compensation Event or variation and submitting full supporting
information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has
failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay caused by such failure shall
not be considered in assessing the new (extended) Completion Date.

17.2 No bonus for early completion of the Works shall be paid to the Contractor by the
Employer.

18. Management Meetings

18.1 A contract management meeting shall be held monthly and attended by the
Project Manager and the Contractor. Its business shall be to review the plans for
the remaining Work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early
warning procedure. The Project Manager shall record the minutes of
management meetings and provide copies of the same to those attending the
meeting and the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for actions to be
taken shall be decided by the Project Manager either at the management
meeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who
attended the meeting.

32
19. Early Warning

19.1 The Contractor shall warn the Project Manager at the earliest opportunity of
specific likely future events or circumstances that may adversely affect the
quality of the Work, increase the Contract Price or delay the execution of the
Works. The Project Manager may require the Contractor to provide an estimate
of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price
and Completion Date. The estimate shall be provided by the Contractor as soon
as reasonably possible.

19.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Project Manager in making and
considering proposals on how the effect of such an event or circumstance can
be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the Work and in carrying out any
resulting instructions of the Project Manager.

20. Defects

20.1 The Project Manager shall inspect the contractor’s work and notify the
contractor of any defects that are found. Such inspection shall not affect the
Contractor’s responsibilities. The Project Manager may instruct the contractor
to search for a defect and to uncover and test any Work that the Project
Manager considers may have a defect. Should the defect be found, the cost
of uncovering and making good shall be borne by the contractor, However, if
there is no defect found, the cost of uncovering and making good shall be
treated as a variation and added to the contract Price.

20.2 The Project Manager shall give notice to the Contractor of any defects before
the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion, and is
defined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. The Defects Liability
Period shall be extended for as long as defects remain to be corrected.

20.3 Every time notice of a defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified
defect within the length of time specified by the Project Manager’s notice. If
the Contractor has not corrected a defect within the time specified in the
Project Manager’s notice, the Project Manager will assess the cost of having
the defect corrected by other parties and such cost shall be treated as a
variation and be deducted from the Contract Price.

21. Bills Of Quantities

21.1 The Bills of Quantities shall contain items for the construction, installation,
testing and commissioning of the Work to be done by the Contractor. The
Contractor will be paid for the quantity of the Work done at the rate in the Bills
of Quantities for each item.

33
21.2 If the final quantity of the Work done differs from the quantity in the Bills of
Quantities for the particular item by more than 25 percent and provided the
change exceeds 1 percent of the Initial Contract price, the Project Manager
shall adjust the rate to allow for the change.

21.3 If requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide the Project
Manager with a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bills of Quantities.

22. Variations

22.1 All variations shall be included in updated programs produced by the

Contractor.

22.2 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a quotation for
carrying out the variations when requested to do so. The Project Manager
shall assess the quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the
request or within any longer period as may be stated by the Project Manager
and before the Variation is ordered.

22.3 If the work in the variation corresponds with an item description in the Bills of
Quantities and if in the opinion of the Project Manager, the quantity of work is
not above the limit stated in Clause 21.2 or the timing of its execution does not
cause the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bills of Quantities
shall be used to calculate the value of the variation. If the cost per unit of
quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the variation does
not correspond with items in the Bills of Quantities, the quotation by the
Contractor shall be in the form of new rates for the relevant items of Work.

22.4 If the contractor’s quotation is unreasonable, the Project Manager may order
the variation and make a change to the Contract price, which shall be based
on the Project Manager’s own forecast of the effects of the variation on the
Contractor’s costs.

22.5 If the Project Manager decides that the urgency of varying the Work would
prevent a quotation being given and considered without delaying the Work,
no quotation shall be given and the variation shall be treated as a
Compensation Event.

22.6 The contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could
have been avoided by giving early warning.

22.7 When the Program is updated, the contractor shall provide the Project
Manager with an updated cash flow forecast.

34
23. Payment Certificates, Currency of Payments and Advance Payments

23.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager monthly applications for
payment giving sufficient details of the Work done and materials on Site and
the amounts which the contractor considers himself to be entitled to. The
Project Manager shall check the monthly application and certify the amount
to be paid to the Contractor within 14 days. The value of Work executed and
payable shall be determined by the Project Manager.

23.2 The value of Work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the
items in the Bills of Quantities completed, materials delivered on Site, variations
and compensation events. Such materials shall become the property of the
Employer once the Employer has paid the contractor for their value.
Thereafter, they shall not be removed from Site without the Project Manager’s
instructions except for use upon the Works.

23.3 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for retention. The Employer shall
pay the contractor the amounts certified by the Project Manager within 30
days of the date of issue of each certificate. If the Employer makes a late
payment, the contractor shall be paid simple interest on the late payment in
the next payment. Interest shall be calculated on the basis of number of days
delayed at a rate three percentage points above the Central Bank of Kenya’s
average rate for base lending prevailing as of the first day the payment
becomes overdue.

23.4 If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an

award by an Arbitrator, the contractor shall be paid interest upon the
delayed payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from
the date upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the
absence of dispute.

23.5 Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be
paid for by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and
prices in the contract.

35
23.6 The contract Price shall be stated in Kenya Shillings. All payments to the
contractor shall be made in Kenya Shillings and foreign currency in the
proportion indicated in the tender, or agreed prior to the execution of the
contract Agreement and indicated therein. The rate of exchange for the
calculation of the amount of foreign currency payment shall be the rate of
exchange indicated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. If the
contractor indicated foreign currencies for payment other than the currencies
of the countries of origin of related goods and services the Employer reserves
the right to pay the equivalent at the time of payment in the currencies of the
countries of such goods and services. The Employer and the Project Manager
shall be notified promptly by the contractor of an changes in the expected
foreign currency requirements of the contractor during the execution of the
Works as indicated in the Schedule of Foreign Currency Requirements and the
foreign and local currency portions of the balance of the contract Price shall
then be amended by agreement between Employer and the contractor in
order to reflect appropriately such changes.

23.7 In the event that an advance payment is granted, the following shall apply:-
a) On signature of the contract, the Contractor shall at his request, and
without furnishing proof of expenditure, be entitled to an advance of 10%
(ten percent) of the original amount of the contract. The advance shall
not be subject to retention money.

b) No advance payment may be made before the contractor has

submitted proof of the establishment of deposit or a directly liable
guarantee satisfactory to the Employer in the amount of the advance
payment. The guarantee shall be in the same currency as the advance.

c) Reimbursement of the lump sum advance shall be made by deductions

from the Interim payments and where applicable from the balance
owing to the contractor. Reimbursement shall begin when the amount of
the sums due under the contract reaches 20% of the original amount of
the contract. It shall have been completed by the time 80% of this
amount is reached.

The amount to be repaid by way of successive deductions shall be calculated

by means of the formula:

R = A(x1 – x11)
80 – 20
Where:

R = the amount to be reimbursed

A = the amount of the advance which has been granted

X1 = the amount of proposed cumulative payments as a percentage

of the original amount of the contract. This figure will exceed
20% but not exceed 80%.
36
 X11 = the amount of the previous cumulative payments as a
percentage of the original amount of the contract. This figure will
be below 80% but not less than 20%.

d) with each reimbursement the counterpart of the directly liable

guarantee may be reduced accordingly.

24. Compensation Events

24.1 The following issues shall constitute Compensation Events:

(a) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the Site
Possession Date stated in the Appendix to Conditions of contract.

(b) The Employer modifies the List of Other contractors, etc., in a way that
affects the Work of the contractor under the contract.

(c ) The Project Manager orders a delay or does not issue drawings,

specifications or instructions required for execution of the Works on time.

(d) The Project Manager instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out
additional tests upon the Work, which is then found to have no defects.

(e) The Project Manager unreasonably does not approve a Sub-contract to be

let.

(f) Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could reasonably
have been assumed before issuance of the Letter of Acceptance from the
information issued to tenderers (including the Site investigation reports), from
information available publicly and from a visual inspection of the Site.

(g) The Project Manager gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen
condition, caused by the Employer or additional work required for safety or
other reasons.

(h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer does not work
within the dates and other constraints stated in the contract, and they
cause delay or extra cost to the contractor.

(i) The effects on the contractor of any of the Employer’s risks.

(j) The Project Manager unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of

Completion.

(k) Other compensation events described in the contract or determined by the

Project Manager shall apply.

37
24.2 If a compensation event would cause additional cost or would prevent the Work
being completed before the Intended Completion Date, the contract Price shall
be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. The
Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much the contract Price shall
be increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date
shall be extended.

24.3 As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each compensation event

upon the Contractor’s forecast cost has been provided by the contractor, it
shall be assessed by the Project Manager, and the contract Price shall be
adjusted accordingly. If the contractor’s forecast is deemed unreasonable,
the Project Manager shall adjust the contract Price based on the Project
Manager’s own forecast. Project Manager will assume that the contractor will
react competently and promptly to the event.

24.4 The contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the
Employer’s interests are adversely affected by the contractor not having
given early warning or not having co-operated with the Project Manager.

24.5 Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only if provided for
in the Appendix to Conditions of contract.

24.6 The contractor shall give written notice to the Project Manager of his intention
to make a claim within thirty days after the event giving rise to the claim has
first arisen. The claim shall be submitted within thirty days thereafter.

Provided always that should the event giving rise to the claim of continuing
effect, the contractor shall submit an interim claim within the said thirty days
and a final claim within thirty days of the end of the event giving rise to the
claim.

25. Price Adjustment

25.1 The Project Manager shall adjust the contract Price if taxes, duties and other
levies are changed between the date 30 days before the submission of
tenders for the Contract and the date of Completion. The adjustment shall be
the change in the amount of tax payable by the contractor.

25.2 The contract Price shall be deemed to be based on exchange rates current
at the date of tender submission in calculating the cost to the contractor of
materials to be specifically imported (by express provisions in the contract Bills
of Quantities or Specifications) for permanent incorporation in the Works.
Unless otherwise stated in the contract, if at any time during the period of the
contract exchange rates shall be varied and this shall affect the cost to the
contractor of such materials, then the Project Manager shall assess the net
difference in the cost of such materials. Any amount from time to time so
assessed shall be added to or deducted from the contract Price, as the case
may be.

38
25.3 Unless otherwise stated in the contract, the contract Price shall be deemed to
have been calculated in the manner set out below and in sub-clauses 25.4 and
25.5 and shall be subject to adjustment in the events specified thereunder;

(i) The prices contained in the contract Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to
be based upon the rates of wages and other emoluments and expenses as
determined by the Joint Building Council of Kenya (J.B.C.) and set out in
the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the date for submission of
tenders. A copy of the schedule used by the contractor in his pricing shall
be attached in the Appendix to Conditions of contract.

(ii) Upon J.B.C. determining that any of the said rates of wages or other
emoluments and expenses are increased or decreased, then the Contract
Price shall be increased or decreased by the amount assessed by the
Project Manager based upon the difference, expressed as a percentage,
between the rate set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days
before the date for submission of tenders and the rate published by the
J.B.C. and applied to the quantum of labour incorporated within the
amount of Work remaining to be executed at the date of publication of
such increase or decrease.

(iii) No adjustment shall be made in respect of changes in the rates of wages

and other emoluments and expenses which occur after the date of
Completion except during such other period as may be granted as an
extension of time under clause 17.0 of these Conditions.

25.4 The prices contained in the contract Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to be
based upon the basic prices of materials to be permanently incorporated in the
Works as determined by the J.B.C. and set out in the schedule of basic rates
issued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders. A copy of the schedule
used by the contractor in his pricing shall be attached in the Appendix to
Conditions of contract.

25.5 Upon the J.B.C. determining that any of the said basic prices are increased or
decreased then the contract Price shall be increased or decreased by the
amount to be assessed by the Project Manager based upon the difference
between the price set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the
date for submission of tenders and the rate published by the J.B.C. and applied
to the quantum of the relevant materials which have not been taken into
account in arriving at the amount of any interim certificate under clause 23 of
these Conditions issued before the date of publication of such increase or
decrease.

25.6 No adjustment shall be made in respect of changes in basic prices of

materials which occur after the date for Completion except during such other
period as may be granted as an extension of time under clause 17.0 of these
Conditions.

25.7 The provisions of sub-clause 25.1 to 25.2 herein shall not apply in respect of any
materials included in the schedule of basic rates.

39
26. Retention

26.1 The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the contractor the
proportion stated in the Appendix to Conditions of contract until Completion
of the whole of the Works. On Completion of the whole of the Works, half the
total amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor and the remaining
half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Project Manager
has certified that all defects notified to the Contractor before the end of this
period have been corrected.

27. Liquidated Damages

27.1 The contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate
stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract for each day that the actual
Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date. The Employer
may deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the contractor.
Payment of liquidated damages shall not alter the contractor’s liabilities.

27.2 If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have
been paid, the Project Manager shall correct any overpayment of liquidated
damages by the contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The
contractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the
date of payment to the date of repayment, at the rate specified in Clause
23.30

28. Securities

28.1 The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no later than the
date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in an amount
and form and by a reputable bank acceptable to the Employer, and
denominated in Kenya Shillings. The Performance Security shall be valid until a
date 30 days beyond the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion.

29. Dayworks

29.1 If applicable, the Dayworks rates in the Contractor’s tender shall be used for
small additional amounts of Work only when the Project Manager has given
written instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way.

29.2 All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the contractor on
Forms approved by the Project Manager. Each completed form shall be
verified and signed by the Project Manager within two days of the Work being
done.

29.3 The contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signed
Dayworks forms.

40
30. Liability and Insurance

30.1 From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued,
the following are the Employer’s risks:

(a) The risk of personal injury, death or loss of or damage to property

(excluding the Works, Plant, Materials and Equipment), which are due to;

(i) use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose of the
Works, which is the unavoidable result of the Works, or

(ii) negligence, breach of statutory duty or interference with any legal

right by the Employer or by any person employed by or contracted
to him except the Contractor.

(b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to the
extent that it is due to a fault of the Employer or in Employer’s design, or
due to war or radioactive contamination directly affecting the place
where the Works are being executed.

30.2 From the Completion Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been
issued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is the
Employer’s risk except loss or damage due to;

(a) a defect which existed on or before the Completion Date.

(b) an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself the
Employer’s risk

(c) the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the Completion Date.

30.3 From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the
risks of personal injury, death and loss of or damage to property (including,
without limitation, the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) which are not
Employer’s risk are contractor’s risks.

The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the
Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects Liability
Period, in the amounts stated in the Appendix to Conditions of contract for the
following events;

(a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials;

(b) loss of or damage to Equipment;
(c ) loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and
Equipment) in connection with the Contract, and
(d) personal injury or death.

30.4 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the contractor to the
Project Manager for the Project Manager’s approval before the Start Date. All
such insurance shall provide for compensation required to rectify the loss or
damage incurred.

41
30.5 If the contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required,
the Employer may effect the insurance which the contractor should have
provided and recover the premiums from payments otherwise due to the
contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be a debt
due.

30.6 Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of
the Project Manager. Both parties shall comply with any conditions of insurance
policies.

31. Completion and taking over

31.1 Upon deciding that the Works are complete, the contractor shall issue a written
request to the Project Manager to issue a Certificate of Completion of the Works.
The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven [7] days of the
Project Manager issuing a Certificate of Completion.

32. Nominated Subcontractors

32.1 All specialists, merchants, tradesmen and others executing any work or supplying
any goods, materials, Plant or services for which Provisional sums or Prime Cost
sums are included in the Contract, who may have been or be nominated or
selected or approved by the Employer or the Project Manager, and all persons to
whom by virtue of the provisions of the Contract the Contractor is required to
subcontract on an approved sub-contract agreement shall, in the execution of
such work or the supply of such goods, materials, Plant or services, be deemed to
be subcontractors to the Contractor and are referred to in this Contract as
“nominated subcontractors”.

32.2 The Contractor shall not be required by the Employer or the Project Manager, or
be deemed to be under any obligation, to employ any nominated Subcontractor
against whom the Contractor may raise reasonable objection, or who declines to
enter into a subcontract with the Contractor containing provisions:

(a) that in respect of the work, goods, materials, Plant or services the subject
of the subcontract, the nominated Subcontractor will undertake towards
the Contractor such obligations and liabilities as will enable the
Contractor to discharge his own obligations and liabilities towards the
Employer under the terms of the Contract and will save harmless and
indemnify the Contractor from and against the same and from all claims,
proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising
out of or in connection therewith, or arising out of or in connection with
any failure to perform such obligations or to fulfill such liabilities, and

(b) that the nominated Subcontractor will save harmless and indemnify the
Contractor from and against any negligence by the nominated
subcontractor, his agents, workmen and servants and from and against
any misuse by him or them of any Temporary Works provided by the
Contractor for the purposes of the Contract and from all claims as
aforesaid.

42
32.3 For all work executed or goods, materials, Plant or services supplied by any
nominated subcontractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to:

(a) the actual price paid or due to be paid by the Contractor, on the
instructions of the Project Manager, and in accordance with the
subcontract;

(b) in respect of labour supplied by the Contractor, the sum, if any, entered
in the Bill of Quantities or, if instructed by the Project Manager pursuant
to the contract, as may be determined in accordance with the
Contract.

(c) in respect of all other charges and profit, a sum being a percentage rate
or sum of the actual price paid or due to be paid calculated, where
provision has been made in the Bill of Quantities for a rate or sum to be
set against the relevant Prime Cost sum at the rate or sum inserted by the
Contractor against that item.

32.4 Before issuing, under the contract, any certificate, which includes any payment in
respect of work done or goods, materials, Plant or services supplied by any
nominated Subcontractor, the Project Manager shall be entitled to demand from
the Contractor reasonable proof that all payments, less retentions, included in
previous certificates in respect of the work or goods, materials, Plant or services of
such nominated Subcontractor have been paid or discharged by the Contractor.
If the Contractor fails to supply such proof then, unless the Contractor:

(a) Satisfies the Project Manager in writing that he has reasonable cause for
withholding or refusing to make such payments, and

(b) Produces to the Project Manager reasonable proof that he has so

informed such nominated Subcontractor in writing.

the Employer shall be entitled to pay to such nominated Subcontractor direct,

upon the certificate of the Project Manager, all payments, less retentions,
provided for in the nominated Subcontract, which the Contractor has failed to
make to such nominated Subcontractor and to deduct by way of set-off the
amount so paid by the Employer from any sums due or to become due from the
Employer to the Contractor.

Provided that, where the Project Manager has certified and the Employer has
paid direct as aforesaid, the Project Manager shall, in issuing any further
certificate in favour of the Contractor, deduct from the amount thereof the
amount so paid, direct as aforesaid, but shall not withhold or delay the issue of
the certificate itself when due to be issued under the terms of the Contract.

33. Final Account

33.1 The Contractor shall issue the Project Manager with a detailed account of the
total amount that the contractor considers payable to him by the Employer
under the contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Project
Manager shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any final payment
that is due to the contractor within 30 days of receiving the Contractor’s account
if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Project Manager shall issue within

43
 30 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that
are necessary. If the final account is still unsatisfactory after it has been
resubmitted, the Project Manager shall decide on the amount payable to the
Contractor and issue a Payment Certificate. The Employer shall pay the
contractor the amount due in the Final Certificate within 60 days.

34. Termination

34.1 The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the contract if the other party
causes a fundamental breach of the contract. These fundamental breaches
of contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following;

(a) the contractor stops work for 30 days when no stoppage of work is
shown on the current program and the stoppage has not been
authorised by the Project Manager;

(b) the Project Manager instructs the contractor to delay the progress of the
Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn within 30 days;

(c ) the Contractor is declared bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than

for a reconstruction or amalgamation;

(d) a payment certified by the Project Manager is not paid by the Employer
to the contractor within 30 days (for Interim Certificate) or 60 days (for
Final Certificate) of issue.

(e) the Project Manager gives notice that failure to correct a particular
defect is a fundamental breach of contract and the contractor fails to
correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the Project
Manager;

(f) the contractor does not maintain a security, which is required.

34.2 When either party to the contract gives notice of a breach of contract to the
Project Manager for a cause other than those listed under Clause 34.1 above,
the Project Manager shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.

34.3 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the contract for
convenience.

34.4 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately,
make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonably
possible. The Project Manager shall immediately thereafter arrange for a
meeting for the purpose of taking record of the Works executed and
materials, goods, equipment and temporary buildings on Site.

35. Payment Upon Termination

35.1 If the contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of contract by

the contractor, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of

44
 the Work done and materials ordered and delivered to Site up to the date of
the issue of the certificate. Additional liquidated damages shall not apply. If
the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the
Contractor, the difference shall be a debt payable by the Contractor.

35.2 If the Contract is terminated for the Employer’s convenience or because of a

fundamental breach of contract by the Employer, the Project Manager shall
issue a certificate for the value of the Work done, materials ordered, the
reasonable cost of removal of equipment, repatriation of the Contractor’s
personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor’s costs of
protecting and securing the Works.

35.3 The Employer may employ and pay other persons to carry out and complete
the Works and to rectify any defects and may enter upon the Works and use
all materials on the Site, plant, equipment and temporary works.

35.4 The Contractor shall, during the execution or after the completion of the
Works under this clause remove from the Site as and when required, within
such reasonable time as the Project Manager may in writing specify, any
temporary buildings, plant, machinery, appliances, goods or materials
belonging to or hired by him, and in default the Employer may (without being
responsible for any loss or damage) remove and sell any such property of the
Contractor, holding the proceeds less all costs incurred to the credit of the
Contractor.

Until after completion of the Works under this clause the Employer shall not be
bound by any other provision of this Contract to make any payment to the
Contractor, but upon such completion as aforesaid and the verification within
a reasonable time of the accounts therefor the Project Manager shall certify
the amount of expenses properly incurred by the Employer and, if such
amount added to the money paid to the Contractor before such
determination exceeds the total amount which would have been payable on
due completion in accordance with this Contract the difference shall be a
debt payable to the Employer by the Contractor; and if the said amount
added to the said money be less than the said total amount, the difference
shall be a debt payable by the Employer to the Contractor.

36. Release from Performance

36.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other event
entirely outside the control of either the Employer or the Contractor, the
Project Manager shall certify that the Contract has been frustrated. The
Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop Work as quickly as possible after
receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all Work carried out before
receiving it.

45
37. Corrupt gifts and payments of commission

The Contractor shall not;

(a) Offer or give or agree to give to any person in the service of the
Employer any gift or consideration of any kind as an inducement or
reward for doing or forbearing to do or for having done or forborne to
do any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of this or any other
Contract for the Employer or for showing or forbearing to show favour or
disfavor to any person in relation to this or any other Contract for the
Employer.

(b) Enter into this or any other Contract with the Employer in connection with
which commission has been paid or agreed to be paid by him or on his
behalf or to his knowledge, unless before the Contract is made
particulars of any such commission and of the terms and conditions of
any agreement for the payment thereof have been disclosed in writing
to the Employer.

Any breach of this Condition by the Contractor or by anyone employed

by him or acting on his behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of
the Contractor) shall be an offence under the provisions of the Public
Procurement Regulations issued under The Exchequer and Audit Act
Cap 412 of the Laws of Kenya.
38. Settlement Of Disputes

38.1 In case any dispute or difference shall arise between the Employer or the
Project Manager on his behalf and the Contractor, either during the progress
or after the completion or termination of the Works, such dispute shall be
notified in writing by either party to the other with a request to submit it to
arbitration and to concur in the appointment of an Arbitrator within thirty days
of the notice. The dispute shall be referred to the arbitration and final decision
of a person to be agreed between the parties. Failing agreement to concur
in the appointment of an Arbitrator, the Arbitrator shall be appointed by the
Chairman or Vice Chairman of any of the following professional institutions;

(i) Architectural Association of Kenya

(ii) Institute of Quantity Surveyors of Kenya

(iii) Association of Consulting Engineers of Kenya

(iv) Chartered Institute of Arbitrators (Kenya Branch)

(v) Institution of Engineers of Kenya

On the request of the applying party. The institution written to first by the
aggrieved party shall take precedence over all other institutions.

46
38.2 The arbitration may be on the construction of this Contract or on any matter
or thing of whatsoever nature arising thereunder or in connection therewith,
including any matter or thing left by this Contract to the discretion of the
Project Manager, or the withholding by the Project Manager of any certificate
to which the Contractor may claim to be entitled to or the measurement and
valuation referred to in clause 23.0 of these conditions, or the rights and
liabilities of the parties subsequent to the termination of Contract.
38.3 Provided that no arbitration proceedings shall be commenced on any dispute
or difference where notice of a dispute or difference has not been given by
the applying party within ninety days of the occurrence or discovery of the
matter or issue giving rise to the dispute.
38.4 Notwithstanding the issue of a notice as stated above, the arbitration of such
a dispute or difference shall not commence unless an attempt has in the first
instance been made by the parties to settle such dispute or difference
amicably with or without the assistance of third parties. Proof of such attempt
shall be required.

38.5 Notwithstanding anything stated herein the following matters may be referred
to arbitration before the practical completion of the Works or abandonment
of the Works or termination of the contract by either party:

38.5.1 The appointment of a replacement Project Manager upon the said

person ceasing to act.

38.5.2 Whether or not the issue of an instruction by the Project Manager is

empowered by these Conditions.

38.5.3 Whether or not a certificate has been improperly withheld or is not in

accordance with these Conditions.

38.5.4 Any dispute or difference arising in respect of war risks or war damage.

38.6 All other matters shall only be referred to arbitration after the completion or
alleged completion of the Works or termination or alleged termination of the
Contract, unless the Employer and the Contractor agree otherwise in writing.

38.7 The Arbitrator shall, without prejudice to the generality of his powers, have
powers to direct such measurements, computations, tests or valuations as
may in his opinion be desirable in order to determine the rights of the parties
and assess and award any sums which ought to have been the subject of or
included in any certificate.

38.8 The Arbitrator shall, without prejudice to the generality of his powers, have
powers to open up, review and revise any certificate, opinion, decision,
requirement or notice and to determine all matters in dispute which shall be
submitted to him in the same manner as if no such certificate, opinion,
decision requirement or notice had been given
37.9 The award of such Arbitrator shall be final and binding upon the parties.

47
 SECTION C :

APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

NOTES: Appendix to the Conditions of Contract (ACC) shall supplement the

Conditions of Contract (CC) whenever there is a conflict between the CC and the
ACC, the provisions of the ACC shall prevail over those of the CC.

THE EMPLOYER IS

Name: THE MINISTRY OF TOURISM AND WILDLIFE,

STATE DEPARTMENT OF TOURISM
Address: P.O. BOX 30027- 00100, NAIROBI
Name of Authorised Representative: THE PRINCIPAL SECRETARY
Telephone: 020 2724646
Email: [email protected]
The Project Manager is
Name: PLANNING PROJECT MANAGEMENT LIMITED,

Address: P.O. BOX 188- 00606, NAIROBI, KENYA

Email : [email protected]
The name (and identification number) of the contract is PROPOSED REGENERATION
OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH IN MOMBASA COUNTY

The Works consist of See Page 1/4 of Bill No. 1 Preliminaries & General Conditions
.

The Start Date shall be To be notified by Project Manager .

The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be

(To be submitted with Form of Tender)

The following documents also form part of the contract:

See Clause 2.1 of the Conditions of Contract

The contractor shall submit a revised program for the Works within 14 days after the
statutory 21 days requirement for contract award.

The Site Possession Date shall be To be notified by the Project Manager

The Site is located at See Page 1/4 of Bill No. 1 – Preliminaries & General Conditions

and is defined in drawings nos.

48
The Defects Liability period is 180 days.

Other Contractors, utilities etc., to be engaged by the Employer through the

Contractor on the Site Include those for the execution of;

1. Electrical Installations

2. Plumbing, drainage and fire fighting installations

3.

The minimum insurance covers shall be;

1. The minimum cover for insurance of the Works and of Plant and Materials in
respect of the Contractor’s faulty design is KShs. 10.0 million
2. The minimum cover for loss or damage to Equipment is KShs. 10.0 million
3. The minimum for insurance of other property is KShs. 10.0 million
4. The minimum cover for personal injury or death insurance

• For the Contractor’s employees KShs. 10.0 million

• And for other people is KShs. 10.0 million

The following events shall also be Compensation Events:

1 – 4 N/A

The period between Program updates is As determined by the Project Manager

The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program is

10% of certified amount

The proportion of certified payments retained is 10%.

The Price Adjustment Clause shall not apply (Clause 25)

The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is KShs. 500,000/- per month or
part thereof.

The Performance Security shall be for the following minimum amounts equivalent as a
percentage of the Contract Price 10 percent (%)

The Completion Period for the Works is (as in Form of Tender) (weeks)

The rate of exchange for calculation of foreign currency payments is Not Applicable

The schedule of basic rates used in pricing by the Contractor is as attached -

contractor to attach].

Advance Payment shall not be granted.

The rate of exchange for calculation of foreign currency payments is Not applicable

49
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

BILL NO 1

PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. NAMES OF PARTIES
The following names will be inserted in the Articles of Agreement:

The Employer Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife,

State Department of Tourism,
P.O Box 30027 - 00100,
Nairobi, Kenya.

The Project Manager Planning Project Management Limited,

Planning House, Lower Kabete Road,
P.O. Box 188 - 00606,
Nairobi.

The Architect Planning Systems Services Limited,

Architects,
Planning House, Lower Kabete Road,
P.O. Box 188 - 00606,
Nairobi.

The Quantity Surveyor Davson & Ward,

Quantity Surveyors and Building
Economists,
Davard House,
5 Cedar Road, Westlands,
P.O. Box 46611 - 00100 GPO,
Nairobi.

B. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

The terms, phrases and abbreviations shall be deemed to have the

following meanings wherever used hereinafter and in all Contract
documents.

Structural_Engineer' for this project shall be Mangat IB Patel Structures

Limited, Consulting Engineers, P.O. Box 48674 - 00100, Nairobi, or in
the event of his death, or ceasing to be the Structural Engineer for the
purpose of this Contract, such other person as the Employer shall
nominate for that purpose. For the purpose of the structural
engineering works, the Engineer shall be deemed vested with the duties
of and be the representative of the Architect, except in respect of
variations which involve the Contract Sum.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/1
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

Mechanical and Electrical Engineer' for this project shall be Emplan

Limited P.O. Box 1746 - 00606, Nairobi, or in the event of his death, or
ceasing to be the Mechanical and Electrical Engineer for the purpose of
this Contract, such other person as the Employer shall nominate for that
purpose. For the purpose of the mechanical and electrical engineering
works, the Engineer shall be deemed vested with the duties of and be
the representative of the Architect, except in respect of variations which
involve the Contract Sum.

Civil Engineer_&_Geotech_Surveyor' for this project shall be Britech Ltd

P.O. Box 15130 - 00509, Nairobi, or in the event of his death, or ceasing
to be the Civil Engineer & Geotech Surveyor for the purpose of this
Contract, such other person as the Employer shall nominate for that
purpose. For the purpose of the civil engineering and geotech survey,
works, the Engineer shall be deemed vested with the duties of and be
the representative of the Architect, except in respect of variations which
involve the Contract Sum.

Landscape_Architect' for this project shall be Insite Landscape

Architects (PTY) Ltd, 117 Karim Avenue, Doringkloor, Centurion, South
Africa, 0157, or in the event of his death, or ceasing to be the
Landscape Architect for the purpose of this Contract, such other person
as the Employer shall nominate for that purpose. For the purpose of
landscaping works, the Landscaper shall be deemed vested with the
duties of and be the representative of the Architect, except in respect of
variations which involve the Contract Sum.

Transport_&_Mobility_Specialists' for this project shall be Mobility In

Chain Srl, a company duly organized and existing under the Republic of
Italy, with its principal place of business in Milan, via Ciovasso 4 - 20021
Milan, Italy, or in the event of his death, or ceasing to be the Transport &
Mobility Specialists for the purpose of this Contract, such other person
as the Employer shall nominate for that purpose. For the purpose of
the transport and mobility works, the Transport & Mobility Specialists
shall be deemed vested with the duties of and be the representative of
the Architect, except in respect of variations which involve the Contract
Sum.

Environmental_Consultant' for this project shall be Green by Choice,

P.O. Box 21212 - 00505, Nairobi, or in the event of his death, or ceasing
to be the Environmental Consultant for the purpose of this Contract,
such other person as the Employer shall nominate for that purpose.
For the purpose of the environmental works, the Consultant shall be
deemed vested with the duties of and be the representative of the
Architect, except in respect of variations which involve the Contract
Sum.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/2
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

Surveyor' for this project shall be Map Surveys (K) Ltd, P.O. Box 44902 -
00100, Nairobi, or in the event of his death, or ceasing to be the
Surveyor for the purpose of this Contract, such other person as the
Employer shall nominate for that purpose. For the purpose of
surveying works, the Surveyor shall be deemed vested with the duties of
and be the representative of the Architect, except in respect of
variations which involve the Contract Sum.

'Contractor' shall mean the person or persons, partnership, firm or

company, whose tender for this work has been accepted, and who has
or have, signed this Contract and shall include his or their heirs,
executors, administrators, assigns, successors and duly appointed
representatives.

Works' shall mean all or any portion of the work, materials and articles,
wherever the same are being manufactured or prepared, which are to
be used in the execution of this Contract and whether the same may be
on the site or not.

'Approved' shall mean approved by the Architect at his absolute

discretion,
'Directed' shall mean directed by the Architect at his absolute
discretion.
'Selected' shall mean selected by the Architect at his absolute
discretion.
'm3' shall mean cubic metre.
'm2' shall mean square metre.

'm' shall mean linear metre.

'mm' shall mean linear millimetre.

'Kg.' shall mean Kilogramme

'No.' shall mean Number

'Prs.' shall mean Pairs,

'K.S.' shall mean the current Kenya Standard Specification
published by the Kenya Bureau of Standards.

As described' shall mean as described in the 'Descriptions of

Materials and Workmanship' contained in the Appendices to these Bills
of Quantities.
'As before' shall mean in all respects as earlier described in the same
or a previous Bill.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/3
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

'Do.' shall mean the whole of the preceding description except as

qualified in the description in which it occurs. Where it occurs in
descriptions of succeeding items it shall mean the same as in the first
description of the series in which it occurs except as qualified in the
description concerned. Where it occurs in brackets it shall mean the
whole of the preceding description which is contained within the
appropriate brackets.

Fix Only' shall mean take delivery in Mombasa (unless otherwise

stated), pay all demurrage and transport charges, load and transport to
site where necessary, unload, store, unpack, check contents against
orders and packing lists, assemble as necessary, distribute to position,
hoist and fix only.

A. GROUPED SIZES

Girths, depths or sizes grouped together in the Bills of Quantities item

descriptions by means of hyphenated upper and lower limits shall be
interpreted as 'exceeding' the lower limit and 'not exceeding' the upper
limit.

B. DESCRIPTION OF SITE
The site of the proposed works is located in Bamburi, Mombasa County.

The Contractor is recommended to visit the site and will be deemed to

have satisfied himself with regard to the conditions of the site, the risk of
injury to the property adjacent to the site, or to the occupiers of such
property, the nature of the materials to be excavated and conditions
under which the works will have to be carried out, the supply of and
conditions affecting labour and the facilities for obtaining the articles or
materials referred to in these Bills of Quantities. No claim by the
Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any
misunderstanding or misapprehension in respect of any such matter or
otherwise. Any damage caused to existing accesses and roads must be
made good as directed by and to the approval of the Architect

C. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

The works in this Contract comprise construction and completion of the

following facilities:-
1 Demolitions and Alterations
2 1No. Gateway
3 3No. Ablution blocks
4 Enabling works for the kiosks
Shs.

1/4
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.
1165 PRELIMINARIES

5 Refuse collection area

6 Hard landscape areas
a) Matatu interchange parking and driveways
b) Beachfront squares (2000m2)
c) New access road (450m long x 4m wide)
d) Pedestrian access way
7 Stormwater drainage
8 Foul drainage
9 Electrical installations
10 Mechanical installations
12 Soft landscaping and furniture
13 Shade areas in food market
14 Restoration & refurbishment of existing structures
15 100No. Food kiosks
16 Sculptures and artworks
A. SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works described above and contained within these Bills of
Quantities is subject to amendment and change at the sole discretion of
the Architect and the Employer. The work to be undertaken may be
added to, omitted or amended to any extent.
No adjustment of any submitted tender rates or prices, including those
for this Bill No. 1, will be permitted as a result of finalization of the scope
of works and under no circumstance will claim for resultant extra cost
etc. be accepted from the Contract.

Bill No. 13 "Schedule of rates" which must be priced by the tenderer will
be used for valuation of additional works ordered which are not part of
the measured works.
B. ACCESS TO SITE
Means of access to the site shall be agreed with the Ministry of Tourism
and Wildlife State Department of Tourism and the Architect prior to the
commencement of work. The Contractor must allow here for any
temporary access roads required for the transport of all materials, plant
and the workmen necessary for the complete execution of the works,
removing same at completion and for making good and reinstating to
the entire satisfaction of the Architect all works or services disturbed at
the completion of the Contract. The Contractor must also allow for
keeping the existing Public Highways and Roads clean and for making
good all damage to the satisfaction of the Architect and Local Authority.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/5
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

C. AREA TO BE OCCUPIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

The areas to be occupied by the Contractor for use as storage or for the
erection of workshops etc. shall be defined on the site by the Architect
and the Contractor must confine his activities to the areas so marked
and must ensure that his own and his sub‑contractors workmen do not
trespass on the adjoining property or cause inconvenience to its
occupiers.

A. DRAWINGS
The Contractor will be deemed to have examined the drawings before
tendering and to have satisfied himself regarding their details and
regarding the nature and extent of the works and the method of
construction involved. No claims arising out of misapprehension in
these respects will be allowed. Drawings may be seen by appointment
at the offices of the Architect during normal working hours.

The works are to be executed in accordance with the drawings referred

to in the Schedule of Drawings used for Bills of Quantities contained in
Appendix 'A' to these Bills of Quantities together with Contract drawings
and any drawings which may be supplied in amplification or amendment
thereof.
B. NOMINATED SUPPLIERS' AND SUB-CONTRACTORS' MATERIALS
Nominated Sub-contract and Nominated Supply Agreements will be
finalised as soon as possible after the contract has been signed. The
Contractor will be deemed to have taken account of this in his allowance
for the provision of space for storage of Nominated Sub-Contractors'
materials and for the provision of storage facilities on or off site for
Nominated Suppliers' materials until required.

C. VALUATION OF LUMP SUM PRELIMINARY COSTS

Lump sums entered in these Bills of Quantities against any item of
Preliminaries and General Conditions will be included in appropriate
valuations according to reasonable assessment of actual costs involved
in the item. Any balance between this assessment and the actual sum
entered in the Bills of Quantities will be included in subsequent
valuations as monthly instalments over the balance of the Contract
Period.
D. PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON SITE

All materials for incorporation in the works must be stored on or

adjacent to the site before payment is effected, unless specifically
exempted by the Architect. This is to include the materials of the
Contractor, Nominated Sub‑Contractors and Nominated Suppliers.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/6
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

A. COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATION NOTICES ETC.

The Contractor shall allow for paying all legally demandable fees, rates
or taxes including VAT (currently rated at 16%), and those for hoardings
and temporary buildings, and no adjustment of the Contract Sum will be
made in respect of such payments unless expressly stated to the
contrary in these Bills of Quantities.

The Contractor shall apply for, provide all transport necessary for, any
pay all costs and charges in connection with the Occupation Certificate
Documentation required for such Certificate(s) will be provided by the
Architect.

B. INSURANCE(S) AND SECURITIES

The Contractor to provide the following insurances and securities as the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. Provide Bid Security.

D. Provide Performance Security.

E. Provide Insurance for the Works.

F. Provide Insurance for Third Party.

Provide Insurance for Contractor's employees and loss or damage to

G.
equipment.

H. TOOLS, PLANT, ETC.

The Contractor shall allow for providing all ladders, tools, plant and
transport required for the works, except in so far as may be specifically
stated otherwise herein.

I. SAFETY, HEALTH AND WELFARE OF WORK PEOPLE

The Contractor shall allow for providing for the safety, health and
welfare of workpeople and for complying with any relevant Ordinances,
Regulations or Union Agreement.

J. NATIONAL INSURANCE AND PENSIONS

The Contractor shall allow for making any National Hospital Insurance
Fund, National Social Security Fund payments due in respect of
workpeople.

K. HOLIDAYS AND TRANSPORT FOR WORKPEOPLE

The Contractor shall allow for providing holidays and transport for
workpeople and for complying with any relevant Ordinances,
Regulations or Union Agreement.
Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/7
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

Time being of the essence in this Contract, however, the Contractor

shall be deemed to have allowed for necessary overtime payments for
work people who may be called to work during the public and gazetted
holidays.

A. TRAINING LEVY
The Contractor's attention is drawn to Legal Notice No. 237 of October,
1971, which requires payment by the Contractor of a Training Levy on
all contracts of more than Shs. 50,000/‑ in value and his tender must
include for all costs arising or resulting therefrom. Proof of payment of
this Training Levy will be required.

B. PROTECTION OF WORKS AND PERSONS

The Contractor shall allow for the protection of the whole of the existing
temporary and permanent works as well as of his own and his
Sub‑Contractor's work liable to damage, including provision of
temporary roofs, gutters, drains, etc., if necessary and shall case‑up,
cover, or in other suitable ways protect all finished work liable to injury,
to the satisfaction of the Architect until completion of the Contract.

From the beginning to the completion of the works, the same shall be
under the entire care and control of the Contractor, who shall take all
possible precautions to prevent any nuisance, inconvenience or injury to
the holders or occupiers of surrounding properties and to the public
generally, and shall at all times keep all paths and roads affected by the
works in a safe and clear state, and shall use proper precautions to
ensure the safety of all wheeled traffic and pedestrians. The Contractor
shall allow for providing all watching, lighting, barriers, covering open
trenches and protection of the works, including Sub‑Contract works, as
may be necessary for the safety of the works and for the protection of
the public and his own and Sub‑Contractors' employees.

In the event of any damage or loss occurring to the works, or to

materials or to any sewers, gullies, drains, paths, or other works on the
site in temporary possession of the Contractor for the purpose of this
Contract, either from the weather, want of proper protection, defects,
theft, insufficiency of the works, or any other cause whatsoever during
the progress of the works, or for any accident or damage to property or
persons by reason of the said works, the Contractor alone shall be
responsible and shall without extra charge, make good all damage and
pay all costs incurred.

C. STANDARDS LEVY AND STANDARDS ACTS

The Contractor's attention is drawn to legal notice No. 267 of 1990
which requires payment by Contractors of an annual Standards Levy
and his tender must include for all costs arising or resulting therefrom.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/8
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

A. POLICE REGULATIONS

The Contractor shall allow for complying with any relevant police
regulations.

B. WORKING HOURS

The working hours shall be those generally operated by good employers

in the building industry. No concrete work shall be carried out at night or
on gazetted holidays unless the Architect shall so direct. All other works
shall be executed at the discretion of the Contractor.

C. PROCEDURE, TIME FOR COMPLETION

the Contractor shall proceed with the works in such manner and such
order as the Architect may direct.

D. CONTRACT SUM
This is a fixed price contract. The Contractor should therefore allow
in his rates for any anticipated price increase in the cost labour,
material, plant, fuel etc. Until completion of the works. No claim of
increase in costs will be entertained except on changes arising from
duties, taxes, levies etc.

E. PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS

The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, within 14 days, for approval
and display in the site offices, a programme and progress chart devised
in such a way that the previously agreed contractually enforceable lined
programme is shown and progress can be marked up as the work
proceeds. The Contractor shall keep this chart up to date at all times.

If required by the Architect this chart shall be generated and up-dated by

an approved computer program.

Approval by the Architect of the programme shall not relieve the

Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.

The Contractor shall not without the Architects consent make any
material alteration to the approved programme.

If the Architect decides that progress does not match the programme,
he may order the Contractor to revise the programme. The Contractor
shall thereafter revise the programme to show the modifications
necessary to ensure completion of the works by the Date of Practical
Completion.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/9
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

The Architect shall notify the Contractor if the Architect decides that the
rate of progress of the works, or any section is too slow to meet the Date
for Practical Completion and that this is not due to a circumstance for
which the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the
Contract.

Following receipt of such a notice the Contractor shall take such steps
as may be necessary, and as the Architect may approve, to remedy or
mitigate the likely delay, including revision of the programme. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for taking such
steps.

A. BLASTING OPERATIONS

Blasting will not be allowed.

B. DAYWORKS

The Architect may, if in his opinion it is necessary or desirable, order in

writing that any additional or substituted work shall be executed on a
Daywork basis. The Contractor shall then be paid for such work in
accordance with Daywork rates and percentage additions as inserted
hereafter in these Bills of Quantities.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect all receipts or vouchers as

may be necessary to prove the amounts paid and before ordering
materials shall submit to the Architect quotations for the same for his
approval.
In respect of all work executed on a Daywork basis the Contractor shall,
during the continuance of such work, deliver each day to the Architect a
list in duplicate of the names, occupation and time of all workmen
employed on such work and a statement also in duplicate showing the
description and quantity of all materials and plant used thereon or
therefor (other than plant which is included in the percentage addition on
net amount of wages). One copy of each list and statement will, if
correct or when agreed, be signed by the Architect and returned to the
Contractor.

At the end of each month the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect a
priced statement of the labour, material and plant (except as aforesaid)
used and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment unless
such lists and statements have been fully and punctually rendered.
Provided always that, if the Architect shall consider that for any reason
the sending of such list or statement by the Contractor in accordance
with the foregoing provision was impracticable, he shall nevertheless be
entitled to authorize payment for such work either as Daywork (on being
satisfied as to the time employed and plant and materials used on such
work) or at such value thereof as he shall consider fair and reasonable.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/10
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

A. WATER FOR THE WORKS

The Contractor shall allow for providing all temporary water supplies
required for the works, including Sub‑Contract works, together with all
necessary storage tanks, meters and distribution systems for the same
and must allow for bearing all expenses incurred and paying for all
water consumed without charge to any Sub‑Contractor. Expenses in
connection with Nominated Sub‑Contractors should be allowed for in
the attendance items under the relevant P.C. Sums.

B. LIGHTING AND POWER FOR THE WORKS

The Contractor shall allow for providing all temporary lighting and power
supplies required for the works, including Sub‑Contract works, together
with all necessary meters and distribution systems for the same and
must allow for bearing all expenses incurred and paying for all current
consumed without charge to any Sub‑Contractor. Expenses in
connection with Nominated Sub‑Contractors should be allowed for in
the attendance items under the relevant P.C. Sums.

C. TELEPHONE
The Contractor shall arrange to provide telephone and Email contacts
which shall be accessible at all times. The Contractor shall pay all
charges for hire or purchase of equipment, licences, connection, rental
and calls made through these lines.
D. CROSSINGS AND TEMPORARY ROADS
The Contractor must allow for providing, forming and maintaining
necessary crossings on to the site and temporary roads as may be
required by the Architect and removing the same at completion and
making good damaged or disturbed surfaces as directed by and to the
approval of the Architect.

E. SITE OFFICES
a) The Contractor may allow for erecting and maintaining on the site in
such positions as may be directed, adequate site offices for the use of
his own site staff and removing same at completion and making good all
surfaces disturbed. The site office shall be of adequate size and shall
have sufficient furniture to permit the Architect to hold site meetings in it.

b) The Contractor shall also allow for providing erecting and maintaining,
on the site where directed, an adequate office of approved construction
and finishes and with sufficient furniture for the sole use of the Clerk of
Works appointed by the Architect with sufficient space to accommodate
25 persons during site meetings.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/11
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

c) The Contractor shall also allow for providing, erecting and maintaining
where directed a lock‑up hut containing a pedestal type water closet and
wash basin for the sole use of the Architect, other consultants and Clerk
of Works including making temporary connections to drains and water
supplies and paying all charges for connections, conservancy and
water consumed.

d) The Contractor shall also allow for providing the services of a cleaner for
keeping both offices and closet in a clean and sanitary condition from
the commencement to completion of the works; and for dismantling at
completion and making good all disturbed surfaces. The offices and
closet shall be completed before the Contractor will be permitted to
commence the works.

A. SHEDS FOR STORAGE OF MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain on the site, in such
positions as may be directed, ample temporary watertight, lock‑up
sheds for the proper storage and protection of cement and other
materials liable to damage and shall remove same at completion and
make good all surfaces disturbed. He shall also provide space for
storage accommodation which Sub‑Contractors may wish to erect for
themselves.

B. SANITATION OF THE WORKS

The Contractor shall allow for providing the necessary latrines for the
labour employed on the works, including labour employed by
Sub‑Contractors, to the satisfaction of the Health and Medical
Authorities and for maintaining the same in a thoroughly clean and
sanitary condition and paying all conservancy fees.
The Contractor shall allow for removing the said latrines and leaving the
ground clean and free from pollution upon completion to the satisfaction
of the Health and Medical Authorities.

C. NO WORKMEN TO BE HOUSED ON SITE

No labour with the exception of a watchman may be housed on the site.
The cost of transporting labour to and from the site or elsewhere will be
deemed to be included in the tender.

D. WORK TO BE OPENED UP AT THE REQUEST OF THE ARCHITECT

The Contractor shall, at the request of the Architect within such time as
the Architect shall name, open for inspection any work covered up, and,
should the Contractor refuse or neglect to comply with such request, the
Architect may employ workmen other than those employed by the
Contractor to open up the same.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/12
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

If the said work has been covered up in contravention of the Architect's

instructions, or if, on being opened up, it be found not in accordance
with the drawings or Bills of Quantities or the instructions of the
Architect, the expenses of opening and covering it up again whether
done by the Contractor or by the Architect, shall be borne by and be
recoverable from the Contractor or may be deducted from any monies
due to the Contractor. If the work has not been covered up in
contravention of such instructions and be found in accordance with the
said drawings and Bills of Quantities, then the expenses aforesaid shall
be borne by the Employer, and be added to the Contract Sum; provided
always that, in the case of foundations or of any other urgent work so
opened up and requiring immediate attention, the Architect shall,
within a reasonable time after the work has been opened, make or
cause to be made the inspection thereof, and at the expiration of such
time, if such inspection shall not have been made the Contractor may
cover up the same and shall not be required to open it up again for
inspection except at the expense of the Employer.

A. HOARDING
The Contractor shall allow for providing and clearing away on
completion such hoarding, fencing, gates etc. as may be required for the
security of the site, and as instructed by the Architect to prevent access
to the site by the public. The exact location and type of these items are
to be agreed with the Architect and negotiated with the local Authority by
the Contractor who will also be responsible for paying any fees or taxes
to the Local Authority in respect of the hoarding, fencing or gates and
providing any drawings necessary for approval.

The Contractor shall allow for thoroughly maintaining the hoarding and
gates throughout the Contract and clearing away and making good
disturbed ground on completion. All materials arising will remain the
property of the Contractor and he should allow credit against this
accordingly.

B. SCAFFOLDING

The Contractor shall allow for providing, erecting and dismantling all
general scaffolding required for the works. The Contractor must allow
here or in his rates for providing all special scaffolding required by his
Sub‑Contractors, other than Nominated Sub‑Contractors carrying out
works for which P.C. Sums are included in these Bills. Where the
Contractor is required to provide special scaffolding for these latter
Sub‑Contractors, an item is included for pricing under the relevant P.C.
Sum.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/13
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

A. HOISTING

The Contractor shall allow for all costs related to hoisting materials for
fixing at any level within the limits shown on the drawings or included in
the general description of the works.

B. TRADE NAMES

Where trade names or manufacturers' catalogue numbers are

mentioned in these Bills of Quantities, the reference is intended as a
guide to the type of article or quality of materials required. The
Contractor may use any article or material equal in type or quality to
those herein described subject to the prior approval of the Architect and
at his absolute discretion. The onus of proof as to equivalent quality will
rest with the Contractor, whose tender will be deemed to include for the
makes described herein.
C. SIGNBOARD
The Contractor must allow for providing, erecting and maintaining a site
signboard, the size, type of construction and lettering of which shall be
to the Architect's design. The names of the Consultants are to be in
lettering 50mm high. The board is to be fixed in an elevated position on
the site where indicated by the Architect. On completion of the works,
the notice board shall be removed and making good shall be carried out
as necessary.

D. REMOVAL OF PLANT, RUBBISH ETC.

The Contractor must allow for removing and clearing away all plant,
rubbish and unused materials, and leaving the whole of the site of the
works in a clean and tidy state at completion to the satisfaction of the
Architect. He must also allow for removing all rubbish and dirt from the
site as it accumulates during the performance of the Contract.

E. DEDUCTION FROM MONEY DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR

The Architect shall be entitled to deduct any monies which the

Contractor shall be liable to pay under the Contract to the Employer
from any sum which may become payable to the Contractor hereunder
and the Architect in issuing his Certificates as provided in Clause 34 of
the Schedule of Conditions shall have regard to any sum so chargeable
to the Contractor. Provided always that this provision shall not affect any
other remedy by action at law or otherwise to which the Employer may
be entitled for the recovery of such monies.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/14
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

A. WORKS TO BE DELIVERED UP CLEAN

On completion of the Contract, the site and the works shall be cleared of
all plant, scaffolding, rubbish and unused materials and shall be
delivered up clean and in perfect condition in every respect to the
satisfaction of the Architect. Particular attention is to be paid to leaving
all windows and floors clean and removing all paint and cement stains.

B. APPROVED SUB‑CONTRACTORS

Where in these Bills of Quantities work is described to be executed

by an approved Sub‑Contractor the firms appointed will be treated as
Sub‑Contractors employed by the Contractor and not as Nominated
Sub‑Contractors. The unit prices for such work must, therefore, include
not only the Sub‑Contractor's charges but also the Contractors'
overheads, profits and attendance. Such firms where not prequalified
shall be classified on the Ministry of Works lists as suitable to undertake
class 'A' works.

C. APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT FOR EMPLOYMENT OF SUB-

CONTRACTORS

The Contractor will be required to obtain the approval of the

Architect/Engineer in writing before Employing any of his own (i.e. not
nominated) Sub‑Contractors for any portion of the work.

D. EXISTING PROPERTY

The Contractor shall take every precaution to avoid damage to all

existing property including buildings on and adjacent to the site, roads,
cables, drains and other services and he will be held responsible for all
damage arising from the execution of this Contract to the
aforementioned and he shall make good all such damage where
directed at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Architect.

E. DISPOSAL OF WATER
Allow for keeping the works free from all water, including spring and
running water, by pumping or other means as required.

F. MAINTAINING SIDES OF EXCAVATIONS

Allow for maintaining the sides of all excavations by planking and
strutting or other means as required. Additional works caused by the
collapse of excavations through inadequate planking and strutting (e.g.
re-routing of adjacent drain runs) will be at the Contractor’s expense.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES
1/15
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

A. WHITE ANTS

Allow for destroying any white ants' nests found in the vicinity of the
buildings, destroying Queen Ants, depositing cyanide lumps in holes
and tunnels and filling with hardcore and murram well rammed and
sealed.

B. SITE PHOTOGRAPHS
The contractor shall take and hand over to the Architect at approved
intervals site progress photographs in a format to be directed by the
Architect.

C. TESTING

Allow for all expenses in connection with the testing of materials as

specified hereunder including the supply and preparation of materials to
be tested, the cost of materials and their packing and conveyance to the
nearest approved Testing Laboratory, laboratory charges, etc. The
following items of tests will be measured according to the number of
tests actually called for by the Architect but unsuccessful tests will not
be included in the remeasurement.

Allow for executing the following tests as detailed in the

Appendices to these Bills of Quantities (PROVISIONAL)
Rate
Water Test (4.5 litres) No. 15

Sand Test (0.028m3) No. 15

Aggregate Test (0.028m3) No. 15

Reinforcement test (1m of mild steel rod or
high tensile steel bar of various sizes) No. 15
Concrete Test (One test comprising three
cubes as described hereinafter) No. 15

Testing of concrete or stone blocks of

various strengths in accordance with British
Standard Specification (one test comprising
six blocks) No. 15

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/16
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

The Contractor shall allow for all other testing of materials, apart from
the above, required by the Appendices of the Bills of Quantities and he
shall be responsible for all expenses incurred in completing such tests
including costs of materials and labour, equipment, transport and
charges of testing authority, etc.

A. APPENDICES
The Appendices to the Bills of Quantities shall be regarded for Contract
purposes as part of the Bills and shall be read and construed with the
appropriate sections of the Bills as if contained therein.

Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/17
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 1

PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS

COLLECTION

Brought forward from page No. 1/1

" " " " “ 1/2

" " " " “ 1/3

" " " " “ 1/4

" " " " “ 1/5

" " " " “ 1/6

" " " " “ 1/7

" " " " “ 1/8

" " " " “ 1/9

" " " " “ 1/10

" " " " “ 1/11

" " " " “ 1/12

" " " " “ 1/13

" " " " “ 1/14

" " " " “ 1/15

" " " " “ 1/16

" " " " “ 1/17

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 1

CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY Shs.

1165 PRELIMINARIES

1/18
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 2

GATEWAY
(ALL PROVISIONAL)

ELEMENT A

SUBSTRUCTURES
A. Allow for planking and strutting to sides of
excavations. Item

B. Allow for keeping excavations free from all

spring and running water Item
C. Excavate oversite to remove vegetable soil
average 150mm deep and cart away. m2 77

D. Excavate oversite to reduce levels commencing

at stripped site level and not execeeding 1.50m
deep. m3 74
E. Excavate foundation trench commencing at
reduced level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 33

F. Do. but 1.50-3.00m deep m3 11

G. Do. but column base m3 23

H. Do. but 1.50-3.00m deep m3 8

I. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral

rock. m3 74

J. Return, fill in and ram selected excavated

material around foundations m3 48
K. Remove surplus excavated material from site m3 26

Selected hardcore
L. Filling in making up levels under floors, spread,
levelled, well rammed and consolidated in
150mm layers m3 110

M. 300mm Bed spread, levelled, well rammed and

consolidated and blinded with 50mm thick
murram, quarry dust or sand to receive damp
proof membrane (measured separately) m2 48

N. Approved insecticide treatment m2 59

Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
SUBSTRUCTURES

2/ 1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 1000 Gauge approved polythene sheeting laid on

blinded hardcore (measured separately) as damp
proof membrane with welted laps (measured net-
no allowance made for laps) m2 59

Plain concrete (1:3:6)

B. 50mm blinding under foundations. m2 23

C. Do. but column bases. m2 17

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

D. Foundations. m3 6

E. Column bases m3 5

F. Columns m3 2

G. 150mm Bed laid on damp proof membrane

(measured separately) in bays not exceeding 50
square metres including formwork to edge of
bays. m2 59

Ribbed steel bar reinforcement to B.S 4461 and

K.S. ISO 6935-2:2007

H. Assorted bar reinforcement sizes in foundations Kg. 600

I. Do. (column bases) Kg. 450

J. Do. (columns) Kg. 180

K. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement to B.S.

4483 Ref. A 142 and K.S. 02-18:1976 in
concrete bed (measured net, no allowance made
for minimum 225mm laps ) including tying and
supporting as required. m2 88

Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
SUBSTRUCTURES

2/ 2
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

Sawn formwork

A. Sides of foundations. m2 18

B. Sides of column bases m2 14

C. Sides of columns m2 15

D. Edge of bed 150-225mm high. m 54

E. No. 16 B.W.G Hoop iron fixing clamp 25mm

wide x 450mm girth once bent and tucked to
inner face of formwork, one end cast into
concrete and the other end afterwards
straightened and built into joints of walling. No. 132
F. 200mm Approved load bearing (7N/mm2)
concrete block walling in cement motar (1:3). m2 80
G. 100mm Thick smooth dressed zero jointed cut
coral cladding on rendered plinths bedded and
jointed on and including 15mm cement and sand
(1:3) backing and including all necessary ties
and finished with brush applied protective
silicone sealant. m2 30

H. Approved plaster render on plinths finished

smooth with a steel trowel. m2 18

Shs.

ELEMENT A

SUBSTRUCTURES

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 2/1

" " " " " 2/2

" " " " " 2/3

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT A

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
SUBSTRUCTURES
COLLECTION
2/ 3
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT B
FRAME
Vibrated reinforced concrete (class 25)

A. Columns. m3 3

B. Beams. m3 15

C. 75mm Projecting moulding brackets m2 12

D. 150mm Suspended slab m2 59

E. Extra over 200mm bed for thicknessing m2 9

F. 200mm Wide x 75mm thick decorative moulding

m 44

G. 100mm Wide x 75mm thick decorative moulding

m 63
Ribbed steel bar reinforcement to B.S 4461 and
K.S. ISO 6935-2:2007
H. Assorted bar reinforcement sizes to columns Kg. 360

I. Do. (beams) Kg. 1,500

I. Do. (projecting moulding brackets) Kg. 173

J. Do. (Suspended slabs) Kg. 608

Sawn formwork
K. Sides of columns. m2 45

L. Sides and soffits of beams. m2 147

M. Sides and soffits of projecting moulded bracket. m2 24

N. Soffits of suspended slab m2 59

O. Sides and soffits of decorative moulding 75 -

150mm high. m 95

P. Sides and soffits of decorative moulding 150 -

225mm high. m 65

Q. Edge of suspended slab 225 - 300 mm high m 54

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT B

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATE WAY

FRAME
COLLECTION
2/ 4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT C

EXTERNAL WALLS

Precast concrete (class 25) bedded, jointed and

pointed in gauged mortar

A. 300 x 250mm Lintol reinforced with and

including three 10mm ribbed steel bars hooked
at ends m 27

B. 600 x 450mm Crenelations moulded to approval

on precast coping (measured separately). No. 6

C. 350 x 50mm Coping twice throated and

weathered and reinforced as necessary for
handling. m 51

D. 150 x 150mm Decorative opening in 250mm

masonry wall with and including finishing to
approval. No. 18

E. 200mm Solid concrete block walling in gauged

mortar m2 107

F. No. 16 B.W.G Hoop iron fixing clamp 25mm

wide x 450mm girth as before. No. 324

Pluvex No. 1 or other equal and approved

horizontal bitumen damp proof course to B.S.
743 (measured net - no allowance made for
laps).

G. 200mm Wide under walling. m 24

H. 200mm Wide under coping. m 77

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT C

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
EXTERNAL WALLS
COLLECTION

2/ 5
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT D

ROOF FINISHES AND RAINWATER

DISPOSAL

Cement and sand (1:3) beds and backings

A. 40mm (Avarage) lightweight screed laid to falls
and crossfalls on concrete flat roof finished to
receive waterproofing membrane (measured
separately). m2 48

B. 15mm Do. but on parapet wall sides. m2 15

C. 50 x 50mm Triangular fillet. m 48

Note:- A ten year guarantee against defects will

be required for the following flat roof
waterproofing.

4mm A.P.P. or other equal and approved

waterproofing membrane laid on concrete flat
roof in accordance with the manufacturers
specifications to be executed by an approved
Sub-Contractor.

D. Finish to flat roof. m2 72

E. Do. but laid vertically on parapet wall sides. m2 23

F. Turn edge of rubber membrane into and

including groove in wall and pointed in gauged
mortar. m 72

G. 100mm Diameter 'Fullbora' rainwater outlet

from East African Foundry or other equal and
approved and fixing in concrete slab including
jointing to down pipe (measured separately) No. 5

H. Precast concrete roof pergola (class 25) bedded,

jointed and pointed in gauged mortar m2 26

Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
ROOF

2/ 6
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 200 x 200 x 20mm Mitchell Cotts (Kenya) Ltd

or other equal and approved precast concrete
interlocking roofing tiles bedded, jointed and
pointed in cement screed on APP waterproofing
membrane (measured separately). m2 108

B. Do. but skirting finish. m 108

C. Extra over do. for return on 50 x 50mm

triangular fillet. m 108

D. Cut and fit interlocking tiles around 100mm

diameter rainwater outlet No. 7

PVC rainwater pipes and fittings to B.S. 4514

E. 100mm Diameter down pipe fixed to masonry or

concrete with and including approved brackets.
m 27

F. Extra for shoe No 7

G. Extra for bend No 7

Shs.

ELEMENT D

ROOF FINISHES AND RAINWATER

DISPOSAL

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 2/6

" " " " " 2/7

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT D

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
ROOF FINISHES
COLLECTION
2/ 7
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT E

EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES

A. 15mm cement, lime and river sand (1:2:9) Lamu

plaster on walls finished smooth with a wood
float. m2 48

B. Do. (columns, moulded brackets and beams

surfaces) m2 117

C. Do. (moulded concrete surfaces) m 160

D. 300mm Wide x 50mm thick Swahili decorative

plaster as 'Vidaka' to approval. m 44

E. 250mm Do. m 114

F. 100 x 100mm square decorated recessed plaster

to approval. m 45

The following work is to be executed by an

approved Sub-Contractor.

G. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two

finishing coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal
and approved Marine external quality paint on
rendered walls externally. m2 72

H. Do. (columns, moulded brackets and beams

surfaces) m2 176
I. Do. but surfaces not exceeding 100mm girth
(moulded concrete surfaces) m 240

J. Do. but surfaces 200 -300mm girth (Swahili

decorated plastered areas) m 171

K. 100mm Thick smooth dressed zero jointed cut-

coral cladding on rendered wall bedded and
jointed on and including 15mm cement and sand
(1:3) backing including all necessary ties and
finished with brush applied protective silicone
sealant. m2 59

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT E

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES
COLLECTION

2/ 8
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT F

INTERNAL WALL FINISHES

A. 12mm Two coat internal lime plaster on walls

finished smooth with a steel trowel. m2 156

B. 100mm Wide x 25mm thick plain cement and

sand (1:3) plaster strip to approval. m 114

C. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two

finishing coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal
and approved Marine quality paint on
plastered walls internally to be executed by an
approved Sub-Contractor. m2 156

D. Do. but surfaces not exceeding 100mm girth

(Gateway opening) m 114

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT F

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
INTERNAL WALL FINISHES
COLLECTION

2/ 9
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT G

FLOOR FINISHES

Cement and sand (1:3)

A. 40mm Paving laid on concrete and trowelled

hard and smooth and polished with and
including yellow ochre additive to the entire
satisfaction of the Architect. m2 56

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT G

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
FLOOR FINISHES
COLLECTION

2/ 10
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT H

CEILING FINISHES

A 12mm Two coat internal lime plaster (cement

lime and riversand 1:2:9) on concrete soffits
finished smooth with a steel trowel. m2 50

The whole of the following work is to be

executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.
B. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two
finishing coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal
and approved Marine quality paint on soffits of
plastered suspended slab. m2 50

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT H

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
CEILING FINISHES
COLLECTION
2/ 11
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT I

BUILDER'S WORK IN CONNECTION WITH

SPECIALIST SERVICES

Electrical Installation

Cut away for and make good after electrician

installing concealed conduit system to the
following points including cutting or leaving
holes, notches, mortices, sinking in both the
structure and its coverings and make good to
them.

A. Lighting points and associated switch points No. 15

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT I

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
B.W.I.C.
COLLECTION
2/ 12
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT J

PAVED AREAS

A. Excavate over site to reduce levels commencing

at existing ground level and not exceeding 1.50m
deep. m3 153

B. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral

rock. m3 15

C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 153

D. 300mm Bed of hand packed and compacted

stone base well rammed and consolidated in
150mm layers. m2 511

E. Telvar 'W' or other equal and approved weed

killer under paving. m2 511

F. 50mm (Average) sand bed blinding spread and

well compacted to falls and crossfalls and
cambers and finished to receive stone paving
(measured separately). m2 511

G. 60mm Thick medium duty 'Bamburi'/Blox or

other equal and approved precast concrete
cobble paver blocks in approved pattern laid on
sand bed (measured separately) to falls,
crossfalls, and cambers including necessary
compaction. m2 113

H. Do. but in colour charcoal topping. m2 142

I. 60mm Thick medium duty 'Bamburi'/'Blox' or

other equal and approved precast concrete quad
paver blocks in colour red topping in approved
pattern laid on sand bed (measured separately)
to falls, crossfalls and cambers including
necessary compaction. m2 256

Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
PAVED AREAS

2/ 13
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 125 x 250mm Precast concrete (Class 20) kerb

with one chamfered edge finished fair on all
exposed surfaces bedded, jointed and pointed in
cement mortar (1:3) on and including 325 x
100mm plain concrete (1:3:6) foundation
haunched up on one side including all necessary
excavation, formwork and soil disposal. m 101

B. 125 x 100mm Precast concrete (Class 20)

channel finished fair on all exposed surfaces
bedded, jointed and pointed in cement mortar
(1:3) on and including 375 x 100mm plain
concrete (1:3:6) foundation haunched up on one
side including all necessary excavation,
formwork and soil disposal. m 101

Shs.

ELEMENT H

PAVED AREAS

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 2/13

" " " " " 2/14

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT J

CARRIED TO SUMARY AT END OF BILL
NO 2 Shs.

1165 GATEWAY
PAVED AREAS
COLLECTION

2/ 14
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 2

GATEWAY
(ALL PROVISIONAL)

SUMMARY

Element Title. Page No.

A. Substructures 2/3

B Frame 2/4

C External and Internal Walls 2/5

D Roof Finishes and Rainwater Disposal 2/7

E. External Wall Finishes 2/8

F. Internal Wall Finishes 2/9

G. Floor Finishes 2/10

H. Ceiling Finishes 2/11

I. Builder Work in Connection with Specialist

Services 2/12

J. Paved Areas 2/14

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 2 CARRIED TO FINAL

SUMMARY. SHS.

1165 BILL NO. 2

SUMMARY

2/15
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 3

3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

Note: Quantities are measured for one ablution

block only.

ELEMENT A
SUBSTRUCTURES
A. Allow for planking and strutting to sides of
excavations. Item
B. Allow for keeping excavations free from all
spring and running water. Item
C. Excavate over site to remove vegetable soil
average 150mm deep and cart away. m2 96
D. Excavate oversite to reduce levels commencing at
stripped site level and not execeeding 1.50m
deep. m3 48
E. Excavate foundation trench commencing at
reduced level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 53
F. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral
rock. m3 101
G. Return fill and ram selected excavated material
around foundations. m3 25
H. Remove surplus excavated material from site m3 29
Selected hardcore
I. Filling in making up levels under floors, spread,
levelled, well rammed and consolidated in
150mm layers m3 77
J. 300mm Bed spread, levelled, well rammed and
consolidated and blinded with 50mm thick
murram, quarry dust or sand to receive damp
proof membrane (measured separately) m2 85
K. Approved insecticide treatment. m2 85

Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

SUBSTRUCTURES
3/ 1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 1000 Gauge 'Diothene' or other equal and

approved polythene sheeting as damp proof
membrane laid on blinded hardcore (measured
separately) with welted laps (measured net-no
allowance made for laps). m2 85

Plain Concrete (Class 15)

B. 50mm Blinding under foundations. m2 42

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

C. Foundations m3 8

D. Columns m3 1

E. 150mm Bed laid on damp proof membrane

(measured separately) in bays not exceeding 50
square metre including formwork to edge of bays.
m2 85

F. Extra over 150mm bed for thicknessing to a total

of 200mm thick x 450mm average wider under
100mm walling including hand packing hardcore
to two sloping sides and all additional binding
and steel fabric mesh reinforcement
m 22

Ribbed bar steel reinforcement as before.

G. Assorted bar reinforcement bars in foundations.

Kg. 422

H. Do. (columns) Kg. 100

I. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement to B.S.

4483 Ref: A 193 and K.S. 02 - 18: 1976 in
concrete bed (measeured net, no allowance made
for minimum 225mm laps) including tying and
supporting as required. m2 85

Sawn formwork

J. Sides of foundations. m2 28

Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

SUBSTRUCTURES
3/ 2
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. Sides of column m2 7

B. Edge of bed 75- 150mm high. m 57

C. 200mm Approved load bearing (7N/mm2)

concrete block walling in cement mortar (1:3). m2 91

D. 100mm Thick smooth dressed zero jointed cut-

coral cladding on rendered surfaces bedded and
jointed on and including 15mm cement and sand
(1:3) backing including all necessary ties and
finished with brush applied protective silicone
sealant. m2 12

Shs.

ELEMENT A

SUBSTRUCTURES

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 3/1

" " " " " 3/2

" " " " " 3/3

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT A

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

SUBSTRUCTURES
COLLECTION
3/ 3
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT B

FRAME

Vibrated reinforced concrete (class 25)

A. Beams. m3 5

B. 150mm Suspended roof slab m2 59

Ribbed bar steel reinforcement as before

C. Assorted bar reinforcement sizes in beams Kg. 515

D. Do. (suspended slab). Kg. 622

Sawn formwork

E. Sides and soffits of beams. m2 62

F. Soffit of suspended slab. m2 59

G. Edge of suspended slab 75-150mm high m 54

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT B

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

FRAME
COLLECTION
3/ 4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT C

EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL WALLS

Precast concrete (class 25) bedded, jointed and

pointed in gauged mortar.

A. 350 x 70mm Coping twice throated and once

weathered and reinforced as necessary for
handling and finished fair on all exposed
surfaces.
m 54

B. 200 x 200mm Lintol reinforced with and

including three 100mm ribbed steel bars hooked
at ends. m 1

C. Approved Swahili decorated concrete louvre

panels. m2 26

Solid concrete block walling in gauged mortar

D. 100mm Thick internal walling, reinforced. m2 31

E. 200mm Thick internal walling. m2 12

F. Do. (external walling). m2 81

G. Do. (parapet walling). m2 69

H. Pluvex No. 1 or other equal and approved

horizontal bitumen damp proof course to B.S.
743 (measured net - no allowance made for laps)

I. 200mm Wide under walling. m 52

J 100mm Wide under walling. m 16

K 200mm wide under coping m 54

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT C

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL WALLS
COLLECTION
3/ 5
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT D

ROOFING FINISHES AND RAINWATER

DISPOSAL

Cement and sand (1:3) beds and backings

A. 40mm (Average) lightweight screed laid to falls

and crossfalls on concrete finished to receive
waterproofing membrane (measured separately).
m2 48

B. 15mm Do. but on parapet wall sides. m2 15

Note: A ten year guarantee against defects will be

required for the following flat roof
waterproofing.

C. 4mm A.P.P. or other equal and approved

waterproofing membrane on concrete flat roof
laid in accordance with the manufacturers printed
specifications to be executed by an approved Sub-
Contractor. m2 48

D. Do. but laid vertically on concrete sides. m2 15

E. Turn edge of A.P.P. waterproofing membrane

into and including groove in concrete beam or
wall and point in gauged mortar. m 50

F. Dress roofing around 100mm diameter rainwater

outlet. No. 3

G. 200 x 200 x 20mm Mitchell Cotts (Kenya)

Limited or other equal and approved precast
concrete interlocking roofing tiles bedded,
jointed and pointed in cement and sand screed on
A.P.P waterproofing membrane (measured
separately). m2 48

H. Do. but skirting finish m 50

Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

ROOF
3/ 6
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 100mm Diameter approved 'Fulbora' rainwater

outlet from East African Foundry or other equal
and approved and fixing in concrete slab
including jointing to down pipe (measured
separately). No. 3

PVC rainwater pipes and fittings to B.S 4514

B. 100mm diameter down pipe fixed to concrete or

stone wall with and including approved brackets.
m 9

C. Extra for swanneck 600mm projection. No. 3

D. Extra for bend. No. 3

E. Extra for shoe. No. 3

Shs.

ELEMENT D

ROOFING FINISHES AND RAINWATER

DISPOSAL

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 3/6

" " " " " 3/7

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT D

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

ROOF
COLLECTION
3/ 7
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT E

DOORS

Wrot mvule

45mm (Finished) framed, tongued and grooved

panel door to the approval of the Architect

A. Door size 900 x 2100mm (cleaner's store) No. 1

B. Door size 800 x 2100mm (washrooms) No. 8

Wrot mvule framed frames and finishings

C. 100 x 50mm Frame with one labour. m 45

D. 45 x 20mm Architrave with three labours. m 45

E. 15 x 15mm Quadrant. m 45

Supply and fix only the following HAFELE

GRADE 316 catalogue ironmongery complete
with all matching screws and keys to
timber/metal. (Reference to this particular
catalogue is given as a guide to type and quality
only and equal and approved alternatives may be
used).

F. 100mm thick butt hinges Prs. 13 1/2

G. Two lever internal lockset. No. 1

H. Pull Handle. No. 8

I. Push plate No. 8

J. Alumiunm satin anodized kick plate No. 16

K. Bathroom indicator bolt. No. 8

L. Male/female symbol. No. 2

Shs.
1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS
DOORS

3/ 8
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. Aluminium coat hook No. 8

B. Floor mounted door stopper. No. 9

C. Prepare and apply one coat of aluminium wood

primer on backs of wood surfaces as before. m2 5

The whole of the following work is to be

executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.

D. Prepare and apply approved stain, sanding sealer

and three coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal
and approved varnish on general surfaces of
timber doors internally. m2 31

E. Do. but surfaces 100 - 200mm girth internally. m 45

Shs.

ELEMENT E

DOORS

COLLECTION

Brought forward from page No. 3/8

" " " " " 3/9

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT E CARRIED

TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL NO. 3
Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

DOORS
COLLECTION
3/ 9
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT F

EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES

A. 15mm Cement and sand (1:4) external rendering

on walls finished smooth with a wood float m2 77

B. Do. (parapet walling). m2 119

C. Do. (beam surfaces). m2 11

The whole of the following work is to be

executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.

D. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two

finishing coats of 'Jotun paints' or other equal
and approved Marine quality paint on rendered
walls externally. m2 77

E. Do. (parapet walling). m2 50

F. Do. (beam surfaces). m2 11

G. 100mm Thick smooth dressed zero jointed cut-

coral cladding on rendered surfaces bedded and
jointed on and including 15mm cement and sand
(1:3) backing including all necessary ties and
finished with brush applied protective silicone
sealant. m2 41

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT F

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES
COLLECTION
3/ 10
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT G

INTERNAL WALL FINISHES

A. 12mm Two coat internal lime plaster on walls

and beam surfaces finished smooth with a steel
trowel. m2 70

B. Do. but finished to receive ceramic wall tiles

(measured separately) m2 48

C. Do. but finished to receive terrazzo dado

(measured separately) m2 124

D. Approved coloured Saj ceramic wall tiles fixed to

plastered walls with and including approved
adhesive and jointed and flush pointed with grout
to match tile (wet areas). m2 48

The whole of the following work is to be

executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.

E. Polished terrazzo dado on plastered walls. m2 124

F. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two

finishing coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal
and approved marine quality paint on plastered
walls internally. m2 70

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT G

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

INTERNAL WALL FINISHES
COLLECTION

3/ 11
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT H

FLOOR FINISHES

Polished Terrazzo to be executed by an approved

Sub-Contractor.

A. 40mm Paving laid on concrete. m2 47

B. 100 x 25 Coved and rounded skirting. m 57

C. Approved plastic dividing strips cut to lengths

and set in terrazzo paving to form margins and
patterns to details. m 118

TOTAL AMOUNT OF ELEMENT H CARRIED

TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL NO. 3
Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

FLOOR FINISHES
COLLECTION
3/ 12
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT I

CEILING FINISHES

A 12mm two coat internal lime plaster on concrete

soffits finished smooth with a steel trowel.
m2 47

The whole of the following work is to be

executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.

B. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two

finishing coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal
and approved marine quality paint on plastered
soffits internally. m2 47

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT I

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

1165 CEILING FINISHES
COLLECTION

3/ 13
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT J

JOINERY FITTINGS

Joinery Fittings
The following in 2 No.Concrete Troughs
Vibrated reinforced concrete (class 25)
A. 75mm Suspended slab. m2 5

B. 75 x 50mm Upstand m 8

C. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement Ref:A 142

in suspended concrete trough otherwise as before.
m2 5
Sawn formwork
D. Soffit of suspended concrete slab. m2 5
E. Edge of suspended concrete slab not exceeding
75mm high m 11
F. Do. Edges of upstand. m 1
G. 75mm Chase in stone wall for building in end of
75mm concrete slab. m 13
Polished Terrazzo to be executed by an approved
Sub-Contractor.

H. 20mm paving on concrete worktop m2 5

I. 75mm high finish to edges of worktop m 11

J. Do. (concrete fascia). m 8

The following in Urinal Troughs

Vibrated reinforced concrete (class 25)

K. 75mm Suspended slab. m2 1

L. 75 x 50mm Upstand m 2

M. Steel wire fabric mesh Ref: A142 in suspended

trough as before. m2 1

Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

JOINERY FITTINGS
3/ 14
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

Sawn formwork

A. Soffit of suspended concrete slab. m2 1

B. Edge of suspended concrete slab not exceeding

75mm high m 3

C. Do. Edges of upstand. m 2

D. 75mm Chase in stone wall for building in end of

75mm concrete slab. m 3

Polished Terrazzo to be executed by an approved

Sub-Contractor.

E. 20mm paving on concrete top m2 1

F. 75mm high finish to edges m 2

G. Do. (concrete fascia). m 2

The following in Concrete bench

H. 100mm Suspended concrete bench m2 2

I. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement Ref:A 142

in suspended concrete otherwise as before. m2 2

Sawn formwork
J. Soffit of suspended concrete bench. m2 2

K. Edge of concrete bench 75-150mm high. m 3

Finishes
L. 20mm thick screed on concrete bench finished
smooth with a steel trowel. m 4
Bathroom mirrors.

M. 6mm Grade 'A' mirror size 3500 x 900mm with

bevelled edges fixed on MDF backing (measured
separately) complete with and including 4No.
Chrome capped screws. No. 2

N. 12mm MDF backing fixed to masonary walling

to approval. m2 6

Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

JOINERY FITTINGS

3/ 15
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT J

JOINERY FITTINGS

COLLECTION

Brougth forward from page 3/14

" " " " 3/15

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT J

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT END OF BILL
NO. 3
Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

JOINERY FITTINGS
COLLECTION
3/ 16
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT K

BUILDER'S WORK IN CONNECTION WITH

SPECIALIST SERVICES

Internal plumbing, fire-fighting and drainage

installations.

A. Hole through 150mm reinforced concrete slab for

small pipe and make good. No. 4

B. Do. but large pipe. No. 2

C. Hole through 200mm thick masonry wall for

small pipe and make good. No. 10

D. Cut horizontal or vertical chase in masonry

walling for small pipe and make good. m 15

E. Hole through suspended roof slab for large pipe

including forming colar around pipe. No. 2

Electrical Installation

Cut away for and make good after electrician

installing concealed conduit system to the
following points including cutting or leaving
holes, notches, mortices, sinking in both the
structure and its coverings and make good to
them.

F. Lighting points No. 16

G. Lighting switch points. No. 16

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT K

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO.3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

B.W.I.C.
COLLECTION
3/ 17
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

ELEMENT L

EXTERNAL WORKS

PAVED AREAS

A. Excavate oversite to reduce levels commencing at

existing ground level and not exceeding 1.50m
deep. m3 14

B. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral

rock. m3 2

C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 14

D. 300mm Bed of selected hardcore, spread,

levelled, well rammed and consolidated in
150mm layers m2 47

E. Telvar 'W' or other equal and approved weed

killer under paving. m2 47

F. 50mm (Average) sand bed spread and well

compacted to falls and crossfalls and cambers
and finished to receive paving slabs (measured
separately) m2 47

G. 50mm washed aggregate precast concrete (Class

25) paving slabs size 600x600 on 50mm sand
bed(measured separately) bedded jointed and
pointed in cement mortar(1:3) and finished fair
on all exposed surfaces m2 47

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR ELEMENT L

CARRIED TO SUMMARY AT THE END OF
BILL NO. 3 Shs.

1165 3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

EXTERNAL WORKS
COLLECTION
3/ 18
ITEM Amount Shs.
No. Cts.

BILL NO.3

3NO. NEW ABLUTION BLOCKS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

SUMMARY

Element Title. Page No.

A. Substructures. 3/3

B. Frame. 3/4

C. External and Internal Walls. 3/5

D. Roof finishes and rainwater disposal 3/7

E. Doors 3/9

F. External Wall Finishes. 3/10

G. Internal Wall Finishes. 3/11

H. Floor Finishes. 3/12

I. Ceiling Finishes. 3/13

J. Joinery Fittings 3/16

K Builder's Works in Connection with Specialist

Services. 3/17

L Paved areas 3/18

TOTAL FOR 1NO. ABLUTION BLOCK

MULTIPLY BY 3 FOR 3NO. ABLUTION BLOCK X3

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 3 CARRIED TO FINAL

SUMMARY. SHS.

1165 BILL NO. 3 3/19

SUMMARY
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

BILL NO. 4

ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

SECTION A

6 NO. 40 FEET CONTAINERS

Note: Quantities are measured for one 40ft container

only.

A. Allow for planking and strutting to sides of

excavations. Item

B. Allow for keeping excavations free from all spring and

running water. Item
C. Excavate over site to remove vegetable soil average
150mm deep and cart away. m2 52

D. Excavate foundation trench commencing at reduced

level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 14
E. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock. m3 14

F. Return fill and ram selected excavated material around

foundations. m3 7

G. Remove surplus excavated material from site m3 7

Plain Concrete (Class 15)

H. 50mm Blinding under foundations. m2 24

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

I. Foundations m3 8

Ribbed bar steel reinforcement as before

J. Assorted bar reinforcement bars in foundations. Kg. 400

K. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement to B.S. 4483 Ref:

A 193 and K.S. 02 - 18: 1976 in concrete bed
(measeured net, no allowance made for minimum
225mm laps) including tying and supporting as
required. m2 12

Sawn formwork
L. Sides of foundations. m2 26

Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

COLLECTION
4/ 1
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

SECTION A

6 NO. 40 FEET CONTAINERS

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 4/1

TOTAL FOR 1NO. 40 FEET CONTAINER Shs.

MULTIPLY BY 6 FOR 6NO. 40 FEET

CONTAINERS Shs. X6

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SECTION A CARRIED TO

SUMMARY AT THE END OF BILL NO. 4
Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION A
COLLECTION

4/ 2
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

SECTION B

13No. 20 FEET CONTAINERS

Note: Quantities are measured for one 20 feet container

only.

A. Allow for planking and strutting to sides of

excavations. Item

B. Allow for keeping excavations free from all spring and

running water. Item

C. Excavate over site to remove vegetable soil average

150mm deep and cart away. m2 20

D. Excavate foundation trench commencing at reduced

level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 3

E. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock. m3 3

F. Return fill and ram selected excavated material around

foundations. m3 1

G. Remove surplus excavated material from site m3 2

Plain Concrete (Class 15)

H. 50mm Blinding under foundations. m2 11

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

I. Foundations m3 4

Ribbed bar steel reinforcement as before

J. Assorted bar reinforcement bars in foundations. Kg. 200

Sawn formwork

K. Sides of foundations. m2 13

Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION B
COLLECTION

4/ 3
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

SECTION B

13No. 20 FEET CONTAINERS

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 4/3

TOTAL FOR 1NO. 20 FEET CONTAINER Shs.

MULTIPLY BY 13 FOR 13 NO. 20 FEET

CONTAINERS Shs. X 13

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SECTION B CARRIED TO

SUMMARY AT THE END OF BILL NO. 4
Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION B
COLLECTION

4/ 4
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

SECTION C

6NO. SERVICE AREAS

Note: Quantities are measured for one service area

only.

A. Allow for planking and strutting to sides of

excavations. Item

B. Allow for keeping excavations free from all spring and

running water. Item

C. Excavate over site to remove vegetable soil average

150mm deep and cart away. m2 10

D. Excavate foundation trench commencing at reduced

level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 3

E. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock. m3 3

F. Return fill and ram selected excavated material around

foundations. m3 1

G. Remove surplus excavated material from site m3 2

Plain Concrete (Class 15)

H. 50mm Blinding under foundations. m2 3

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

I. Foundations m3 1

Ribbed bar steel reinforcement as before

J. Assorted bar reinforcement bars in foundations. Kg. 50

Sawn formwork

K. Sides of foundations. m2 3

L. 150mm Approved load bearing (7N/mm2) coral block

walling in cement mortar (1:3). m2 12

Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION C

4/ 5
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

A. 15mm Cement and sand (1:4) external rendering to

plinth finished smooth with a wood float. m2 3

B. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two finishing

coats of bituminous paint or other equal an approved
water resistant paint on rendered plinth. m2 3

Precast concrete (class 25) bedded, jointed and pointed

in gauged mortar.

C. 350 x 70mm Coping twice throated and once weathered

and reinforced as necessary for handling and finished
fair on all exposed surfaces. m 8

D. Approved Swahili patterned concrete breeze blocks to

approval. m 4

Pluvex No. 1 or other equal and approved horizontal

bitumen damp proof course to B.S. 743 (measured net -
no allowance made for laps)

E. 150mm Wide under coping. m 5

Wall Finishes

F. 100mm Thick smooth dressed zero jointed cut-coral

cladding on rendered wall bedded and jointed on and
including 15mm cement and sand (1:3) backing
including all necessary ties and finished with brush
applied protective silicone sealant. m2 9

G. 12mm Two coat internal lime plaster (cement, lime

and riversand 1:2:9) on walls finished smooth with a
steel trowel. m2 9

The whole of the following work is to be executed by

an approved Sub-Contractor.

H. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two finishing

coats of 'Jotun Paints' or other equal and approved
Marine quality paint on plastered walls internally. m2 9

Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION C

4/ 6
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

Paved Areas

A. Excavate oversite to reduce levels commencing at

existing ground level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 4

B. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock. m3 1

C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 4

D. 150mm Bed of selected hardcore, spread, levelled, well

rammed and consolidated in 150mm layers m2 12

E. Telvar 'W' or other equal and approved weed killer

under paving. m2 12

F. 50mm (Average) sand bed spread and well compacted

to falls and crossfalls and cambers and finished to
receive paving slabs (measured separately)
m2 12

G. 50mm washed aggregate precast concrete (Class 25)

paving slabs size 600x600 on 50mm sand
bed(measured separately) bedded jointed and pointed
in cement mortar(1:3) and finished fair on all exposed
surfaces m2 12

Joinery Fittings

The following in 2 No.Concrete Troughs

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

H. 75mm suspended slab. m2 2

I. 75 x 50mm upstand m 4

J. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement Ref:A 142 in

suspended concrete trough otherwise as before. m2 2

Sawn formwork

K. Soffit of suspended concrete slab. m2 2

Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION C

4/ 7
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

A. Edge of suspended concrete slab not exceeding 75mm

high m 5

B. Do. Edges of upstand. m 1

C. 75mm Chase in stone wall for building in end of 75mm

concrete slab. m 6

Polished Terrazzo

D. 20mm paving on concrete worktop m2 2

E. 75mm high finish to edges of worktop m 5

Builder's Work in connection with specialist services

Internal plumbing, fire-fighting and drainage

installations.

F. Hole through 200mm thick masonry wall for small pipe

and make good. No. 10

G. Cut horizontal or vertical chase in masonry walling for

small pipe and make good. m 2

Electrical Installation

Cut away for and make good after electrician installing

concealed conduit system to the following points
including cutting or leaving holes, notches, mortices,
sinking in both the structure and its coverlug and make
good to them.

H. Lighting points No. 10

I. Lighting switch points. No. 10

J. Consumer unit point. No. 1

Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION C

4/ 8
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

SECTION C

6NO. SERVICE AREAS

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 4/5

" " " " " " 4/6

" " " " " " 4/7

" " " " " " 4/8

TOTAL FOR 1NO. SERVICE AREA Shs.

MULTIPLY BY 6 FOR 6 NO. SERVICE AREAS Shs. X6

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SECTION C CARRIED TO

SUMMARY AT THE END OF BILL NO. 4
Shs.

1165 ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

SECTION C
COLLECTION
4/ 9
ITEM AMOUNT
No. Shs. Cts.

BILL NO.4

ENABLING WORKS FOR KIOSKS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

SUMMARY

Section Title. Page No.

A. 6No. 40 Feet Containers 4/2

B. 13No. 20 Feet Containers 4/4

C. 6No. Service Areas 4/9

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 4 CARRIED TO FINAL

SUMMARY. SHS.

4/10
1165 BILL NO. 4
SUMMARY
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

BILL NO. 5

REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

Substructures

A. Allow for planking and strutting to sides of

excavations. Item

B. Allow for keeping excavations free from all spring

and running water. Item

C. Excavate over site to remove vegetable soil

average 150mm deep and cart away. m2 25

D. Excavate foundation trench commencing at

reduced level and not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 30

E. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock.

m3 30

F. Return fill and ram selected excavated material

around foundations. m3 10

G. Remove surplus excavated material from site m3 20

Selected Hardcore

H. Filling in making up levels under floor, spread,

levelled, well rammed and consolidated in 150mm
layers. m3 13

I. 300mm Bed of selected sub-grade material

compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm thick. m2 21

J. Approved insecticide treatment. m2 21

K. 1000 Gauge 'Diothene' or other equal and

approved polythene sheeting as damp proof
membrane laid on blinded hardcore (measured
separately) with welted laps (measured net-no
allowance made for laps).
m2 25

Shs.

1165 REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

5/ 1
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

Plain Concrete (Class 15)

A. 50mm Blinding under foundations. m2 12

Vibrated reinforced concrete (Class 25)

B. Foundations m3 3

C. 200mm Bed laid on damp proof membrane

(measured separately) in bays not exceeding 50
square metre including formwork to edge of bays.
m2 25

Ribbed bar steel reinforcement as before

D. Assorted bar reinforcement bars in foundations. Kg. 150

E. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement to B.S. 4483

Ref: A 193 and K.S. 02 - 18: 1976 in concrete bed
(measeured net, no allowance made for minimum
225mm laps) including tying and supporting as
required. m2 25

Sawn formwork

F. Sides of foundations. m2 10

G. Edge of bed 75- 150mm high. m2 20

H. 200mm Approved load bearing (7N/mm2) coral

block walling in cement mortar (1:3). m2 25

I. 15mm Cement and sand (1:4) external rendering to

plinth finished smooth with a wood float. m2 8

J. Prepare and apply one undercoat and two finishing

coats of bituminous paint or other equal an
approved water resistant paint on rendered plinth.
m2 8

Shs.

1165 REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

5/ 2
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

External Walls

Precast concrete (class 25) bedded, jointed and

pointed in gauged mortar.

A. 350 x 70mm Coping twice throated and once

weathered and reinforced as necessary for
handling and finished fair on all exposed surfaces. m 20

Approved Coral stone walling

B. 200mm Walling with hoop iron reinforcement

where required by the Engineer. m2 42

Pluvex No. 1 or other equal and approved

horizontal bitumen damp proof course to B.S. 743
(measured net - no allowance made for laps)

C. 200mm Wide under coping. m 20

D. 200mm Wide under coping. m 20

Hot-dipped galvanized mild steel gate

E. 3500 x 2100mm Double leaf gate comprising of 25

x 25 x 3mm square hollow section top, bottom and
stiles and hinged on and including 50 x 50 x 4mm
thick angle line frame complete with all necessary
hinges, catches, bolts etc including oiling, easing
and adjusting. No. 1

The whole of the following work is to be executed

by an approved Sub-Contractor.

F. Prepare, touch up primer and paint undercoat and

two finishing coats of 'Crown Paints Solo' or other
equal and approved oil paint on general surfaces or
mild steel doors (both side measured flat overall)
m2 15

Shs.

1165 REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

5/ 3
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

External Wall Finishes

A. Extra over hand chisel dressed stone walling for

smooth face and pointing with flush neat
horizontal joints formed with a steel rod as the
work proceeds.
m2 42

Internal Wall Finishes

B. 12mm Two coat internal lime plaster (cement,

lime and riversand 1:2:9) on walls finished smooth
to receive tiles (mesured separately) m2 29

C. 12mm Approved industrial quality porcelain wall

tiles fixed to plastered walls with and including
approved adhesive and jointed and flush pointed
with grout to match tile. m2 29

Floor Finishes

D. 42mm Cement and Sand (1:3) bed and backing

finished to receive industrial quality tiles
(measured separately). m2 22

E. 200mm Approved non-slip industrial quality

porcelain wall tiles fixed to plastered floor with
and including approved adhesive and jointed and
flush pointed with grout to match tile. m2 22

Paved Areas

F. Excavate oversite to reduce levels commencing at

existing ground level and not exceeding 1.50m
deep. m3 7

G. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock.

m3 1

H. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 7

Shs.

1165 REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

5/ 4
ITEM AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE
No. Shs./Cts.

A. 150mm Bed of selected hardcore, spread, levelled,

well rammed and consolidated in 150mm layers
m2 24

B. Telvar 'W' or other equal and approved weed killer

under paving. m2 24

C. 50mm (Average) sand bed spread and well

compacted to falls and crossfalls and cambers and
finished to receive paving slabs (measured
separately) m2 24

D. 50mm washed aggregate precast concrete (Class

25) paving slabs size 600x600 on 50mm sand
bed(measured separately) bedded jointed and
pointed in cement mortar(1:3) and finished fair on
all exposed surfaces m2 24

Shs.

BILL NO. 5

REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 5/1

" " " " " " 5/2

" " " " " " 5/3

" " " " " " 5/4

" " " " " " 5/5

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR BILL NO. 5 CARRIED

TO FINAL SUMMARY
Shs.

1165 REFUSE COLLECTION AREA

COLLECTION
5/ 5
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 6
(ALL PROVISIONAL)
HARD LANDSCAPE AREAS
SECTION A
MATATU INTERCHANGE PARKING AND
DRIVEWAY
A. Excavate oversite to reduce level commencing at
existing ground level not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 2,100

B. Extra over excavation for excavating in Coral m3 240

rock
C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 2,100

D. Approved murram in making up levels, spread,

levelled, watered and well rammed and
consolidated in 150mm layers. m3 1,200

E. Grade bottoms of excavations or surfaces of

filling to falls and crossfalls including rolling and
compacting to 95% MDD compaction. m2 6,000

F. Tevlar 'W' or other equal and approved weed

killer under driveways and parking. m2 6,000

G. 300mm Bed of selected sub-grade material

compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm thick
to 95% MDD. m2 6,000

H. 200mm Bed of approved gravel sub-base

(minimum 30% CBR) or graded crushed stones. m2 6,000

I. 50mm Bed of approved sand/stone dust blinding

finished to receive paving (measured separately). m2 6,000

J. 60mm Thick medium duty 'Bamburi Blox' or

other equal and approved precast concrete paving
in approved pattern laid on sand bed (measured
separately) to falls, crossfalls, and cambers
including necessary compaction. m2 3,200

K. Take delivery from store cabro and fix only

including necessary compaction. m2 2,800

Shs.

1165 MATATU INTERCHANGE PARKING AND

DRIVEWAY
6/ 1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 125 x 250mm Precast concrete (Class 20) kerb

with one chamfered edge finished fair on all
exposed surfaces bedded, jointed and pointed in
cement mortar (1:3) on and including 325 x
100mm plain concrete (1:3:6) foundation
haunched up on one side including all necessary
excavation, formwork and soil disposal. m 800

B. 125 x 100mm Precast concrete (class 20) channel

finished fair on all exposed surfaces bedded,
jointed and pointed in cement mortar (1:3) laid on
and including 375 x 100mm Plain concrete (1:3:6)
foundation haunched up on both sides including
all necessary excavation, formwork and soil
disposal. m 800

C. Prepare and apply three coats of 'Crown Paints

Solo' or other equal and approved yellow road
marking enamel paint 100mm wide on surfaces of
parking to be executed by an approved Sub-
Contractor. m 400

Shs.

SECTION A

MATATU INTERCHANGE PARKING AND

DRIVEWAY

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 6/1

" " " " " 6/2

TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECTION A CARRIED

TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 6 Shs.

1165 MATATU INTERCHANGE PARKING AND

DRIVEWAY
COLLECTION
6/ 2
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

SECTION B

PROMENADE

A. Excavate oversite to reduce level commencing at

existing ground level not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 1,080
B. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral rock
m3 108
C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 1,080
D. Grade bottoms of excavations or surfaces of
filling to falls and crossfalls including rolling and
compacting to 95% MDD compaction. m2 1,800
E. Tevlar 'W' or other equal and approved weed
killer under driveways and parking. m2 1,800
F. Approved murram in making up levels, spread,
levelled, watered and well rammed and
consolidated in 150mm layers. m3 540
G. 200mm Bed of selected sub-grade material
compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm thick
to 95% MDD. m2 1,800
H. 50mm Bed of approved sand/stone dust blinding
finished to receive paving (measured separately). m2 1,800
J. 60mm Thick medium duty normal grey 'Bamburi
Blox' or other equal and approved precast
concrete quad paving in approved pattern laid on
sand bed (measured separately) to falls,
crossfalls, and cambers including necessary
compaction. m2 1,260
K. Do. but with approved colour topping. m2 540

J. 125 x 100mm Precast concrete (class 20) channel

finished fair on all exposed surfaces bedded,
jointed and pointed in cement mortar (1:3) laid on
and including 375 x 100mm Plain concrete (1:3:6)
foundation haunched up on both sides including
all necessary excavation, formwork and soil
disposal. m 720
TOTAL AMOUNT OF PROMENADE
CARRIED TO BILL NO. 6 SUMMARY Shs.

1165 PROMINADE
COLLECTION
6/ 3
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

SECTION C
BEACH FRONT SQUARE
(ALL PROVISIONAL)

A. Excavate oversite to reduce level commencing at

existing ground level not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 600
B. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral
rock m3 60

C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 600

D. Approved murram in making up levels, spread,

levelled, watered and well rammed and
consolidated in 150mm layers. m3 180
E. Grade bottoms of excavations or surfaces of
filling to falls and crossfalls including rolling and
compacting to 95% MDD compaction. m2 2,000

F. Tevlar 'W' or other equal and approved weed

killer under driveways and parking. m2 2,000

G. 300mm Bed of selected sub-grade material

compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm thick
to 95% MDD. m2 2,000

H. 150mm Bed of approved gravel sub-base

(minimum 30% CBR) or graded crushed stones. m2 2,000

I. 50mm Bed of approved sand/stone dust blinding

finished to receive paving (measured separately). m2 2,000

J. 60mm Thick medium duty 'Bamburi Blox' or

other equal and approved natural grey quad paver
blocks in appoved pattern laid on sand bed
(measured separately) to falls, crossfalls, and
cambers including necessary compaction. m2 1,400

K. Do. but in approved red colour topping m2 600

L. 125 x 250mm Precast concrete (Class 20) kerb
with one chamfered edge finished fair on all
exposed surfaces bedded, jointed and pointed in
cement mortar (1:3) on and including 325 x
100mm plain concrete (1:3:6) foundation
haunched up on one side including all necessary
excavation, formwork and soil disposal. m 300
Shs.
1165 BEACHFRONT SQUARE
COLLECTION

6/ 4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. 125 x 100mm Precast concrete (class 20) channel

finished fair on all exposed surfaces bedded,
jointed and pointed in cement mortar (1:3) laid on
and including 375 x 100mm Plain concrete (1:3:6)
foundation haunched up on both sides including
all necessary excavation, formwork and soil
disposal. m 300

SECTION C

BEACHFRONT SQUARE

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 6/4

" " " " " 6/5

TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECTION C CARRIED

TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 6 Shs.

1165 BEACHFRONT SQUARE

COLLECTION
6/ 5
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

SECTION D
NEW ACCESS ROAD
(ALL PROVISIONAL)
A. Excavate oversite to reduce levels commencing at
existing ground level not exceeding 1.50m deep. m3 540

B. Extra over excavation for excavating in coral m3 54

rock.
C. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 540

D. Grade bottoms of excavations or surfaces of

filling to falls and crossfalls including rolling and
compacting to 95% MDD compaction. m2 1,800

E. Tevlar 'W' or other equal and approved weed

killer under driveways and parking. m2 1,800
F. 150mm Bed of selected sub-grade material
compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm thick
to 95% MDD. m2 1,800
G. 125mm Bed of gravel finish compacted to
standard specifications for roads and to approval
of the Civil Engineer (First layer). m2 1,800
H. Do. (Second layer) m2 1,800

TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECTION D CARRIED

TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 6 Shs.

1165 NEW ACCESS ROAD

COLLECTION

6/ 6
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 6

HARD LANDSCAPE AREAS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

SUMMARY

Section Title. Page No.

A. Matatu Interchange Parking and Driveway 6/2

B Prominade 6/3

C Beachfront Square 6/5

D New Access Road 6/6

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 6 CARRIED TO FINAL

SUMMARY. SHS.

1165 BILL NO. 6

6/8
SUMMARY
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

BILL NO. 7

STORMWATER DRAINAGE
(ALL PROVISIONAL)

A. Excavate trench in fill for 450mm diameter

pipe not exceeding 1.50m deep and average
750mm deep, part return fill in and ram and
remainder remove from site. m 90

B. Excavate trench in fill for 300mm diameter

pipe not exceeding 1.50m deep and average
500mm deep, part return fill in and ram and
remainder remove from site. m 89

C. Excavate trench in fill for 200mm diameter

upvc pipe not exceeding 1.50m deep and
average 500mm deep, part return fill in and ram
and remainder remove from site. m 201

D. Excavate for 'V' section open invert block drain

not exceeding 1.50m deep, average 800mm
deep and 1100mm wide and cart away and trim
sides to slope. m 200

E. 450mm Diameter precast concrete ogee jointed

drain pipe to B.S. 556 laid and jointed in trench
and bedded on and including 750mm wide x
200mm thick plain concrete (1:3:6) bed and
surround all round with 150mm thick plain
concrete (1:3:6) including all necessary
formwork (culvert) m 60

F. Do. but laid on with and including approved

granular fill soround. m 30

Shs.

1165 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

7/1
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

A. 300mm Diameter precast concrete ogee jointed

drain pipe to B.S. 556 laid and jointed in trench
and bedded on and including 600mm wide x
200mm thick plain concrete (1:3:6) bed and
surround all round with 150mm thick plain
concrete (1:3:6) including all necessary
formwork (culvert) m 29

B. Do. but laid on and with and including

approved granular fill soround. m 60

C. Precast concrete (class 25) rainwater channel

comprising 600mm long rectangular invert
blocks each 600 x 300mm high with two top
edges each twice splayed and 400mm wide x
200mm deep sinking on top, finished fair and
reinforced as necessary for handling, bedded,
jointed and pointed on and including 50mm bed
of plain concrete (1:4:8) and with 100mm thick
murram backfilling to bottom and both sides.
m 200

D. 75mm Precast concrete (class 25) side slabs

size 600 x 225mm finished fair, bedded on and
including 75mm murram well compacted to
sides and slopes of rainwater channel and
pointed in cement mortar (1:3). m2 270

E. 200mm Diameter Upvc drain pipe laid and

jointed in trench. m 201

F. 150mm Plain concrete (1:3:6) bed 300mm wide

under 200mm pipe and soround pipe with
simillar concrete 150mm thick including all
necessary formwork. m 50

Shs.

1165 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

7/2
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

A. Inspection chamber size 900 x 900 x 1000mm

deep internally with 150mm thick natural stone
walls, 150mm reinforced concrete (class 20)
base and cover slab complete with and
including 600 x 600mm medium duty cast iron
manhole cover and frame, plain concrete
(1:3:6) benching and channels, 15mm
waterproof cement and sand (1:5) rendering to
walls and base including all necessary
reinforcement, formwork, cutting existing slab,
excavation, backfill and soil disposal. No. 6

B. Road gully size 450 x 450 x 600mm deep

internally 50mm plain concrete (1:3:6) blinding
with 150mm thick masonry walls, 150mm
reinforced concrete (class 20) base and toping
complete with and including 40 x 3mm flat
galvanized mild steel grating cover at 40mm
centres welded to 50 x 50 x 3mm mild steel
angle frame, 15mm waterproof cement and
sand (1:5) rendering to walls and base
including all necessary reinforcement,
formwork, excavation, backfill and soil
disposal. No. 32

The following in 6No. Headwalls

C. Excavate in fill for headwall not exceeding

1.50m deep. m3 105

D. Return fill in and ram selected excavated

material around headwall. m3 42

E. Remove surplus excavated material from site. m3 63

Vibrated reinforced concrete (class 25)

F. 150mm Base slab. m2 47

G. 150mm Head wall. m2 40

Shs.

1165 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

7/3
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

A. Steel wire fabric mesh reinforcement to B.S.

4483 Ref. A193 otherwise as before in base
slab and headwall. m2 87

Sawn formwork

B. Edge of base 75 - 150mm high. m2 70

C. Sides of headwall. m2 80

D. Upper surfaces of wall sloping more than 15

degrees from the horizontal. m2 5

E. Hole through 150mm reinforced concrete wall

for 450mm diameter pipe and make good. No. 6

French Drains

F. Excavate trench French drains commencing at

existing ground level not exceeding 1.50m m3 184
deep.
G. Extra over for excavation in coral rock. m3 20

H. Remove surplus excavated materials from site m2 184

Selected fill material

I. 150mm Bed of top vegetation soil to approval.

m2 260

J. 20-60 Crushed agregates laid to approval. m3 115

K. 500 Guage approved polythene sheeting laid on

coral base as a damp proof membrane
(measured net-no allowance) m2 320

Shs.

1165 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

7/4
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

Pipe and geotextile membrane

A. 150mm Diameter perforated Upvc pipe, laid at

a minimum slope of 1:200 and 3/4 perforated
using, 16mm diameter hole staggered about
with and including approved geotextile
membrane surround all to the entire satisfaction
of the Civil Engineer. m 440

B. Allow for testing the whole of the stormwater

drainage during the progress of the works and
again on completion and leave in perfect
working order to the satisfaction of the
Architect. Item 1

Shs.

BILL NO 7
STORMWATER DRAINAGE

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 7/1

" " " " " 7/2

" " " " " 7/3

" " " " " 7/4

" " " " " 7/5

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 7 CARRIED

TO FINAL SUMMARY Shs.

1165 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

COLLECTION
7/5
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

BILL NO. 8

FOUL DRAINAGE
(ALL PROVISIONAL)

A. Excavate trench for drain pipe exceeding

150mm diameter not exceeding 1.50m deep and
average 600mm deep part return fill in and ram
and remainder remove from site. m 150
B. Do. but average 1000mm deep. m 150
C. Do. but average 1500mm deep. m 100
D. Do. but average 2000mm deep. m 100
E. 160mm Diameter UPVC golden brown class 41
drain pipe laid and jointed in trench. m 350
F. 200mm Do. m 150
G. 150mm Plain concrete (1:3:6) bed 600mm wide
under 160mm diameter pipe and surround pipe
with simillar concrete 150mm thick including
all necessary formwork. m 150
H. Do. but 700mm wide under 200mm diameter
pipe. m 75
I. Oil interceptor overall size 5600 x 1600 x
2050mm deep in three interconnected
compartments constructed of 200mm thick
reinforced concrete (class 25) base and cover
slab, 150mm reinforced concrete walls, 3No.
openings for and including 600 x 450mm heavy
duty covers and frames to BS 497, 100mm
diameter PVC interconnecting Pipes grouted in
concrete, 50mm diameter PVC vent pipe with
anti-bat gauze discharging approximately 10m
away as directed, 500 x 300 x 400mm
galvanized perforated bucket with handle on
and including an approved sand bed complete
with and including all necessary excavations,
cart away, backfill, formwork, reinforcement,
waterproofing and finishes to the architect's
approval. No. 2

Shs.

1165 FOUL DRAINAGE

8/1
ITEM
No. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.

A. Soak pit overall size 1600mm diameter x

3500mm deep internally approved and selected
hardcore filling with 150mm thick natural stone
walls on 150mm reinforced concrete (class 20)
cover slab and base blinded with 50mm plain
concrete (1:3:6), 1No oppening for and
including 600 x 450mm heavy duty covers and
frames to BS 497, 15mm waterproof cement
and sand (1:5) rendering to walls including all
necessary reinforcement, formwork,
excavation, backfill and soil disposal. No. 4

B. Allow for testing the whole of the foul drainage

during the progress of the works and again on
completion and leave in perfect working order
to the satisfaction of the Architect. Item 1

Shs.

BILL NO. 8

FOUL DRAINAGE

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 8/1

" " " " " 8/2

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 8 CARRIED

TO FINAL SUMMARY Shs.

1165 FOUL DRAINAGE

COLLECTION

8/2
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E1 ABLUTION BLOCK INSTALLATIONS

E1.1 LIGHTING SYSTEM

E1.1.01 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3No. X 1.5Sq. mm colour-
coded Single Core Copper Cables to lighting points drawn in
20mm Ǿ concealed High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduits,
complete with draw boxes, switch boxes and all other necessary
accessories as detailed in Lighting Layout Contract Drawing.
No. 66

E1.1.02 Supply, install, Test and Commission Lighting Control Switch

Plates, complete with all other necessary accessories as
detailed in Lighting Layout Contract Drawings for all the
Floor Levels.
i One Gang One Way Switch Plates No. 15
ii Motion Sensors No. 3

E1.1.03 Supply, install, Test and Commission the following Lighting

Fittings, complete with lamps and all other necessary
accessories as detailed in Lighting Layout Contract Drawings
for all the Floor Levels.
i 3.5 Watts LED Ceiling Recessed Light Fitting No. 15
ii Lighting Point Type LP No. 51

TOTAL FOR E3.1 - LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS CARRIED

E1.1
FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/4

E1.2 SMALL POWER POINTS

E1.2.01 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3No. X 2.5Sq. mm colour-
coded Single Core Copper Cables Radial Circuits drawn in
20mmǾ concealed High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduits,
complete with switch boxes and all other necessary accessories -
but excluding the power point face plates as detailed in Small
Power Layout Contract Drawing. No. 6

E1.2.02 Supply, install, Test and Commission the following Power

Point Accessories as detailed in Small Power Layout Contract
Drawings for all Floor Levels.
i 20 Amps Double Pole Switch with neon indicator. No. 6

TOTAL FOR E3.2 - SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS

E1.2
CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/4

9/1
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E1 ABLUTION BLOCK INSTALLATIONS - Continued

E1.3 CABLE WAYS & ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Please Refer To Lighting and Small Power Drawings -

E1.3.01 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3Core X 2.5Sq. mm PVC

SWA PVC Copper Cable drawn in Ducts, complete with switch
boxes and all other necessary accessories and 20 Amps Double
Pole Switch face plates, for Drainage Pump as detailed in Small
Power Layout Contract Drawing. LM 0

E1.3.02 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3Core X 2.5Sq. mm PVC

SWA PVC Copper Cable drawn in Ducts, complete with switch
boxes and all other necessary accessories and 20 Amps Double
Pole Switch face plates, for Circulation Pump as detailed in Small
Power Layout Contract Drawing. LM 0

E3.3.03 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3Core X 2.5Sq. mm PVC

SWA PVC Copper Cable drawn in Ducts, complete with switch
boxes and all other necessary accessories and 20 Amps Double
Pole Switch face plates, for Solar Water Heating System as
detailed in Small Power Layout Contract Drawing.
LM 0

E1.3.04 Supply, install, Test and Commission 4Core X 2.5Sq. mm PVC

SWA PVC Copper Cable drawn in Ducts, complete with switch
boxes and all other necessary accessories and 20 Amps Isolator,
for Booster Pump as detailed in Small Power Layout Contract
Drawing. LM 0

E1.3.05 Supply & Install 20 Amp Isolators for Mechanical Equipment

NOS. 0

TOTAL FOR E3.3- CABLE WAYS & ELECTRICAL

E1.3 CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CARRIED
FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/4

9/2
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E1 ABLUTION BLOCK INSTALLATIONS - Continued

E1.4 POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM

METER BOARD
E1.4.01 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision Meter
Board complete with all accessories to Kenya Power Standards -
Enclosure for KP&LC Meter No 3

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
E1.4.02 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision 100
Amp 4 way TP/N MCB Distribution board complete with
integral isolator and MCBs. No 3

SUB MAIN CABLE

E1.4.03 Supply, draw in 32mmǾ High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduit,
complete with all conduit accessories, connect-up complete, Test
and Commision, 4Core X 25Sq. mm PVC SWA PVC Copper
Cable from Authority Power Supply to the Main Distribution
Board. LM 30

EARTHING SYSTEM
E1.4.04 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision,
Distribution Boards Earthing Systems for the installations, to
Kenya Power Standards. No. 3

E1.4.05 Supply, draw in 20mmǾ High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduit,
complete with all conduit accessories, connect-up complete, Test
and Commision, 1No. X 16Sq. mm copper earth cable from
Earthing Points to respective connections. LM 30

TOTAL FOR E3.4 - POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM

E1.4
CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/4

9/3
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E1 ABLUTION BLOCK INSTALLATIONS - Continued B/F

PAGE NO.
COLLECTION PAGE KSHS.

E1.1 TOTAL FOR E3.1 - LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS 9/1

E1.2 TOTAL FOR E3.2 - SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS 9/1

E1.3 TOTAL FOR E3.3- CABLE WAYS & ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 9/2

E1.4 TOTAL FOR E3.4 - POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM 9/3

E1 TOTAL E3 ABLUTION BLOCK INSTALLATIONS CARRIED TO SUMMARY (PAGE 9/11)

9/4
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E12 GATEWAYS (1 No.) INSTALLATIONS

E2.1 LIGHTING SYSTEM

E2.1.01 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3No. X 1.5Sq. mm colour-
coded Single Core Copper Cables to lighting points drawn in
20mm Ǿ concealed High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduits,
complete with draw boxes, switch boxes and all other necessary
accessories as detailed in Lighting Layout Contract Drawing.
No. 9

E2.1.02 Supply, install, Test and Commission Lighting Control Switch

Plates, complete with all other necessary accessories as
detailed in Lighting Layout Contract Drawings for all the
Floor Levels.
i One Gang One Way Switch Plates No. 3
ii Motion Sensors No. 2

E2.1.03 Supply, install, Test and Commission the following Lighting

Fittings, complete with lamps and all other necessary
accessories as detailed in Lighting Layout Contract Drawings
for all the Floor Levels.
i Lighting Point Type LP No. 18

TOTAL FOR E4.1 - LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS CARRIED

E2.1
FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/7

E2.2 SMALL POWER POINTS

E2.2.01 Supply, install, Test and Commission 3No. X 2.5Sq. mm colour-
coded Single Core Copper Cables Radial Circuits drawn in
20mmǾ concealed High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduits,
complete with switch boxes and all other necessary accessories -
but excluding the power point face plates as detailed in Small
Power Layout Contract Drawing. No. 3

E2.2.02 Supply, install, Test and Commission the following Power

Point Accessories as detailed in Small Power Layout Contract
Drawings for all Floor Levels.
i 13 Amps Twin Switched Socket Outlets. No. 3
-

TOTAL FOR E4.2 - SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS

E2.2
CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/7

9/5
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E2 GATEWAYS (1 No.) INSTALLATIONS - Continued

E2.3 POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM

METER BOARD
E2.3.01 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision Meter
Board complete with all accessories to Kenya Power Standards -
Enclosure for KP&LC Meter No 1

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
E2.3.02 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision 100
Amp 4 way TP/N MCB Distribution board complete with
integral isolator and MCBs. No 1

SUB MAIN CABLE

E2.3.04 Supply, draw in 32mmǾ High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduit,
complete with all conduit accessories, connect-up complete, Test
and Commision, 4Core X 10Sq. mm PVC SWA PVC Copper
Cable from Authority Power Supply to the Main Distribution
Board. LM 20

EARTHING SYSTEM
E2.3.05 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision,
Distribution Boards Earthing Systems for the installations, to
Kenya Power Standards. No. 1

E2.3.06 Supply, draw in 20mmǾ High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduit,
complete with all conduit accessories, connect-up complete, Test
and Commision, 1No. X 16Sq. mm copper earth cable from
Earthing Points to respective connections. LM 40

TOTAL FOR E4.4 - POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM

E2.4
CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 9/7

9/6
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E2 GATEWAYS (1 No.) INSTALLATIONS - Continued B/F

PAGE NO.
COLLECTION PAGE KSHS.

E2.1 TOTAL FOR E4.1 - LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS 9/5

E2.2 TOTAL FOR E4.2 - SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS 9/5

E2.3 TOTAL FOR E4.4 - POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM 9/6

E2 TOTAL E4 GATEWAYS (1 No.) CARRIED TO SUMMARY (PAGE 9/11)

9/7
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E3 TYPICAL CONTAINER KIOSKS (100No.) INSTALLATIONS

E3.1 POWER RETICULATION SYSTEM

E3.1.01 Supply, draw in 32mmǾ High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduit,
complete with all conduit accessories, connect-up complete, Test
and Commision, 4Core X 10Sq. mm PVC SWA PVC Copper
Cable from Authority Power Supply complete with Power Tap
Off Unit installed within each of the containers.
LM 135

EARTHING SYSTEM
E3.1.02 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision,
Distribution Boards Earthing Systems for the installations, to
Kenya Power Standards. No. 100

E3.1.03 Supply, draw in 20mmǾ High Impact Heavy Gauge PVC conduit,
complete with all conduit accessories, connect-up complete, Test
and Commision, 1No. X 16Sq. mm copper earth cable from
Earthing Points to respective connections. LM 135

E3 TOTAL E3 TYPICAL CONTAINER KIOSKS (100No.) CARRIED TO SUMMARY (PAGE 9/11)

9/8
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E4 STREET LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

E4.1.01 Supply, draw in ducts (measured separately), Connect-up

complete, Test and Commision, 2Core X 2.5Sq. mm PVC SWA
PVC Copper Cable from the Control Panels to the Street Lighting
Points as detailed in our contruct drawing. LM 1000

E4.1.02 Supply, install with concrete base, connect-up complete, Test

and Commision 8 Meter Marine Grade Hot -Dipped Galvanised
Street Lighting Poles complete with armstrech bracket to match
county government requirements and to approval
No 21

E4.1.03 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision 2.5Sq.

Mm Twin with Earth Sheathed Copper Cables connecting
Lighting fittings with the underground cable via slidlocks within
the Poles. LM 60

E4.1.04 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision 40W

LED Street Light Fittings complete with fixing accessories and to
approval No 21

E4.1.05 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision, Street

Light Earthing Systems for the installations. No. 2

E4.1.06 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision, Street

Light Control Systems (WEATHERPROOF FEEDER PILLARS)
for the installations as detailed in our contract drawing.
No. 5

E4.1.07 Supply, install, connect-up complete, Test and Commision,

Feeder Pillars (WEATHERPROOF FEEDER PILLARS) for
Power Supply to Container Kiosks the installations as detailed in
our contract drawing. No. 5

E4 TOTAL E4 STREET LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS CARRIED TO SUMMARY (PAGE 9/11)

9/9
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

E5 SERVICE DUCTS RETICULATION SYSTEM

E5.1.01 Supply, install with concrete surround, 2 X 150mmǾ High Impact

Heavy Gauge PVC Duct, for Underground High Voltage Power
Distribution System. Existing overhead cables to be redirected
into the ducts. LM 1200

E5.1.02 Supply, install with concrete surround, 2 X 100mmǾ High Impact

Heavy Gauge PVC Duct, for Underground LOW Voltage Power
Distribution System. Existing overhead cables to be redirected
into the ducts. LM 1200

E5.1.03 Supply, install with concrete surround, 2 X 100mmǾ High Impact

Heavy Gauge PVC Duct, for Underground EXTRA LOW Voltage
(FIBRE) Distribution System. LM 1200

E5.1.04 Supply, install 600mm X 600mm Standard Manholes complete

with weathertight covers, for HIGH Voltage Distribution System.
No 19

E5.1.05 Supply, install 600mm X 600mm Standard Manholes complete

with weathertight covers, for EXTRA LOW and LOW Voltage
Distribution System. No 38

E5.1.06 Supply, install with concrete surround, 1 X 50mmǾ High Impact

Heavy Gauge PVC Duct, for Underground LOW Voltage Power
and Extra Low Voltage Distribution System. Existing overhead
cables to be redirected into the ducts. LM 200

E5 TOTAL E5 SERVICE DUCTS RETICULATION SYSTEM CARRIED TO SUMMARY (PAGE 9/11)

9/10
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

B/F
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY PAGE KSHS.

E1 ABLUTION BLOCK INSTALLATIONS 9/4

E2 GATEWAYS (1 No.) INSTALLATIONS 9/7

E3 TYPICAL CONTAINER KIOSKS (100No.) INSTALLATIONS 9/8

E4 STREET LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS 9/9

E5 SERVICE DUCTS RETICULATION SYSTEM 9/10

TOTAL CARRIED TO MAIN SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 9 (PAGE 9/12)

9/11
 BILL NO. 9
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL)
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE KSHS AMOUNT KSHS

MAIN SUMMARY
KSHS.

1 SCHEDULE OF PRICES THE FROM SUMMARY PAGE B/F FROM PAGE 9/11 -

2 ALLOW FOR PREPARATION OF WORKING DRAWINGS,

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND USER MANUALS

3 ALLOW FOR TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

4 ALLOW FOR LIAISON WITH LOCAL POWER AUTHORITY FOR MAINS

POWER CONNECTIONS

5 ALLOW FOR LIAISON WITH OTHER SPECIALIST FOR FINAL

CONNECTIONS, TESTING & COMMISSIONING

SUB-TOTAL

ADD
PROVISIONAL SUMS

6 SUM FOR METER CONNECTION BY KENYA POWER COMPANY

7 SUM FOR REROUTING OF EXISTING OVERHEAD POWER

SYSTEM BY KENYA POWER COMPANY

8 SUM FOR SUPPLY OF LIGHTING FITTINGS

9 SUM FOR SUPPLY & INSTALLATION OF CCTV &

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM (Omitted) Nil

10 SUM FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR PUBLIC

FACILICITIES & PLAYGROUND

11 SUM FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR SPORTS & ACTIVITIES AREA

12 SUM FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR EVENTS AREA (Omitted) Nil

13 SUM FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FORCOMMERCIAL FOOD MARKET

14 SUM FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR BEACHFRONT SQUARE

TOTAL CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY

9/12
 BILL NO. 10

MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS (ALLL PROVISIONAL)

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

I SANITARY FITTINGS (SUPPLY AND INSTALL

Supply the following appliances including their support brackets, screws etc.and their
connection to water supply, waste/soil drainage and electrical power supply:-

A SQUAT TYPE WATER CLOSET

Squatting water closet suite comprising of water closet bowl with top plate and integral foot
No 5
threads, S-trap connector. All to be as ''Duravit '' or approved equivalent.

B WATER CLOSET FLUSH VALVE

Concealed water closet flush valve, with 3/4" stop valve. 6-9 lts, and having a Flow Pressure
range of 1.2-5.0 bar . The Flush valve to comprise the following accessories: Stainless Steel
No. 5
Actuator plate, Fixing device with hidden fixing screws for flush pipes,Flush Valve connector to
WC ,and flush pipe. All products to be as specified or equal and approved.

C DELAY ACTION PILLAR TAP

Vandal-resistant delay action basin tap as Geberit self-closing tap type 26, with mixer and with
Manual flush actuation .Flow duration setting of the tap independent of water pressure.Flow
duration, adjustment setting in the range of 3-30 s.To be complete with 2 Reinforced braided No. 9
hose, 3/8",2 check valves R 3/8,Tap aerator key and Fastening material and all necessary
fittings and mounting accessories.

D URINAL TROUGH AND AUTOMATIC FLUSHING SYSTEM

Complete set of a 3m long stainless steel urinal trough/channel with 25mm dia. heavy duty GI
pipe with 50mm interval drip-holes, and with all necessary fittings fixed to the wall as per No 1
Architect's instructions complete with Urinal automatic flushing system with connections

E SHOWER
Shower combination: Single Lever Shower Mixer with basic three way set for concealed
installation, complete with single lever mixer, and an overhead shower . As Hansgrohe Focus E2 No. 4
Concealed shower or equal and approved.

F SOAP DISPENSER
Wall-Mount Automatic IR Sensor Soap Dispenser Touch-free with capacity of about one litre
having a sensor automatic mechanism complete with fixing screws. Allow for initial soap supply. No 0
As Mediclinics ref DJ0011C or approved equivalent

G HAND DRIER
Automatic hand drier in white colour, operating on an infra-red automatic sensing system with
heating element safety cut-out complete with a 30 seconds safety timer,plastic rawl plugs and
fixing screws. The hand drier to have a heating capacity of 1.65 kw and performance flow rate of No 0
135cfm (3.82m3/min).It shall be as Mediclinics ref Optima # A99 or approved equivalent

H ARABIC SHOWER TAP

Arabic shower tap complete with all the mounting bracket, hose pipe, necessary connections and
No. 5
fittings.

I TOILET ROLL HOLDER

Chromed brass, wall mounted toilet roll hansgrohe # 40523-000 or equal and approved . No 0

J ROBE HOOK
Chrome plated robe hook mounted with concealed screws. To be as hansgrohe # #40511-000
No 0
or equal and approved.

TOTAL FOR SANITARY SUPPLY CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/6

10/1
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

II SANITARY FITTINGS (INSTALL ONLY)

Take posession, intall, test and commision the following appliances including their
support brackets, screws etc.and their connection to water supply, waste/soil drainage
and electrical power supply:-

N/B: Handling charges should there be any should be included in this section.

A SQUAT TYPE WATER CLOSET

Squatting water closet suite comprising of water closet bowl with top plate and integral foot
No 5
threads, S-trap connector. All to be as ''Duravit '' or approved equivalent.

B WATER CLOSET FLUSH VALVE

Concealed water closet flush valve, with 3/4" stop valve. 6-9 lts, and having a Flow Pressure
range of 1.2-5.0 bar . The Flush valve to comprise the following accessories: Stainless Steel
No. 5
Actuator plate, Fixing device with hidden fixing screws for flush pipes,Flush Valve connector to
WC ,and flush pipe. All products to be as specified or equal and approved.

C DELAY ACTION PILLAR TAP

Vandal-resistant delay action basin tap as Geberit self-closing tap type 26, with mixer and with
Manual flush actuation .Flow duration setting of the tap independent of water pressure.Flow
duration, adjustment setting in the range of 3-30 s.To be complete with 2 Reinforced braided No. 9
hose, 3/8",2 check valves R 3/8,Tap aerator key and Fastening material and all necessary
fittings and mounting accessories.

D URINAL TROUGH AND AUTOMATIC FLUSHING SYSTEM

Complete set of a 2m long stainless steel urinal trough/channel with 25mm dia. heavy duty GI
pipe with 50mm interval drip-holes, and with all necessary fittings fixed to the wall as per No 1
Architect's instructions complete with Urinal automatic flushing system with connections

E SHOWER
Shower combination: Single Lever Shower Mixer with basic three way set for concealed
installation, complete with single lever mixer, and an overhead shower . As Hansgrohe Focus E2 No. 4
Concealed shower or equal and approved.

F SOAP DISPENSER
Wall-Mount Automatic IR Sensor Soap Dispenser Touch-free with capacity of about one litre
having a sensor automatic mechanism complete with fixing screws. Allow for initial soap supply. No 0
As Mediclinics ref DJ0011C or approved equivalent

G HAND DRIER
Automatic hand drier in white colour, operating on an infra-red automatic sensing system with
heating element safety cut-out complete with a 30 seconds safety timer,plastic rawl plugs and
No 0
fixing screws. The hand drier to have a heating capacity of 1.65 kw and performance flow rate of
135cfm (3.82m3/min).It shall be as Mediclinics ref Optima # A99 or approved equivalent

H ARABIC SHOWER TAP

Arabic shower tap complete with all the mounting bracket, hose pipe, necessary connections and
No. 5
fittings.

I TOILET ROLL HOLDER

Chromed brass, wall mounted toilet roll hansgrohe # 40523-000 or equal and approved . No 0

J ROBE HOOK
Chrome plated robe hook mounted with concealed screws. To be as hansgrohe # #40511-000
No 0
or equal and approved.

TOTAL FOR SANITARY INSTALL CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/6

10/2
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

III PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

Supply, install, test and commission the following:-

A PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

Prices for pipework shall include the cost for couplings, sockets, nipples, fixing brackets and
plugs, (timber plugs not accepted) and jointing to fittings etc., including jointings tapes,
compounds etc. together with fixing pipe sleeves and the necessary builders work, all as
required in the pipework installation. Mains supply, Cold distribution and over-flow
system shall be in PP-R (Polypropylene Random Co-polymer) PN20 pipes and fittings to
DIN 8078 and DIN 16962, with polyfusion welded joints to DVS 2207 to approval all to
approval:

i 25 mm PP-R fixed to wall surface,or in wall chase LM 56

ii 32 mm ditto LM 16
iii 40 mm ditto LM 45

B ELBOWS
i 25 mm diameter elbow No 19
ii 40 mm ditto LM 16

C TEES
i 25 mm diameter tee No 20
ii 32mm ditto No 15
iii 32 x32X 25 mm reducing tee No 15
iv 40 x40X 25 mm ditto No 16
v 40 x40X 32 mm ditto No 14

D REDUCERS
i 25 x 15 mm No 12
ii 32 x 25 mm No 14
iii 40 x 32 mm No 12

E SOCKETS
i 25 mm No 18
ii 32 mm ditto LM 14
iii 40 mm ditto LM 12

F UNIONS
i 25 mm No 14
ii 32 mm ditto LM 16
iii 40 mm ditto LM 18

G BRASS BALL CORKS

i 40 mm two way brass ball cork valve, (Unit as Peglar-BS type, or equal approved) No 2
II 25 mm ditto No 2

H ANGLE VALVES
15mm angle (service) valve to be as Tivoli of Germany or equal and approved No 26

I INCOMING WATER SUPPLY FROM TOWER TANKS

40mm diameter HDPE PN12.5 surface mounted,wall chased,burried in ground or underslab. With
i LM 28
one 50x50x25,one 50x50x50 tee and one 50mm bend.

J WATER METER
Supply and install 40mm gate valves and strainer, water meter as ‘Kent’, or equal and approved
equivalent for the connection to the water supply to Ablution center, The quote to include Item 1
600x450mm water meter manhole

TOTAL FOR PLUMBING CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/6

10/3
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

V FOUL & WASTE WATER DRAINAGE

Prices for pipework shall include the cost for couplings, socket reducers, connectors, fixing
brackets, clips, holderbats and jointing to fittings, aplliances etc, wall chasing and holes cutting
or fixing pipe sleeves as required in the pipework installation.

u.P.V.C. and MuPVC Waste and Ventilating pipes and fittings to B.S. No. 5255, Heavy gauge.
All u.P.V.C. connectors, bends, branches, etc are to be formed strictly according to the
manufacturer's instructions. All u.P.V.C. pipes and fitting shall be as manufactured by Metro or
equal and approved. All pipework shall be connected using appropriate sockets , heat formed
sockets shall not be accepted

Supply, install, test and commission the following:

A PIPEWORK
i 40mm waste pipe fixed to wall or wall chase Lm 10
ii 50mm – ditto- Lm 30
iii 100mm brown drain pipe fixed to wall surface or boxed to architect’s detail Lm 6

B UNDERGROUND UPVC PIPEWORK TO BS 4660:1963 GOLDEN BROWN SERIES

i 100mm soil and waste pipe laid in or under concrete Floor slab or underground Lm 15
ii 150mm grey brown drain pipe fixed to wall surface or boxed to architect’s detail Lm 28

C SWEEP BEND
i 40mm No 14
ii 50mm No 12
iii 100mm short radius bend No 15

D SWEEP TEE
i 40mm No 12

E FLOOR TRAP
50mm Trapped Floor Gully with 150 x 150 mm gully inlet with tile cover and trap to enable easy
access from above for maintenance purposes. benching including forming drain channels, and No 9
200mm thick

F WC CONNECTOR
No. 125 WC Connector No 5

G WEATHERING APRON TERRAIN No. 131 No 1

H WEATHERING SLATE No 1

I VENT COWL TERRAIN No. 150.2 No 1

J GULLEY TRAP
Gulley trap chamber size 350x350x450mm deep, in masonry walling, housing a uPVC gully trap
i with drain pipe, SFRC Manhole Covers etc. and allow for excavation in soil or murram, and No 3
making good.

K MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

Man-hole or inspection chamber size 600 x 450mm by approximately 750mm deep using 200mm
thick base (concrete class N15) with 250mm thick (average) solid concrete block walling,
No 4
including 15mm internal plaster and top slab/screed, including appropriate man hole cover and
frame, pit digging, backfilling, cartingaway surplus material and making good.

L CONNECTION TO SEPTIC TANK

Allow for connection of foul drainage to septic tank, this to include the sleeves and all the required
i Item Sum
accessories

COST OF FOUL DRAINAGE TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/6

10/4
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT

VI RAIN WATER DRAINAGE

Prices for pipe work shall include the cost for couplings, connectors,reducers and jointing to
fittings,etc and fixing brackets all as required in the pipework installation together with providing
and fixing pipe sleeves in structural work. All u.P.V.C couplings, branches, tees, etc. are to be
i formed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All u.P.V.C pipes and fittings
shall be as manufactured by Caradon Terrain Ltd. Or other equal and appproved. u.P.V.C Rain
Water Drainage Pipes and Fittings for above ground and Buried Pipes To B.S. 4660 and ISO
Class 41, Golden Brown in Colour with Rubber joints

A PIPEWORK

i 100 mm Diameter Pipe LM 20

B uPVC PIPE WORK FITTINGS

BENDS
i 100mm Bend No. 8

C 100 mm Fullbora outlet with Flat grating cover. No. 4

D RAIN WATER CHAMBERS

Construct rain-water chamber size 300 x 350 x 500mm deep inside, using 200 thick solid
concrete block walling or approved stone, over 200mm thick concrete base (mix 1:3:6), including
vi No. 3
15mm internal plaster, bottom and top screed and pipes connections etc, including pit digging,
back filling, carting away surplus material .

E CONNECTION TO STORM DRAINS

Allow for application and connecting to storm drainage by Mombasa water and sewarage
i Item Sum
company

COST OF RAIN WATER TO MAIN COLLECTION PAGE 10/6

10/5
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

B/F FROM PAGE

I SANITARY SUPPLY ONLY 10/1 Kshs.

II SANITARY INSTALL ONLY 10/2 Kshs.

III COST FOR PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS 10/3 Kshs.

IV COST FOR FOUL WATER DRAINAGE 10/4 Kshs.

V COST FOR RAIN WATER 10/5 Kshs.

VI SUB TOTAL FOR 1NO. ABLUTION BLOCK

MULTIPLY BY 3 FOR 3NO. ABLUTION BLOCKS X3

TOTAL NUMBER OF 3NO. ABLUTION BLOCKS

TOTAL COST FOR ABLUTION CENTER 1 FROM ABOVE CARRIED FORWARD TO MAIN SUMMARY PAGE 10/21

10/6
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

I PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
Supply, install, test and commission the following:-

Supply, intall, test and commision the following appliances including their support
brackets, screws etc.and their connection to water supply, waste/soil drainage and
electrical power supply:-

A KITCHEN SINKS
Double bowl, Single drainer stainless steel kitchen sink of size 1200x 400mm as
manufactured by FRANKE. The bowl size to be 400 x 400 x 150mm deep complete with
No 1
chrome plated 40mm waste fittings, overflow,chrome plated bottle trap with 75mm deep
seal and chain waste fitting or equal and approved.

B BIP TAPS
1/2" Chrome Plated Hose Union Bibtap with Double Check Valve and a 3/4" threaded
No. 1
connection to connect to tap connectors and timers with a threaded connection.

A PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

Prices for pipework shall include the cost for couplings, tees, elbows, reducers, adaptors,
sockets, nipples, fixing brackets and plugs, (timber plugs not accepted) and jointing to
fittings etc., including jointings tapes, compounds etc. together with fixing pipe sleeves
and the necessary builders work, all as required in the pipework installation. Mains
supply, Cold distribution and over-flow system shall be in PP-R (Polypropylene
Random Co-polymer) PN20 pipes and fittings to DIN 8078 and DIN 16962, with
polyfusion welded joints to DVS 2207 to approval all to approval:

i 25 mm PP-R fixed to wall surface,or in wall chase LM 10

C ELBOWS
i 25 mm diameter elbow No 10

D BRASS BALL CORKS

i 25 mm two way brass ball cork valve, (Unit as Peglar-BS type, or equal approved) No 1

E INCOMING WATER SUPPLY FROM TOWER TANKS

25 mm diameter HDPE surface mounted,wall chased,burried in ground or underslab. With
i LM 10
one 50x50x25,one 50x50x50 tee and one 50mm bend.

F WATER METER
Supply and install 25mm gate valves and strainer, water meter as ‘Kent’, or equal and
approved equivalent for the connection to the water supply to each Kiosk,The quote to Item 1
include 600x450mm water meter manhole

TOTAL FOR PLUMBING CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/10

10/7
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

V FOUL & WASTE WATER DRAINAGE

Prices for pipework shall include the cost for couplings, socket reducers, connectors, fixing
brackets, clips, holderbats and jointing to fittings, aplliances etc, wall chasing and holes
cutting or fixing pipe sleeves as required in the pipework installation.

u.P.V.C. and MuPVC Waste and Ventilating pipes and fittings to B.S. No. 5255, Heavy
gauge. All u.P.V.C. connectors, bends, branches, etc are to be formed strictly according to
the manufacturer's instructions. All u.P.V.C. pipes and fitting shall be as manufactured by
Metro or equal and approved. All pipework shall be connected using appropriate sockets ,
heat formed sockets shall not be accepted

Supply, install, test and commission the following:

A PIPEWORK
i 40mm waste pipe fixed to wall or wall chase Lm 4
ii 50mm – ditto- Lm 5
iii 100mm brown drain pipe fixed to wall surface or boxed to architect’s detail Lm 6

B UNDERGROUND UPVC PIPEWORK TO BS 4660:1963 GOLDEN BROWN SERIES

i 100mm soil and waste pipe laid in or under concrete Floor slab or underground Lm 15

C SWEEP BEND
i 40mm No 2
ii 50mm No 2

D FLOOR TRAP
50mm Trapped Floor Gully with 150 x 150 mm gully inlet with tile cover and trap to enable
easy access from above for maintenance purposes. benching including forming drain No 2
channels, and 200mm thick

E BOTTLE TRAP
Supply and install 40mm Chrome plated bottle trap (TR2/P) 1 1/2in plastic bottle trap with
No 2
75mm seal

F GULLEY TRAP
Gulley trap chamber size 350x350x450mm deep, in masonry walling, housing a uPVC gully
i trap with drain pipe, SFRC Manhole Covers etc. and allow for excavation in soil or murram, No 2
and making good.

G MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

Man-hole or inspection chamber size 600 x 450mm by approximately 750mm deep using
200mm thick base (concrete class N15) with 250mm thick (average) solid concrete block
walling, including 15mm internal plaster and top slab/screed, including appropriate man No 2
hole cover and frame, pit digging, backfilling, cartingaway surplus material and making
good.

H GREASE TRAP
Allow for Connection, testing and commissioning of grease trap constructed by the Main
i Item 1
contracotr

COST OF FOUL DRAINAGE TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/10

10/8
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Supply ,install, connect and set to work the following complete with all accessories. Note
all extinguishers sets shall be priced complete with locable cabinets with break glass

A CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHER

UL approved 9 litres Carbon Dioxide fire extinguishers to UL rating 10-B:C. with 20 sec.
discharge time (H;682MM W;330MM) complete with fixing brackets, Pictorial Instructions,
No 1
Colour Code, Dishcharge horn and Hose, and operating Valve as NAFFCO N20 LC. or
equal and approved.

B ABC MULTIPURPOSE EXTINGUISHER

UL /FM approved 10 Kg Multipurpose fire extinguishers to UL rating 4A:60B:C with 22 sec.
discharge time (H;48.6CM W;8.13CM) complete with fixing brackets, Pictorial Instructions, No 1
Colour Code, Dishcharge horn and Hose, and operating Valve.or equall and approved.

SUB TOTAL

TOTAL FOR PORTABLE CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/10

10/9
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

B/F FROM PAGE

I COST FOR PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS 10/7 Kshs.

II COST FOR FOUL WATER DRAINAGE 10/8 Kshs.

III COST FOR PORTABLES 10/9 Kshs.

IV SUB TOTAL FOR 1NO. KIOSK

MULTIPLY BY 10 FOR 10NO. KIOSKS X 10

TOTAL COST FOR 10 NO. KIOSKS

TOTAL COST FOR 10NO. KIOSKS FROM ABOVE CARRIED FORWARD TO MAIN SUMMARY PAGE 10/21

10/10
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT
S
1 REFUSE COLLECTION ROOM

FLOOR DRAIN
Stainless steel floor drains as Rofo, RO280SVNW100 size 310x310x360mm deep, in
masonry walling, housing a uPVC gully trap with drain pipe, 100mm thick P.C.C. cover with No 2
vent-hole etc.

STAND PIPES FOR REFUSE ROOM

Allow for intallation of Standpipe in Galvanised steel piping 1.5m from the slab level
complete with a manhole with gate valves, check valves and unions as detailed in the No 2
design drawings.

DRAINAGE CONNECTION FOR REFUSE ROOM

Allow for drainage connection from Floor drain to the nearest drainage Manhole using a
No 2
100mm heavy duty PVC pipe complete with heavy duty manhole and cover.

TOTAL COST FOR REFUSE ROOM CARRIED FORWARD TO MAIN SUMMARY PAGE 10/13

10/11
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

BOREHOLE
A
1 NEMA - Environmental Impact Assesment LS 1

2 Hydrogeological Survey
To undertake a hydrogeological survey and write up a detailed report LS 1

3 Application & Permit fee for Authorisation to drill Borehole and follow ups LS 1

SUB TOTAL - A Carried to Collection Page 10/13

B
1 Mobilization, Setting Up, Demobilization and Shifting
Mobilization to the project area of all plant, materials, equipments and personnel,
1a including demobilization at the end of the contract and removal LS 1

2 Drilling, Installation, Development,Testing of production Borehole

2a 8" Dia. From ground level to 100 metres M 100
2b As item 2.1a but beyond 100 metres M 100
2c As item 2.1a but beyond 200 metres M 100
2d As item 2.1a but beyond 300 metres M 100

2e Beyond 300m M

2.2 Supply & Installation of 152mm dia, steel plain casing M 200

2.3 Supply & Installation of 6" dia. Steel machine cut screen casing. M 100

2.4 Water Supply for drilling & domestic purposes at site LS 1

2.5 Supply and installation of Gravel Pack TONS 15

2.6 Well development with SHMP and Drilling Foam before test pumping HRS 5

2.7 Test pumping for 24 hrs and recovery measurements LS 1

3 Surface Casing - Estimated for Loose Formation

3.1 Supply and Install and remove surface casing or M
3.2 Supply and install Permanent surface casing M 6

4 Completion
4.1 Construct Concrete to slab and well head capping and lock LS 1
4.2 Chemical analysis of water sample and borehole report LS 1
4.3 Stand by time beyond control of contractor HRS

ESTIMATED TOTAL - B (Drilling Cost) Carried to Collection Page 10/13

Grundfos stainless steel borehole pump model SP8A-73 coupled to a Grundfos Motor
15HP (3 Phase). The pump should be capable of pumping 5,000 per hour at 350m Hear NO 1
with the pumpset at a depth of no less than 260m below ground level.
100mm2 x 4 core submersible borehole pump cable LM 265
Electrode cable 0.75mm2 x 1 core LM 530
Electrodes PAIR 1
Cable splicing kit with heat shrink SET 1
uPVC Dipper Pipes 1" PCS 44
Centralizer for borehole pipe in 12m intervals 6"x2" NO 15
GI Pipe Class B 2" LM 43
Peglar Socket 2" LM 46

GI Starter pipe 2" (2 Metres) NO 1

Borehole Surface Accessories.

Borehole cover plate 6"x2", GI Plug, 2", GI Bend 2", Hex Nipples 2", Union Pegglar 2",
1
GI Tee 2", NRV 2" (Caleffi) LS
Installation of the above accessories to International Standards. LS 1

Electrical Items
Junction Box complete with fittings LS 1

10/12
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

Supply of 10mm2 x 4 Core Armoured Underground cable LTS 20

Supply of 1.5mm2 x 2 Core Armoured Underground cable for float switch LM 20
Supply of 1.5mm2 x 2 Core Armoured cable for borehole electrodes LM 20
Main switch for Fuse MCB LS 1
Float Switch LS 1
Control Panel MP204 7.5Hp in a lockable steel enclosure and hour meter. NO 1
Electrical works for mounting control panel in a sheltered structure provided by others LS 1
Instalaltion of the borehole pump using movable service gantry LS 1
Transport charges to and from site LS 1
Supply and Installation 2" water meter with accessories from Nairobi Water and
sewarage company. Quote to include Borehole meter deposit and survey fees LS 1

Application of water abstaction permit from Water Resource Management Authority LS 1

Payment for ground water use fees at Water Resource Management Authority LS 1

2" Screen Filter LS 1

TOTAL (Pump & Electricals)- C Carried to Collection page 10/13

COST B/F - SECTION A PAGE NO. 10/11

COST B/F - SECTION B PAGE NO. 10/12
COST B/F - SECTION C PAGE NO. 10/12

TOTAL FOR PLUMBING CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/21

10/13
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT
S
1 SITE RETICULATION

A EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Supply, Install test and commision the following pipe work and fittings
Cold water distribution and over-flow system in High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) PIPES
AND FITTINGS manufactured to EN 1519. All pipe sizes indicated are Nominal (outside)
diameter (mm). ; SDR 11 PN16 joining of pipes to be in electrofusion welded joints all to
Enginerers' approval:
All dimmensions are outside nom.

PIPEWORK

iv 75 mm-50mm dia nom. As per the construction drawing details Lm 750

E BRASS BALL CORKS

i 50 mm two way brass ball cork valve, (Unit as Peglar-BS type, or equal approved) No 24

ii 75 mm. ditto No 12

F BALL VALVES
50mm diameter ball valve No 4

G WATER METER
50mm diameter water meter as SENSUS or equal and approved. No 1

I HIGH LEVEL WATER TANK

Supply, deliver and Assemble a High level plastic water tanks capacity of 24,000 litres as
Toptank or equal and approved. The Tank to come complete with tank cover, mosquito proof
inspection vent, internal stays, jointing material, bolts and nuts including applying two coats No 4
of non-toxic bituminous paint on the inside and two coats of aluminum paint on the outside.

N WATER CONNECTION
Allow for application for connection to local main supply through 50mm water meter and
Item 1
liaison with the Local Authorities.

E MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

Man-hole or inspection chamber size 600 x 450mm by no more than 750mm deep using
200mm thick base (concrete class N15) with 250mm thick (average) solid concrete block
vi walling, including 15mm internal plaster and top slab/screed, including appropriate heavy No. 38
duty man hole cover and frame, pit digging, backfilling, cartingaway surplus material and
making good.

TOTAL COST OF PLUMBING SITE RETICULATION CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/17

10/14
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT

II RAIN WATER DRAINAGE

Prices for pipe work shall include the cost for couplings, connectors,reducers and jointing to
fittings,etc and fixing brackets all as required in the pipework installation together with
providing and fixing pipe sleeves in structural work. All u.P.V.C couplings, branches, tees,
i etc. are to be formed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All u.P.V.C
pipes and fittings shall be as manufactured by Caradon Terrain Ltd. Or other equal and
appproved. u.P.V.C Rain Water Drainage Pipes and Fittings for above ground and Buried
Pipes To B.S. 4660 and ISO Class 41, Golden Brown in Colour with Rubber joints

A PIPEWORK

i 100 mm Diameter Pipe LM 144

v 100 mm Fullbora outlet with Flat grating cover. No. 17

D RAIN WATER CHAMBERS

Construct rain-water chamber size 300 x 350 x 500mm deep inside, using 200 thick solid
concrete block walling or approved stone, over 200mm thick concrete base (mix 1:3:6),
i No. 15
including 15mm internal plaster, bottom and top screed and pipes connections etc, including
pit digging, back filling, carting away surplus material .

E CONNECTION TO STORM DRAINS

Allow for application and connecting to storm drainage by Mombasa water and sewarage
i Item Sum
company

COST OF RAIN WATER TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/17

10/15
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT

III PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Supply ,install, connect and set to work the following complete with all accessories. Note all
extinguishers sets shall be priced complete with locable cabinets with break glass

A CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHER

UL approved 9 litres Carbon Dioxide fire extinguishers to UL rating 10-B:C. with 20 sec.
discharge time (H;682MM W;330MM) complete with fixing brackets, Pictorial Instructions,
No 20
Colour Code, Dishcharge horn and Hose, and operating Valve as NAFFCO N20 LC. or equal
and approved.

B ABC MULTIPURPOSE EXTINGUISHER

UL /FM approved 10 Kg Multipurpose fire extinguishers to UL rating 4A:60B:C with 22 sec.
discharge time (H;48.6CM W;8.13CM) complete with fixing brackets, Pictorial Instructions, No 20
Colour Code, Dishcharge horn and Hose, and operating Valve.or equall and approved.

` SUB TOTAL

TOTAL FOR PORTABLE CARRIED FORWARD TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/17

10/16
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

BF FROM PAGE NO.

I COST FOR PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS 10/14 Kshs.

II COST FOR RAIN WATER 10/15 Kshs.

III COST FOR PORTABLES 10/16 Kshs.

III SUB TOTAL

TOTAL COST FOR SITE RETICULATION FROM ABOVE CARRIED FORWARD TO MAIN SUMMARY PAGE 10/21

10/17
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY AMOUNT
SOLAR WATER HEATING INSTALLATION
Supply, delivery to site, Install, test and commissioning of solar hot water system in
accordance with conditions of contractand with specifications of the following:-

Note: The prices as tendered should be included of all necessary fittings, including
Pipe and pipe fittings of upto 1m to the plumbers termination point, Thermostatic
mixers, air release valves, pressure release valves, unions, sockets, ball corks and
any other items required to complete installation of the Solar water heating system.

A SOLAR WATER HEATING SYSTEMS

300 Litre Thermosiphon Solar water heating system with a single heat exchange
serpentine thermal tanks, complete with1 No. 2.4m2 Solar collector with thick
toughened glass, 24 copper risers protrusions coated with brass, fitted with
No. 0
aluminium zinc coating, 5 layers of insulation, 50mm rock wool insulation, Flat Roof
Mounting Frame, 2kW backup heating element, and sensor cabling to the
respective offices. As Chromagen, Veissmann, Calpek or equal and approved.

C INSTALLATION & LABOUR

Full installation of solar unit, all plumbing materials to complete installation fully,
liaison with plumber, Tanks can be lifted with the assistance of the crane presently No. 0
installed on site by MC.

SUB TOTAL

CARRIED FORWARD TO MAIN SUMMARY PAGE 10/21

10/18
 Rev A0

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

II WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT

A MBBR WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT

Conduct survey, supply, install, test and commission a Moving bed bio reactor MBBR waste
water treatment plant for a designed flow of 80,000L/day with a basic sewage analysis of pH
6.5-8.5, TSS(mg/l) 230, oil and grease (mg/l) 100, BOD (mg/l) 300 and COD (mg/l) 600. with
minimum ouput of treated water to be pH 7.5-8.5, TSS(mg/l) <30, oil and grease (mg/l) Nil,
BOD (mg/l) <30 and COD (mg/l) <50. The treated water to be in accordance with the
specified levels and local Nema regulations. Plant to have an equalization and pretreatment
i chamber that should be able to hold incoming water if it exceeds daily demand, Biological No 1
treatment section chamber, secondary settling chamber, disinfection chamber, tertiary
filtration treatment chamber, and a sludge disposal system which has a filter press. Note: the
plant must have a treated water tank complete with a pressurized pump to use the treated
water for irrigation purposes throughout the site.

TOTAL COST FOR MECHANICAL VENTILATION TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/21

10/19
1d- ‘TENDER NO. MOT/01/2018-2019- PROPOSED REGENERATION OF MAMA NGINA DRIVE WATERFRONT AND CULTURAL DISTRICT IN MOMBASA COUNTY-
Rev A0
HVAC INSTALLATION WORKS
- KILINDINI CULTURAL CENTRE
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

II MECHANICAL VENTILATIONS

A WALL MOUNT TOILET EXTRACT FANS

install,test and commission high level mounted in line duct fan as SOLER & PALAU
Q:600 M³/hr @250PA, Power:1.2KW. The fan to be complete with acoustic insulation of
50mm thickness fire proof fibre glass with high resistance coating, electric motor,
i couplings, flexible connections, The quotes to include antivibration mounting and No 0
Electrical connections, etc. The fan should come complete with control panels and timers
Or approved eqivalent.

B ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Wiring including any necessary conduit, fittings etc. between the power supply points and
the the fan with a cable length of 2m. The cost shall include any isolators if and as
No 0
required.

TOTAL COST FOR MECHANICAL VENTILATION TO COLLECTION PAGE 10/21

10/20
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT

BILL NO. 10

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION (ALL PROVISIONAL)

SUMMARY PAGE

I BROUGHT FORWARD FROM ABLUTION BLOCKS PAGE 10/6 KES

II BROUGHT FORWARD FROM KIOSKS PAGE 10/10 KES

III BROUGHT FORWARD FROM BOREHOLE DRILLING AND PUMP PAGE 10/13 KES

IV BROUGHT FORWARD FROM SITE RETICULATION SERVICES PAGE 10/17 KES

V BROUGHT FORWARD FROM SOLAR WATER HEATING PAGE 10/18 KES

VI BROUGHT FORWARD FROM WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT PAGE 10/19 KES

VII BROUGHT FORWARD FROM HVAC FOR ABLUTION BLOCK PAGE 10/20 KES

SUB-TOTAL

VIII ADD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING KES

IX ADD RECORD DRAWINGS (AS BULIT DRAWINGS) KES

X ALLOW FOR LIASON WITH LOCAL WATER AND SEWERAGE COMPANY KES

TOTAL COST FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY

10/21
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 11

DAYWORKS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)
Labour

A. Payment of labour authorised by the Architects

to be employed on Dayworks will be the net
amount of wages paid in respect of such labour,
in accordance with the rates to be inserted below
by the Contractor, plus the percentage addition
also to be inserted by the Contractor.

B. The rates inserted against each category of

labour will be deemed to be the hourly wages
paid to workmen and chargehands, working with
their gangs, inclusive of allowances for housing,
holidays with pay, annual leave, sick leave,
safari allowance and all other allowances
required by Government enactments concerning
regulations of wages and conditions of
employment.

C. The percentage addition on net amount of wages

defined above will be deemed to cover:-

Supply, transport about the site, use,

maintenance and removal of ordinary hand tools
and equipment used in Dayworks (such as picks,
shovels,barrows, ladders, buckets, trestles,
stages, scaffolding, hoses, rubber boots, special
clothing, tarpaulins, and all items of a like
nature), insurance superintendence (including
wages of foreman), water supply, artificial
lighting overheads, head office, site staff and
establishment charges profit, and all other
liabilities and obligations whatsoever.

Shs.

1161 DAYWORKS
11/1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

Net Amount of Wages

A. Labourer. Hours 75

B. General tradesman, category learner. Hours 25

C. Do. but ungraded. Hours 25

D. Do. but Grade III trade tested. Hours 25

E. Do. but Grade II trade tested. Hours 25

F. Do. but Grade I grade tested. Hours 25

G. Light plant operator (compressors, mixers,

tractors, rollers, etc.) Hours 25

H. Heavy plant operator (D7 tractors, graders,

excavators, etc.). Hours 25

I. Junior headman. Hours 25

J. Senior headman. Hours 25

Sub total of net amount of wages Shs.

Allow a percentage addition on net amount of

wages to cover tools, insurances, etc. as defined
above. %

Shs.

1165 DAYWORKS

11/2
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

Materials

A. Payment for materials authorised by the

Architect to be used in Dayworks will be the
approved net cost of supply and delivery to site
of such materials, plus the percentage addition
to be inserted below by the Contractor.

B. The percentage addition on net cost of materials

as defined above will be deemed to cover
insurances, overheads, head office, site staff
and establishment charges, profit, and all other
liabilities and obligations whatsoever.

C. Include the Provisional Sum of Shillings Five

Thousand (Shs. 5,000/‑) for the approved net
cost of supply and delivery to site of materials
to be used in Dayworks. Sum 5,000.00

D. Allow a percentage addition on net cost of

materials to cover insurances, overhead charges,
profit, etc., as defined above. %

Plant

E. Payment for the use of heavy plant (such as

compressed air equipment, concrete mixers,
pumps, excavators and the like) authorised by
the Architect to be used in Dayworks will be the
approved net hire charges, plus the percentage
addition to be inserted below by the Contractor.

Shs.

1165 DAYWORKS
11/3
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. The 'approval net hire charges' of heavy plant

(covered by a Provisional Sum below) shall
mean the approved invoiced hire charges
including delivery to site, and subsequent
removal, after deduction of trade discounts, but
without deduction of cash discounts not
exceeding 2 1/2% which shall be retained by the
Contractor, or, in the case of use of the
Contractor's own heavy plant, current hire
charges plus justifiable charges for handling,
delivery to and removal from the site.

B. Include the Provisional Sum of Shillings Five

Thousand (Shs. 5,000/‑) for the approved net
hire charges of heavy plant to be used in
Dayworks. Sum 5,000.00

C. Allow a percentage addition on net hire charges

of heavyplant to cover insurances, overhead
charges, profit, etc. as defined above.
%

Direct Charges

D. Payment for direct charges authorised by the

Architect to be incurred in Dayworks will be the
approved net cost of such direct charges plus the
percentage addition to be inserted below by
the Contractor.

Shs.

1165 DAYWORKS
11/4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. The 'approved net cost of direct charges'

(covered by a Provisional Sum below) shall
mean the approved invoiced cost of work
executed by sub‑contractors or specialists
after deduction of trade discounts, but without
deduction of cash discounts not exceeding 2
1/2% which shall be retained by the
Contractor.

B. The percentage addition on net cost of direct

charges as defined above will be deemed to
cover insurances, overheads, head office, site
staff and establishment charges, profit,
attendance and all other liabilities and
obligations whatsoever.

C. Include the Provisional Sum of Shillings Five

Thousand (Shs. 5,000/‑) for the approved net
cost of direct charges incurred in Dayworks.
Sum 5,000.00

D. Allow a percentage addition on net cost of

direct charges to cover insurances, overhead
charges, profit, etc., as defined above. %

Shs.

1165 DAYWORKS
11/5
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

BILL NO 11

DAYWORKS

(ALL PROVISIONAL)

COLLECTION

Brought forward from Page No. 11/1

" " " " " 11/2

" " " " " 11/3

" " " " " 11/4

" " " " " 11/5

TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 11

CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY Shs.

DAYWORKS
1165 COLLECTION
11/6
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY RATE Shs./Cts.
No.
BILL NO. 12
PROVISIONAL SUMS
Note: See Appendix 'E' for preambles to Prime
Cost and Provisional Sums
A. Include the sum of shillings Six hundred
thousand only (shs. 600,000/-) for signage. Sum 600,000.00
B. Include the sum of shillings nine million only
(shs. 9,000,000/-) for soft landscaping and street
furniture. Sum 9,000,000.00
C. Include the sum of shillings six hundred
thousand only (shs. 600,000/-) for sculptures
and artworks. Sum 600,000.00
D. Include the sum of shillings three million only
(shs. 3,000,000/-) for builder's work in
connection with external works specialist
services. Sum 3,000,000.00
E. Include the sum of shillings five million only
(shs. 5,000,000/-) for civil works in connection
with water treatment plant. Sum 5,000,000.00
F. Include the sum of shillings one million five
hundred thousand only (shs. 1,500,000/-) for
refurbishment and restoration of existing
structures Sum 1,500,000.00
G. Include the sum of shillings eleven million only
(shs. 11,000,000/-) for kiosks. Sum 11,000,000.00
H. Include the sum of shillings two million only
(shs. 2,000,000/-) for site clearance, demolitions
and alterations. Sum 2,000,000.00
I. Include the sum of shillings one million two
hundred thousand only (shs. 1,200,000/-) for
sports facilities. Sum 1,200,000.00
J. Include the sum of shillings two million only
(shs. 2,000,000/-) for works in respect to
commercial food market. Sum 2,000,000.00
K. Include the sum of shillings seven million five
hundred thousand only (Shs. 7,500,000/-) for
reinforced concrete high level tank support. Sum 7,500,000.00
L. Include the sum of shillings eighteem million
only (Shs. 18,000,000/-) for contingencies. Sum 18,000,000.00
TOTAL AMOUNT OF BILL NO. 12
CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY Shs.

1165 PROVISIONAL SUMS

COLLECTION
12/1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

BILL NO. 13
SCHEDULE OF RATES
At the discretation of the Architect additional works may be
ordered whose valuation shall be based on the following
schedule of rates

Rates submitted should be inclusive of profits overheads and

also the prevailing 16% VAT.

The prices submitted should be fixed and valid for one year.
A. DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
Note: All rates for new works should include all necessary
preparatory work to surfaces to receive new finishes, new
doors and window frames and all work of a like nature whether
stated in the item descriptions or not.

A. Carefully into existing asphalt concrete slab prepare surfaces

to receive new floor finishes (measured separately) m2

B. Carefully hack out existing reinforced concrete plinth

aproximately 200mm thick and make good disturbed surfaces. m2
C. Carefully remove existing floor tiles and make good backing
screed to receive new floor finishes (measured separately) m2

D. Carefully remove existing mild steel railing and balustrades

approximately 1200mm high complete with and including all
the members. m
E. Carefully remove existing precast concrete paving slabs
complete with the sub-base and prepare surfaces to receive
new paving slabs (measured separately) m2

F. Carefully hack off existing painted plaster and prepare exposed

surfaces to receive new wall finishes (measured separately)
m2

G. Carefully demolish existing 200mm Coral stone boundary wall

complete with all foundations and make good all disturbed
areas to match existing. m2
H. Carefully remove existing precast concrete carbro paving
complete with the sub-base and make good all disturbed areas
to match existing. Store on site for re-use. m2
I. Carefully demolish existing precast concrete kerb complete
with and including the sub-base and make good all disturbed
areas to match existing. Store on site for re-use. m2

JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH

1165 SCHEDULE OF RATES

13/ 1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

B. SITE CLEARANCE

A. Clear site of all existing shrubs and cart away arisings. m2

B. Clear existing shrub hedge avaragely 2.5m high and cart away
arisings. m

Cut down existing trees, shrubs, grab up all roots and hand
over arisings to the client, fill in voids with approved selected
material well rammed and consolidated.

C. Small tree not exceeding 600mm girth. No.

D. Tree 900 - 1200mm girth. No.

E. Tree 1200 - 1500mm girth. No.

F. Tree 1500 - 1800mm girth. No.

G. Tree 1800 - 2100mm girth. No.

H. Tree 2100 - 2400mm girth. No.

I. Tree 2400 - 2700mm girth. No.

J. Tree 2700 - 3000mm girth. No.

C. EXCAVATIONS

K. Excavate in compacted fill commencing at reduced level but

not exceeding 1.50m deep. m2

L. Do. but 1.50 - 3.00m. m2

D. INTERNAL PARTITIONS

M. Supply, assemble and fix 10mm laminated glass partition in

100 x 50mm powder coated aluminium section frames and
glazing beads to Architect's approval. m2

N. Supply, assemble and fix 10mm toughened frameless glass

partitions complete with approved fixing accessories to
Architect's approval. m2

JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH

1165 SCHEDULE OF RATES
13/ 2
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. Approved decorative film fixed onto glass to approval

(measured separately) m2

B. Sparkle white sand blast film fixed onto glass to approval

(measured separately) m2

D. WINDOWS

Supply, assemble and fix the following purpose made powder

coated aluminium windows in 4mm thick (minimum)
approved sections complete with all necessary handles, levers
or finger pulls and pins, catches and stays, complete with all
necessary handles and approved small locking device where
applicable fixed at pre-determined positions, including snap
on glazing beads, building in lugs to jambs, plugging and
screwing to head and cill and bedding frames in waterproof
cement mortar and pointing in approved acrylic mastic and
oiling, easing and adjusting. All windows have permanent
ventilators with 40mm mosquito gauze panel cover.

C. Two pane window size 1800 x 1600mm in two sliding panes.

m2

E. FLOOR FINISHES

D. Supply and fix approved 8mm thick SAJ/RAK ceramic or

other equal and approved ceramic floor tiles fixed on backing
screed (measured separately) with an approved adhesive
jointed and flush pointed with grouting to match tile. m2

E. Do. But 10mm thick. m2

Supply and fix approved 8mm thick SAJ Mosaic tiles or other
equal and approved ceramic floor tiles fixed on backing screed
(measured separately) with an approved adhesive jointed and
flush pointed with grouting to match tile. m2

F. Do. But 10mm thick. m2

G. 8mm Thick granito floor tiles or other equal and approved

fixed on floor screed (measured separately) with an approved
adhesive jointed and flush pointed with coloured grout to
match tiles. m2

JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH

1165 SCHEDULE OF RATES
13/ 3
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A 20mm Regular sized mazeras stone paver including cement and

sand (1:3) backing bedded, jointed and neat pointed joints as
works proceeds including all necessary ties built or cast in to
approval.

B. Take delivery and fix only floor tiles fixed on backing screed
(measured separately) with an approved adhesive jointed and
flush pointed with grouting to match tile (fixing adhesive by
the Contractor). m2

C. Supply and fix 'Britons' carpet tiles or any other equal and
approved fixed on backing screed (measured separately) with
an approved adhesive m2

D. Take delivery and fix only 'Britons' carpet tiles or any other
equal and approved fixed on backing screed (measured
separately) with an approved adhesive (fixing adhesive by the
Contractor). m2

E. 100mm Thick hand dressed 'Nairobi Blue Stone' or other equal

and approved paving in approved pattern laid on sand bed
(measured separately) to falls, crossfalls, and cambers
including necessary compaction. m2

F. 50mm Thick powerfloated monolithic screed to concrete

surface with X-Tech Integral S floor hardener as manufactured
by X-Calibur Construction Systems Inc. and locally supplied
by Paveseal (K) Limited or other equal and approved laid
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
specifications (parking and driveways) m2

F. CEILING FINISHES

G. 25mm MDF suspended ceiling on and including approved

stainless steel frame structure suspended from existing
concrete soffit to Architects approval. m2

H. 9mm Thick butt jointed gypsum Rhino board suspended

ceiling with skimmed screen joint filler fixed to and including
heavy duty steel studwork brandering at 600mm centres with
rounded smooth compound sanded edges clad with silver
metal laminate in accordance with manufacturer's printed
specifications to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
m2

JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH

1165 SCHEDULE OF RATES

13/ 4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE Shs./Cts.
No.

A. Armstrong minabord suspended ceiling comrpising 600 x 600

x 15mm fine fisured laid in grid accoustic ceiling on and
including tegular grid system complete with white perimeter,
curved trim and wall angles where necesarry. m2

G. REDECORATION

B. Rub and brush down existing wall decoration, prepare surfaces

and apply two coats of approved marine quality paint to
approval m2

C. Carefully scrub and clean existing steel trowelled floor screed,

prepare surfaces and apply approved paint to the entire
satisfaction of the Architect.
m2

D. Rub and brush down existing ceiling decoration, prepare

surfaces and apply two coats of approved silk vinyl emulsion
paint on existing ceiling internally m2

LANDSCAPE FINISHES & FURNITURE

E. 1000mm High x 200mm diameter Custom precast concrete

bollards. No.

F. 900 x 600 x 600mm Custom precast concrete litter bins. No.

G. 900 x 600 x 600mm Custom precast concrete benches. No.

H. 60mm Thick medium duty normal grey 'Bamburi Blox' or other

equal and approved precast concrete cobble paving in
approved pattern laid on sand bed (measured separately) to
falls, crossfalls, and cambers including necessary compaction. m2

I. Do. but with approved colour topping. m2

JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH

1165 SCHEDULE OF RATES
13/ 5
ITEM
Shs. Cts.
No.
PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH
IN MOMBASA COUNTY

FINAL SUMMARY

BILL TITLE PAGE

No. No.
1 Preliminaries and General Conditions. 1/18
2 Gateway (All Provisional) 2/15
3 3No. New Ablution Blocks (All Provisional) 3/19
4 Enabling Works for Kiosks (All Provisional) 4/10
5 Refuse Collection Area (All Provisional) 5/5
6 Hard Landscape Areas (All Provisional) 6/8
7 Stormwater Drainage (All Provisional) 7/5
8 Foul Drainage (All Provisional) 8/2
9 Electrical Installation Works (All Provisional) 9/12
10 Mechanical Installations (All Provisional) 10/21
11 Dayworks (All Provisional) 11/6
12 Provisional Sums. 12/1
13 Schedule of Rates 13/5

ESTIMATE AMOUNT INCLUSIVE OF 16%

VAT CARRIED TO FORM OF TENDER Shs.

Signature of Contractor....................................................................

Address ...................................................................

......................................................................

......................................................................

Date ........................................................................

1165 FINAL SUMMARY FS/1

 SECTION ‘E’

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS USED FOR

THE BILLS OF QUANTITIES

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS

Drawing No. Description Scale

- Jomo Kenyatta Site Plan -

E/1
 ARCHITECTS SPECIFICATION

GENERAL
DISCREPANCIES IN DESCRIPTIONS
Descriptions of materials and workmanship contained in the Bills of Quantities
measured items shall take precedence over descriptions contained in Appendices in
the event of discrepancies between the two, unless the Architect shall otherwise
direct.
DISCREPANCIES IN DRAWINGS
Drawings shall take precedence over the Bills of Quantities, for construction
purposes, in the event of discrepancies between the two, and the Architect must be
notified immediately any such discrepancy becomes apparent.
TESTS AND SAMPLES
Unless otherwise described in the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor will be
responsible for all the costs involved in testing materials as described hereinafter.
He will also be responsible for all the costs involved in supplying samples of
materials or workmanship as required hereinafter to the satisfaction of the Architect.
The cost of replacing materials fixed or placed in position which do not comply with
the required test results or approved samples shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
KENYA STANDARDS
All materials and goods supplied for incorporation in the works must comply with any
relevant current standards issued by the Kenya Bureau of Standards. Where these
are not established or are unclear the latest British Standards and Codes of Practice
shall be applied.
EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS

SITE CLEARANCE
See Structural Engineers Specification.
GRUBBING
See Structural Engineers Specification.
EXCAVATION
See Structural Engineers Specification
WATER IN EXCAVATIONS
The Contractor shall excavate sumps, cut drains, provide and place all necessary
materials and provide and work pumps, plant and apparatus for dealing with any
water which may find its way into the excavation from any source whatsoever.
The responsibility for draining away, pumping, or otherwise removing water from the
excavations shall rest with the Contractor throughout the duration of the Contract,
but methods employed shall be subject to the agreement of the Architect.

F/1
Provision has been made in the Preliminaries and General Conditions of these Bills
of Quantities for the Contractor to insert a price against this item.
HARD ROCK
See Structural Engineers Specification
FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS
See Structural Engineers Specification.
SURPLUS SOIL DISPOSAL
See Structural Engineers Specification.
TOP SOIL FOR SPREADING
See Structural Engineers Specification.
FILLING UNDER SURFACE BED IN BUILDINGS
See Structural Engineers Specification.
FILLING OBTAINED FROM THE EXCAVATIONS
See Structural Engineers Specification.
MATERIALS FOUND IN EXCAVATIONS
See Structural Engineers Specification.

CONCRETE WORK

See Structural Engineers Specification.

WALLING
CEMENT
All cement used for making mortar shall be Portland Cement complying with B.S. 12.
SAND
All sand used for making mortar shall be clean well graded silicone sand of good
sharp quality equal to samples which shall be approved by the Architect. It shall be
free from lumps of stone, earth, loam, dust, salt, organic matter and any other
deleterious substance, sieved through a fine sieve and washed if so directed by the
Architect.
LIME
Lime for mortar shall be non-hydraulic or semi-hydraulic quick lime or hydrated lime
in accordance with B.S. 890, Class B.
Quick lime shall be run to putty immediately after delivery to site in a pit dug on the
site or in approved containers. The water to be first run into the pit or container and
the lime to be added until it is completely submerged and stirred until all lumps are
disintegrated and the resulting mild-lime shall then be run through a 3mm square
mesh sieve and run into a pit or other container and kept clean and moist for not
less than 4 weeks before use.
Hydrated lime shall be added to water in a clean receptacle thoroughly mixed to the
consistency of thick cream and allowed to stand and be kept clean and moist for not
less than 16 hours before use.
F/2
CEMENT MORTAR
The cement mortar (1:3) shall be composed of 42.5 kgs. of Portland Cement to
0.085 cubic metres of sand. The cement mortar (1:6) shall be composed of 42.5 kgs
of Portland Cement to 0.17 cubic metres of sand measured in specially prepared
gauge boxes and thoroughly mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or mixed dry
on clean and approved mixing platforms with water added afterwards until all parts
are completely incorporated and brought to a proper consistency. The use or
retempering of wholly or partly set mortar will not be allowed.
Foundation walling up to ground floor slab 1 part cement to 6 parts sand.
GAUGED LIME MORTAR
Gauged lime mortar shall be composed of 2 parts by volume of lime putty to 12 parts
by volume of sand measured in specially prepared gauge boxes and mixed dry on
clean and approved mixing platforms with water added afterwards until all parts are
thoroughly incorporated and brought to a proper consistency.
The mortar shall be mixed 7 to 10 days before it is required for use and shall be
stacked in a neat heap well smoothed off, covered with wet sacks and allowed to
mature.
Immediately before use 1 part by volume of Portland Cement shall be added to 9
parts by volume of lime mortar, the whole being remixed with the addition of extra
water until all parts are completely incorporated and brought to a proper consistency.
The gauged mortar must be used within 45 minutes of being mixed and the use or
retempering of wholly or partially set mortar will not be allowed.
Above ground floor slab 1 part cement to 3 parts lime to 15 parts sand.
CONCRETE BLOCKS
Concrete blocks shall be hollow or solid as required and shall be hard, true to size
and shape with sharp arrises in accordance with B.S. 2028 type 'A'. They are to be
obtained from an approved manufacturer and shall be equal in every respect to a
sample to be deposited with and approved by the Architect. Blocks must be cured at
least 4 weeks before delivery to site and the Contractor is to order his entire stocks
as soon as the Contract is signed. Before bulk delivery commences and thereafter,
if the Architect so directs, the Contractor shall dispatch twelve sample blocks to the
M.O.W. Materials Testing Laboratory. Should tests indicate that the blocks do not
comply with the Specification, the batch from which they were taken shall forthwith
be removed and re-executed or otherwise rectified at the Contractor's expense.
Blocks shall be generally 390mm long, 190mm high and of the thicknesses required
for the walling to be built. Blocks of other sizes will, however, be required to form
proper bondings at corners, around openings, etc. and the like positions and the
Contractor must make or cut blocks to all the varying sizes required for these
purposes.
LOAD BEARING CONCRETE BLOCKS
Blocks described as load bearing shall have the minimum compressive strengths
specified for each block, determined and tested in accordance with the appropriate
B.S. and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. Blocks of the various strengths
shall be differentiated by means of an approved colour code marking.
COLOURED CONCRETE BLOCKS
Concrete blocks described as coloured shall contain colouring pigment mixed
integrally with the materials to produce the required tint or shade. The mix of

F/3
materials contained in the blocks is to be adjusted as and if necessary to maintain
the materials to produce the required tint or shade. The mix of materials contained
in the blocks is to be adjusted as and necessary to maintain the specifications of
strength etc. Unless otherwise described blocks are to be laid jointed and pointed in
mortar containing pigment mixed integrally to produce a tint or shade matching that
of the blocks. The mix of materials contained in the mortar is to be adjusted as and
if necessary to maintain the specifications of strength, etc.
HOLLOW CLAY BLOCKS
Hollow clay blocks are to be hard, well burnt, true to size and shape with sharp
arises and keyed faces and joints in accordance with B.S. 1190 Type 'A'. They are
to be equal in every respect with a sample to be deposited with and approved by the
Architect. The hollow clay blocks are to be bedded and jointed in gauged mortar.
FAIR FACED CONCRETE BLOCKWORK
Fair faced concrete blockwork shall be built in ordinary blocks selected for their
uniformity and appearance and shall be free from holes or any other deformities and
shall have clean, sharp arises. The blocks shall be built in mortar as described and
raked out and pointed with a neat flush joint as the work proceeds, unless otherwise
stated. All arises shall be plumb and square, and all joints properly bonded and true
to line.
STONE WALLING
The stone for walling shall be sound and hard throughout free from all defects and
shall be obtained from a quarry approved by the Architect. Samples shall be
submitted for approval and, if approved, shall be regarded as the standard for the
work generally. All stone rejected by the Architect shall be removed immediately
from the site. Stones shall be laid on their natural beds and properly lapped and
bonded and thoroughly wetted before laying and again after laying for at least three
days. Stones shall be chisel dressed into true rectangular blocks with each surface
even and at right angles to all adjoining surfaces and shall generally be not less than
390mm long, 190mm high and of the thickness required for the walling to be built.
Extra over for fair face shall mean 'fine or medium butched chisel dressed' to an
even surface, built with a fair face and raked out and pointed with a neat recessed
joint as the work proceeds. All arrises shall be plumb and square and all joints
properly bonded and true to line. Fine or medium butched chisel dressed walling
shall be in regular courses.
If required by the Bills of Quantities, coloured stone walling and fair face dressings
shall be as described below:-
1) Fine butched stone shall be either chisel dressed or machine dressed - dress the
external face of each stone to the finest face practically obtainable and finish to a
fine rubbed plane surface.
2) Medium butched chisel dressed stone - chisel dress the external face of each
stone so that chisel marks are approximately the same width, with ridges
between adjacent marks approximately in the same plane.
3) Quarry faced stone - do not work the external face of each stone.
4) Random rubble stone facing - stones of random shape, colour and size as
facing to backing wall.
5) Random squared medium butched chisel dressed stone - stones of random
shape, colour, size and thickness squared and dressed as before described.

F/4
6) Stone walling of approved colour - walling to be built using grey and mixed blue
and grey coloured stones.
7) Stone walling of variegated colours - walling to be built using multi colour stone
approved by the Architect and mixed in proportions approved by the Architect.
8) Machine dressed stone facing shall be 25mm or 50mm thick as required by the
Architect. Machine rotary blade cut stones facing on backing wall.
The finished mortar joint for fine or medium butched chisel dressed stonework is to
be 10mm wide and generally 5mm back from the face of the stone. Where directed
by the Architect the mortar will be coloured to match the stones.
Stone walling described as load bearing shall have a minimum crushing strength of
10 Newtons per square mm.
On completion all stonework is to be scrubbed down with a wire brush.
BRICK FACINGS
Brick facings shall be of hand scratched bricks size 65mm high x 65mm deep x
230mm long as manufactured by Clayworks Ltd., P.O. Box 48202, Nairobi, with
10mm horizontal joints only raked out 10mm deep as the work proceeds. Wall ties
shall be 18 gauge butterfly shaped galvanised mild steel wire staggered at 450mm
centres vertically and 900mm centres horizontally. Supports at heads shall be with
approved steel angles. Strict supervision of quality will be maintained by the
Architect and all work will be in accordance with a sample panel to be approved by
the Architect prior to the start of facing works.
WALLING GENERALLY
The Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out all work on same for
courses, openings, heights, etc., and shall build the walls, piers, etc., to the widths,
depths and heights indicated on the drawings.
Concrete blocks shall be thoroughly wet before being laid and shall be kept wet
during that day. Where unfinished work is continued, the completed walling shall be
wetted before laying mortar.
All walls throughout the work shall be carried up evenly in 200mm courses, no part
being carried up more than 1m higher at one time than any other part, and in such
cases the jointing shall be made in long steps so as to prevent cracks arising, and all
walls shall be levelled round at each stage. All faces of walls to be plastered are to
have all the joints raked out as key for plaster.
Alternate courses of walling at all angles and intersections shall be carried through
the full thickness of the adjoining wall. All walling shall be built up entirely solid in
blocks, without voids. All perpends, reveals and angles of the walling shall be built
strictly true and square and all walling shall be flushed up and grouted solid as the
work proceeds.
All putlog holes shall not be less than one course deep and carefully filled with a
block cut to fit size of opening with beds and joints filled with mortar well tamped in
after scaffolding is removed and if in fair faced wall to match facings.
All walling 150mm thick and under is to be reinforced with one layer of 25mm x 16
B.W.G. hoop iron built into every second course well lapped at joints and
intersections and carried at least 115mm into abutting walls at junctions.
Where concrete and stone walling are bonded together at intersections or heading
joints the horizontal cement mortar beds shall not exceed 15mm thickness and
vertical joints are to be staggered.
F/5
DAMP PROOF COURSES
The damp proof course is to consist of a 25mm screed of cement and sand (1:2) laid
over the area of the walls and finished to a level surface and covered with and
including an approved fibre based bituminous damp proof course weighing not less
than 2.7 kgs. per square metre and lapped 225mm at all joints and intersections. All
walls are to be carefully cleaned and wetted before the screed is laid.
OTHER TRADES
Close co-operation with electrical and plumbing Sub-Contractors must be
maintained from the beginning of the job to avoid chases being cut in hollow block or
100mm solid block work or across any fair faced work. If necessary, conduits should
be run down the jambs of the door openings behind the door frame and taken to the
switch position through a horizontal joint in the masonry.
ROOFING
SCREEDS
Roof screeds where specified shall be as described in 'Floor, Wall and Ceiling
Finishes'.
GUARANTEE
The Contractor and the Roofing Sub-Contractor are to leave all the roofs complete
and watertight, unmarked with cement or bitumen particularly flashings and external
finishes and with joints in straight and even lines.
The Contractor must submit to the Employer a ten year guarantee for the roof
coverings against leakage. If a Sub-Contractor is to execute the roofing the
Contractor is responsible for obtaining this guarantee for them for submission to the
Employer.
ALUMINIUM EMBOSSED CAP SHEET ROOF COVERING
The cap sheet covering shall be Cabro 42 S.W.G. aluminium embossed cap sheet
covering with underlayers of saturated felt, as manufactured by Cabroworks Ltd.,
P.O. Box 98567, Mombasa, and laid by an approved Sub-Contractor in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING
All asphalt roofing shall be manufactured and applied in accordance with B.S. 988
Mastic Asphalt for Roofing (Limestone Aggregate). Proportions of component
ingredients shall be generally within the limits laid down in the B.S. but the ratio of
bitumen to Lake asphalt shall be appropriate for use in tropical climates. The
asphalt shall be applied in two coats each of 10mm thickness laid to the falls formed
in the screeds, by an approved Sub-Contractor.
The first coat of all horizontal work shall be laid on a single layer of black sheathing
felt complying with B.S. 747, Table 4A (i) laid and lapped in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Rates for asphalt shall include for underlay.
All vertical surfaces, tops of parapets, gutter sides and bottoms shall be finished with
one coat of bituminous aluminium paint. All other surfaces shall have a 12mm layer
of black trap chippings graded from 6 - 12mm, laid loose.
MASTIC ASPHALT TANKING
All asphalt tanking shall be manufactured and applied in accordance with B.S. 1097
by an approved Sub-Contractor.

F/6
ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEETING
Asbestos cement roof sheeting and accessories shall be as manufactured by Kenya
Asbestos Cement Co. Ltd., P.O. Box 90662, Mombasa, and fixed strictly in
accordance with their printed instructions and generally in accordance with
International Standard 459.
The sheeting will be fixed to steel purlins with galvanised hook bolts and patent
P.V.C. combined capping, rubber washer and metal nut.
Holes shall be drilled through the ridges of corrugations not in the hollows.
Ridges and other accessories shall be fixed to timber purlins as above described.
Fixed bolts and screws shall comply with B.S. 1494.
Side laps shall be minimum one and a half corrugations and end laps shall be as
specified.
GALVANISED CORRUGATED IRON SHEETING
Roof sheeting and accessories shall be pre-painted galvanised steel as
manufactured by Galsheet Kenya Ltd., P.O. Box 78162, Nairobi, and fixed strictly in
accordance with their printed instructions and generally in accordance with
international standards.
ROOFING TILES
The roofing tiles shall be as specified, of approved quality and manufacture, uniform
in size, shape and colour, free from twist or other defects to be obtained from an
approved manufacturer, supplied and fixed in accordance with the manufacturers
specifications and recommendations.
The ridge and hip shall be socketed tiles of approved quality, shape and
manufacture, to match the roofing tiles in colour with rebated joints and free from
twist and other defects.
The roofing tiles shall be hung on timber/concrete battens and shall be laid to
accurate gauge and each roof shall be set out to take an exact number of tiles
without cutting.
Hip and ridge tiles to be bedded and jointed in cement mortar (1:4) and pointed at
joints and ends and intersections in coloured cement to match colour of tiles. All
angles and intersections shall be neatly cut and rubbed to form a close joint.

CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

QUALITY OF TIMBER
The qualities of timber stated hereinafter are to be in accordance with the Grading
Rules (Third Edition) dated 8th April, 1959, approved by the Forest Department of
Kenya.
All timber described as 'Sawn Podocarpus' shall be Second (Select) Grade Sawn
Podocarpus Gracilior.
All timber described as 'Sawn Cypress' shall be Second Grade Sawn Cupressus.
All timber described as 'Wrot Cypress' shall be First (Prime) Grade Wrot Cupressus.
All timber described as 'Wrot Cedar' shall be First (Prime) Grade Wrot Red Cedar
(Juniperus Procera).

F/7
All timber described as 'Wrot Meru Oak' shall be First (Prime Grade Wrot Meru
Oak).
All timber described as 'Wrot Camphor' shall be First (Prime) Grade Wrot Camphor
specially selected for straight grain and colouring. No joinery work is to be put in
hand until the Architect has seen and approved the colour and grain of the timber.
Where hardwood is specified it shall be Mvuli, Mahogany, Mninga, Camphor,
Rosewood, Blackwood or Meru Oak as selected by the Architect at the letting of the
contract and all tenders will be deemed to have allowed for this.
When employed for carpentry work the above timbers shall be well seasoned to a
moisture content not exceeding 18% of the dry weight.
When employed for joinery work the above timbers shall be well seasoned to a
moisture content not exceeding 6% of the dry weight.
GENERALLY
All timber for permanent work in the buildings shall before use, be dry and be
approved by the Architect for quality in accordance with the foregoing specification
for its respective grade. All structural timber shall be in accordance with C. P. 112.
All Carpenter's work shall be left with sawn surfaces unless particularly specified to
be wrot. Scantlings and boarding shall be accurately sawn and shall be left uniform
in width and thickness throughout. All Carpenter's work shall be accurately set out
together and securely fixed in the best possible manner with properly made joints.
Provide all brads, nails, screws, bolts, etc. as necessary. Nails shall comply with
B.S. 1202 and bolts with B.S. 916.
Knotting shall comply with B.S. 1336
Variations from specified dimensions of scantling shall not exceed the tolerance
stated in the aforementioned Grading Rules. Boards 25mm thick or less shall hold
up to the specified sizes. All timber shall be as long as possible and practicable to
eliminate joints.
Ends of timbers required to be built into walls shall have 12mm space between same
and walling. All ends of timbers to be strapped with hoop iron and primed.
All Joiner's work shall be wrot unless otherwise specified.
All mouldings shall be accurately run and finished and all arrises shall be slightly
rounded. Framed work shall be cut out, properly tenoned, shouldered, etc., and
framed together as soon after the commencement of the works as is practicable but
should not be wedged up until required for fixing in position and any portions that
warp, get in winding, develop shakes or other defects shall be replaced with new.
As soon as required for fixing in position the framing shall be glued together with
best quality glue and properly wedged or pinned, etc., as described.
Unless otherwise described oval or round brads will be used for fixing all face work,
all heads shall be properly punched in. Where described as pellated work shall be
countersunk screwed and the screw heads covered with timber pellets to match the
adjacent timber.
Should any of the Carpenter's or Joiner's work shrink, warp, wind or develop any
other defects within six months after the completion of the works, the same shall be
removed and new fixed in its place together with all other work which may be
affected thereby, all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

F/8
INSECT DAMAGE
All timber, whether graded or ungraded, and including shuttering, scaffolding and the
like shall be free of live borer beetle or other insect attack when brought upon the
site. The Contractor shall be responsible up to the end of the maintenance period
for executing at his own cost all work necessary to eradicate insect attack to timber
which becomes evident including the replacement of timbers attacked or suspected
of being attacked, notwithstanding that the timber concerned may have been
inspected and passed as fit for use.
DIMENSIONS
(a) Timber not specified to be wrought shall be as from the saw and full to the
nominal dimensions stated. No undersizes shall be permitted but oversize to the
following tolerances may be allowed:-
(i) 1.5mm oversize on dimensions up to 25mm
(ii) 3mm oversize on dimensions up to 50mm
(iii) 6mm oversize on dimensions over 50mm.
(b) Where 'nominal' dimensions are stated for wrot timber a tolerance of 3mm shall
be allowed for each wrot face.
Before putting in hand any joinery work, whether built-in or fixed later, the joiner is to
ascertain and check on site all dimensions which affect or govern the joinery work.
PRESERVATION OF TIMBER
All timber described as impregnated shall be vacuum pressure impregnated with
Tanalith or Celcure preservative in accordance with Specification No. 1/56
(Buildings) for the Vacuum/Pressure Impregnation of Timber with Hickson's 'Tanalith'
wood preservative issued by Hickson's Timber Impregnation Co. (G.B.) Ltd., or other
approved source. Where timber is cut or bored after impregnation the exposed
surfaces are to be liberally swabbed with Wolmanol.
SPECIES OF TIMBER
Only those timbers specified in these Bills of Quantities are to be used for the works,
unless alternatives are authorised by the Architect.
SEASONING OF TIMBER
All carpentry timbers are to be seasoned to a moisture content of not more than 18%
of the dry weight. All joinery timbers are to be seasoned to a moisture content of not
more than 6% of the dry weight. The Contractor is to make available on site a meter
for testing moisture content of all timber delivered.
PREPARATION AND PROTECTION OF TIMBER
(a) All timber necessary for the works is to be purchased immediately the Contract is
signed, and when delivered is to be open stacked for such further seasoning as
may be necessary. Preparation of the timber is to be commenced simultaneously
with the commencement of the works generally.
(b) All timber and assembled woodwork is to be protected from the weather and
stored in such a way as to prevent attack by decay, fungi, termites or other insects.
CLEARING UP
The Contractor is to clear up and destroy or remove all cut-ends, shavings and other
woodwaste from all parts of the buildings and the site generally as the work
progresses and at the conclusion of the works.
F/9
TIMBER IN MASONRY, ETC.
Ends of timber built into walls shall be thoroughly brush treated with creosote or
other approved preservatives and clean air space maintained around the timbers
where they adjoin the walls.
PRIMING WOODWORK
All woodwork which is to be painted or hidden from view, backs of door frames, etc.
are to be primed and painted one coat before fixing. Allow for touching up priming
during progress of works.
JOINTING
(a) All joints must be made as specified or detailed and the execution of all jointing
shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect.
(b) Joining surfaces of all connections exposed to the weather are to be thickly
primed except where glueing is specified. Surfaces are to be in good contact over
the whole area of the joint before fastenings are applied.
(c) No nails, screws or bolts are to be placed in any end split. If splitting is likely or is
encountered in the course of the work, holes for nails are to be pre-bored at
diameters not exceeding 4/5ths of the diameter of the nails. Clenched nails must be
bent at right angles to the grain. Lead holes are to be bored for all screws.
(d) Where the use of bolts and washers are specified the holes are to be bored from
both sides of the timber and are to be a diameter D + D/16 where D is the diameter
of the bolt. Nuts must be brought up tight but care is to be taken to avoid crushing of
the timber under the washers.
(e) Joints in joinery must be as specified or detailed and so designed and secured as
to resist or compensate for any stresses to which they may be subjected. All nails,
sprigs,etc., are to be punched and puttied.
(f) Loose joints are to be made where provision must be made for shrinkage, glued
joints where shrinkage need not be considered and where sealed joints are required.
All glued joints shall be crosstongued or otherwise reinforced.
(g) Glues for load-bearing joints or where conditions may be damp must be of the
resin type. For non-load-bearing joints, or where dry conditions can be guaranteed,
casin or organic glues may be used.
JOINERY
(a) All joinery shall be accurately set out on boards to full size for the information and
guidance of artisans with all joints, ironwork and other works connected therewith
fully delineated. This setting out shall be submitted to the Architect and approved
before the work is commenced.
(b) All joinery shall be executed with workmanship of the best quality in strict
accordance with the detailed drawings. All mouldings, shall be accurately and truly
run and all work planed, sand-papered and finished to the approval of the Architect.
(c) All framed work shall be cut out, properly tenoned, shouldered etc., and framed
together as soon after the commencement of the building as is practicable but shall
not be wedged up until th building is ready for fixing the same and any portions that
warp, wind, develop shakes or other defects shall be replaced with new. As soon as
required for fixing in the building the framing shall be glued together and properly
wedged or pinned, etc., as directed.
(d) Should any of the joinery shrink, warp, wind or develop any other defects within
the maintenance period specified in the Contract the same shall be removed and
F/10
new fixed in its place together with all other work which may be affected thereby. All
at the Contractor's expense.
TOLERANCE
Reasonable tolerance shall be provided at all connections between joinery works
and the building carcass, so that any irregularities, settlement or other movements
shall be adequately allowed for.
SCRIBING
All cornices, architraves, frames and other joinery works shall be accurately scribed
to fit the contour of any irregular surfaces against which they may be required to
form a close butt connection. In particular, architraves are to be cut to fit against
side walls and maintain proper mitres at top corners.
SHRINKAGE
The arrangement, jointing and fixing of all joinery shall be such that shrinkage in any
part and in any direction shall be compensated for and not impair the strength or
appearance of the work or cause damage to adjacent structures
VENEERS
All veneers are to be specially selected for grain and colouring and no veneered
work shall be put in hand until the Architect has approved the sample of grain and
colour.
NATURAL FINISH
When natural finish is specified, the timber in adjacent pieces shall be matched and
uniform or symmetrical in colour and grain. The surface finish is to be as specified.

FLUSH DOORS
Flush doors shall be 3mm plywood faced doors with solid or semi-solid cores, in
accordance with B.S. 459 Part 2, obtained from a manufacturer approved by the
Architect and equal in every respect to a sample to be submitted to and approved by
the Architect. Doors shall be lipped with hardwood strips on all edges and shall be
finished for painting on both faces unless otherwise stated. Plywood for use on
external doors shall be of exterior grade as described later.
The proportion of solid area in semi-solid doors shall not be less than 50% of the
total and shall be evenly distributed throughout the door.
CHIPBOARD
Chipboard shall comply in all respects with B.S. 2604 for medium density resin
bonded wood chipboard and shall be veneered or not as shown on the drawings and
as described in the Bills of Quantities. Chipboard of non-British origin shall comply
with the tests enumerated in the said B.S. and samples shall be submitted to the
Architect for this purpose and for his approval.
BLOCKBOARD
Blockboard is to be of approved quality, solid and glued throughout. Where
described as faced it shall be faced with an approved veneer of the timber specified.

F/11
PLYWOOD
Plywood shall be in accordance with B.S. 1455 and shall be of second grade and
that for use externally shall be of external grade conforming at least to Clause 138 of
the B.S.
HARDBOARD
Hardboard shall be oil-tempered or otherwise as specified of the thicknesses
specified and is to be glued and fixed with the special hardboard nails supplied by
the manufacturer. Sheeting is to be wetted the day before fixing. All sawn edges to
be carefully sandpapered.
SOFTBOARD
The softboard is to be of approved quality and manufacture, fixed with galvanised
clout nails or an approved adhesive as necessary, or both as specified.
PLASTIC LAMINATE
Plastic laminate shall be as manufactured by Formica Ltd. or other equal and
approved and shall be worked and fixed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions with the adhesive recommended by the manufacturer.
Colours shall be selected by the Architect from samples to be submitted early in the
Contract.
PLUGS
All plugs described as fixing for joinery etc., shall be approved plugs such as
Rawlplugs or Philplugs set into holes drilled in masonry in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction. No wooden plugs are to be used.
PROTECT JOINERY
Any fixed joinery which is liable to become bruised or damaged in any way shall be
properly cased and protected by the Contractor until the completion of the works.
SITE DIMENSIONS
Before putting in hand any joinery work, whether to be built in with the carcass or
fixed later, the joiner is to ascertain and check all dimensions on the site which affect
or govern joinery work.
BILLS OF QUANTITIES DIMENSIONS
All wrot timber dimensions given in the Bills of Quantities are finished sizes unless
otherwise stated.
IRONMONGERY
The Contractor is to check consignments of ironmongery upon receipt and store
them in safe keeping until required for fixing.
All ironmongery shall be fitted and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Rates for fixing are to include for all cutting, sinking, boring, morticing
and fitting in hardwood or softwood and for supplying all necessary and matching
screws. Rates for door furniture shall also include for fixing before painting, removal
during painting operations and afterwards fixing and for labelling all keys with door
references and handing to the Architect upon completion.
All locks, springs and other items of ironmongery with movable parts shall be
properly tested, cleaned and adjusted where necessary and left in perfect working
order upon completion of the works by the Contractor who shall include for this in his
prices for fixing.
F/12
GENERALLY
All pencil marks are to be removed before oiling or varnishing joinery work. Leave all
joinery work perfect and clean without nail holes; clean up all waste and protect
finished work from staining or damage. Oil all locks and adjust to give a perfect fit
and leave clean.
METAL WORK

GENERALLY
All materials shall be of the best of their respective kinds and conform at least to the
relevant B.S. where such exists. All work shall be carried out strictly as directed and
approved by the Architect before fixing.
WELDING
Welding shall comply with the provisions of B.S. 538.
MILD STEEL
Shall be of approved manufacture complying with the requirements of B.S. 15.
Welding to comply with the requirements of B.S. 538, 938 and 1856. Screws, bolts,
washers, etc., to comply with the requirements of B.S. 916 and 1494.
GALVANISED STEEL SHEET
Shall be of approved manufacture, free from all defects and shall hold up to the
gauge specified. Galvanising shall be to B.S. 729 Part 7.
BOLTS AND SET SCREWS
All bolts to be the best screw bolts with hexagonal heads and nuts and round
washers.
Set screws to be similar but with circular flat slotted head for screwing or with round
countersunk slotted head, similar to a wood screw, the threaded end suitable for
screwing into tapped steel to the required depth.
ALUMINIUM
Aluminium sheet shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1470 and be suitable for
the purpose required.
Extruded aluminium sections shall be obtained from an approved source and be
equal to samples to be submitted to and approved by the Architect. The surface
finish shall be matt.
HOOP IRON.
Provide 25mm wide 24 gauge hoop iron reinforcement and anchors to be laid where
specified under masonry, and anchored in ring beams.
PRICING INFORMATION
Prices for all welded work shall include for preparing, welding and grinding to a
smooth finish.
FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES

GENERALLY
The whole of the plasterwork and other wall, floor and ceiling finishes shall be
executed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect and any work rejected shall be
F/13
taken down and re-executed by the Contractor at his own expense. All scaffolding,
temporary rules and screeds, tools or special appliances required shall be furnished
by the Contractor.
CEMENT
Shall be as described in 'Walling'
LIME
Shall be as described in 'Walling'
SAND
Shall be as described in 'Walling'
WATER
Shall be as described in Structural Engineers Specification.
WORKMANSHIP
All concrete beds or slabs shall be thoroughly brushed, cleaned, hacked if
necessary and well wetted and flushed over with a cement and sand (1:1) grout
immediately before screeds or pavings are laid.
Screeds and cement pavings shall be laid in accordance with the relevant B.S.
Code of Practice and in alternate bays generally not exceeding 3m x 3m with neat
butt joints and shall be damp cured with sand or sawdust and kept damp for at least
7 days after laying.
Adequate time intervals must be left between successive coats in two coat work in
order that the drying shrinkage of the under-coat may be substantially complete. All
internal and external angles shall be pencil rounded.
BOARD MARKED FINISH
Board marked finish is to be provided where shown on the drawings and shall be
priced against the formwork item of 'Extra over formwork for board marked finish'.
The shuttering boards shall be heavily grained knotty cypress, or similar and
approved, well seasoned and free of wind and shakes. The boards shall be in
100mm widths fixed vertically or horizontally as directed. The edges shall be butt
jointed to maintain a flat surface. Unless otherwise approved, boards shall have a
maximum of four uses and between each use shall be carefully cleaned from
adhering grout and lightly oiled with an approved non-staining mould oil.
Every care and attention shall be paid to obtaining and maintaining throughout the
course of the works a satisfactory visual appearance, free from blow holes, hungry
patches and other blemishes and uniform in colour and texture.
Construction joints shall be as shown on the drawings or otherwise the pour each
day shall be as directed by the Engineer.
Samples panels will be required for approval of the Engineer before work
commences.
Protective covering is to be applied as necessary where finished concrete is liable to
damage or staining.
CEMENT AND SAND PAVING.
Cement and sand paving shall be composed of one part cement to one part sand to
three parts of 6 - 3mm gauge black trap grit, applied in two coats to the thickness

F/14
shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall allow for finishing surfaces perfectly
smooth and hard with a steel trowel and dead level or to true falls if so desired.
SCREEDS AND BACKINGS
Screeds and backings shall be composed of one part of cement to three parts of
sand unless otherwise specified in the Bills of Quantities by volume and shall be
trowelled hard and smooth to the texture required by the finish to be applied.
WATERPROOFING AGENT
Screeds and pavings described as incorporating waterproofing agent shall have
Lillington's No. 1 Metallic Liquid or similar mixed in. Mixing and application shall be
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
BONDING LIQUID
The bonding liquid shall be Sealocrete Sealobond high P.V.A. content brushed on.
Surfaces to be treated shall be thoroughly cleaned down and be free from all loose
material, dust, mould, oil, grease and any other foreign matter. The bonding liquid
shall be allowed to dry before screeds and renderings are applied. All mixing and
application shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturers, Sealocrete Products Ltd.
HARDENING AGENT
Screeds and pavings described as incorporating hardening agent shall incorporate
Sealocrete Double Strength Premix Plus S.R.A. mixed with the gauging water at the
rate of 2.3 litres of Sealocrete to every 50 kgms. of cement. Mixing and application
shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturers, Sealocrete Products Ltd.
TERRAZZO AND GRANOLITHIC WORK
The whole of the terrazzo and granolithic work is to be carried out by a specialist
Sub-Contractor who is to be specifically approved by the Architect and the
Contractor will be required to make arrangements for the execution of this work and
bear all expenses incurred. No change in the rates for this work inserted by the
Contractor in these Bills of Quantities will be allowed.
The materials used and method of construction for terrazzo work are to be in
accordance with the B.S. Code of Practice C.P. 204/1951.
The surface finish to terrazzo or granolithic is to be brushed, ground or polished as
specified. These textures are to comply with samples approved by the Architect.
The terrazzo topping is to be 20mm thick with imported white cement and 12mm
marble aggregate, rolled and trowelled to a dense even surface and rubbed down at
completion t a grit finished surface free from holes and blemishes. Colours shall be
as selected by the Architect. The paving is to be laid in squares divided by plastic
strips anchored securely in the screed and having their top edges truly level with the
finished floor surface. The terrazzo work is to be laid and finished complete to the
approval of the Architect. The screed between the terrazzo topping and the
concrete floor is to be cement and sand (1:3) laid by the Sub-Contractor.
The granolithic topping is to be 15mm thick and shall consist of one part coloured
cement to two parts aggregate to 6mm gauge mixed with 15% fine dust. Aggregate
is to be 70% black trap and remainder approved local coloured stone. Colours shall
be as selected by the Architect. Paving is to be rolled and trowelled to a dense even
surface and rubbed down at completion to a grit finished surface free from holes and
blemishes. The paving is to be laid in squares divided by plastic strips anchored

F/15
securely in the screed and having their top edges level with the finished floor
surface. The granolithic work is to be laid and polished complete to the approval of
the Architect. The screed between the granolithic topping and the concrete floor is
to be cement and sand (1:3), laid by the Sub-Contractor.
The Contractor is to twice scrub the topping with soap and water before twice wax
polishing and handing over.
MARBLE
Marble floor paving or wall cladding shall be compact and dense with a density of
2700 Kg/m3 as manufactured by Athi River Mining Ltd., P.O. Box 41908, Nairobi or
other equal and approved, fixed in accordance with BS CP 298:1972 and
manufacturer's instructions all to the Architect's approval. For floor paving, marble
must be hardwearing and non-slip.
The marble supplier shall prepare fully dimensioned drawings from details supplied
by the Architect and from site survey. Key numbers of each store shall be shown,
together with details of all metal anchorages. No marble shall be fixed/laid until
these drawings are approved by the Architect and the Contractor and local authority
if necessary.
Exposed surfaces shall be finished in accordance with an approved sample.
Cramp holes and mortices shall be carefully drilled or cut to avoid stunning or
fracture of the material adjacent to the hole or mortice.
The fixing cramps shall be adequately inset into the supporting background,
preferably with under cut dowel holes and grouted in (1:3) cement/sand mortar, or
other equal and approved epoxy/polyester resin mortars. A cavity between cladding
and backing of 20mm minimum should be maintained except where dabs of weak
mortar or lime putty are required to position the slabs. The back of slabs shall be
coated with "shellac" or other equal and approved paint.
Metal anchorage shall be made from suitable non-ferrous metal and shall be of such
size and dimension adequate to support loads imposed on them.
The length and height dimensions of individual dimension of slabs shall be + 1mm of
the specified sizes. Thickness shall be within 3mm from that specified except on the
exposed ends.
Internal wall cladding shall be fixed with tight joints and external cladding shall have
3mm joints. All joints to be filled with coloured cement and sand mortar to match
marble. Paving shall be bedded solid on cement and sand screed.
The whole of marble work is to be executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.
QUARRY TILES
Where indicated lay approved clay quarry tiles bedded in cement. Joints to be
10mm wide and slightly recessed pointed in pigmented cement colour to match
colour of quarry tiles to the approval of the Architect. Quarry tiles are to be laid as
skirtings to these areas. Cement must not be smeared over the face of the tiles
which must be selected for variety of colour and evenness of size.
VINYL ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES
Vinyl asbestos floor tiles shall be of the thickness specified as manufactured by
Dunlop Kenya Ltd., or other equal and approved, and of colours to be selected by
the Architect and shall be bedded in suitable mastic to a square pattern.
The whole of the floor tiling is to be executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.

F/16
Screeds must be perfectly smooth level clean and dry before laying commences and
tiling must be laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Tiles
shall comply with B.S. 3260 and 3261 respectively. Prices shall include for giving
the floor coverings two coats of an approved emulsion wax floor polish or other
approved protective coating.
PARQUETRY
Parquetry is to be 8mm thick on building paper or similar backing bedded in hot
bituminous mastic. After laying remove backing paper, sand to a smooth surface
and finish with three coats of Polyurethane matt clear sealer.
The whole of the parquetry is to be executed by an approved Sub-Contractor.
Screeds must be perfectly smooth level clean and dry before laying commences and
parquetry must be laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
DIVIDING STRIPS
Dividing strips shall be 3mm thick and of a similar height as the paving in which they
are embedded. Strips shall be cut to lengths and embedded in the pavings to form
margins or bays to a detailed pattern or between differing floor finishes.
Prices for dividing strips are to include all necessary cutting required to ensure a
flush level surface with the paving.
NON-SLIP POLISHED PAVINGS
Where pavings are described as non-slip they shall have carborundum dust
sprinkled evenly over the surface at the rate of one kilogram per square metre lightly
trowelled in whilst still green.
LIGHTWEIGHT SCREEDS
Lightweight screeds shall be composed of cement, sand and approved lightweight
vermiculite (1:4:8) finished with a minimum 12mm thickness of cement and sand
(1:5) laid whilst the base course is still green and trowelled smooth to the satisfaction
of the roofing or flooring Sub-Contractor. Alternatively an approved pumice
aggregate screed may be used to the approval of the Architect.
The Architect reserves the right to delete the lightweight screeds from the
Contractor's work and to order their execution by a Nominated Sub-Contractor. No
claim for loss of profit will be entertained in this eventuality.
DUST PROOFING COMPOUND
Concrete surfaces to be dust proofed shall have two coats of Sealocrete Concrete
Surface Dressing applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
PLASTERING AND RENDERING GENERALLY
All surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be brushed clean and be well wetted
before plaster is applied. All plaster and rendering shall be kept continuously damp
for seven days after application. All arrises shall be finished true and slightly
rounded except where otherwise stated, and shall be run at the same time as the
adjoining plaster. No partially or wholly set plaster or rendering will be allowed to be
used or re-mixed.
The Contractor shall prepare samples of the plastering and rendering as directed
until the quality, texture and finish required is obtained and approved by the Architect
after which all plastering executed in the work shall conform to the respective
approved samples.
F/17
The Contractor shall cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other defects
and leave the whole of the work perfect on completion. When making good defects,
the plaster or rendering shall be cut out to a rectangular shape with edges undercut
to form dovetailed key, and all finished flush with face of surrounding plaster or
rendering.
Rates for plastering and rendering are to include for raking out joints of walling or
hacking concrete to form a key. Instead of hacking the Contractor will be permitted
to treat concrete surfaces, at his own expense, with bonding fluid, such as
'Plastaweld' manufactured by I. Manger and Son Ltd., or other equal and approved
applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
INTERNAL PLASTER
Internal plaster shall be applied in two coats as follows, overall 12mm thick unless
otherwise described:-
(a) 9mm First coat consisting of cement, and sand (1:4) well scratched, wetted and
keyed to receive finishing coat.
(b) 3mm Finishing coat consisting of cement and lime putty (1:5) skim coat finished
with a steel trowel to a smooth and even surface. Adequate time intervals must be
left between successive coats in order that the drying shrinkage of the under coat
may be substantially complete. All internal and external angles shall be pencil
rounded.
EXTERNAL RENDERING
External rendering shall consist of cement and sand (1:8) applied in one coat and
finished with a wood float as specified. Unless otherwise described rendering is to
be 12mm thick applied in one coat. Rendering described as 20mm thick or over
shall be applied in two coats.
TYROLEAN RENDER
Tyrolean render shall be composed of Colocrete or Snowcrete coloured or white
cement and a special aggregate supplied as Cullamix and mixed in the proportion of
two and a quarter to two and a half parts Cullamix to one part water applied with an
approved hand operated machine. A finished thickness of 6mm should be obtained
in stages until the crisp texture is obtained completely obliterating the background
surface and as approved by the Architect. An equivalent made-up mixture with an
approved aggregate similar to Cullamix may be used with the Architect's approval.
JOINTS
At junctions of structure frame and panel walling, cut through the entire thickness of
plaster with a trowel leaving a gap of not more than 1mm width.
CRACKS AND DEFECTS
The Contractor shall cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other defects
and leave the whole of the plastering and rendering perfect at completion. When
making good defects the plaster shall be cut out to a rectangular shape with edges
undercut, to form dovetailed kay, and all finished flush with the face of the
surrounding plaster.
BAGGING
All internal and/or external surfaces specified as bagged are to be treated with a
complete covering of 1:4 liquid cement/sand wash thoroughly rubbed in with an old
sack to fill all cavities.

F/18
CERAMIC TILES
Ceramic tiles shall be from an approved manufacturer, and shall conform with the
requirements of B.S. 1281. Tiles shall be of standard quality and unless otherwise
specifically described shall be size 200 x 250 x 6mm thick for walls and 200 x 200 x
8mm thick for floors. Tiles shall be laid with continuous 2mm wide straight joints with
plastic spacers and internal angles shall be butt jointed. Plastic edge beads shall be
used at all external angles and at edges of panels. Tiles shall be well soaked in
water, bedded in approved tile adhesive, pointed in white cement, and cleaned and
polished on completion.
SAMPLES
The Contractor shall without charge prepare samples of work as directed until the
quality, texture and finish required are obtained and approved by the Architect, after
which all work executed shall conform to respective approved samples.
APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall state on the form provided and included as a tender document,
the names of the Sub-Contractors he proposes to employ, and he shall not employ
any other Sub-Contractors for the work without the written permission of the
Architect.
PRICING INFORMATION
Prices for paving, beds and screeds shall include for the preparation of the concrete
floor and painting with cement grout, as described; for any extra thickness
consequent upon the concrete floor not being finished to true levels; and for laying
over electrical conduits including reinforcing as necessary to the approval of the
Architect.
Prices for plastering and rendering shall include for the preparation of the surfaces
including raking out joints of brickwork or blockwork and hacking surfaces of
concrete to form key, and for any extra thickness or dubbing out consequent upon
any irregularities or inaccuracies in the surfaces to be covered.
Prices for terrazzo and granolithic work shall include for beds and backings,
executing in the colours selected by the Architect, laying to panels and designs as
may be directed, and for polishing at completion. Dividing strips forming panels and
designs will be measured and paid for separately.
Prices for external finishings shall include for executing work at any height above
ground and for any necessary additional scaffolding, ladders, cradles, etc.
If required by the Architect, or if indicated on the drawings prices for internal
plastering and external rendering shall include for forming a fair splayed edge at all
junctions with fair faced concrete surfaces and for forming 12mm wide grooves with
fair splayed edges at junctions of walls with structural members and at soffits of
slabs etc. Prices shall also include for V-grooves or rounded grooves, not exceeding
12mm wide, in external rendering to form decorative panels.
Prices for beds and backings are to allow for a true and even finish with a steel float,
which is to be scraped clean by the Contractor before receiving the finish, to the
satisfaction of the finishing Sub-Contractor.
PROTECTING FLOOR FINISHINGS
The Contractor is to allow for protecting all floor and staircase finishings after laying,
whether executed by himself or a Sub-Contractor and will be held responsible for

F/19
any damage to the finishings after laying. All floors are to be cleaned on completion
of the building before handing over.
GENERALLY
Protect all fittings, joinery and finishings from plaster and other finishings and clean
up all marks on completion.

GLAZING
GENERALLY
All glass shall be of approved manufacture in accordance with B.S. 952, and free
from flaws, bubbles, specks, and other imperfections cut to size to fit the opening for
which it is required with not more than 1.6mm tolerance all round. All glass to be
delivered in proper containers with maker's name, guarantee, type of glass and
thickness or weight of glass attached to the outside of the container.
The clear sheet glass shall be Ordinary Glazing (O.Q.) quality sheet glass.
The obscured glass shall be of a pattern approved after the Contractor has
submitted samples to the Architect at the beginning of the Contract.
Tempered glass shall be of the thicknesses specified.
The putty for glazing shall be tropical putty of approved manufacture suitable for
glazing to metal or wood frames as hereinafter specified.
All putty shall be delivered on site in the original manufacturer's sealed cans or
drums. The putty is to be removed from the drum well kneaded with the minimum of
linseed oil and left for 24 hours before using.
The rebates and backs of handle brackets to metal windows shall be painted one
coat before puttying. Before glazing the rebates of all windows shall be adequately
back puttied.
Within 14 days the putty must dry and harden without wrinkling of the surface or
caking and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surface of the glass and the frame.
The washleather strip shall be approved by the Architect and shall be cut to fit the
exact line of bead.
The wires of Georgian wired glass, in adjacent panes, are to align both ways.
PRICING INFORMATION
Prices for glass shall include for all cutting and glazing to frames as described.
PAINTING AND DECORATING

GENERALLY
The whole of the work shall be executed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect,
and all work rejected is to be re-executed by the Contractor at his own expense.
Subject to the foregoing, the methods of application adopted i.e. brush, spray, roller,
etc. are at the discretion of the Contractor, unless otherwise described.
All paints shall be Grade A in accordance with the Ministry of Works approved paint
list.
Sumps and drains shall not be used for the disposal of waste or dirty water.

F/20
MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall make good after other trades have carried out maintenance
work. In cases where the defective work is not caused by, or the responsibility of,
the Contractor, or his Sub-Contractors, he should make arrangements for payment
with the party concerned. Where cracks have been made good, apply two coats to
the new filling and one coat to the whole wall in which the crack has appeared.
MATERIALS
Any deviation from the materials and makes specified must be approved in writing
by the Architect to whom application must be made before decoration starts.
IRONMONGERY
All ironmongery already fixed is to be removed before painting doors and refixed on
completion of the finishing coat. If any paint should get on to ironmongery, it must
be removed with chemical solvents and not scratched off.
APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall arrange for the painting and decorating work to be executed by
an approved Sub-Contractor. The Contractor shall state on the form provided and
included as a tender document the name of the Sub-Contractor he proposes to
employ and he shall not employ any other Sub-Contractor for the work without the
written permission of the Architect.
MIXING
All materials shall be delivered on site intact in the original containers and shall be
mixed and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
No addition will be allowed to be made locally without the express permission of the
Architect.
COLOURS
The priming, undercoats, and finishing coats shall each be of differing tints, the
priming and undercoats shall be the correct brands and tints to suit the respective
finishing coats, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All finishing
coats shall be of the colour and type specified by the Architect.
The Contractor will be required to paint trial panels and will be required to adjust tints
as necessary.
AREAS TO BE READY FOR PAINTING ETC.
Before the painting or decorating is started the Contractor shall arrange that all other
trades have been completed and other tradesmen removed from the vicinity of the
area to be painted. All plaster, mortar, concrete, oil or stains of any kind shall be
removed by the Contractor from work to be decorated before painting commences.
PREPARATION
Plastered and rendered surfaces to be decorated shall be allowed to dry for a
minimum of four weeks before decoration commences.
Plaster finished with a steel trowel and fair face concrete surfaces shall be well
rubbed down filled and made good as necessary and thoroughly cleaned down
immediately before decoration is applied.
Plaster finished with a wood float or other rough textured surface of a similar nature
shall be made good as necessary and thoroughly brushed clean immediately before
decoration is applied.

F/21
Insulating board or similar surfaces shall be filled and made good as necessary and
lightly brushed down to remove all dirt, dust and loose particles.
Metal work to be painted shall be scaled clean and thoroughly wire brushed.
Woodwork to be painted shall be well rubbed down. All knots shall be covered with
good knotting before priming and all defects shall be filled with hard stopping after
priming. Plywood shall be brush filled over the entire surface
Woodwork to receive finishes other than paint shall have all stains and pencil marks
removed, be well rubbed down and have all defects levelled up with hard stopping of
a colour to match the adjoining surface.
Woodwork to be clear varnished shall be well rubbed down and the varnish is to be
applied with a chamois leather pad, rubbed back with fine graded steelwool between
coats and afterwards buffed up to produce an approved finish.
All woodwork to be varnished is to have all pencil and other marks removed and
surfaces smoothed down prior to application.
PAINTS
All paints used should be obtained from one of the following manufacturers after
obtaining the Architect's approval and of the product specification hereinafter
described.
a) Robbialac
b) Crown Paints
c) Dulux Paints
d) Sadolins
PLASTIC EMULSION PAINTS
Plastic emulsion paint for internal and external application shall be of a manufacture
approved by the Architect.
BITUMINOUS SOLUTION
Bituminous solution for use on coated pipes shall be obtained from a manufacturer
approved by the Architect.
PRIMERS
Unprimed steelwork shall be primed with a Red Lead Primer.
Galvanised steelwork shall be treated with a mordant solution and primed with a
Zinc Chromate Primer.
Woodwork shall be primed with a Pink Wood Primer.
UNDERCOATING
The undercoat for use under enamel finishing coats shall be an approved undercoat.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTS
Product specification for paints shall be in accordance with the composition
requirements and may be required to be tested by the M.O.W. Materials Testing
Branch.

F/22
 1st Quality 2nd Quality 1st Quality Alkyd
Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint Gloss Paint

Non-volatile(B.S Must not exceed Not more than Less than 50%
Content3900 B2) 50% by weight
60% by weight by weight

Pigment Volume Not more than Not more than Less than
Concentration 5% 70% 25%

Resin type Vinyl Acetate/ Vinyl Acetate/ Long Oil Alkyd

Acrylic Ester Acrylic Ester minimum oil length
Copolymer Copolymer not less than 60%

Opacity Not less than Not less than Not less than
requirement
80% 70% 90%
(contrast ratio to
B.S. 3900 D4)

Pigment/ Binder Not more than Not more than Not more
Ratio 2.25:1 2.75:1 2.25:1

PRICING INFORMATION
The numbers of coats stated in the descriptions in these Bills of Quantities shall be
applied in addition to any primers, stoppers, fillers, sealers, knotting, stopping, etc.
required. The Contractor's prices shall be deemed to include for supplying and
applying all such preparatory materials as may be required by the Standard
Specification as recommended by the manufacturer of the finishing coat for the
particular surface to be covered. The Contractor's prices shall further include for all
other preparatory.

F/23
 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION
GENERAL
ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER
Where the word 'Engineer' is used in these descriptions of Materials and Workmanship, it
shall in all appropriate cases be used and construed as the 'Structural Engineer'. For this
purpose the Engineer shall be deemed vested with the duties of and be the representative
of the Architect.
DISCREPANCIES IN DESCRIPTIONS
Descriptions of materials and workmanship contained in the Bills of Quantities measured
items shall take precedence over descriptions contained in Appendices in the event of
discrepancies between the two, unless the Engineer shall otherwise direct.
TESTS AND SAMPLES
Unless otherwise described in the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor will be responsible for
all the costs involved in testing materials as described hereinafter. He will also be
responsible for all the costs involved in supplying samples of materials or workmanship as
required hereinafter to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cost of replacing materials
fixed or placed in position which do not comply with the required test results or approved
samples shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Samples of materials shall be submitted
as soon as possible after the Contract is let. No deliveries in bulk shall be made until the
samples are approved by the Engineer.
STANDARDS
All materials and goods supplied for incorporation in the works must comply with any
relevant standards issued by the Kenya Bureau of Standards or by the British Standard
Institution.

EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK

SITE CLEARANCE
Site clearance shall include the cutting down of all trees, stumps, bushes, vegetation and
rubbish, burning the debris arising in approved locations, and carting remaining material to
a tip provided by the Contractor.
GRUBBING
Grubbing up roots etc. shall include the following and disposal shall be as described under
the foregoing clause :-
1. Stumps and roots of large trees shall be completely removed.
2. Stumps and roots of small trees, bushes or other vegetation shall be completely
removed to a depth of at least 600mm below formation.
3 Smaller stumps and roots of vegetation up to 25mm thick shall be completely
removed to a depth of 230mm below formation.
4. Fine roots shall be removed to as great depth as is practicable by hand.

F/24
Except where the area of grubbing is to be excavated, all resulting holes shall be filled up
solid with approved material compacted to the same relative density as the surrounding
material.
EXCAVATION
The Contractor is advised to visit the site and ascertain the nature of the ground to be
excavated and he shall price accordingly and no claim will be allowed for want of
knowledge in this respect.
Rates for excavation shall include for excavation in soil, earth, black cotton, sandy soil,
murram, tuff, soft rock, boulders or whatever other subsoil is encountered, except hard rock
as defined below.
HARD ROCK
Any rock or other hard materials encountered in excavating to the required depths which in
the opinion of the Architect or Engineer can only be removed by wedges, compressed air
or other special plant, or explosives shall be paid for as an extra and the price shall include
for trimming and levelling. No blasting will be allowed without prior permission. Material
which can be removed by pick or traxcavator, ripper or similar mechanical plant will not be
classed as rock.
FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS
(a)The foundation trenches and column bases shall be excavated to the widths and
depths of the concrete foundations shown on the drawings or to such widths and depths
as the Engineer may instruct after examination of the excavations. Quantities of all
excavations shall be measured and valued by the Quantity Surveyor and any difference
between such measurements and the measurements herein given shall be dealt with as a
variation of the Contract. If, however, the Contractor excavates to any greater depths
than shown in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, then he shall at his own
expense fill in such extra depth of excavation with concrete as specified for the
foundations, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be paid for the
cost of any excavation executed deeper or wider than shown on the drawings or
instructed by the Engineer nor for the cost of back filling such excavation or disposing of
surplus.
(b) The Contractor shall report to the Engineer when secure bottoms have been obtained
to the excavations and are ready to receive the foundation concrete. Any concrete or
other work put in before the excavations have been inspected and approved by the
Engineer shall, if so directed, be removed and new work substituted in accordance with
the specification after excavations have been approved, all at the Contractor's expense.
(c) The bottoms of all foundation trenches and column bases shall be trimmed square and
level. The Contractor shall form such steps on bottoms of foundation trenches as the
Engineer may consider necessary in such positions and to such depths as he may direct.

SURPLUS SOIL DISPOSAL

Excavated material not required for subsequent refilling shall be removed to areas off site
which will be approved by the Architect.
TOP SOIL FOR SPREADING
Where required in the Bills of Quantities, top soil required for subsequent spreading over
finished work shall be especially selected and shall be dumped in special heaps as

F/25
indicated by the Architect. Such top soil shall be reasonably free from vegetation to the
satisfaction of the Architect, and shall be compacted as little as possible in the heaps.
FILLING UNDER SURFACE BEDS IN BUILDINGS
Murram Filling
Murram for filling as base course shall be from an approved source and of the highest
quality. It shall be laid in layers not less than 150mm thick and not greater than 230mm
thick prior to compaction. Water will be applied to O.M.C. and each layer will be thoroughly
compacted by at least 8 passes of a 10 tonne smooth wheeled roller or a 2 tonne vibrating
roller until all movement ceases and 100% M.D.D. is obtained.
Hardcore Filling
Hardcore filling shall be crushed rock, broken brick, broken concrete or other approved
hard granular materials broken to pass not greater than a 150mm ring or to be 75% of the
finished thickness of the layers being compacted whichever is the less and graded so that it
can be easily and thoroughly compacted by rolling. The filling is to be laid in layers each of
a consolidated thickness not exceeding 230mm. Where rolling by 10 tonne smooth
wheeled roller or 2 tonne vibrating roller is impossible, compaction shall be by hand or
mechanical tampers. Each layer shall be compacted by at least 8 passes of the roller.
The top surface of the hardcore shall be levelled or graded to falls as required and blinded
with similar material broken to 25mm gauge and surfaced with stone dust and well wetted
before consolidation by the roller. The surface so obtained shall be to the Engineer's
approval.
MATERIALS FOUND IN EXCAVATIONS
All materials classified as rock may, if approved by the Architect or Engineer be used as
hardcore filling and the measured quantities of imported filling will be adjusted accordingly;
all rock so used must be broken to the required size as before described before being
used.
No sand, aggregate, murram or other material found in the excavations is to be used in the
works without the written permission of the Engineer.
FILLING OBTAINED FROM THE EXCAVATIONS
Filling obtained from surplus excavated materials is to be free from all weeds, roots,
vegetable soil or other unstable materials and is to be filled in layers each of not more than
230mm finished thickness. Each layer to be well wetted and consolidated as described
herein.
INSECTICIDE TREATMENT
Where described, the top surface of filling shall be treated with Gladiator Pesticide
(manufactured by Dow Agrosciences Ltd.) to be applied by Rentokil Ltd., P.O. Box 44360,
Nairobi, or other equal and approved firm, in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and subject to a twenty year guarantee to the satisfaction of the Architect.
DIOTHENE SHEETING
Diothene sheeting shall be produced by an approved manufacturer. Joints in sheeting
shall be treble folded with a 150mm fold and taped at 300mm intervals with 50mm wide
black plastic adhesive tapes. The sheeting shall not be stretched but shall be laid with
sufficient wrinkles to permit shrinkage up to 15%.

F/26
 CONCRETE WORK

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER
For the purpose of the concrete structure the Structural Engineer shall be deemed vested
with the duties of and be the representative of the Architect.
CODE OF PRACTICE
All workmanship, materials, tests and performances in connection with the reinforced
concrete work are to be in conformity with the latest edition of the appropriate British
Standards where not inconsistent with these specifications.
SUPERVISION
A competent person approved by the Engineer shall be employed by the Contractor whose
duty will be to supervise all stages in the preparation and placing of the concrete. All cubes
shall be made and site tests carried out under his direct supervision, in consultation with
the Engineer.
CONTRACTOR'S PLANT, EQUIPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
Not less than 30 days prior to the installation of the Contractor's plant and equipment for
processing, handling, transporting and storing and proportioning ingredients, and for
mixing, transporting and placing concrete, the Contractor shall submit drawings for approval
by the Engineer, showing proposed general plant arrangement, together with a general
description of the equipment he proposes to use.
After completion of installation, the operation of the plant and equipment shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
Where these specifications, the Bills of Quantities or the drawings require specific
procedures to be followed, such requirements are not to be construed as prohibiting use by
the Contractor of alternative procedures if it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, that equal results will be obtained by the use of such alternatives.
Approval of plant and equipment or their operation, or of any construction procedure, shall
not operate to waive or modify any provisions or requirements contained in these
specifications governing the quality of the materials or of the finished work.
LEVELS AND FOUNDATIONS
The foundations of the work shall be carried down to depths as may be directed by the
Engineer and they must be cut as nearly to the size of the concrete as possible and the
vacant spaces between the concrete and solid ground excepting where otherwise shown
must be carefully filled in as directed by the Engineer.
All temporary timbering shall be removed but should any timber be left in or should any
other work be done beyond that specified, it will be at the Contractor's own cost.
TOLERANCES
On all setting out dimensions of 6m and over a maximum non-accumulative tolerance of
plus or minus 6mm will be allowed. On all setting out dimensions under 6m a maximum
non-accumulative tolerance of plus or minus 3mm will be allowed. On the cross sectional

F/27
dimensions of structural members, unless otherwise required by the drawings, a maximum
tolerance of plus or minus 3mm will be permitted.

The top surface of concrete floor slabs and beams shall be within 6 mm of the normal level
and line shown on the drawings. Columns shall be truly plumb and non-accumulative
tolerance of 3 mm in each storey and not more than 12 mm out of plumb in their full height
will be permitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all corrective
measures required by the Engineer to rectify work which is not constructed within the
tolerances set out above.
MATERIALS GENERALLY
All materials which have been damaged, contaminated or have deteriorated or do not
comply in any way with the requirements of these specifications shall be rejected and shall
be removed immediately from the site at the Contractor's own expense. No materials shall
be stored or stacked on suspended floors without the Engineer's prior approval.
SAMPLES AND TESTING
Every facility shall be provided to enable the Engineer to obtain samples and carry out tests
on the materials and construction. If these tests show that any of the materials or
construction do not comply with the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor will
be responsible for the costs of the tests and the replacement of defective materials and/or
construction.
CEMENT
Cement unless otherwise specified shall be Portland Cement of a brand approved by the
Engineer and shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 12, and a manufacturer's
certificate of test in accordance with B.S. 12 shall be supplied for each consignment
delivered to the site. Provided that the approval of the Engineer is obtained, the cement
may vary from B.S. 12 in that up to 10% of the total weight may be reactive volcanic ash
and the quantity of insoluble residue may exceed that specified by B.S. 12.
Should the Contractor require to use cement of the rapid hardening variety, he shall obtain
the approval of the Engineer and also obtain any instructions regarding modifications to
these specification caused thereby. Any additional cost that may be caused by the use of
rapid hardening cement shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Cement may be delivered to the site either in bags or in bulk.
If delivered in bags each bag shall be properly sealed and marked with the manufacturer's
name and on the site is to be stored in a weatherproof shed of adequate dimensions with a
raised floor. Each consignment shall be kept separate and marked so that it may be used
in the sequence in which it is received. Any bag found to contain cement which has set or
partly set, shall be completely discarded and not used in the works. Bags shall not be
stored more than 1.50 metres in height.
If delivered in bulk the cement shall be stored in a weatherproof silo either provided by the
cement supplier or by the Contractor but in either case the silo shall be to the approval of
the Engineer.
AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall conform with the requirements of B.S. 882 and the sources and types of
all aggregates are to be approved in all respects by the Engineer before work commences.
F/28
The grading of fine aggregates shall be within the limits set out in B.S. 882 and as later
specified and the grading, once approved, shall be adhered to throughout the works and
siliceous sand of good, sharp, hard quality and shall be free from lumps of stone, earth,
loam, dust, salt, organic matter and any other deleterious substances. It shall be graded
within the limits of Zone F or M of Table 2 of B.S. 882. Sea sand will not be accepted.
Coarse aggregate for concrete Classes '30', '25', and '20' shall be black trap, Mazeras, or
similar basaltic stone to the approval of the Engineer and coral aggregate will not be
accepted. It shall be hard, clean and of good shape, free from dust, decomposed stone,
clay, earthy matter, foreign substances or friable thin elongated or laminated pieces. It
shall be graded within the limits of Table 1 of B.S. 882 for its respective nominal size.
If in the opinion of the Engineer the aggregate meets with the above requirements but is
dirty or adulterated in any manner it shall be screened and/or washed with clean water if he
so directs at the Contractor's expense,
Aggregates shall be delivered to the site in their prescribed sizes or gradings and shall be
stockpiled on paved areas or boarded platforms in separate units to avoid intermixing. On
no account shall aggregates be stockpiled on the ground.
The Engineer shall be entitled to require a certificate from an approved testing laboratory in
connection with each source of fine and coarse aggregate showing that materials comply
with the specification.
WATER
The water used for mixing concrete shall be from an approved source, clean, fresh and free
from harmful matter, and comply with B.S. 3148.
EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
Expansion joint filler shall be 'Flexcell' as manufactured by Expandite Ltd., or 'Resilex' as
manufactured by Evomatics Ltd. or equal and approved.
JOINT SEALER
Sealers shall be 'Pli-astic' or 'Seelastic' as described, both manufactured by Expandite Ltd.,
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and prices shall include
for temporary battens or fillets and afterwards withdrawing to form grooves as necessary.
'Seelastic' shall be applied by gun and where more than 12mm deep shall include filling the
groove with loose packing yarn to within 1mm from outer face.
'Pli-astic' shall be Grade 88 and applied hot. With the Engineer's prior approval
'Polevomastic' fillers of the appropriate grade as manufactured by Evomastics Ltd. may be
substituted for 'Seelastic' and 'Pli-astic'.
CONCRETE STRENGTHS
Classes '30', '25', and '20' concrete shall have the minimum strengths as given by works
cube tests shown here below.
Classes lower than those given shall be of the following nominal mixes and may be
measured by volume or weight. No cube tests will be required for these classes.
Nominal mix by volume 1:3:6 (Class 15) 1:4:8 (Class 10)
Cubic m. fine aggregate per 50Kg. bag of cement 0.12 0.16
Cubic m. coarse aggregate per 50Kg. bag of cement 0.24 0.32
Max. size of coarse aggregate 40mm 40mm
F/29
MEASURED PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE
Cement
The quantity of cement shall be measured by weight. Where delivered in bags, each batch
of concrete is to use one or more whole bags of cement.
Aggregate (i) For Classes '30', '25', and '20' concrete shall be measured by weight
in a weigh batching machine as described hereafter.
(ii) For lower Classes concrete, aggregates may be measured by weight or
by volume. Where by volume, approved gauge boxes of such a size as
will give the correct proportions shall be used.
WEIGH BATCHING MACHINE
Weigh batching machines shall be of an approved type and shall be properly maintained
and checked for accuracy at regular intervals.
CONCRETE CLASSES - '30', '25', and '20'
The weights of fine and coarse aggregate to be used in concrete classes '30', '25', and
'20' shall be limited in accordance with the table below. The proportions of fine to coarse
aggregate and cement which the Contractor proposes to use for the mix specified shall first
be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor will then be required to prepare preliminary
test cubes and have these cubes tested as described for work cube tests. The test results
should be submitted to the Engineer in sufficient time for further tests to be carried out
should they prove unsatisfactory. Cube strengths in the preliminary tests must show
crushing strengths of at least 25% higher than the strengths specified for work cube tests.
If the Contractor is unable to produce specified cube strengths, he will be required at his
own cost to increase the cement of the mix until satisfactory results are produced.

Minimum Crushing Strengths

Age Class 30 Class 25 Class 20

7 days 21.0 N/mm2 17.5 N/mm2 14.0 N/mm2
28 days 31.0 N/mm2 26.5 N/mm2 21.0 N/mm2
The average strength obtained from cube tests shall be 10% higher than the minimum
strength shown above.
The Engineer may require at any time during the Contract the proportions of fine to coarse
aggregate to be altered in order to produce a mix of greater strength or improved
workability and providing that the total proportions of aggregate to cement remain
unchanged, no claim for additional cost will be considered.
Concrete shall be poured to the classes as follows:-
The mixes given below e.g. 1:3:6 shall mean concrete composed by volume one part
Portland cement, three parts sand or fine aggregate and six parts of coarse aggregate. All
other compositions shall be interpreted in a like manner.

Class '30' concrete 1:11/2:2 using 5mm to 20mm coarse aggregate

Class '25' concrete 1:11/2:3 using 5mm to 20mm coarse aggregate
Class '20' concrete 1:2:4 using 5mm to 20mm coarse aggregate

F/30
Unless otherwise specified concrete shall be used as follows:-
High stress reinforced concrete CLASSES '30'
Normal reinforced concrete CLASSES '25' & ’20’
Reinforced concrete member of CLASSES '20'
thickness 75mm or less
Surface beds, threshold, concrete Concrete 1:3:6 mix
surface channels and mass concrete fill
Concrete benching to cupboards and Concrete 1:4:8 mix
fittings and filling where described

MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT - CLASSES ' '30', '25', and '20'

The minimum cement content by weight shall be limited to :-

Mix. '30' '25' '20' 1:3:6 1:4:8

Minimum cement 300 300 260 220 150

content (kg/m3)
WATERPROOF CONCRETE
Where 'waterproof concrete' is specified, the system may be an approved surface applied
product, or waterproofing additives of a type approved in writing by the Engineer are to be
added to the mixing water strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Not
more than 25 litres of water per 50Kg. bag of cement are to be used unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
WATER BAR
Water bar shall be P.V.C. water bar as manufactured by Expandite Limited, or other
approved type and shall be provided in width and at the positions indicated on the
drawings.
Joints shall be heat welded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and where
the water bar is to be fixed vertically, metal clips as manufactured by the supplier of the
water bar or of other approved design shall be provided to suspend the water bar from the
reinforcement.
Where waterproof concrete is used the Contractor shall adhere strictly to the position and
type of construction joints as detailed on the drawings. Any deviation from this procedure
or the provision of additional construction joints will require the prior approval of the
Engineer and any additional water bar so required will be at the Contractor's expense.
Formwork shall be designed with sufficient timber formers and blocking pieces to support
the water bar and to ensure that it is not displaced during concreting. In the case of
horizontal joints in vertical walling and similar members the formwork shall be so
constructed as to permit the starter or upstand of concrete surrounding the lower half of the
water bar to be poured in the same operation as the slab or other concrete from which it
springs. Formwork to walls or similar members where water bar is positioned at the base
of the lift shall have sufficient openings not less than 300mm square at approximately

F/31
150mm to 300mm above the level of the water bar to permit checking that the water bar is
correctly positioned and not displaced during concreting.
No concreting will be permitted to portions where upstand starters form an integral part until
the formwork to the starter has been fixed and approved.
SEALOCRETE SUPERCOAT WATERPROOFER
Where specified 'Sealocrete Supercoat Waterproofer' shall be applied to concrete or
blockwork surfaces strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The
surfaces must be well wire-brushed to remove dirt, efflorescence, adhering mortar and all
foreign matter. It shall then be cleaned with fresh water. When absolutely dry a generous
coat of Sealocrete Supercoat shall be applied by brush or spray gun. Surfaces so treated
shall be protected from damage or staining as described elsewhere.
TESTING EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall provide the following equipment for carrying out control tests on the
site :-
(a) Straight edges 3.00m and 1.20m long for testing the accuracy of the finished
concrete;
(b) A glass graduated cylinder for use in the silt test for organic impurities in the sand;
(c) Slump test apparatus;
(d) Four 150mm steel cube moulds with base plates and tamping rods to B.S. 1881.
WORK CUBE TESTS
Work cubes are to be made at intervals such that one set of four cubes shall represent no
more than 50m3 of concrete in the works or as required by the Engineer and the
Contractor shall provide a continuous record of the concrete work. The cubes shall be
made in approved 150mm moulds in strict accordance with the British Standards.
Four cubes shall be made on each occasion, from each batch, the concrete being taken
from the point of deposit.
Each cube shall be marked with a distinguishing number (numbers to run consecutively)
and the date, and a record shall be kept on site giving the following particulars :-
(a) Cube No.
(b) Date made.
(c) Location in work.
(d) 7-day Test
Date
Strength required
(e) 28-day Test
Date
Strength required
Cubes shall be forwarded, carriage paid, to an approved Testing Authority, in time to be
tested, two at 7 days and one at 28 days and the fourth at the discretion of the Engineer.
No cube shall be despatched within 3 days of casting.

F/32
Copies of all work cube test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer and one shall be
retained on the site.
If the strengths required above are not attained, and maintained throughout the carrying out
of the Contract, the Contractor will be required to increase the proportion of cement and/or
substitute better aggregates so as to give concrete which does comply with the
requirements of the Contract. The Contractor may be required to remove and replace at
his own cost any concrete which fails to attain the required strength as ascertained by work
cube tests.
The Contractor must allow in his rates for concrete test cubes for all expenses in
connection with the preparation and conveyance to the Testing Laboratory of test cubes
and no claim in respect of his not so doing will be allowed.
MIXING AND PLACING OF CONCRETE
The concrete shall be mixed only in approved power driven mixers of a type and capacity
suitable for the work, and in any event not smaller than 0.33 cu.m. capacity.
The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate water measuring device. All materials shall
be thoroughly mixed dry before the water is added and the mixing of each batch shall
continue for a period of not less than two minutes after the water has been added and
until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is uniform in colour.
The entire contents of the mixed drum shall be discharged before recharging. The volume
of mixed materials shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. Whenever the mixer is
started, 10% extra cement shall be added to the first batch and no extra payment will be
made on this account.
As a check on concrete consistency slump tests may be carried out and shall be in
accordance with B.S. 1881. The Contractor shall provide the necessary apparatus and
allow for the costs of such tests. The slump of the concrete made with the specified water
content, using dry materials, shall be determined and the water to be added under wet
conditions shall be so reduced as to give approximately the same slump. Slump shall be
75 + 25mm, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
The concrete shall be mixed as near to the place where it is required as is practicable, and
only as much as is required for a specified section of the work shall be mixed at one time,
such section being commenced and finished in one operation without delay. All concrete
must be efficiently handled and used in the works within twenty (20) minutes of mixing. It
shall be discharged from the mixer direct either into receptacles or barrows and shall be
distributed by approved means which do not cause separation or otherwise impair the
quality of the concrete. Approved mechanical means of handling will be encouraged, but
the use of chutes or pumping for placing concrete is subject to the prior approval of the
Engineer.
Concrete shall be placed from a height not exceeding 1.5m directly into its permanent
position and shall not be worked along the shutters to that position. Unless otherwise
approved, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full thickness of slabs,
beams and similar members, and shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 1.4m
deep in walls or similar members.
Concrete in columns may be placed to a height of 4.00m with careful placing and vibration
and satisfactory results. Where the height of the column exceeds 4.00m suitable openings
must be left in the shutters so that this maximum lift is not exceeded.

F/33
Concrete shall be placed continuously until completion of the part of the work between
construction joints as specified hereinafter or of a part of approved extent. At the
completion of a specified or approved part a construction joint of the form and in the
positions hereinafter specified shall be made. If stopping of concreting be unavoidable
elsewhere, a construction joint shall be made where the work is stopped. A record of all
such joints must be made by the Contractor and a copy supplied to the Engineer.
Any accumulation of set concrete on the reinforcement shall be removed by wire brushing
before further concrete is placed.
The Contractor shall provide runways for concreting to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Under no circumstances will the runways be allowed to rest on the reinforcement.
Care shall be taken that the concrete is not disturbed or subjected to the vibrations and
shocks during the setting period.
Mixing machines, platforms and barrows shall be clean before commencing mixing and be
cleaned on every cessation of work.
Where concrete is laid on hardcore or other absorbent materials, the base shall be suitably
and sufficiently wetted before the concrete is deposited.
COMPACTION
At all times during which concrete is being placed, the Contractor shall provide adequate
trained and experienced labour to ensure that the concrete is compacted in the forms to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Concrete shall not be placed at a rate greater than will permit satisfactory compaction nor
to a depth greater than 450mm before it is compacted.
During and immediately after placing, the concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by
means of continuous tamping, spading, slicing and vibration. Vibration is required for all
concrete of classes '30', '25' and '20'
Care shall be taken to fill every part of the forms, to work the concrete under and around
the reinforcement without displacing it and to avoid disturbing recently placed concrete
which has begun to set.
Any water accumulating on the surface of newly placed concrete shall be removed and no
further concrete shall be placed thereon until such water be removed.
Internal vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 7,000 cycles per minute and shall
have a rotating eccentric weight of at least 0.7Kg., with an eccentricity of not more than
12mm. Such vibrators shall visibly affect the concrete within a radius of 230mm from the
vibrator.
Internal vibrators shall not be inserted between layers of reinforcement less than one and a
half times the diameter of the vibrators apart. Contact between vibrators and reinforcement
and vibrators and formwork shall be avoided.
Internal vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete wherever possible at not more
than 500 mm centres and shall constantly be moved from place to place. No internal
vibrator shall be permitted to remain in any one position for more than ten seconds and it
shall be withdrawn very slowly from the concrete.
In consolidating each layer of concrete the vibrating head shall be allowed to penetrate and
re-vibrate the concrete in the upper portion of the underlying layer. In the area where newly
placed concrete in each layer joins previously placed concrete more than usual vibration
F/34
shall be performed, the vibrator penetrating deeply at close intervals along these contacts.
Layers of concrete shall not be placed until layers previously placed have been vibrated
thoroughly as specified.
Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete from place to place in the formwork.
At least one internal vibrator shall be operated for every three cubic metres of concrete
placed per hour and at least one spare vibrator shall be maintained on site in case of
break-down during concreting operations.
External formwork vibrators shall be of the high frequency low amplitude type applied with
the principal direction of vibration in the horizontal plane. They shall be attached directly to
the forms at not more than 1224mm centres.
In addition to internal and external vibration the upper surface of suspended floor slabs
shall be levelled with a tamping or vibrating screed prior to finishing. Vibrating elements
shall be of the low frequency high amplitude type operating at a speed of not less than
3,000 r.p.m.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints shall be permitted only at the positions pre-determined on the drawings
or as instructed on the site by the Engineer. In general they shall be perpendicular to the
lines of principal stress and shall be located at points of minimum shear, viz. vertically at, or
near, mid-spans of slabs, ribs and beams.
Suspended concrete slabs are generally to be cast using alternate bay construction in bays
not exceeding 13 metres in length. No two adjacent bays are to be cast within a minimum
period of 48 hours of each other. The joints between adjacent bays are to be in positions
agreed with the Engineer.
Under no circumstances shall concrete be allowed to tail-off, but it shall be deposited
against stopping-off boards.
Before placing new concrete against concrete already hardened, the face of the old
concrete shall be thoroughly hacked, roughened and cleaned, and laitance and loose
material removed therefrom, and immediately before placing the new concrete the surface
shall be saturated with water and covered with a coat of mortar at least twenty five mm in
thickness composed of cement and fine aggregate in the proportions used in the concrete.
CURING AND PROTECTION
Care must be taken that no concrete is allowed to become prematurely dry and the fresh
concrete must be carefully protected within two hours of placing from rain, sun and wind by
means of hessian sacking, polythene sheeting, or other approved means. This protective
layer and the concrete itself must be kept continuously wet for at least seven days after the
concrete has been placed. The Contractor must allow for the complete coverage of all
fresh concrete for a period of 7 days. Hessian or polythene sheeting shall be in the
maximum widths obtainable and shall be secured against wind. The Contractor will not
be permitted to use old cement bags, hession or other material in small pieces.
Concrete in foundations and other underground work shall be protected from admixture
with falling earth during and after placing.
Traffic or loading must not be allowed on the concrete until the concrete is sufficiently
matured, and in no case shall traffic or loading be of such magnitude as to cause deflection
or other movement in the formwork or damage to the concrete members. Where directed

F/35
by the Engineer props may be required to be left in position under slabs and other
members for greater period than those specified hereafter.
FAULTY CONCRETE
Any concrete which fails to comply with these specifications, or which shows signs of
setting before it is placed shall be taken out and removed from the site. Where concrete is
found to be defective after it has set, the concrete shall be cut out and replaced in
accordance with the Engineer's instructions. On no account shall any faulty,
honeycombed, or otherwise defective concrete be repaired or patched until the
Engineer has made an inspection and issued instructions for the repair. The whole
of the cost whatsoever, which may be occasioned by the need to remove faulty concrete
shall be borne by the Contractor.
ROD REINFORCEMENT
The steel reinforcement shall be mild steel or high tensile steel as detailed on drawings or
schedules and comply with the latest requirements of the following British Standards :-
Hot rolled bars for the reinforcement of to B.S. 4449 (metric units)
concrete
Cold worked steel for the reinforcement of to B.S. 4461 (metric units)
concrete
Hard drawn steel wire to B.S. 4482 (metric units)
It shall be in metric sizes as detailed on the drawings.
The Contractor shall submit a test certificate of the rollings. Reinforcement shall be stored
on racks above ground level. All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale or rust,
grease, paint or other substances likely to reduce the bond between the steel and concrete.
FABRIC REINFORCEMENT
To be electrically cross-welded wire mesh reinforcement to B.S. 4483 and of the size and
weight specified
FIXING ROD REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement shall be accurately bent to the shapes and dimensions shown on the
drawings and schedules and in accordance with B.S. 4466. Reinforcement must be cut
and bent cold and no welded joints will be permitted unless so detailed.
Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in position as shown on the drawings and, before
and during concreting, shall be secured against displacement by using No. 18 S.W.G.
annealed binding wire or suitable clips at intersections, and shall be supported by concrete
or metal supports, spacers or metal hangers to ensure the correct position and cover.
No concreting shall be commenced until the Engineer has inspected the reinforcement in
position and until his approval has been obtained and the Contractor shall give two clear
days' notice of his intention to concrete.
The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the reinforcement in its correct position,
according to the drawings, before and during concreting. During concreting a competent
steel fixer must be in attendance on the concretors to adjust and correct the positions of
any reinforcement which may be displaced. The vibrators are not to come into contact with
the reinforcement.

F/36
Where reinforcement projects from a concreted section of the structure and this
reinforcement is expected to remain exposed for some time, it is to be coated with a
cement grout to prevent rust staining on the finished concrete. This grout is to be brushed
off the reinforcement prior to the continuation of concreting.
POSITION AND CORRECTNESS OF REINFORCEMENT
Irrespective of whether any inspection and/or approval of the fixing of the reinforcement
has been carried out as above, it shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that
the reinforcement complies with the details on the drawings or schedules and is fixed
exactly in the positions shown therein and in the positions to give the prescribed cover.
The Contractor will be held entirely responsible for any failing or defect in any portion of
the reinforced concrete structure and including any consequent delay, claims, third party
claims, etc., where it is shown that the reinforcement has been incorrectly positioned or is
incorrect in size or quantity with respect to the detailed drawings or schedules.
SPACING BLOCKS
Spacing blocks of approved size and shape made of concrete similar to that used in the
surrounding construction and fixed to the reinforcement or formwork by No. 18 S.W.G.
wires set into the spacer blocks, or other approved means, shall be provided where
necessary to ensure that the requisite cover is obtained. The Contractor is to include for
providing sufficient such spacer blocks in his prices for steel reinforcement where a supplier
has been nominated. Where composite blocks or other forms of rib construction are used,
spacer blocks are to be provided as shown on the drawings. These will generally consist of
concrete blocks as described above made to fit the width of the rib less 3mm tolerance and
with single or double grooves (depending on the number of reinforcement bars used per
rib) in the top surface with wire ties at each groove.
CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCEMENT
Unless otherwise directed the concrete cover to rod reinforcement over main bars in any
face shall be :-
Foundations 50mm
Columns and walls 40mm
Beams 25mm
Slabs 15mm

FIXING FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

The fabric shall be free from scale, rust, grease or other substance likely to reduce the
bond between the steel and the concrete and shall be laid with minimum 300mm laps and
bound with No. 18 S.W.G. annealed iron wire.
In all ground slabs, unless otherwise specified a single layer of square mesh steel fabric
shall be placed at a depth of 50mm below the top surface of the concrete. The fabric shall
comply in all respects with B.S. 4483 and be of the size and weight specified or shown on
the drawings.
The fabric shall extend to within 75mm of the expansion joints and shall have laps of at
least 230mm at all joints in the fabric at junctions with reinforced concrete beams or other
members. It shall be placed on top of the first layer of concrete as previously described
and sufficient wire ties shall be provided to ensure that the fabric is held down securely.
FIXTURES AND INDENTATIONS IN CONCRETE
F/37
No openings, chases, holes or other voids shall be formed in the concrete without the prior
approval of the Engineer. Details of any fixtures to be permanently built into the concrete
including the proposed position of all electrical conduits 25mm and over in diameter shall
be submitted to the Engineer for his approval before being placed.
CHASES, HOLES, ETC. IN CONCRETE
The Contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination with the Electrical and other
Sub-Contractors for incorporating electrical conduit, pipes, fixing blocks, chases, holes and
the like in concrete members as required and must ensure that adequate notice is given to
such Sub-Contractors informing them when concrete members incorporating the above are
to be poured. The Contractor shall submit full details of these items to the Engineer for
approval before the work is put in hand. All fixing blocks, chases, holes, etc., to be left in
the concrete shall be accurately set out and cast with the concrete.
POSITION OF ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer all electrical conduit to be positioned within the
reinforced concrete shall be fixed inside the steel cages of beams and columns and
between the top and bottom steel layers in slabs and similar members.
The proposed position of all electrical conduits 25mm and over in diameter which are to be
enclosed in the concrete shall be shown accurately on a plan to be submitted to the
Engineer, whose approval shall be obtained before any such conduit is placed.
FORMWORK
The method and system of formwork which the Contractor proposes to use shall be
approved by the Engineer before construction commences. Formwork shall be
substantially and rigidly constructed of timber or steel or precast concrete or other
approved material.
All timber for formwork shall be good sound clean sawn well-seasoned timber, free from
warps and loose knots and of scantlings sufficiently strong for their purpose.
CONSTRUCTION OF FORMWORK
All formwork shall be of sufficient thickness and with joints close enough to prevent undue
leakage of liquid from the concrete and fixed to proper alignment, level and plumb and
supported on sufficiently strong bearers, shores, braces, plates, etc. properly held together
by bolts or other fastenings to prevent displacement, vibration or movement by the weight
of materials, men and plant on same and so wedged and clamped as to permit of easing
and removal of the formwork without jarring the concrete. Where formwork is supported on
previously constructed portions of the reinforced concrete structural frame, the Contractor
shall be in consultation with the Engineer to ensure that the supporting concrete structure is
capable of carrying the load and/or sufficiently propped from lower floors or portions of the
frame to permit the load to be temporarily carried during construction.
Soffits shall be erected with an upward camber of 10mm for each 4000mm of each
horizontal span or as directed by the Engineer.
Great care shall be taken to make and maintain all joints in the formwork as tight as
possible, to prevent the leakage of grout during vibration. All faulty joints shall be caulked
to the Engineer's approval before concreting.

The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that no distortion or bulging occurs under
the effects of vibration. If at any time the formwork is insufficiently rigid or in any way
F/38
defective the Contractor shall strengthen or improve such formwork as the Engineer may
direct.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the various surface textures and applied finishes
required and the faces of formwork next to the concrete must be of such material and
construction and be sufficiently true to provide a concrete surface which will in each case
permit the specified surface treatment or applied finish.
All surfaces which will be in contact with concrete shall be oiled or greased to prevent
adhesion of mortar. Oil or grease shall be of a non-staining mineral type applied as a thin
film before the reinforcement is placed. Surplus moisture shall be removed from the forms
prior to placing of the concrete.
Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of columns, wall and beam forms and at
any other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection immediately before
the pouring of concrete. Before the concrete is placed the shuttering shall be trued-up and
any water accumulated therein shall be removed. All sawdust, chips, nails and other
debris shall be washed out or otherwise removed from within the framework. The
reinforcement shall then be inspected for accuracy of fixing. Immediately before placing
the concrete the formwork shall be well wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
The erection, easing, striking and removing of all formwork must be done under personal
supervision of a competent foreman, and any damage occurring through faulty formwork or
its incorrect removal shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
After removal of formwork, all projections, fins, etc., on the concrete surface shall be
chipped off, and made good to the requirements of the Engineer. Any voids or
honeycombing shall be treated as described in 'Faulty Concrete'.
STRIPPING FORMWORK
All formwork shall be removed without undue vibration or shock and without damage to the
concrete. No formwork shall be removed without the prior consent of the Engineer and the
minimum periods that shall elapse between the placing of the concrete and the striking of
the formwork will be as follows:-
Beam sides, walls and inclined columns 2 days
(unloaded)
Slab horizontal soffits (props left under) 4 days
Beam soffits (props left under) 10 days
Removal of props (subject to 7 days concrete cube strength being satisfactory) to :-
Slabs 10 days
Beams 14 days
If the Contractor wishes to take advantage of the shorter stripping times permitted for beam
and slab soffits when props are left in place, he must so design his formwork that sufficient
props as agreed with the Engineer can remain in their original position without being moved
in any way until expiry of the minimum time for removal of props. Stripping and re-propping
will not be permitted.
The above times may be reduced in certain circumstances, at the discretion of the
Engineer provided an approved method is adopted at the Contractor's expense to ensure
that the required concrete strength is attained before the forms are stripped.

F/39
Solid strips in composite slab shall be considered as beams. The tops of retaining walls
shall be adequately supported with stout raking props at intervals required by Engineer.
These props are not to be removed until 7 days after casting of the floor slab.
FAIR FACE
Where fair face is specified the concrete shall be brought perfectly true smooth and even
by rubbing with carborundum stone dipped in cement grout. Such work must be
commenced within one hour of removing the formwork and be actively and rapidly persued
until completed, the object being to complete the finish as soon as possible after the
removal of the shuttering. On no account may such work be postponed to a later stage in
the Contract. Fair face surfaces shall be clean, smooth, even, true to form and free from all
board marks joint marks, honeycombing, pitting, etc. The Contractor is permitted at his
own expense to provide smooth lining to the forms which will achieve the required finish
without rubbing down. All rubbed down work must be lightly washed with plain cold water
at the completion of the Contract, and not before the cement grout used in the finish is at
least four weeks old after initial mixing
BUSH HAMMERED FINISH
The concrete surface prior to the tooling of this finish shall resemble in all respects that
produced as 'Fair Face' above. Particular care is required to achieve complete compaction
of the concrete.
The bush-hammering shall be carried out using approved tools and shall produce an even,
tooled appearance. All arrises, projections, etc., shall remain true and sharp and no
rounding off of edges shall be permitted. The Contractor is to take care that no
reinforcement is exposed and that in any case no tooling penetrates the concrete surface
by more than 10mm.
The Contractor shall, prior to any bush-hammering taking place, provide a sample
measuring 1.00m square to the Engineer indicating the standard of bush-hammering to be
achieved. This when approved by the Engineer will form the standard for the entire works.
Any surface not complying with this standard shall be removed or made good to the
Engineer's satisfaction at the Contractor's expense.
TAMPED FINISH
Areas so specified shall be finished at the time of casting with a tamped finish to the
Engineer's approval produced by an edge board. Board marks are to be made to a true
pattern and will generally be at right angles to the traffic flow. Haphazard or diagonal
tamping will not be accepted.
WROT LINED FORMWORK
The shuttering shall be constructed of wrot tongued and grooved boarding, plywood or
blockboard lined with approved laminated plastic sheeting to produce a concrete surface
with truly flat surface completely free from all air bubbles, joint marks, honeycomb and
other pittances and blemishes to the approval of the Engineer.
Should the Contractor desire to use alternative materials he should submit his proposals to
the Engineer for approval.
Should the Contractor fail to obtain approval and the Architect subsequently rejects the
work, the Contractor will at his own expense carry out all work necessary to attain the
approval of the same.

BOARD MARKED FINISH

F/40
Where so directed or measured the finish shall be that of a board marked pattern in panels,
the boards shall be arranged vertically or horizontally and of widths and sizes all as detailed
on the drawings. All exposed concrete will be left unpainted and therefore every care and
attention shall be paid to obtain a satisfactory visual appearance and the maintenance of
the same throughout the building operation. The finished surfaces shall be free from blow
holes, hungry patches and other blemishes, and a sample panel is to be provided and
approved by the Engineer before work commences.
Unless otherwise specified, the formwork shall be rip sawn softwood to the Engineer's
approval and shall have a sufficiently strong grain to impart a corresponding pattern to the
concrete surface. Unless otherwise approved it shall have four uses only and shall be
carefully cleaned from adhering grout after each use. It shall be lightly oiled with approved
no-staining oil.

CHISEL DRESSED FINISH

Where specified a chisel dressed finish is to be carried out on any grade of concrete but
not until it is at least 30 days old. The surfaces are to be fully chisel dressed to remove a
maximum of 12mm (average 9mm) of the surface to expose the aggregate without
excessive cracking or breaking thereon.
Where the drawings show details of arrises of columns, beams, etc., these are to be
pre-formed with timber fillets set in the formwork and care must be taken in working up to
those to preserve a clean line. For vertical surfaces of walls and columns, particular care
must be taken to remove all sharp projections. For beam soffits this requirements is not
necessary.
All chisel dressed surfaces are to have the margin chisel dressed by hand for a minimum
width of 75mm commencing from the fillet edge. Thereafter mechanical chisel dressing
may be used but the Contractor must ensure that a uniform texture and even plane surface
is achieved. The use of pointed steel tools for both hand and mechanical chisel dressing is
essential. Upon completion the surfaces are to be thoroughly wire brushed and washed
down and protected during the course of construction from damage, dirt, cement grout, etc.
PRECAST CONCRETE
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all precast concrete construction shall be
carried out on the site and shall conform to the requirements given elsewhere.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate in precast concrete shall not exceed 20mm except
for thicknesses less than 75mm where it shall not exceed 12mm.
The compaction of precast concrete shall conform with requirements given elsewhere in
these Specifications except for thin slabs where use of immersion type vibrators is not
practicable. The concrete in these slabs may be consolidated on a vibrating table or by any
other methods approved by the Engineer.
Steam curing of precast concrete will be permitted. The procedure for steam curing shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The precast work shall be made under cover and shall remain under the same for seven
days. During this period and for a further seven days the concrete shall be shielded by
sacking or other approved material kept constantly wet. It shall then be stacked in the open
F/41
for at least a further seven days to season before being set in position. Where steam
curing is used these times may be reduced to the approval of the Engineer.
Precast concrete units shall be constructed in individual forms. The method of handling the
precast concrete units after casting, during curing and during transport and erection shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Providing that such approval shall not relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for damage to precast concrete units resulting from careless
handling.
Repair of damage to the precast concrete units, except for minor abrasions of the edges
which will not impair the installation and/or appearance of the units will not be permitted
and the damaged units shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Moulds for 'Fair Face' precast work are to be made of metal or are to have metal or
plywood linings or are to be other approved moulds which will produce a smooth dense fair
face to the finished concrete suitable to receive a painted finish direct and free from all
shutter marks, holes, pittances, etc. In his prices for such precast work the Contractor
shall include for all rubbing down to produce the finish required, to the satisfaction and
approval of the Engineer.
The precast units shall be installed to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the
drawings or as directed by Engineer.
COMPOSITE FLOOR OR ROOF SLABS
Concrete hollow blocks for used in the composite floor slabs are to be of the sizes required
as shown on the drawings and with 30mm wall thickness and are to be of adequate
strength to support the concrete during placing and consolidation by vibration. Blocks are
to be manufactured in accordance with the procedure specified in B.S. 2028 and to be of a
mix not weaker than 1:4:8 cement : sand : aggregate using maximum size aggregate.
Concrete blocks are to be cured for at least 28 days before use on the site. During the first
seven days of curing, blocks are to be kept permanently damp and protected from
exposure to sun and wind.
Concrete blocks are to be well wetted before the pouring of concrete.
COMPOSITE FLOOR CONSTRUCTION
The hollow block floor construction is generally to be as shown on the Engineer's drawings.
Care shall be taken in placing blocks to ensure that they are set out in accordance with the
details shown on the drawings and that they run truly in line without encroaching on the
width of the insitu ribs.
The open ends of hollow blocks, if adjacent to concrete to be placed insitu, are to be
plugged or stopped to prevent the concrete from flowing into the void and the Contractor is
to include for this in his prices.
The Contractor should note that slip tiles are not to be used to the soffit of ribs and he is to
take this into consideration in pricing the items of formwork to the soffit of hollow block floor
construction.
Before concreting is carried out the blocks are to be thoroughly wetted.
Care should be taken during concreting that the width of ribs between the rows of blocks
and the solid insitu concrete shown on the drawings adjacent to supporting beams is not
encroached upon by the blocks.

F/42
It is essential that the concrete topping be poured at the same time as the ribs between
hollow blocks.
Reinforcement shall be positioned accurately with required cover in accordance with the
drawings and using the particular spacing blocks with wire ties as previously described.
Spacer blocks shall be provided in ribs at not more than 1.2m centres. Care must be taken
during concreting that the reinforcement is not displaced.
Where holes for services, etc. occur, the necessary holes or pockets shall be
accommodated by the replacing of a hollow block by insitu concrete or the widening of a rib
all in accordance with the Engineer's instructions.
Prices for holes, etc. through hollow block construction are to include the re-arrangement or
substitution of the hollow block with sold concrete in addition to the actual formation of the
hole.
CONCRETE SURFACE BEDS
Concrete for surface beds shall be Grade '20'.
Before placing concrete and where specified or shown on the drawings a layer of 500
gauge polythene or diothene sheeting shall be laid on the base course. Minimum 300mm
laps shall be provided at all joints.
The concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after being mixed. In transporting the
concrete, adequate precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the prepared base.
The concrete shall be spread to such a thickness that when compacted it shall have the
finished thickness as specified or shown on the drawings. A layer of concrete 50mm less
than the finished thickness shall first be spread and struck off at the correct level to receive
the top fabric reinforcement.
The top layer shall then be added. Not more than 30 minutes shall elapse between
spreading the bottom layer. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the
reinforcement in its correct position during the placing and compaction of the concrete.
The compaction and finishing of the concrete shall be effected by immersion vibrators and
a hand or mechanical tamper weighing not less that 10Kg per meter run and having a
tamping edge shod with a steel strip 75mm wide fixed to the tamper by countersunk
screws. Immersion vibrator with 'spade' attachments will be permitted. Compaction shall
be continued until a dense, sealed surface finish is achieved. Over-compaction causing an
excessive amount of fines to be brought to the surface shall be avoided.
The surface of the concrete shall be finished to the surface texture specified to the levels,
falls and crossfalls, as directed or shown on the drawings and shall be subject to the
following tolerance :-
The level shall be within or - 6mm of the levels specified.
The falls shall be within 10% of the falls specified.
The smoothness shall be such that departure from a 3.000m straight edge laid in any
direction shall not exceed 3mm.
Minor irregularities shall be made good by the use of a steel float but in no circumstances
shall mortar be used to make good the surface.
As soon as the surface has been finished, it shall be protected against too rapid drying by
means of damp hessian, polythene sheeting or other approved means placed carefully on
the surface and kept damp and in position for 7 days and the concrete shall be kept wet for
F/43
further 21 days. The most critical period is the first 24 hours after placing and curing during
that time shall be very thorough. The Contractor is to obtain the Engineer's approval to the
material and method he proposes to use for curing and no concreting will be permitted until
sufficient such material is on site.
Forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete until it is at least 24 hours old.
Care shall be taken that in their removal no damage is done to the concrete, but should any
damage occur the Contractor shall be responsible for making it good.
EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONCRETE SURFACE BEDS
Expansion joints shall be positioned and constructed as shown on the drawings. The joints
in the surface beds shall be absolutely square and true to line and position.
All joints in surface beds shall be formed to the patterns and shapes to coincide exactly
with the joints in the surface finish or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. Formwork
shall be manufactured from steel of heavy angle section and be to the Engineer's approval.
The Contractor shall submit drawings of the forms he intends to use and obtain the
Engineer's approval before fabrication. Panels shall be poured in alternate bays as agreed
with the Engineer. No construction joints other than those indicated on the drawings shall
be submitted.

NOTES CONCERNING MEASUREMENT AND PRICING

The Contractor must allow for all costs incurred during the progress of the Contract for
complying with the provisions concerning the preparation and use of graded mixes.
Prices for concrete shall include for mixing and depositing as described or indicated and for
hoisting and depositing at the various levels required throughout the building, and shall also
include for forming or hacking a satisfactory key for all faces receiving asphalt and plaster
work. Prices for slabs shall also include for levelling off the surface as described under
'Compaction', and all temporary formwork to form construction joints at bay edges.
Prices for reinforced concrete shall, in addition, include for filling into, between or on
formwork and thoroughly compacting between and around rods or fabric reinforcement and
for forming all additional construction joints between varying mixes. Where described as
vibrated, prices must include for fully vibrating as described.
Formwork (use and waste only) is measured net to the actual face of the concrete to be
supported and the prices for formwork shall include for extra material at joints, extra labour
and waste for narrow widths, small quantities, overlaps, passing at angles, straight cutting
and waste, splayed edges, notchings, etc., and for fixing at the various levels including
battens, struts, and supports and for bolting, wedging, easing, striking and removal. Prices
for linear items such as boxings shall include for angles and ends. Strutting has been
measured at varying levels to soffits only and prices for other items must include for
strutting at any level.
Prices for steel rod reinforcement shall include for cutting to lengths and all labour in
bending and cranking, forming hooked ends, handling, hoisting and fixing in position and
for providing all necessary tying wire and supports. Prices for fabric reinforcement shall
include for all straight cutting and waste, handling, hoisting and fixing in position, providing
all necessary tying wire, and supports and all extra material in laps.
Prices of all precast concrete shall include for all moulds, finishings as described, handling
reinforcement, hoisting and fixing at the required levels, bedding, jointing and pointing in
F/44
cement and sand (1:5) mortar, also for casting or cutting to the exact lengths required and
any waste resulting from such cutting. The sizes of weathered or moulded items stated are
extreme sizes.
Prices for suspended hollow tile composite floor and roof slabs must be 'all inclusive' to
include for concrete hollow tiles, in situ concrete ribs, concrete topping, concrete filling to
open ends of hollow concrete tiles.
Concrete in main beams has been measured to the full width thereof and for full depth to
top of slab level and composite slabs are measured separately, the net area between
same. No adjustment will be made in these measurements for any projection of ribs,
reinforcement, etc., into main beams or floors etc., to obtain bearings, which are deemed to
be covered in the Contractor's rates.
Prices for expansion joints shall include for cutting to size and all temporary supports and
prices for expansion joint sealers shall include for all temporary battens or fillets required to
form the necessary grooves.

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTOR
The whole of the structural steelwork is to be executed by a specialist Sub-Contractor who
is to be specifically approved by the Engineer and the Contractor will be required to make
arrangements for the execution of this work and bear all expenses incurred. No change in
the rates for this work inserted by the Contractor in these Bills of Quantities will be allowed
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER
For the purpose of the steel structure the Structural Engineer shall be deemed vested with
the duties of and be the representative of the Architect.
QUALITY OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
The quality of all materials and workmanship used in the execution of the works shall
comply with the requirements of current relevant British Standard and Codes of Practice,
including all the latest amendments.
BRITISH STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE
B.S. 4360......................… Weldable Structural Steels
B.S. 5950 ........................ The use of Structural Steel inBuilding.
B.S. 4 (Part 1) ........ Hot Rolled Sections
B.S.4848 (Part2)........ Hot Rolled Hollow Sections.
B.S. 2994 & 1449 ............. Cold Formed Steel Sections
B.S. 5135 ......................... General Requirements for the Metal Arc Welding of Structural
Steel Tubes to B.S. 6222,(B.S. 5125 will be considered to
apply to the requirements for weldingofhotrolled hollow
sections to B.S. 4848 Part 2).
B.S. 6323 Parts 1 - 8 ........ SteelTubesfor Mechanical, Structural & General Engineering
Purposes.
B.S. 1856 ........................ General Requirements for the Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel.
B.S. 639 .......................... Covered Electrodes for the Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel
F/45
C.P. 2008 ......................... Protection of Iron & Steel Structures from Corrosion
TESTS
The Engineer may at any time require any materials to be tested in accordance with the
requirements of the Standards listed above. The cost of all successful tests shall be borne
by the Employer. The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, promptly supply at his
own expense test pieces. The costs of tests on materials failing to comply with these
Standards shall be borne by the Contractor. If in the opinion of the Engineer, faulty
material and/or workmanship has been used in the works, the Contractor may be directed
to dismantle and cut out the parts concerned and remove them for examination and testing.
The cost of dismantling, cutting out and making good to the approval of the Engineer shall
be borne by the Contractor.
FABRICATION
The standard of work and the general procedure to be followed during fabrication shall be
in accordance with B.S. 449. The Contractor must ascertain all dimensions on the site
prior to commencement of fabrication.
(a) Cutting & Bending - All members, plates, brackets, etc., shall be neatly and accurately
sheared, sawn, or profiled to the required shape as shown on the drawings. Where steel is
oxy-cut to shape, care shall be taken to preserve the full finished sizes required.
If members or plates are bent or set, the bends or sets shall be correctly made to the radii
or angles specified without leaving hammer marks. The materials may be heated to permit
this. Material that has been heated should be annealed to approval.
(b) Punching & Drilling - Holes for black bolts shall be drilled or punched 2mm larger in
diameter than the bolt size. Holes for high tensile friction grip bolts shall be drilled or
sub-punched and reamed to 2mm larger in diameter than the specified bolt size. All drilled
holes shall be parallel sided and shall be drilled with the axis of the holes perpendicular to
the surface. Badly drilled holes shall either be reamed out to approval and larger bolts
fitted or otherwise as directed. All rough arrises shall be ground off. Holes for bolts in
material thicker than 15mm must be drilled. When holes are drilled in one operation
through two or more thicknesses of material, the parts shall be separated after drilling and
all burrs removed before assembly. Holes for bolts shall not be formed by a gas cutting
process. Holes formed or enlarged by oxy-cutting will not be accepted and must be filled
to approval by electric welding and re-drilling.
(c) Bolting - All bolts used shall be of such length that at least one full thread is exposed
beyond the nut after the nut has been tightened. Where a nut or bolt head would bear on
an inclined surface, a bevelled washer of the correct shape shall be interposed between
the two surfaces. Bevelled washers shall not be allowed to get out of position during
fabrication and erection and for this purpose may be spot welded to the steel surface.
Bevelled washers for use with high tensile bolts shall not be welded.
(i) Black Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Black bolts shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 916. (B.S.W. Threads).
(ii) Close Tolerance Bolts
Close tolerance bolts shall conform to B.S. 916.
(iii) High Strength Friction Grip Bolts
(a) General grade bolts to B.S. 3692.

F/46
(b) Load indicating bolts manufactured by G.K.N. Ltd. or any other approved
manufacturer.
(c) High tensile bolts to B.S. 4395.
(iv) Rawlbolts
Rawlbolts shall be those manufactured by Rawlplug Company Ltd or any other approved
manufacturer.
(v) Washers
Washers to B.S. 4320.
Washers for high strength friction grip bolts shall be appropriate to the type and quality of
the bolt specified.
(vi) Rivets
The steel used for rivets shall be in accordance with B.S. 4360 and in the case of high
tensile steel rivets shall be so manufactured that they can be driven and the heads formed
and the physical properties not impaired.
(d)Pressed Steel Sections
Pressed or cold rolled steel purlins and girders shall be to the sizes indicated on the
drawings and shall be formed from approved steel strip with a minimum yield strength of
175N/mm2.
The sections shall be manufactured straight and free from twist. The tolerance away from
straightness shall not be greater than 2mm for every 2000mm in length along any folded
edge.
(e) Electric Welding
All welding shall be carried out in strict accordance with the requirements of B.S. 5135 and
B.S. 2624 as appropriate and electrodes shall comply with B.S. 639. Only approved and
certified welders shall be used
Fusion faces shall be free from irregularities such as tears, fins, etc., which would interfere
with the deposition of weld metal.
Fusion faces shall be smooth and uniform and shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust,
grease, paint and other deleterious material.
All welds shall be of approved type and finished size as specified. Welding shall be carried
out in such sequence that minimum distortion of the parts welded results.
Preparation of edges for welding shall be carried out by planing or machine flame cutting.
Manual flame cutting will not be permitted.
Parts to be welded shall be maintained in their correct relative positions during welding,
preferably by jigs.
Multi-run welds shall be carried out with each run closely following the previous run but
allowing sufficient time for the proper removal of slag.
The Contractor shall ensure that each run is inspected and any unsatisfactory weld cut out
and remade to approval.
Welds in material 25mm or greater in thickness shall be made by the Argon arc or similar
approved process, and special precautions shall be taken to prevent weld cracking.

F/47
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum size of fillet shall be 6mm.
On completion, welds shall present a smooth and regular finish. Weld metal shall be solid
throughout with complete fusion between weld metal and parent metal and between
successive runs throughout the joint
Defects shall be cut out and made good to approval in sound weld metal.
The external faces of butt welds are to be ground smooth on completion to the approval of
the Engineer.
SHOP AND FIELD CONNECTIONS
(a) Rolled Sections
All shop connections shall be electric welded or bolted with high tensile bolts.
No bolts used shall be less than 12mm diameter and no weld less than 40mm in length. At
least two bolts shall be used in connections transmitting loads unless otherwise indicated
by the Engineer.
No weld of length less than four times the nominal fillet size shall be deemed capable of
carrying load.
Beam to column connections not detailed shall be on 'Standard' top and bottom cleat
connections with the load carried on the bottom cleat. 'Standard' web connections shall
be used for connecting beams to beams.
Field connections shall be as detailed, i.e. bolted with high tensile or black bolts in drilled
holes. Black bolts in punched holes will only be permitted for connections carrying a
designed load or for connections to timber members.
(b) Structural Hollow Sections
Hollow sections shall be connected by electric welding unless specified otherwise.
The designs of welds shall be in accordance with Clause 6.6 of B.S. 5950.
Butt welds in tension members will not be permitted unless the prior approval of the
Engineer in writing has first been obtained.
Butt welds where permitted, shall be made with the fusion surfaces of the ends of each
member properly prepared and the member properly aligned.
ASSEMBLY
(a) Trusses and Portal frames
Trusses and portal frames shall be carefully set out to the dimensions shown on the
drawings.
Where it is required that trusses be cambered, such camber shall be provided by bending
the bottom chord to an arc of a circle.
Not withstanding any dimensioned spacing of purlin cleats, the Contractor shall ensure that
purlin cleat spacing is satisfactory for the available stock lengths of roof sheeting.
However, the Engineer's approval must first be obtained before any alteration is made in
purlin spacing or sheeting sizes.
Splices in portal and other frames shall be made where shown on the details or where
directed by the Engineer.
(b) Boxed Members
F/48
 Abutting edges of boxed members shall be connected and sealed with a continuous weld
to exclude the entrance of moisture. Where specified such welds shall be ground flush to
approval.
(c) Shop Assembly
Assembly of units in the shop prior to transporting to the site must be inspected by the
Engineer before painting. The assembled work shall be laid out in the shop or yard such
that all parts are accessible for inspection and testing.
The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and testing of the works and must
notify the Engineer on every occasion materials are ready for inspection.
(d) Marking
All members of the structures to be site assembled shall be marked in accordance with the
shop details and marking plans submitted to the Engineer for approval.
ERECTION
(a) Site Dimensions
Erection shall not commence unless and until accurate site dimensions have been taken
by the Contractor. No claims will be considered should site dimensions differ from those
on the drawings. Any modifications to the structural steel required in order to comply with
site dimensions shall be made on the ground to the Engineer's approval before erection is
commenced.
(b) Safety
All erection shall be carried out by competent and experienced personnel and the
Contractor shall take every care to safeguard members of the public, workmen, and
adjoining property against injury and/or damage. The Contractor shall be held responsible
for all damage caused to the structure, workmen, or other property during erection.
All gear used shall be of adequate strength and shall comply with all current Regulations.
During erection the work shall at all times be adequately bolted, guyed and/or braced to
make the structure secure.
(c) Storage and handling
Steel members shall be stored, handled and erected in such a manner that no member
shall be subjected to excessive stresses which could have adverse effect on the
properties of the steel. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the steelwork has been subjected
to such treatment, the Contractor shall remove the member from the site and replace it at
his own expense.
(d) Erection Notes
No member or part of a member which has been bent or distorted shall be erected in that
condition. All straightening shall be done on the ground.
Stanchions shall be wedged to line and level on steel or cast iron wedges and checked by
the Engineer. After acceptance, stanchion bases shall be grouted to approval before
wedges are removed. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all stanchions shall be left
truly vertical and correct to line and level. Beams, girders, etc., shall be erected level
unless otherwise shown, and correctly positioned.

F/49
Trusses and open web joists shall be carefully handled at all times and during erection
shall be lifted at such points and in such a manner as will preclude any possibility of
damage from excessive stresses.
Packing plates, shims, washers or similar adjusting pieces found necessary to
accommodate tolerances in structural site dimensions shall be provided and fixed to the
approval of the Engineer.
Immediately after erection, each truss shall be made secure by purlins, bracing or guys to
approval of the Engineer.
Bracing shall be fixed in position as soon as dependent portion of the work is completed.
(e) Tightening and Testing High Tensile Friction Grip Bolts
Before assembly, the contact surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers, shall be
descaled, and be free from dirt, oil, loose scale, burrs, paint (except priming paint), pits and
other defects that would prevent proper seating of the parts.
Bolts shall be fixed with approved hardened flat or tapered washers as required between
the bolt and nut and the softer mild steel.
When bearing faces of the bolted parts have a slope of more than 1 in 20 with respect to a
plane normal to the bolt axis, square smooth bevelled washers shall be used to
compensate for the lack of parallelism.
All bolts shall be tightened by the 'Turn of Nut' method and as approved by the Engineer
to achieve in all bolts a minimum tension equal to the proof load.
(f) Grouting
Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, a space of not less than 40mm shall be
provided between undersides of column base plates and footings, and between all beams
and roof truss bearings and concrete pads.
After each column, beam or roof truss has been wedged up to a line and level and fixed in
position to approval, the space between footing or pad and the underside of the column
base plate or steel member shall be grouted with a mixture of one part of Portland cement
and one part of approved washed sand (1:1).
The Portland cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed together with sufficient water to
produce a mixture of 'damp earth' consistency and shall be used within twenty minutes of
mixing. The caulking mixture shall be packed tight into the space between baseplate and
foundation and protected from damage until it sets.
PAINTING
(a) Paints
All paints are to be obtained from suppliers approved in writing by the Engineer.
Paints are to be delivered to the site or to the Contractor's fabrication site in the original
containers as supplied by the manufacturer with seals unbroken and are to be used in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer's representatives are
to be free to visit the site and inspect materials for laboratory analysis.
Paints are not be thinned unless instructed by the Engineer. No external painting is to be
carried out during rain or when rain is likely to occur before the paint has had time to dry.
All surfaces are to be dry and free from moisture during painting.

F/50
(b) Preparation for Painting
All structural steel shall be thoroughly scraped and wire brushed to remove mill scale and
rust. Dirt, grease and oil shall be washed off with white spirit and the steel allowed to dry.
(c) Application
A first coat of Red Lead Graphite Primer or other approved primer shall be applied after
fabrication of the works has been completed. A minimum of 24 hours shall elapse before
the steel is moved from its position after painting has been completed.
After delivery to site, the steel shall be carefully examined and all areas where the priming
coat has been damaged and/or where rust has developed shall be washed with white spirit
and wire brushed as necessary and a further priming coat as for the first coat applied to
completely cover the damaged areas.
During erection, surfaces of steel which are to be in contact shall be painted with one
further coat of primer as previously described and the surfaces brought together whilst the
paint is still wet.
After erection, paint a second and finishing coat of 'Oil Company Aluminium Paint 368/36'
or other finishing paint of standard as for steelwork. Welds shall not be painted over until
they have been deslagged, inspected and approved.
Steel purlins and side rails shall generally be painted as for steelwork when the following
specification shall be used.
1st Coat - Red Oxide Zinc Chromate Primer or other approved primer
2nd Coat - Robbialac 'Oil Company Aluminium Paint 368/36' or other equal and approved
Aluminium Paint
The interior of mild steel gutters shall be prepared as previously described and painted
with 2 coats of Robbialac Epilac Coal Tar Epoxy Paint or other approved paint.
PRICES, MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
Prices quoted by the Contractor shall be based on the calculated weights of steel, and
shall include for manufacture, painting, and supply, all as described in the Bills of
Quantities, specified, and shown on the drawings, including the cost of delivery to the site
or other agreed place or places and the supply of all bolts, rivets, plugs, gussets, cleats, to
complete the erection of the works.
Prices shall include for erection, (all labour, scaffolding, and other erection equipment
necessary) and cover the cost of additional prime coat painting as previously specified.
The prices shall also include for lining up, levelling and plumbing but not for grouting up of
the bases.
The basis for payment for steelwork shall be the calculated steel weights of the structure.
Any variation from the original design on which the tender was based, which results in
either an increase or decrease in calculated weight of the structure as completed, shall
result in the appropriate additions or deductions to the submitted tender totals.
Any written instruction from the Engineer which may result in additional work over and
above that for which the Contractor quoted will be considered as extras and shall be paid
for on the basis of calculated additional steel weights.

F/51
 EXTERNAL WORKS SPECIFICATION
ARCHITECT OF ENGINEER

Whenever the word ‘Engineer’ is used in these descriptions of materials and workmanship, it
shall, where appropriate, be read and construed as the ‘Architect’, Landscape Architect or, as the
‘Civil Engineer’ in which instance the Landscape Architect or Engineer shall be deemed vested
with the duties of and be the representative of the Architect.

DISCREPANCIES IN DESCRIPTIONS

Descriptions of materials and workmanship contained in the Bills of Quantities measured items
shall take precedence over descriptions contained in appendices in the event of discrepancies
between the two, unless the Engineer shall otherwise direct.

TESTS AND SAMPLES

Unless otherwise described in the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor will be responsible for the
costs involved in testing materials as described hereinafter. He will also be responsible for all
the costs involved in supplying samples of materials or workmanship as required hereinafter to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cost of replacing materials fixed or placed in position which
do not comply with the required test results or approved samples shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.

KENYA STANDARDS

All materials and goods supplied for incorporation in the works must comply with any relevant
current standards issued by the Kenya Bureau of Standards.

GENERAL

The provisions of other sections of this Specification shall, where appropriate, apply to this
section. The works shall be executed in accordance with consultant drawings and designs.

CONCRETE PIPES

Concrete pipes and fittings shall conform to B.S. 556 and shall have ogee or spigot and socket
joints as specified in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

PVC SOIL SYSTEM

The Contractor shall supply and fix PVC soil pipes and fittings as indicated in the drawings.
Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant BS including BS 4514 and fixed to the

F/52
manufacturer’s specifications and any other particular specifications that may be issued by the
Engineer during the construction period.

EXCAVATION

The excavation shall be made true and even to falls, the bottom being trimmed to the correct
levels and well rammed. The minimum width of the trench at the bottom shall be the external
width of the pipe plus 300mm. Wherever soft places in excavated areas are encountered, the
Contractor shall excavate such soil to a hard foundation and replace with hard filling before any
drains are laid. Any trenches excavated in error to a greater depth than required shall be
backfilled to the required level with hard filling at the Contractor's own expense.

DRAIN RUNS

Surface water drains are to be to the diameters and of the materials as shown on the drawings,
laid in straight lines and with uniform falls to the levels indicated. No alterations to the sizes,
falls and runs shown on the drawings are to be made without previous consent.

JOINTING CONCRETE PIPES

Joints are to be made with best quality gaskin dipped in cement grout immediately prior to use,
caulked in, and finished off to not more than one third the depth of the socket.

Pipe runs are to be laid dry and jointed in one operation with cement and sand (1:2) trowelled to
a smooth face at an angle of 45 degrees to the pipes, and properly cored as the work proceeds.

Where an approved proprietory spigot and socket pipe is used, joints shall be made in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.

BACKFILLING

No backfilling shall be carried out until drains, manholes and chambers etc., have been tested and
approved. The whole of the backfilling shall be properly consolidated and shall be put back in
250mm layers. No mechanical rammers may be used until at least 600mm of consolidated
material has been returned over the pipes. Only approved material may be used for backfilling.
Where pipes are unprotected by concrete haunching, the first operation in filling shall be to
handpack and tamp selected fine material around the lower half of the pipes to buttress them to
the sides of the trench.

In the case of pitch fibre and plastic pipes, the first filling shall completely cover the pipe and
shall be of material free from stones or hard material which would be retained on a 25mm sieve.

TESTING NEW DRAINS

F/53
All surface water drains will be tested to 1500mm head of water. No drains are to be covered in
or further proceeded with until such test has bee made, repeated as necessary, and passed by the
Architect and Local Authority.

After passing the test the head of water is to be maintained until the concrete bed, haunching or
covering is complete. Immediately prior to completion of the Contract the main and branch
drains shall be tested by passing through them a ball or disc 6mm less in diameter than the bore
of the pipe, and the water test repeated, as required by the Architect and Local Authority.

PROTECTION OF WORK

The drains are to be laid to suit the general progress of the building work and at such times and in
such a manner as to be adequately protected against damage and deterioration. The whole of the
work is to be maintained and handed over in a sound and clean condition on completion of the
Contract.

INVERT BLOCK DRAINS

Precast concrete invert blocks and side slabs shall be formed of concrete (Grade 20) to the
dimensions shown on the drawings. Each course of side slabs required in the Bills of Quantities
shall be interpreted as one complete row of side slabs to one side of the channel concerned.
Drains should not normally be laid to a radius of less than 10 times the actual width of the drain.

Invert block drains shall be constructed in the positions and to the levels and dimensions shown
on the drawings and laid to true line and even fall. Where underfilling is required it shall be in
100mm maximum thickness layers of compacted gravel. The earth sides to such channels shall
be neatly finished to a slope of 1 to 1 or such other slope as the Architect may direct.

Invert blocks and side slabs shall be laid on a 75mm minimum thickness of compacted gravel
and be neatly jointed with cement mortar (1:3) as the work proceeds. The rates included in the
Bills of Quantities shall include for excavation, gravel bedding, providing, laying and jointing
invert blocks, refilling and disposal of surplus all as specified and all in-situ connections in
concrete of the appropriate Grade specified.

On completion, all drains, manholes, etc. shall be flushed from end to end with water and left
clean and free from obstructions and deleterious matter.

ROAD GULLIES

Gullies shall be masonry gullies constructed from 225mm building stone and rendered internally.
The rates included in the Bills of Quantities shall include for excavation, provision of all
materials, making junctions with connections to main drains, accurate setting of frames to line
and level, refilling and disposal of surplus materials.

Concrete filled gulley grating of size shown on the drawings shall be used as the cover.

F/54
KERBS, CHANNELS AND QUADRANTS

Precast concrete kerbs channels and quadrants shall be bedded and jointed in 12mm thick cement
mortar (1:3) on concrete (1:3:6 - 40mm) foundation of dimensions shown on the drawings.
Immediately after being laid, the kerbs and quadrants shall be haunched on back face to half their
height in concrete (1:3:6 - 40mm) to the dimensions shown on the drawings.

The exposed face of kerbs and quadrants shall be not less than 100mm nor more than 105mm
above the channel of the road except where it is necessary to provide an artificial fall in the
channel. The exposed surfaces of the kerbs, channels and quadrants shall conform to the
required gradients and curves in vertical plane and to the required plan.

Kerbs, channels and quadrants shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 340. No joint shall
exceed 12mm in width. All units shall be laid true to line and level and any unit found to be
more than 3mm out of line or level at either end shall be lifted and relaid.

PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or directed, precast concrete paving slabs shall comply
with B.S. 368 with minimum strength.

WEED KILLER

The finished formation of the footways and roads shall, where directed by the Architect, be
sprayed with a persistent total herbicide 'Telvar' W or other equal and approved, at the rate of 4
Kg per hectare. The application shall be evenly sprayed in a high volume of water at about 100
to 200 litres per hectare.

PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCKS PAVING

Precast Concrete block paving shall be laid in sand on properly prepared and compacted sub-base
as for in-situ concrete or asphalt concrete.

Blocks shall be fitted close together in a pattern approved by the Architect and boundaries shall
be restrained by edge channels or kerbs before vibrating begins.

Blocks thickness and characteristic strengths shall be as measured in the Bills of Quantities.

Blocks shall be laid by hand 20 to 30mm above finished level on levelled, unconsolidated sand
50mm thick before compaction and the paving shall be compacted using a plate vibrator. Fine
sand shall be brushed into the joints before and after compacting.

After compacting the surface level shall be within 5mm of the specified level and the level of any
two adjacent blocks shall not differ by more than 2mm.

F/55
 PRIME COST AND PROVISIONAL SUMS PREAMBLES

The Contractor shall include the Prime Cost and Provisional Sums for each Bill in his
tender. These sums shall be expended as directed by the Architect or deducted in
whole or in part if not required. Work executed in respect of Provisional Sums shall be
measured and valued by the Quantity Surveyor in accordance with the Conditions of
Contract.

The Contractor will be responsible for the administration of all Nominated Suppliers in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract and will be required to arrange an approved
programme for delivery of materials with each firm.

The Contractor will be responsible for the supervision and administration of all
Nominated Sub-Contractors in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and will be
required to arrange an approved programme with each firm.

The Contractor shall allow for general attendance upon Nominated Sub-Contractors and
for affording them all reasonable specific attendance and facilities for carrying out their
works simultaneously with his own and shall add to prime cost sums for each or all of
the following items or any other item which he considers necessary :-

(a) Profit and overhead cost

(b) Supplying all necessary full size setting out templates

(c) Giving all necessary dimensions and taking responsibility for their accuracy.

(d) Unloading or assistance in unloading of materials, getting in and hoisting in

position
(e) Providing all necessary working space and providing space for storage
accommodation which the Nominated Sub-Contractors will erect for themselves.

(f) Allowing the free and full use of all scaffolding, ladders, hoists, trestles, scaffold
boards and all plant of a similar nature belonging to or provided by the Contractor
while it remains erected on the site. Any further scaffolding required shall be the
Nominated Sub-Contractor's responsibility and he shall pay the cost thereof
unless otherwise stated.

F/56
g) Supply of water and supply of temporary lighting and of electric power, as more
specifically described in Bill No. 1 under 'Water for the Works' and 'Lighting and
Power for the Works' respectively.

(h) Providing all necessary latrine accommodation as more specifically described in

Bill No. 1 under 'Sanitation of the Works'.

(i) Removing ad replacing duct covers, pipe casings etc., as necessary for the
execution and testing of Nominated Sub-Contractor's work.

Provision is made after each Prime Sum Cost for the pricing of the foregoing under two
headings:-

'Add for Profit' should include (a)

'Allow for Attendance' should include (b) to (i) and any other expenses involved in
compliance with the preambles of this Appendix.

Builder's work in connection has been measured separately unless otherwise described
or unless any particular Sub-Contractor has been instructed to execute his own builder's
work. Where work in connection is required from the Contractor, he must obtain
particulars of positions in which chases, holes, mortices, etc., will be required so as to
avoid unnecessary cutting away. No claim will be considered for the extra cost of
cutting away work already built as a result of the Contractor's failure to obtain sufficient
particulars beforehand.

Any percentage addition made by the Contractor against an item of 'Add for Profit'
beneath a Prime Cost Sum will be deducted from the Contract Sum and in lieu thereof
he will be paid the said percentage of the actual amount directed to be expended in
respect of that particular Prime Cost Sum.

F/57
 SECTION G:

SAMPLE FORMS
(to be used at various stages of tender process up to signing of contract)

Page

(i) Form of Tender G/2

(ii) Letter of Acceptance G/3

(iii) Form of Agreement G/4 – G/5

(iv) Form of Tender Security G/6

(v) Form of Performance Bank Guarantee Undertaking G/7

(vi) Performance Bank Guarantee G/8 – G9

(vii) Certificate of site visit G/10

(viii) Form of Oath G/11 – G/12

(ix) Details of Sub-Contractors G/13

(x) Confidential Business Questionnaire G/14 – G/15

G/1
 FORM OF TENDER

To: Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife,

State Department of Tourism (Date)

P. O. Box 30027 – 00100 Nairobi. _____________________________ [Date]

PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH IN

MOMBASA COUNTY

Dear Sir,

1. In accordance with the Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Drawings

and Bills of Quantities for the execution of the above named works, we, the
undersigned offer to construct, install and complete such works and
remedy any defects therein for the sum of
KShs.___________________________[Amount in figures] Kenya
Shillings __________________________________________________________
_________________________________[Amount in words]
2. We undertake, if our tender is accepted, to commence the Works as soon
as is reasonably possible after the receipt of the Project Manager’s notice to
commence, and to complete the whole of the works comprised in the
contract within ________ weeks from the Date for Possession of Site.
3. We agree to abide by this tender until ________________ [Insert date], and it
shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before that
date.
4. Unless and until a formal Agreement is prepared and executed this tender
together with your written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding
Contract between us.
5. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any tender
you may receive.
Dated this ____________________ day of ____________ 20 __________

Signature __________________ in the capacity of _____________________

duly authorized to sign tenders for and on behalf of

____________________________________ [Name of Tenderer]

of __________________________________[Address of Tenderer]

Witness: Name ________________________________________

Address _____________________________________

Signature ___________________________________

Date ________________________________________

G/2
LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE
[Letterhead paper of the Employer]

_______________ [date]

To: _______________________________
[name of the Contractor]

________________________________
[Address of the Contractor]

Dear Sir,

This is to notify you that your Tender dated ______________________________________ for

the execution of

PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH IN

MOMBASA COUNTY

for the Contract Price of Kshs. _______________________________ (Kenya Shillings

______________________________ (amount in words) within a Completion Period of _____
Weeks in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers is hereby accepted.

You are hereby instructed to proceed with the execution of the said Works in accordance with
the Contract documents.

Authorized Signature _________________________________________________________

Name and Title of Signatory ___________________________________________________

Attachment: Agreement.

G/3
 FORM OF AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT, made the ______day of ___________, 2019

between Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife, State Department of Tourism, of [or whose registered office
is situated at] P.O. Box 30027 – 00100, Nairobi
(hereinafter called “the Employer”) of the one part AND
_____________________________________________of [or whose registered office is situated at]

P.O. Box Nairobi hereinafter called “the contractor”) of the other part.
WHEREAS THE Employer is desirous that the Contractor executes
The Proposed Regeneration of Jomo Kenyatta Public Beach in Mombasa County (hereinafter
called “the Works”) located in Mombasa County [Place/location of the Works] and the Employer
has accepted the tender submitted by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works
and the remedying of any defects therein for the Contract Price of Kenya Shillings
__________________________[Amount in figures], Kenya Shillings
_________________________________________________________________Amount in words].
and completion period of _____ Weeks.
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows:
1. In this Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively
assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and shall be read as part of this
Agreement i.e.:
i) Letter of Acceptance
ii) Form of Tender
iii) Conditions of Contract
iv) Appendix to Conditions of Contract
v) Specifications
vi) Drawings
vii) Priced Bills of Quantities
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as
hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute
and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all respects
with the provisions of the Contract.
4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution
and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the contract Price or
such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times
and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

G/4
IN WITNESS whereof the parties thereto have caused this Agreement to be executed the day
and year first before written.

SEALED with Common Seal of the Employer, MINISTRY OF TOURISM AND WILDLIFE,
STATE DEPARTMENT OF TOURISM

In the presence of (i) Name: _______________________________________

Address: _______________________________________
Signature: _______________________________________

(ii) Name: _______________________________________

Address: _______________________________________
Signature: _______________________________________

SEALED with Common Seal of the Contractor

In the presence of (i) Name: _______________________________________
Address: _______________________________________
Signature: _______________________________________

(ii) Name: _______________________________________

Address: _______________________________________
Signature: _______________________________________

G/5
 FORM OF TENDER SECURITY

WHEREAS ………………………………………………………. (hereinafter called “the Tenderer) has

submitted his tender dated ……………………………………… for the construction of
…………………………………………….. (name of Contract)

KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that WE ……………………………………………… having

our registered office at ……………………………….. (hereinafter called “the Bank”), are bound unto
………………………………….. (hereinafter called “the Employer”) in the sum of
KShs……………………………………… for which payment well and truly to be made to the said
Employer, the Bank binds itself, the successors and assigns by these presents, sealed with the Common
Seal of the Said Bank this ……………… Day of …………………….. 20 …………

THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are:

1. If after tender opening the Tenderer withdraws his tender during the period of tender validity
specified in the instructions to tenderers Or

2. If the Tenderer, having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by the Employer during the
period of tender validity:

(a) fails or refuses to execute the Form of Agreement in accordance with the Instructions to
Tenderers, if required; or
(b) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the Instructions
to Tenderers.

We undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written demand,
without the Employer having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the Employer will
note that the amount claimed by him is due to him, owing to the occurrence of one or both of the two
conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions.

This guarantee will remain in force up to and including thirty (30 days) after the period of tender validity,
and any demand in respect thereof should reach the Bank not later than the said date.

___________________________ _________________________
Signature of the Bank Name of Witness

___________________________ _________________________
Seal Signature of the Witness

__________________________ _________________________
Date Date

G/6
TO: Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife,
State Department of Tourism,
P.O. Box 30027 - 00100,
Nairobi.
KENYA.

Dear Sirs,

FORM OF PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE UNDERTAKING

We..............................................................................................................

of........................................................................................................(Surety)

are willing to act as Surety and to be bound to Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife, State
Department of Tourism, P.O. Box 30027 – 00100, Nairobi (hereinafter called the
Employer) in the sum equal to Ten Percentum (10%) of the Contract Sum for the due
performance by
....................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................(Tenderer)

of ...........................................................…………...........(address) of a Contract

Which he/they contemplate(s) entering into with the Employer for Proposed
Regeneration of Jomo Kenyatta Public Beach in Mombasa County according to the
terms of the Form of Performance Bank Guarantee, a copy of which has been
inspected by us without addition of any limitations.

We agree to provide a Performance Bank Guarantee under the above mentioned terms when and
if called upon to do so.

Name of Surety.................................................................................................

Signature of Surety.............................................................................................

Date: .............................................................................................................

Witness ..........................................................................................................

To be completed by proposed Surety

and returned with Tender Documents

(Official rubber stamp required)

G/7
 PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE

To: ________________________(Name of Employer) ____________(Date)

________________________(Address of Employer)

Dear Sir,
WHEREAS ______________________________ (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has
undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No.________________dated ________________ to
execute ______________________ (hereinafter called “the Works”);

AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor
shall furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum specified therein
as security for compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract;

AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee;

NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you,
on behalf of the Contractor, up to a total of Kshs. ____________ (amount of Guarantee in
figures) Kenya Shillings _______________________________________ (amount of
Guarantee in figures) Kenya Shillings ________________________________ (amount of
Guarantee in words), and we undertake to pay you upon your first written demand and
without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of Kenya Shillings
____________________________________(amount of Guarantee in words) as aforesaid
without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum
specified therein.

We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor
before presenting us with the demand.

We further agree that no change, addition or other modification of terms of the Contract or of
the Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract documents which may be
made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this
Guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of change, addition or modification.

G/8
This guarantee shall be valid until the date of issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion.

SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF THE GUARANTOR ______________________________

Name of Bank _______________________________________________________________

Address _______________________________________________________________

Date _______________________________________________________________

G/9
 Name of Contractor _________________________________

PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA PUBLIC BEACH IN

MOMBASA COUNTY

CERTIFICATE OF SITE VISIT

I/We, the undersigned Contractor, hereby certify that I/we have visited the above site, that
I/we have familiarized ourselves fully with the existing buildings and that we are
completely aware of the requirements of the tender documents as to the scope of works
required to complete the works and the conditions under which such works will be carried
out.

Contractor _________________________________________________________________

Date _______________________________________________________________________

G/10
 REPUBLIC OF KENYA

IN THE MATTER OF OATHS AND STATUTORY DECLARATION ACT

CHAPTER 15 OF THE LAWS OF KENYA
AND
IN THE MATTER OF THE EXCHEQUER AND AUDIT (PUBLIC
PROCUREMENT), REGULATIONS, 2001.

I, …………………………………….of P. O. Box ………………………. being a resident of

………………………………….. in the Republic of Kenya do hereby make oath and state as
follows:-

1. THAT I am the Chief Executive/Managing Director/Principal Officer/Director of

……….... ………………………………..
(name of the Candidate) which is a Candidate in respect of Tender Number No.
…………………... To supply goods, render services and/or carry out works for
Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife, State Department of Tourism and duly authorized
and competent to make this Affidavit.

2. THAT the aforesaid Candidate has not been requested to pay any inducement to any
member of the Board, Management, Staff and/or employees and/or agents of
Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife, State Department of Tourism which is the
procuring entity.

3. THAT the aforesaid Candidate, its servants and/or agents have not offered any
inducement to any member of the Board, Management, Staff and/or employees
and/or agents of Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife State Department of Tourism.

4. THAT what is deponed to hereinabove is true to the best of my knowledge

information and belief.

SWORN at NAIROBI by the said }

……………………………………………… }

Name of Chief Executive/Managing Director/ }

Principal Officer/Director }
on this …………. day of …………… 20 …… }

} __________________________
DEPONENT

G/11
 }

Before me }

Commissioner for Oaths }

G/12
LIST OF PROPOSED SUB- CONTRACTORS

The Contractor is required to arrange for the undermentioned works to be executed complete by
approved Sub - Contractors and shall state in the spaces provided the names of the Sub - Contractors
he proposes to employ. The proposals will only be acceptable with the approval of the Project
Manager. Sub-Contractor’s experience of similar works carried in the last 3 years with the Sub-
Contract values will be considered before granting of approval.

ELEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTORS

Painting and decoration Name....................................................

Address................................................

.........................................................

.........................................................

Structural steelwork Name....................................................

Address................................................

.........................................................

.........................................................

A.P.P. Waterproofing Name....................................................

Address................................................

.........................................................

.........................................................

Electrical Installations Name....................................................

Address................................................

.........................................................

.........................................................

Plumbing, drainage and fire Name....................................................

fighting installations
Address................................................

.........................................................

.........................................................

G/13
 CONFIDENTIAL BUSINESS QUESTIONNAIRE

You are requested to give the particulars indicated in Part 1 and either Part 2 (a), 2 (b) or whichever
applies to your type of business.

You are advised that it is a serious offence to give false information on this Form.

Part 1 – General

Business Name:

Location of Business Premises: Country/Town:

Plot No. Street/Road:

Postal Address: Tel No.

Nature of Business:

Current Trade Licence No. Expiry Date:

Maximum value of business which you can handle at any time: KShs.:

Name of your Bankers:

Branch:

Sole Proprietor

Your name in full: Age:

Nationality: Country of Origin:

Citizenship details:

Part 2 (b) – Partnership

Give details of partners as follows

Name in Full Nationality Citizenship Details Shares

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

G/14
Part 2(c ) - Registered Company:

Private or public:

Issued Kshs.

Give details of all directors as follows

Name in Full Nationality Citizenship Details Shares
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Part 2 (d) - Interest in the Firm:

Is there any person/persons in ………………………. [name of Employer] who has interest in this firm?
Yes/No. ………………………[delete as necessary]

I certify that the information given above is correct

Title Signature Date

* Attach proof of citizenship

G/15
 SECTION H

SUMMARY OF THE EVALUATION CRITERIA

MAIN BUILDERS WORKS – PROPOSED REGENERATION OF JOMO KENYATTA
PUBLIC BEACH IN MOMBASA COUNTY
STAGE 1 STAGE 2 STAGE 3

PRELIMINARY TECHNICAL EVALUATION FINANCIAL RECOMMENDATIONS

EVLAUATION (MAX.100 POINTS) EVALUATION
Documentary evidence Must be
provided
a) Tax PRICE THE LOWEST
Compliance A Documents fully completed/ COMPARISIONS EVALUATED TENDER
Certificate compliance with AND TO BE
from KRA pricing instructions (4 points) CHECKING RECOMMENDED
b) List of FOR FOR
Directors with ➢ Dully filled/Completed ARITHMETIC CONSIDERATION OF
respective Documents (4 points) or ERRORS AWARD SUBJECT TO
shareholding Rejection under Clause THE STATED
and 2.2 of CONDITIONS OF
citizenship instructions to Tenderers AWARD
details
c) Audited • No errors (2 points)
Accounts for • Up to 15% error (1
the last 2 points)
years • Above 15% error -
d) Certificate of Non responsive
Company • Consistency in Price
Registration Distribution (1 points)
e) NCA class 2 • Non consistent (0
and above Points)
Contractor
for National SUB-TOTAL SECTION A
Construction
Authority B Personnel (28 Points)
f) Current
Business ➢ Contract Manager to have at
permits from least University Degree in
relevant local Architecture, Quantity
authority. Surveying or Civil
g) Bid Bond of Engineering with at least five
2% of the years’ experience as a
Tender Sum Contract Manager in works of
from a an equivalent nature and
reputable Volume OR Higher National
Bank. Diploma in Building
h) The proposed Construction/Engineering with
Domestic 15 years’ experience as a
sub- Contract Manager in works of
contractors to an equivalent nature and

H/1
 submit Volume
(Electrical) • Qualification (5 points) and
a) Tax experience for the Period
compliance Indicated ( points) – (total 10
certificate Points)
from KRA
b) Certificate of • With the required qualification but
company less experience than the period
registration indicated (Pro-rate)
c) National
construction • Less Qualifications than stated
authority above (0 Points regardless of
registration experience)
and NCA
category 3 or ➢ Site Manager to have at least
higher (copy Higher National Diploma in
of certificate
Building
to be
Construction/Engineering with
attached)
10 years (if degree holder 5
d) Electrical sub-
years) experience as a Site
contractor to
Manager in works of an
provide ERC
equivalent nature and Volume
category A-1
and be
OR Certificate holder in
licensed with
Building
Communicati Construction/Engineering with
ons Authority 15 years’ experience as a Site
of Kenya Manager in works of an
equivalent nature and Volume
i) The proposed
Domestic • Qualification (4 points) and
sub- experience for the Period Indicated (4
contractors to points) – (total 8 Points)
submit
(Mechanical) • With the required qualification but
a) Tax less experience than the period
compliance indicated (Pro-rate)
certificate
from KRA ➢ • Less Qualifications than
b) Certificate of stated above (0 Points
company regardless of experience)
registration
c) National Construction/Engineering with 10
construction years (if degree holder 5 years)
authority experience as a Construction
registration Supervisor OR Certificate holder in
and NCA Building construction/Eng with 15
category 3 or years experience as a Construction
higher (copy Supervisor in works of similar nature.
of certificate
to be • Qualification (2 points each) and
attached) experience for the Period Indicated (1

H/2
NOTES: point each) – (total 6 Points)
1. Tenders which
do not satisfy • With the required qualification but
any of the above less experience than the period
requirements indicated (Pro-rate)
shall be rejected
2. √ Responsive • Less Qualifications than
3. X Non stated above (0 Points
Responsive regardless of experience)

➢ Detailed curriculum vitae

of personnel certified by
employee and bidding
company representative
to be attached (2 Points)
• Submission for all the
above staff (2 Points)
• Submission of less (pro-
rata)

➢ Copies of employment
letters of relevant
personnel on permanent
or contract terms to be
attached.(2 Points)
• Submission of
employment letters for all
staff (2 Points)
• Submission of less (Pro-
rata)

SUB-TOTAL SECTION B

C Relevant Experience (30

Points)

Details of experience and past

performance on at least five
completed projects as a main
contractor (builders works) within the
past ten years each with a value of a
lesser magnitude including names of
clients/firms, clear physical address
and contact persons [At least three (3)
of these projects must be located in
Kenya]. (Attach Contract agreements
and Certificates of completion)
Completed projects to include the
following name of project, address of
client, contact persons. Providing
evidence of such contracts(attach

H/3
contract agreements and practical
completion certificates. (6 Points on
each project)

• Any project submitted as above

which of a lesser magnitude or not
accompanied by evidence of contract
i.e. Contract agreement and
Completion Certificate shall not be
considered for scoring of the assigned
points. • Projects that are at least 70%
complete with evidence in regard to
(1) above would be considered for
scoring

SUB-TOTAL SECTION C

D Machinery & Equipment (13

Points)

Provide a list of Major items of

construction equipment proposed to
carry out the Contract including, but
not limited to the listed items as
shown in page 23 and 24 hereinafter
{tenderers are expected to complete
this table as necessary, failure to do
so may attract nil points for this
item}. State if own or lease and an
undertaking letter that they will be
available for the Contract. (Provide
Proof of ownership e.g. copies of log
books, receipts, letters of insurance
e.t.c. or lease agreements or a firm
commitment letter on its availability
for inspection by Ministry of Tourism
and Wildlife, State Department of
Tourism at any time) – 10 points.

Concrete mixing & placing plant/

Equipment (3 Points)

Vertical Transport Equipment (3

Points

Vehicle Transport (2 Points

Earthmoving & Compaction
Equipment (5Points
- All the listed Equipment (10 Points)
- Less than the listed items (Pro-rata

H/4
SUB-TOTAL SECTION D

E Business Support (19 Points)

Availability of Liquid assets (5

points) and access to lines of credit or
other financial resources (5 points) -
(total 10 Points)

Proof of Financial stability

(current ratio of 2:1) – (4 Points)

Information regarding any

litigation, current or during the
last five years, in which the
tenderer is involved, the parties
concerned and disputed amount.
If none, state so. (5 Point)

SUB TOTAL SECTION E

F At least 3 referees (attach

copies of referees).
(3 Points)

• Three referees (3 points)

• Less or none(0)

SUB-TOTAL SECTION F

G Completion programme for

the works (3 points)

• Realistic shortest
contract period (3 Points)
• Any other period (Pro-
rata)

SUB-TOTAL SECTION G

GRAND TOTAL

N.B. Cut off – 75% to qualify for

financial evaluation.

H/5
.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:
SECTION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS.

SECTION 2 - QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP.

SECTION 3 - COMMISSIONING AND TESTING.

SECTION 4 - PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

SECTION 5 - SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES AND PRICES

BILLS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.2 WORKING DRAWINGS
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
1.4 STRUCTURAL PROVISION FOR THE CONTRACT WORKS
1.5 COLLABORATION
1.6 CUTTING AWAY AND MAKING GOOD
1.7 CONCEALED WORK
1.8 POSITION OF SERVICES, EQUIPMENT FITTINGS AND APPARATUS
1.9 PAINTING
1.10 IDENTIFICATION OF PLANT AND COMPONENTS

2 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

2.1 REGULATIONS
2.2 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
2.3 EARTHING
2.4 SWITCHBOARDS
2.5 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS INCOPORATING FUSE SWITCHES-
GENERAL
2.6 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS INCOPORATING FUSE SWITCHES-UNIT
TYPE
2.7 MANUFACTURERS
2.8 FUSE SWITCHES, SWITCH-FUSE & ISOLATING SWITCHES
2.9 H.R.C. FUSES
2.10 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
2.11 MINIATURE AIR BREAK CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
2.12 PVC INSULATED, PVC SHWATHED, SINGLE WIRE ARMOURED & PVC
SHEATED OVERALL CABLE (PVCI, SWA & PVCS)
2.13 PVC INSULATED, PVC SHWATHED, SINGLE WIRE ARMOURED & PVC
SHEATED OVERALL CABLE (PVCI, PVCS, SWA, & PVCS) INSTALLATION
& TESTING
2.14 PVC CABLES
2.15 HEAT RESISTING CABLES
2.16 FLEXIBLE CORDS & CABLES
2.17 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES
2.18 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING
2.19 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
2.20 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
2.21 LIGHTING SWITCHES
2.22 LUMINAIRES
2.23 LUMINAIRE CONNECTIONS
2.24 LAMPHOLDERS
2.25 LAMPS
2.26 CEILING ROSES
2.27 GENERAL PURPOSE SOCKET OUTLETS
2.28 FUSED SPUR OUTLETS
2.29 SUB-CIRCUITS WIRING
2.30 CABLE IDENTIFICATION
2.31 EARTHING & TESTING
3.0 COMMISSION AND MAINTAINANCE

I/2
3.1 COMMISSION AND TESTING
3.2 HANDING OVER
3.3 MAINTENANCE AND DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

4.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

4.1 EXTENT OF WORKS

4.2 EXCLUSIONS
4.3 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING
4.4 INSTALLATION OF POWER
4.5 LIGHTING FITTINGS
4.6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
4.7 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
4.8 T.V. INSTALLATION
4.9 TRUNKING SYSTEM
4.10 STAND-BY GENERATOR
4.11 CABLE TRAYS
4.12 CHANGE OVER CONTACTORS
4.13 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
4.14 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
4.15 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM
4.16 MAIN EARTHING
4.17 MAINTAINED AND NON MAINTAINED RISING MAINS
5.0 SCHEDULE OF UNIT RATES
6.0 PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF PRICES
6.1 GENERAL
6.2 DEFINATIONS
6.3 ABBREVIATIONS
6.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENTS
7.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES AND PRICES
8.0 COLLECTION
9.0 MAIN SUMMARY

I/3
SECTION 1
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

1.1 1NTRODUCTION

These specifications cover the execution of Electrical installation and standby Generator
Installation and should be read in conjunction with all other relevant drawings and contract
documents issued to the contractor in connection with the job.

1.2 WORKING DRAWINGS

Contract Drawings are preliminary drawings whose purpose is to establish the requirements and
scope of the sub contract works and to allow tenderers to prepare their tenders. They are not
intended to be working drawings and must not be used as such unless specifically released for
that purpose

The Contractor shall himself prepare his working Drawings as may be necessary. The working
drawing shall be complete in such detail that not only the Contractor works can be executed on
site but also that the Engineer can approve the Contractor’s designs and intentions in the
execution of the Contractors works.

If the Contractor requires any further instructions, details, contract drawings , or information to
enable him to prepare his working drawings or any work to be done, he shall give adequate notice
in writing to the Engineer of such information as may be required.

All working drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work commenced prior to such approval.

Working Drawings to be prepared by the Contractor shall include but not be restricted to The
following:

a) Any drawing required by the main contractor and the Engineer to enable structural
provision to be made, they shall include details of holes, chases, fixings, foundations, cable
ducting etc.

b) General arrangement drawings of all plant, control panel, switch and distribution boards,
fittings and apparatus or any part thereof and of installation layout arrangements of such
plant and apparatus.

c) Layout drawings of all concealed and surface ducts and conduits.

d) Such other drawings as may be necessary.

One copy of all Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Two copies
of approved Working Drawings shall be submitted as soon as possible thereafter.

There shall be no deviation from approved Working drawings without the Engineer’s written
permission. Working drawing shall be based on the metric system.

Approval by the Engineer of Working Drawings shall neither relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations under the Contract nor relieve him of correcting any error found subsequently in the
approved Working Drawings or other drawings and in the work onsite or elsewhere associated
therewith.

I/4
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

During execution of the works on site the Contractor shall, in a manner approved by the
Engineer, record on working drawings contract drawings all information necessary for preparing
record drawings of the installed Contract Works. Marked-up drawings and other documents shall
be available to the Engineer as he may require for inspection and checking.

Record Drawings may, subject to the approval of the Engineer, include approved working
drawings adjusted as a correct record of the installation of the Contract Works. They shall be
included but are not restricted to the following drawings or information:

a) Working Drawings And Contract Drawings amended as necessary but titled “Record
Drawings” and certified as a true record of the “as installed” Contract Works. Subject to
the approval of the Engineer such working drawings as may be inappropriate may be
omitted.

b) Fully dimensioned drawings of all plant and apparatus installed or connected by the
Contractor.

c) General arrangement drawings of equipment, other areas containing plant forming part of
the Contract Works and the like, including the accurate size and location of plant and
apparatus suitably cross-referred to the drawings mentioned in (b) above and hereinafter.

d) Routes, types, sizes and arrangement of all electric cables, conduits, ducts and wiring.

e) Schematic diagrams showing all vital information relating to control and instrumentation.

f) Schematic diagrams of individual plant, apparatus, switch and distribution boards, and
control panels

These diagrams shall include those particular to individual plant or apparatus and also
those applicable to system operation as a whole.

g) Wiring diagrams of plant and apparatus.

The Contractor shall supply for fixing in the plant room and the office of the maintenance
Engineer and similar places such suitable instruction charts, Schematic diagrams as may be
requested by the Engineer provided that the said charts, diagrams etc. Relate to the
installations forming part of sub contract works. All such charts and diagrams shall be
suitable plastic material on a stiff backing and must be approved by the Engineer before final
printing.

Two copies of the Record Drawings of the Contract Works and two sets of installation charts
and schematic diagrams on stiff backing shall be provided not more than one month after
practical completion.

Record Drawings shall be prepared on approved translucent linen or plastic material suitable
for reproduction by the Dyeline process or similar.

I/5
1.4 STRUCTURAL PROVISION FOR THE CONTRACT WORKS

Preliminary major structural; provision has been made for the Contract works based on outline
information ascertained during preparation of the Contract documents. The preliminary major
structural provision made will be deemed adequate unless the Contractor states otherwise when
submitting his tender.

Any minor structural provisions or alterations to major structural provisions required by the
Contract shall be shown on the working drawings to be submitted to the Engineer within 30 days
of the date of award of the Contract.

No requests for alterations to preliminary major structural provisions will be approved except
where they are considered unavoidable by the Engineer. In no case will they be approved if the
building work is so far advanced that they will cause additional coasts or delays in the work of
the Main Contractor.

1.5 COLLABORATION

The Contractor shall carry out his work in accordance with the main contractor’s working
program.

The Contractor shall collaborate with the Engineer and the Main Contractor in planning the
installation before work is commenced. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that there is close
collaboration with other Contractors in installing services to prevent fouling of service positions,
cable routes, switch positions, access positions etc.

When large items of equipments such as switchboards, trunking or long lengths of conduit are to
be installed or cable to be stretched out before drawing in, the Contractor shall advise the Main
Contractor in adequate time so that access is provided for installation before work is commenced
on site.

The Contractor shall make sure the correctness of connections he is making to all items and
equipments supplied under this and other contracts before they are put into operation. Details of
operation, temperatures, voltage, phase, power, rating etc shall be confirmed to others and
confirmation received before the system is first operated.

1.6 CUTTING AWAY AND MAKING GOODS

The Main contractor shall be responsible for all cutting away and making good, but it will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to make sure that this work is kept to a minimum.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that runs for the floor or wall chase, holes
to be cut or left, will be marked out at the appropriate stage of structural works.

The Main contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all cable ducts and trenches and for
their installation, unless otherwise stated in the particular specification or the Contract Drawings.

The Contractor shall include in his tender for the plugging of all wall, ceilings and floors to
facilitate the fixing of the conduits, accessories and all other portions of the electrical
installations. Any purpose made fixing brackets shall also be provided and installed by the
Contractor.

The Contractor is to set out at the earliest opportunity the position of all holes necessary for the
passage of ducts and conduits or otherwise in the connection of his work, and should additional
holes or openings be required due to failure of the Contractor to fulfil the condition of this clause,
then he must arrange with the Main Contractor to make such openings as expense of the

I/6
Contractor. The Contractor is not to cut any holes or openings unless specifically authorized to
do so by the Main Contractor and should he do so without the approval he will become liable to
any damage to the building or fittings.

The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the fixing and alignment of switched socket
outlets, telephone and similar boxes.

1.7 CONCEALED WORK

The Contractor will be responsible for the exact runs and placing of conduits and boxes that are
to be cast in concrete ceilings, floors, walls, columns and beams, and for the proper fixing of the
conduits and boxes to the shuttering and the steel reinforcement work.

During the procedure of casting, the Contractor must provide an electrician to attend the work
and, if necessary, to be ready to make good any damage on the Contractor’s work caused by the
Main contractor’s labourers when casting.

Where conduits are concealed, the boxes shall be in an exact position relative to the finished
plaster or such other finish as may be applied to enable cover plates to be accurately positioned.
The Main Contractor will, if required, indicate suitable datum points from which all
measurements can be taken and will inform the Contractor of the measurements of all walls,
depth of plaster and floor screeds, final finish and any other information. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to ensure accuracy of fixings.

1.8 POSITION OF SERVICES, EQUIPMENT, FITTINGS AND APPARATUS

The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions relative to his work by actual
measurements taken on the site.

The routes of services and approximate positions of apparatus are shown on the Contract
Drawings, but their exact positions shall be determined by approved dimensional details on
working drawings or on site by the Engineer in consultation with the Contractor or Contractor.

The Contractor shall ascertain on site that his work will not foul other services and in all cases
the services through the ducts must be readily accessible for maintenance.

Any work which has to be re-done to negligence in this respect will be his responsibility.

The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his tender for locating terminal points of
services (e.g. lighting switches, socket outlets, lighting points) in position 1 meter horizontally
and vertically from the location shown on the Contract Drawings. Within this limits no variations
in the Contract Sum will be made unless the work has already been executed in accordance with
previously approved working drawings or with the Engineer’s approval.

1.9 PAINTING

The Contractor must include for all protective and finish painting of the Contract works to the
approval of the Architect and Engineer. The painting shall be carried out by skilled painters.

1.10 IDENTIFICATION OF PLANT AND COMPONENTS

All main switches, circuit breakers, isolators, switch fuses, consumer’s service units and
distribution boards shall be neatly and clearly labelled externally with identification marks
corresponding with those on drawings or in Specifications.
Details of the lettering of the labels and the method of mounting or supporting shall be forwarded
to the Engineer for approval prior to manufacture.

I/7
 SECTION 2
2. QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

2.1 REGULATIONS

The Contract Works must be carried out strictly in accordance with the following documents:

i.The 14th Edition of the “Regulations for the Electrical equipment of Buildings” issued by the
institution of Electrical Engineers of Great Britain with local amendments.

ii.The Licensee’s bye-laws.

iii.Relevant British standard specification and code of practice published by the British Standard
Institution (hereinafter referred to as B.S. and C.P. respectively).

iv.The Specification.

v.The working drawings produced by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

vi.The Engineer’s instructions.

The Contractor shall undertake all modifications demanded by authorities in order to comply with
the regulations, and produce all certificates, if any, from the authorities without extra charge.

2.2 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All materials, fittings and accessories are to be new and in accordance with the requirements of
the current rules and regulations where such exist, and with the relevant British Standard
Specification.

Uniformity of type and manufacture of fittings or accessories is to be preserved as far as

practicable throughout the whole work.

Wherever in this Specification the practice is adopted of specifying a particular item as ‘similar’
to that listed in a particular firm’s catalogue, it is to be clearly understood that this is to indicate
the type and quality of equipment required.

No attempt is being made to give preference to the equipment supplied by the firm whose
catalogue is quoted.

Where particular manufactures are specified herein, no alternative makes will be considered
without weighty reasons and the Engineer shall have the right to reject any other makes.

The Contractor shall if required by the Architect or Engineer submits samples of materials for
their approval before placing an order.

The Contractor will be entirely responsible for all materials, apparatus, equipment etc. Furnished
by him in connection with his work, and shall take all special care to protect all parts of finished
work from damage until handed over to the Employer.

The work shall be carried out by competent workmen under skilled and experienced supervision.
The Engineer shall have the right to have any part of work taken down or changed at the
Contractors expense, which is executed in an unsatisfactory manner.

I/8
Such materials supplied by other installation and/or connection by the Contractor shall be
carefully examined before installation and connection. Any defects noted shall immediately be
reported to the Engineer.

2.3 EARTHING

The Contractor shall earth the entire installation in accordance with the IEE Regulations and
Licensee’s bye-laws.

An earth electrical system shall be installed at the point adjacent to the main supply intake and at
every building served by the external distribution system.

Each earth electrode shall be a 12mm diameter copper rod driven to a depth of 1300mm. In rocky
soil conditions, where this depth is difficult to obtain, the Sub contractor shall obtain written
approval from the Engineer for an alternative earth electrode system. The electrode shall be
connected via a green PVC insulated copper cable to an earth terminal adjacent to the incoming
supply, to which all cable armouring, conduit, trunking, switchgear etc. shall be bonded, together
with all other metallic incoming services, e.g. water, gas etc.

Provision shall also be made for connection with the neutral of the incoming supply.

Where P.M.E. is approved and after the supply Authority has made its connection, the electrical
Contractor shall similarly connect the neutral of each distribution main to the earth at its remote
end.

The bonding of other services or connections of neutral to earth shall be made after satisfactory
completion of earth continuity and line earth loop impedance tests. Tests of the resistance to earth
of each electrode system shall also be carried out and the results recorded.

The entire system of metallic conduits and trunking, metallic sheaths of cables, cases and
enclosures of switchgear and electrical apparatus shall be connected to the earth point, according
to current rules and regulations. The Su-Contractor is reminded that resistance of the earth
conductor from the earth electrode to any point in the earthing system shall not exceed 0.5 ohms.

The Contractor shall supply and install conductors, cables, copper tapes, earthing rods etc for
installation of complete earthing system.

Means shall be provided, e.g. by means of test clamp, to isolate the electrode from the system for
periodic checking.

All cable glands for steel wire armoured underground type cable, where installed, shall be fitted
with an approved earthing washer having a tag for the connection of an earth lead. Every such
washer installed shall be connected by an insulated earthing lead to proper earthing terminal by
means of lug or washers on the adjacent switchgear or other equipment.

2.4 SWITCHBOARDS

Tender prices must include the supply of all switchboards and distribution boards where not
otherwise stated.

All costs for installation in the positions indicated on drawings and the cleaning and connection
of all in and outgoing cables to the correct terminals must be included in the tender.

Each switchboard section shall be completed, fully wired and checked out at the factory or
workshop and shall require a minimum of installation work on site. Modular construction shall be

I/9
used wherever practicable and provision shall be made for simplified servicing, replacement and
maintenance throughout without major dismantling.

All switches, switch fuses, circuit breakers etc. shall be numbered in agreement with the Engineer
with engraved plastic labels.

Where space on switchboards is provided for future components to be installed as shown on the
drawings, all ancillary parts shall be provided and installed so the future components may be
installed and connected with the least possible inconvenience. Fully safety measures shall be
provided with all such spaces.

Provision must be made for installation of the Licensee’s metering equipment, if any, including
viewing holes in the panel.

Switch and distribution boards shall be dustproof if nothing else is stated. They shall have a
flexibility of arrangement so that future extensions are possible. Switch fuses shall be so installed
that when front covers are removed all incoming and outgoing connections are easily accessible
from the front. Neutral and earthing bar shall be provided within each panel in the full length of
the panel having connectors equivalent to the number of switches.

The arrangements shall be so that complete switches may be disconnected and withdrawn without
too extensive work.

All busbars and busbar connections shall be clearly marked with colours according to the phases:
red, yellow, blue, and black for the neutral. The busbars shall be orderly arranged in the panel
and furthermore so the extensions to both sides may be made in the future.

Removable insulated shields shall be provided for protection against contact with live parts. All
panel arrangements shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to withstand the influences of
short-circuit currents.

All wiring within each switchboard shall be orderly laced and bonded to the panel structure, the
wiring insulation being colored according to the above busbar color scheme.

Where wiring passes through holes in metalwork protection by rubber bushes shall be provided.

Where single core cables are used care shall be taken to prevent hysteresis.

Conduit and cable entries shall be provided at top and bottom end.

Where wiring is installed to panels which are supplied and installed by others the cables shall be
brought into the panel and sufficient lengths left to permit the making off and connection by
others to the terminals.

Similarly where wiring which is installed by others to a panel supplied under this contract, the
final connection of the cables to the terminal shall be carried out as part of this contract. Standard
colour phase discs shall be fixed on all panels to indicate to which phase the various components
are connected.

Each panel shall be fitted internally with circuit lists and a schematic drawing showing the
distribution system, mounted on a glazed frame.

I/10
2.5 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS INCORPORATING FUSE SWITCHES-GENERAL

Low voltage (L.V) switchboards shall be of the ‘unit’ or ‘cubicle’ type as specified, constructed
by a specialist switchgear manufacturer in accordance with BS. 5486.

Each switchboard shall incorporate the isolators; fuse switches, meters, instruments, protection
relays as detailed in the following specification sections and/or drawings.

Equipment sizes indicated are minimum acceptable to the Engineer. Approved manufacturer’s
standard units, may be offered however, the units shall not be of lower rating than the sizes
specified.

Each switchboard shall be manufactured so that no operating handle exceeds the height of 2.10 m
from the finished floor level.

Fused switches shall comply fully with the testing requirements of BS. 5419, the tests being
carried out at an A.S.T.A. proving Station. Fuse switches shall be fitted with suitable HRC
cartridge fuse links, which fully comply with BS. 88. The units shall totally enclosed in a sheet
steel case and be of the 440 volt (A.C) between phases) rating, triple pole and switched neutral
(T.P. & S.N.), triple pole and unswitched neutral (T.P. & N) or single pole and unswitched
neutral (S.P. & N) as specified. Glazed porcelain or approved equal bases and carriers shall be
fitted. Together with a hand operated isolating mechanism, complete with a mechanical On/OFF
position indicator.

All switched neutral contacts shall be arranged to close the circuit prior to the phase contacts and
break the circuit after the phase contacts.

All fuse switches or isolator handles shall be arranged to operate in a vertical plane.

Connections between the fuse switches or isolators and the bus-bars shall be made by means of
solid high conductivity copper links and solid mechanical clamps.

Bus-bars incorporated in each switchboard shall be marked and arranged in accordance with
bS.158 and be manufactured from either circular or rectangular hard drawn, high conductivity
copper and be supported by rigid bracings manufactured from bakelite, ceramics or other
approved material. Bus-bar clearance shall be in accordance with BS.15 and PVC insulation shall
be applied to all bus-bars and associated connections.

Each switchboard shall be arranged so that the bus-bar is accessible from a separate sheet steel
cover or covers, without removing any fuse switch or isolator.

Connection to the bus-bars shall be made with suitable solid mechanical clamp, nut and bolt to
B.S.159. Bus-bars shall not be drilled.

Each complete switchboard shall be constructed in compliances with BS.159 and be capable of
withstanding, without damage, a symmetrical through fault of prospective current equivalent to
31.0MVA. 3 phase at 415 volts for the maximum time it will take the major prospective device
incorporated in the switchboard to operate unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Engineer.
Each switchboard shall be capable of having an isolator or fuse switch closed or opened on to
such a fault without damage to the switchboard.

I/11
2.6 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD INCORPORATING FUSE SWITCHED-UNIT TYPE

Low voltage (L.V) unit type switchboards shall be in accordance with the preceding ‘L.V.
Switchboards- General’ clause of this specification Section and be purpose designed and
constructed by an approved specialist switchgear manufacturer.

Each switchboard shall be manufactured from a suitable angle or channel iron welded framework
on to which shall be fixed the items of switchgear, with inter-connections or trunking as
necessary to form a neat and compact switchboard.

Individual items of equipment shall be mounted above and below a bus-bar chamber with the
complete switchboard being of the floor mounting type with suitable wall ties.

Each complete switchboard shall be prefabricated by the switchgear manufactured with all
internal wiring being carried out before delivery. The wiring shall be coloured to indicate the
different phases.

Each bus-bar chamber shall be constructed from rustproof sheet steel with detachable end plates
and a screwed or bolted front cover. All conductors shall be equal cross section formed from H.C.
copper and mounted on insulators.

Heavy grade bitumastic felt shall be provided between the floor and the switchboard.

2.7 MANUFACTURERS

All low voltage main and sub-main switchboards shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

All floor distribution cubicles, purpose made distribution panels, distribution boards, MCCB,
MCB, switches and isolators shall be supplied by one manufacturer, but not necessarily the same
manufacturer as mention above.

All types of equipment shall have been in general use for at least 3 years prior to the
commencement of the contract and spare availability shall be guaranteed for a minimum of 5
years following the completion of the contract.

2.8 FUSE SWITCHES, SWITCH-FUSE & ISOLATING SWITCHES

All fuse switches, switch-fuses, and isolating switches shall be hand operated, single pole and
neutral, double pole, triple pole and neutral, four poles as specified and be ASTA certified to
B.S.5419.

The neutral contact shall be arranged to be switched or linked as specified and in the switched
neutral units the neutral contact shall make before, and break later than the phase contacts.

Each unit shall be of the 440-volt (a.c. between phases) rating and be complete with a sheet steel
case manufactured from not less than 1.7mm thick metal.

Each unit shall incorporate a hinged cover provided with adequate lugs to enable padlocks to be
fitted if required.

Suitable phase identification shall be fitted to all units.

Each switch shall have a quick make and break switch action with spring-assisted mechanism
ensuring positive ON/Off movement and identification.

I/12
Adequate wiring space shall be provided in each unit to facilitate wiring and connection and, if
possible, removable side and top panels shall be provided.

Each complete unit shall be fitted with all necessary terminals, shrouds, earthing connection etc
and be stove enamelled finished to an approved colour.

2.9 H.R.C. FUSES

The Contract shall include for the provision of H.R.C. fuses of maximum rating of all
equipments, in compliance with BS.88 for AC46 Category of Duty and class Q1 fusing factors.

Confirmation of fuse ratings shall be obtained from the Engineer before placing any orders.

H.R.C. fuses provided on this contract shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and be of same
class or type to ensure adequate discrimination and grading throughout the distribution system.

Semi-enclosed or rewireable type shall not be provided.

Cartridge fuses for use in conjunction with 13amp socket outlet fused plug tops shall be in
accordance with B.S.1362.

2.10 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

The Contract shall include for each distribution board to be of the same size and type as detailed
in the following specification sections, or the attached drawings and to fully comply with BS;
4649 for those incorporating MCCB or MCB units and BS: 214 for those incorporating HRC
fuses. Each enclosure shall be of the dust protecting pattern in accordance with BS.4727 Part 2
group 03.

Each unit shall be of the 500-volt pattern as a minimum requirement and be complete with a
pressed or fabricated steel case manufactured from sheet steel having a minimum thickness of
1.7mm.

Hinged doors shall be provided and shall be complete with a catch and key operated lock.

All live terminals or parts shall be shrouded by insulating material to ensure that it is impossible
for any live metal to be touched whilst withdrawing or replacing the MCB units or fuses.

The moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB), miniature circuit breakers (MCB) or HRC fuses
shall be arranged in banks which shall be easily removable to facilitate wiring and connection.
Adequate non-ferrous bus-bars shall be fitted to the banks and shall be complete with suitable
cast brass cable terminals for the termination of cables. The diameter of each terminal pinching
screw shall be not less than 75% of the diameter of the cable entry hole.

Each distribution board shall be completed with an internal circuit chart clearly detailing the
circuit numbers, areas served and the respective circuit breakers or HRS sizes, The charts shall
be type–written, glued to stiff cardboard, covered with clear Perspex and fixed to the inside face
of the door by means of screws and nuts.

In addition, each circuit chart shall contain full details of the size and type of cable feeding the
distribution board, etc, together with the size, type and location of major switch or section board
serving the board.

Circuit and phase colour identification bands shall be fitted to all phase, neutral and control
circuit cables.

I/13
Each distribution board shall be new and complete with all necessary shrouds, carriers, MCCB,
MCB and HRC units etc, with metal case stove enamelled finished to an approved colour.

Where distribution boards are surface mounted, and the installation is concealed with walls, the
conduit shall be terminated in a suitable flush adoptable box measuring not less than 300mm x
300mm. The distribution board shall be mounted over the box and attached to the box with four
brass machine screws into threaded holes at the corner of the box and in addition shall be
securely fixed to the wall with rawl bolts or rawl plugs and screws.

Final connections between the adaptable box and the distribution board shall be made via a large
square or rectangular hole in the back of the distribution board. The edges of the hole shall be
finished with a suitable insulating material to ensure that the cables are not pulled over rough or
sharp edges.
The insulating material shall be securely fixed to the distribution board and the adaptable box
shall be adequately bonded to the distribution board by means of short lengths of flexible copper
tape, bolts, nuts and shake proof washers.
Each neutral bar incorporated in distribution boards shall have the same number of connections,
as there are phase connections within the boards. Each neutral wire connections as there are
phase connections within the boards. Each neutral wire connections shall be made in the same
order as the phase wires are connected to the protection units.

The neutral bar shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the respective phase bus-bars.

2.11 MINIATURE AIR BREAK CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

Miniature air break circuit breakers (MCB) shall be provided in accordance with the following
specification sections and attached drawings, and shall fully comply with BS: 3871. Part 1.

Distribution boards incorporating MCB units shall be arranged such that sub-circuits cannot be
made alive by unauthorized persons. MCB units shall be of the plug-in type or supplied capable
of being locked in the ‘OFF’ position.

All sizes of MCB units shall be checked with the Engineer before any orders are placed. Each
MCB unit unless otherwise stated, shall be of the hermetically sealed, magnetic, hydraulic type
having a short circuit duty rating of M6 (6000 amps) at 415 volts a.c.

MCB units used for the final means of protection and isolation to items of fixed or removable
equipment, e.g. electrical tubular heaters small ventilation fans, macerators, etc, shall be complete
with malleable iron or pressed steel box and with front plate arranged as over-lapping for flush
mounted units.

Assemblies shall be arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated in the detail sections of
this specification, schedules or drawings, and the associated front plates shall be finished to
match the general lighting switches.

Final connections between the MCB unit and item of equipment shall be made by means of a
short length of conduit, B.S. 4568 conduit box having 50.8mm fixing centres and sheet steel
cover plate. The plate shall be complete with suitable brass stuffing gland with a flexible cord or
cable as specified provided between the MCB and the particular item pf equipment.

I/14
2.12 PVC INSULATED, PVC SHEATHED, SINGLE WIRE ARMOURED & PVC
SHEATHED OVERALL CABLE (PVCI, SWA & PVCS)

PVC armoured cables shall be used only in the position indicated the attached drawings and/or
specification sections and each cable shall fully comply with the following requirements.

The p.v.c. armoured cables shall comprise copper conductors of equal section laid up in a sector
shape, the cores being p.v.c. insulated twisted and wormed circular, further insulated with an
overall p.v.c. sheath, single wire armoured and p.v.c. sheathed overall.

The cables shall be rated at 600/1000 volt in accordance with BS: 6346.

Duplicate copies of the test certificates for each length of cable, together with 300mm of
‘stepped’ sample cut from the cable length, shall be forwarded by the manufacturer direct to the
Engineer before the cable is dispatched to the site.

Each size of cable shall be manufactured in one length. No through joints shall be allowed in any
new cables, unless authorized by the Engineer. The contract shall include for the phasing of cable
conductors from the main switchboard i.e. 0,1,2,3,4, etc. Terminal at each end of the feeder shall
be correspondingly marked. In no case shall the radius of the cable bend be lower than eight
times the overall diameter of the cable.

The contractor shall include for measuring and cutting exact lengths required for the runs. No
allowance shall be made for waste lengths. All cables shall be delivered to the site with the
maker’s sales, labels, or other proof of origin attached.

The cables shall be terminated in approved type compression glands complete with p.v.c. shroud.

All p.v.c. armoured cables shall be installed generally as detailed in the specification section. No
cable shall be installed when the cable or ambient temperature is 00 C or below.

After the installation has been completed, tests shall be carried out on the cables as set out in BS:
6346 to the general requirement detailed in this specification section.

2.13 PVC INSULATED, PVC SHEATHED SINGLE WIRE ARMOURED & PVC
SHEATHED OVERALL CABLES (PVCI, PVCS, SWA & PVCS) INSTALLATION
&TESTING

PVC armoured cables shall be installed along the routes generally indicated on the attached
drawings and/or described in the specification sections.

PVC armoured cables shall be fixed to an approved cable rack system consisting of two identical
half racks, diecast in magnesium aluminium alloy conforming to BS: 1490 or approved and equal
material. The cable rack shall be supported on a metal back strap with rawlbolts grouted into the
building structure. Spacing of cable racks shall not exceed 1 m on straight runs and additional
racks shall be erected at bends as required.

The Contract shall include for the preparation of detailed plan and section drawings for the cable
runs. The drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before work is commenced.

Where PVC cables and PVC armoured cables are to be installed together, they shall be fixed to a
common cable tray, the PVC armoured cables being secured to the cable tray by means of
suitable saddles or other approved means.
Where cable pass through floors or through walls, they shall be protected by short length of
heavy gauge pipe bushed with hardwood or lead at each end. When rising through a floor the
protecting barrel shall project to a height of approximately 1.20 m.

I/15
PVC armoured cables scheduled to cross roads, paths, car parks, structural concrete or
pavements, exceeding 1.80 m wide, shall be installed in adequate cross-sectional area
earthenware ducts or approved and equal type. Cables to be installed adjacent to pavements shall
be located below the outer edge of the pavement, with cable tile protection.

Where more than one cable is to be installed in a common trench or route, they shall be spaced at
the following minimum dimensions: -

CABLE H.V L.V TELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS

H.V 15mm 300mm 30mm 300mm

L.V 300mm 80mm 300mm 300mm

TELEPHONE 300mm 300mm 50mm 50mm

COMMUNICATIONS 300mm 300mm 50mm 50mm

Roller and chairs shall be used during the installation of underground cables to prevent them
being pulled through the base of the trench.

No cables crossing will be permitted except at branches off the main trench. Where the cables
enter draw-in points adequate slack cable shall be left. All cables shall be kept clear of other
service pipes and cables by not less than 50mm, preferably below hot water pipes. Where it is
found necessary to cross service pipes and cables and the required clearance cannot be obtained,
hardwood blocks shall be inserted between and securely fixed in position.

Where cables enter buildings they shall pass through cast iron or equal and approved conduits
that shall form runs laid to fall under the surrounding paths, etc. The cast iron pipes shall be
complete with suitable puddle flanges and after the installation of the cables the conduits shall be
plugged to ensure that a complete watertight seal is provided around and within the conduit. Each
puddle flange shall be provided by Building Contractor. This Contract shall include for the
provision of the necessary detail and liaison attendance.

Unless otherwise stated, the excavation and backfilling of trenches, provision of sifted soil or
sand and cable conduits will be carried out by the Building Contractor. The Contractor shall
include for the supply and installation of cable tiles/identification tape and cables and to
supervise the backfilling and correct protection of the cables to suit the layout of draw-in points
and/or cable routes.

Voltage and bending tests in accordance with BS: 6346 shall be carried out on each lengths of
cable to be installed under this contract. These tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s
works before the cable is dispatched and duplicate copies of the test certificate for each length of
cable shall be sent to the Engineer.

The Contract shall include for high voltage tests on the cables and joints on accordance with the
requirements of BS: 6346 to be carried out after the cables have been installed.

In addition, the following tests on all cables shall be executed:-

• Resistance of each core

• Resistance of sheath and armour.

• Capacitance of each core, with all other cores floating free of earth.

I/16
 • Capacitance of each core, with all other cores earthed.

The Contract shall include for all necessary test equipment to carry out the tests and the provision
of the necessary qualified staff.

The Engineer shall be notified in writing seven days in advance of when the pressure testing is to
be carried out and duplicate typewritten copies of the tests taken and the results obtained shall be
sent to the Engineer.

Any unacceptable insulation or continuity reading identified by the cable pressure testing
sequence shall be corrected and cable retested. The contract shall include for this.

2.14 PVC CABLES

PVC cables shall be enclosed in conduit, trunking within short lengths of flexible conduit and
final connections to the various items and equipment.

PVC cable shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS: 6004 Table 1a) and
be rated at 450/750 volts.

No cables less than 1.5mm2 shall be used and the p.v.c. Cables shall be coloured as detailed in
this particular specification section. All 2.5mm2 cables shall be of the 7/0.67 type ‘B’
classification in accordance with BS: 6231,

2.15 HEAT RESISTANCE CABLES

Heat resistance cables shall be used as detailed in the following Specification Section and
drawings and shall be of buty1 rubber insulated type or approved equal.

Buty1 rubber insulated cable shall be manufactured to BS: 6007 and rated 450/750 volts.

No cable less than 1.5mm2 shall be used and the cables shall be coloured as detailed in the
specification section for p.v.c. cables.

2.16 FLEXIBLE CORDS & SYSTEMS

Flexible cords or cables shall be manufactured in accordance with the attached drawings and/or
specification section. No cord or cable less than 24/0.20 or 0.75mm2 respectively shall be used

Flexible cords or cables, except those used to final connections to light fittings, shall be circular 2
or 3 core as required and each conductor shall be insulated with buty1 rubber and taped, cores
laid up, cotton filled, cotton braided and treated with cellulose lacquer, to give a glossy white
finish.

Flexible cords used to final connections to all luminaries shall be silicone rubber insulated and
terylene braided, manufactured in accordance with BS: 6500 Tables 15 and 16.

2.17 CONDUITS & ACCESSORIES

Except where other kinds of enclosures are specifically referred to in this specification, all p.v.c
cables shall be enclosed in heavy gauge, screwed and welded conduit, finished black stove
enamel (B.E.) or hot-dipped, zinc coated and sheradized (HDZCS) as described in the
specification section. The conduits shall be manufactured in accordance with BS: 4568 Part1.

I/17
Lighting power and low voltage socket outlets, together with other auxiliary services shall be
enclosed in separate conduit and no wiring associated with one service shall be installed in any
conduit box or enclosure containing wires associated with a different service, unless the box or
enclosure etc. as supplied by the manufacturer, is complete with a segregation fillet, in
accordance with the I.E.E regulations.

Conduit accessories shall me manufactured in accordance with BS: 4568 Part 2. Black stove
enamelled (B.E.) conduit shall be used with black stove enamelled (B.E.) accessories and hot-
dipped zinc coated and sheradized (H.D.Z.C.S.) conduit with (H.D.Z.C.S.) accessories.

All B.E. and H.D.Z.C.S. conduit and accessories shall be complete with class 2 and class 4
protections respectively in accordance with BS: 4568.

The ends of conduits shall be reamered internally to give a smooth bore. No thread shall be
exposed except at running couplers.

Running couplers shall be backed by a securely locked heavy gauge lock nut and excess threads
painted with good quality paint for B.E. conduit and zinc-rich paint for H.D.Z.C.S.

All couplers shall be securely tightened and care shall be taken to ensure the conduits ‘butt-up’
inside the couplers.

No conduit bearing traces of rust, or damage shall be used. The conduits shall be cleaned and free
from oil before erection.

Conduits shall be laid as far as possible in straight lines with easy sets or bends. Conduits to be
formed shall be bent cold without altering the section with an approved type of machine to give
results consistent with first grade craftsmanship. Such bends and sets shall be painted in
accordance with the requirements of this specification section. The conduits shall be run so as to
be self-draining to switch boxes incorporating, as necessary, an approved means of draining.

Conduits entering equipment or accessories shall do so through clearance holes only and
connection shall be made by means of a hexagonal male brass bush, earth continuity washer and
coupler. Connections to cable trunking and large sheet steel adaptable boxes shall be made means
of hexagonal male brass bush of the long threaded type, earth continuity washer, lead or leather
washer and flanged coupler.

Standard round boxes in accordance with standard sheet 4 of BS: 4568 Part 2 and with 50.8mm
fixing centres and of malleable iron shall be used for all intersection and outlet points, except
where the conduits terminate in accessories such as lighting switches, sockets outlets etc.

At intersection points on multiple conduit runs, steel adaptable boxes with light steel covers
(overlapping for concealed conduit work) shall be used in accordance with standard sheets No. 3a
and 3b in BS: 4568 the largest conduit entry. Cables from more than one distribution board shall
not enter any single adaptable box.

Conduits of capacity sufficient to carry the full number of circuit way cables shall be installed
between trunking and distribution board. The sub-mains supplying the distribution board shall be
considered separately.

Adaptable boxes and distribution boards, where not fixed to trunking, shall be installed with
20mm or 25mm clearance holes suitably plugged, with at least 2 holes for adaptable boxes and
holes equal to spare fuse-ways for distribution boards.

Manufactured solid or inspection elbows or tee pieces shall not be permitted.

I/18
The conduit work shall be arrange so that the wiring can be drawn in and out, and later renewed
from draw-in box and point box positions. Draw-in boxes and point boxes shall be of ample size
to enable this to be carried out.

No boxes shall be provided in voids where access cannot be readily obtained. No draw-in boxes
other than point boxes shall be installed in plaster wall or ceiling surface, where conduit work is
flush, except within cupboards and switchrooms, or where specific permission is given by the
Engineer. If permission is given, each box shall be made permanently accessible and so arranged
to be neatly finished, flush with the finished surface of the walls, ceilings or floors.

Where bends or sets are required, they shall be made cold and on proper bending machines
without altering the section of the conduit. Such bends or sets shall be painted with good quality
paint wherever the finish has been removed.

Conduit buried in concrete or plaster and chased into walls shall be secured by holdfasts or
crampets spaced at intervals not greater than 1200mm and there shall not be less than 20mm
covering over the final projection of any holdfast coupling, conduit etc. Where indicated in the
attached specification sections that this contract is to include chasing for concealed conduit, the
making of ways for conduit shall be carried out by machine raggling of all necessary walls,
floors, ceilings etc. and it shall be noted that no other method of raggling will be accepted.

All surface conduits fixed to walls, ceiling and to the roof steelwork shall be fixed by means of
heavy gauge distance saddles as standard sheet No.23 or BS: 4568 Part 2 spaced at intervals not
greater than 1200mm apart with additional saddles as necessary at bends and joints and within
275mm of such points. Draw-in points shall be available on such conduits every 8.00m of straight
run or after not more that two right angled bends. Where such points are provided exclusively for
draw-in purposes, they shall be in the form of rectangular junction boxes.

No conduit or accessories smaller than 20mm shall be allowed and the number of cables drawn
into each conduit shall not exceed that stated in the latest I.E.E. Regulations.

The whole of conduit system to be erected shall not be covered with concrete or plaster or cables
drawn in, before permission is given by the Engineer.

Conduit runs shall be left clear of gas or water pipes by a minimum distance of 150mm. Where
conduit is, or may be, in contract with any structural steelwork, an efficient and permanent
metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and metal work.

No part of the conduit shall be under mechanical stress and each length of conduit shall be
swabbed out prior to the installation of the cables.

All conduit boxes, saddles and point boxes shall be fixed by not less than 40mm x No.8 wood
screws with raw plugs or similar fibre plugs in concrete or brickwork, and not less than 25mm x
No.8 wood screws in structural timber. No fixing shall be made to building boards or to plaster,
but only to concrete, brickwork, timber structures and block or tile partitions.
Countersunk screws shall be used for fixing only where special countersunk holes have been
drilled or provided. Round-headed screws used for all fixings shall be black japanned finish.
Screw heads shall have all burrs and sharp edges removed before wiring commences and all
screws are to be driven into their correct depth. Box lids shall be fitted by means of brass round
headed M.4 screws. All such boxes shall be securely fixed by means of at least two screws such
that the screw threads do not project into the box.

Conduits crossing expansion joints shall be fitted with expansion couplers at the position of
expansion joint. An earth wire shall be installed between the nearest conduit box at either side of
the coupler. The back of the conduit box shall be drilled and taped to a size not less than M.4 and

I/19
the earth connection made by means of an approved combination of terminal washer and brass
screws.

Where conduits pass from inside the building to the outside, free circulation of air shall be
prevented by the insertion of a conduit box, which shall be filled with plastic compound after the
cables have been drawn in.

All flush boxes installed shall be recessed approximately 3mm below the finished wall or ceiling
surfaces. The Contractor shall include for verification on site with the building contractor of the
finished thickness of all walls and ceilings.

The entire conduit installation shall harmonise with architectural features of the building,
including accessibility, inspection and maintenance and attention shall be given to alignment of
conduits which shall be on the same horizontal or vertical centre lines where practicable.

Attention shall be paid to the installation of surface conduits. All corners and angles shall be
neatly negotiated with vertical and horizontal runs kept straight. No diagonal runs shall be
permitted and all branches shall be taken off at right angles.

The lead and return conductor of the same circuit or circuits shall be drawn into the same
conduit.

The conductors forming the various systems shall be installed in separate conduits or trunking
compartments unless specifically agreed otherwise in writing by the Engineer.

All conduit which is left with screwed ends for the reception of outlet boxes, etc, shall be fitted
with a coupler and screwed plug to protect the ends.

No conduits shall be installed in vertical ducts specifically installed for the installation of
mechanical, air conditioning or public health engineering services without the permission of the
Engineer.

A running coupler socket within 300mm above or below the floor on all vertical drops or pieces
respectively shall be provided where conduit is cast into or passes through structural floors.

Where conduits are installed in floors and the building programme indicates that the screed is not
to be applied within three days of the three days of the installation, then the conduits shall be
immediately protected by means of a hunching of a cement and sand mixture by the Building
contractor.

Conduits set through walls shall not be permitted. Where conduits change direction through a
wall, a back outlet box shall be used.

No outlet shall be installed immediately behind each other (i.e. back-to-back) in a common wall
or partition, unless agreed in writing by the Engineer. Separate conduits shall be taken to each
outlet, from the floor screed/ void or ceiling void and no ‘through wall’ conduit or cable
connections shall be made.

2.18 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING

Sheet steel cable trunking shall be used only in areas and in the position detailed on the attached
drawings or for terminating conduits and cables at distribution boards etc. cable trunking may be
used, if required, in the ceiling voids or otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur.

I/20
Cable trunking and fittings shall be in accordance with BS: 4678 Part 1 and shall be either Class
2 staved black enamel (B.E.) or Class 3 galvanized (G) protected as detailed in the following
specification section and/or attached drawings.

The cable trunking shall consist of butting section constructed from high grade sheet rust-proofed
by an approved process and be finished either stove enamel or galvanized as specified. Trunking
lids shall be made from the same material and shall be removable over the whole length of the
trunking and secured at centres not greater than 450mm by cadmium plated mushroom head
screws. These screws shall locate into ‘ Hank bushes’. The trunking shall be provided with return
edges on its opening side to form a tray and clips shall be inserted at centres not greater than
600m to retain the cables in position when lids are removed.

Where vertical runs of p.v.c. cables enclosed in trunking exceed 8.00m, the enclosed cables shall
be adequately supported by approved carrier rods inserted in the trunking at not more than 3.00 m
centres with the cable effectively bound to the rods having I.S.O. Metric threads complying with
requirements of BS: 4183.

Adjoining lengths of trunking shall be correctly aligned and the two sides at right angles to the
cover shall be jointed to the corresponding sides of the adjacent trunking piece by means of
internal fishplate connector not less than 2.5mm thick, attached by means of not less than four
cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M.4 screws for trunking having a depth of less than
150mm and eight cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M.4 screws for trunking having a
depth 150mm and above, each passing through clearance holes, shakeproof washers and nuts.
Two pairs of screws on either side of the join shall be connected by tinned copper links with split
soldering washers under the nuts, to provide electrical continuity across the joints.

The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and tinned copper straps shall be provided
across all joints formed by the straight lengths, angles, tees etc.

Trunking shall be manufactured from not less than 1.2mm (18swg) thick for trunking up to
100mm x 100mm cross-section and a minimum of 1.6mm (16swg) for trunking sizes above this.
Where the trunking passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be fitted, before
erection, such that cover plate extends approximately 50mm beyond the finished surfaces of the
walls or floors.

Separate compartments shall be provided in trunking as necessary and in all tees, angles, reducers
etc, to ensure that the segregation of the various services as detailed in this specification section.

All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners. All angles
formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners.

Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected to different
distribution boards i.e. single phase and three phase power circuits, they shall be distinguished by
separating the cables by insulated taping at intervals of 1.20m together with an approved means
of identification sleeve adjacent to each taping that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference.
Trunking shall be fixed to walls etc, with No. 12 round-headed wood screws to lengths depending
on the material on which the fixing is made. The contractor shall include for providing all
necessary supporting devices, for trunking and adequate allowance shall be made for expansion
and contraction of long runs. All cable trunking shall be fixed clear of the respective surfaces by
means of not less than 6mm spacers.

Trunking and trunking fittings shall be manufactured by a reputable engineering company, with
facilities for giving quick delivery of trunking and purpose-made pieces of trunking whose shape
shall be determined by dimensions obtained from site. On-site welding shall not be allowed.

Flexible expansion joints shall be provided in trunking runs as necessary.

I/21
Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity for installation of any future cables, due to
precaution being taken to ensure that the correct space factor of fully loaded trunking is provided
in accordance with the relevant clause, in the I.E.E. Regulations.

Attention is also drawn to Regulation B.40 of the 14th edition of the I.E.E. Regulations, in
connection with precaution to be taken to prevent spread of fire.

2.19 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION

The minimum cable trunking requirement shown on the drawings shall be supplemented if
required. Proposals for any such supplementary trunking shall be indicated on the installation
drawings at the time of submission for approval. It shall be clearly understood that the
introduction of supplementary trunking runs or the increase of compartment size will be allowed
only at the discretion of the Engineer and if accepted shall be regarded as a concession to permit
cables that would otherwise be enclosed in conduit to be accommodated in trunking.

Cable Trunking installed on the exposed surface of walls shall be arranged with the respective
wiring compartments in the vertical plane with all conduits emanating from the top, bottom and
side of the assembly. In all cases the access lid shall be fitted to the exposed side of such
assemblies.

Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever possible
shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with the access lid at the
lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top and sides of the assembly.

The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the ceiling structure within ceiling voids,
generally below and clear of mechanical, air conditioning and public health services.

Trunking shall be supported by purpose-made brackets suspended from the structural concrete
ceiling slab soffit.

Conduits used to complete the final section of each circuit from the general trunking system
installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated, shall emanate from the top of appropriate
compartment of the cable trunking and rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduit shall be
taken when through the structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various
lighting, power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.

The majority of the space in the corridor ceiling voids, with the exception of the space reserved
for electrical services and detailed on the attached drawings, will be used to accommodate pipe
work and ducting, associated with the mechanical, air conditioning and public health services.
The Contract shall include for all necessary costs for co-operating with other trades to ensure that
a neat and a high Standard of overall installation is provided.

Drawings showing the extent of the mechanical air conditioning and public health engineering
services may be inspected at the Engineer’s office.

The contract shall include for the preparation of detailed installation drawings of all trunking and
conduit runs and for their submission to the Building Contractor and the Engineer for approval.
These drawings shall be submitted to the above organizations as quickly as possible, after
receiving the official order for the Works. Duplicate copies of the drawings shall be submitted
initially for approval. Unless otherwise stated, upon receipt of approval a further six copies of
each drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer for distribution.

I/22
2.20 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

Conduit connections to motors or other such items of removable equipment, unless otherwise
stated, shall be made with p.v.c. sheathed metallic flexible conduit, in accordance with the
attached Schedules and to BS: 731.

All such metallic flexible conduit shall be composed of double aluminium with bitumen infused
paper interleaf, with a p.v.c. Overall sheath. Each end of the flexible conduit shall be terminated
by a coupler comprising a union, lead seal and screwed nut. Each coupler shall have a male
thread for connecting to a standard BS: 4568 box or an equipment terminal box.

Each length of flexible conduit shall be complete with an approved integral copper earth wire of
2.5mm minimum size incorporated during manufacture. As an alternative, an independent earth
wire of 2.5mm minimum size and complete with green buty1 rubber insulation shall be installed
in all such flexible conduit and shall be connected to the accessory earth terminal at one end and
an M.4 brass screw and washer tapped into the back or side of a BS: 4568 conduit box at the
other

Flexible conduits shall be less than 300mm and more than 1.00m in length unless permitted in
writing by the Engineer.

2.21 LIGHTING SWITCHES

Unless otherwise stated, lighting switches shall be 5amp single pole, one way, two way or
intermediate way, and be mounted in singles or in gangs as required. All units shall be suitable
for the a.c.supply and mounted at the height detailed on the attached schedule or shown on the
drawings unless otherwise stated.

Switches shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting, as required, and be complete with
pressed steel box, adjusting grid plate, switch interior and cover plate. All grid plates to be
earthed to the mounting box by means of short green coloured p.v.c. sheathed bonding wire.

Each switch interior shall be of porcelain or bakelite, mounted to a top adjustable grid plate and
complete with a switch ‘rocker’ to match the finished plate. At least 9mm clearance shall be
provided between the switch and the inner wall of the box.

Flush mounting switch plates shall be flat, overlapping the associated metal box not less than
5.5mm at all sides. Switch plates shall be manufactured from white amino plastic urea powder
moulding to BS: 1233 with high track resisting qualities or stainless steel to an approved sample
in accordance with the attached Schedule unless otherwise stated.

In plant, roof space and other similar areas as specified, the switches shall be arranged in singles
or in gangs as required complete with protected type dolly. Switched assemblies shall be stove
enamel or galvanized finished to match the connected conduit.

Switches mounted in exposed locations or positions subject to moisture shall be enclosed in a

galvanized metal weatherproof enclosure in accordance with an approved sample.

All ceiling switches shall be complete with a 50.8mm fixing centre conduit box, porcelain or
bakelite interior and overlapping plate, finished as the general lighting switches unless otherwise
stated. Each unit shall be complete with white nylon cord and white acorn.

Where two or more phases of the supply are connected to a single switch assembly, switch units
finished as above shall be provided complete with the necessary phase barriers and
identifications, in order to comply with the relevant clauses of the I.E.E regulations.

I/23
Switch plates specified to be labelled shall be suitably engraved to clearly denote the function of
the switch. Details of the actual engraving shall be determined at a later date or is given in the
following Specification Section and/or on the drawings.

Where indicator switches are shown on the attached drawings, they shall be as the general
lighting switches, with the addition of a red indication light.

All switches shall fully comply with BS: 3676, quick make and break for d.c. and slow make and
break for a.c.supplies.

2.22 LUMINAIRES

The contract shall include for the erection and connection of the luminaries and lamps as detailed
on the attached schedule of Luminaries and Lamps and for the provision of all-necessary lamp
holders, lamps, flexible connections etc.

All luminaries shall be manufactured in accordance with the appropriate sections of BS: 4533.
Parts 1 and 2.

The control gear associated with each of the fluorescent luminaries shall accord with BS: 2818
and BS: 4017 and be of the instant start type unless otherwise stated.

Luminaries incorporating tube suspensions shall be complete with non-rigid connections to the
general conduit system, the conduits being of the hook plate type. Ball socket joints shall be
provided if the suspension chain, wire or non-rigid tube be used as the earth continuity conductor.
Flexible earth wires shall be provided across all ball/socket joints.

Luminaires designed for use with 300 watt lamps and larger sizes shall incorporate cool wiring
devices so that in an ambient temperature of 21o C they shall limit the temperature of the fitting
wiring to a maximum of 53oC and the temperature of the lamp caps to a maximum of 1500C.

Fluorescent and other forms of discharge luminaire shall be complete with an integral HRC
circuit fuse and capacitor of the ‘dry foil’ type, to provide power factor correction to a minimum
of 0.9 lagging.

The Contract shall include for all luminaries detailed under a P.C. sum to comply fully with this
clause.

2.23 LUMINAIRE CONNECTIONS

Final connections to all luminaries shall be made by means of an approved nylon connector
terminal block, complete with two screws, brass ferrules for connecting to the final sub-circuit
wiring.
Unless otherwise stated, each luminaire in this specification shall be mechanically connected to a
metal conduit box by means of suitable brass R.H. screws finished to match the metalwork of the
luminaire. The terminal block shall be enclosed in the conduit box.

In the case of fluorescent luminaries, two such conduit boxes shall be provided at appropriate
fixing centers,

A heat resisting flexible cord shall be connected from the terminal block to the fitting. Care shall
be taken to ensure that the metalwork of the fitting is effectively earthed.

I/24
Final connection to each bulkhead luminaries shall be by a standard circular conduit box in
accordance with Standard sheet No.4. of BS: 4568 Part 2 mounted immediately adjacent to the
fitting.

Wiring of sub-circuit cables through luminaries shall not be allowed unless otherwise stated.

Where luminaries are mounted on or in accessible suspended ceilings, the final sub-circuit wiring
shall terminate in a universal ceiling rose and flexible cord used for the final connection to the
fitting.

2.24 LAMP HOLDERS

Each luminaire shall be complete with a suitable lampholder, or lampholders, or lampholders, to

BS:52 BS:98, BS:495, BS:841 as appropriate with the tungsten luminaries being complete with
heavy duty H.O. pattern lampholders of the G.E.S., E.S., or B.C. type as detailed below.

The lampholders shall be provided as follows: -

▪ Lamps up to and including 100 watts – B.C. type.

▪ Lamps over 100 watts and including 300 watt – E.S. type.

▪ Lamps over 300 watts- G.E.S. type.

All E.S. and G.E.D lampholders shall be of the porcelain type with brass guard. B.C. type
lampholders shall be of the heavy duty brass type.

Where S.B.C. or non-standard Lampholders are specifies in other sections of this Specification
they shall be of the heavy duty brass type.

Lampholders suspended from flexible cords shall be of the all-insulated cord-grip type, with
insulated skirts and solid stem plungers complete with external springs. The cable entry to the
lampholders shall allow the cable sheath to be taken into the lampholder.

Lanpholders incorporating ‘telescopic’ type plungers shall be used in conjunction with non-
flexible cable only.

All batten lampholders not fitted with shades shall be complete with insulated skirt. Shade carrier
rings shall be provided with all lampholders not incorporated in fittings.

Lampholders for use with fluorescent lamps shall be either of the white bakelite retractable ‘bi-
pin’ type or centre twist type, complete with earthing clamp, in accordance with BS: 1875.

2.25 LAMPS

All lamps shall be in accordance with BS: 161, BS:555 and BS:1853 as detailed in the attached
Schedule of Luminaires and Lamps and/or Specification Sections.

After testing the installation, lamps shall be removed from the luminaries and replaced prior to
handover.

Fluorescent lamps shall be provided in accordance with the attached Schedule and/or
Specification Section and drawings.

2.26 CEILING ROSES

I/25
The Contract shall include for ceiling roses to be manufactured from glazed porcelain, suitable
for direct connection to a 50.8mm fixing center BS:4568 conduit box, unless otherwise stated.

Where a conduit box is flush mounted in the ceiling, a suitable white bakelite break-ring shall be
provided and fitted between the soffit and the ceiling rose.

Each ceiling rose shall fully comply with BS: 67

Plug-in type universal ceiling roses, manufactured from either rigid p.v.c. or bakelite and
complete with 50.8mm fixing centres and short length of three core flexible cord shall be used for
the final connection to all luminaries incorporated in removable and hence accessible type false
ceilings.

2.27 GENERAL PURPOSE SOCKET OUTLETS

The Contract shall include for the installation of the general purpose 13 amp switched socket
outlets positioned as shown on the drawings, the socket being wired in accordance with the
circuit details indicated on the attached drawings. Each socket outlet shall fully comply with BS:
1363.

The 13amp socket outlets shall comprise single or twin units as shown on the drawings. Each
outlet shall be complete with a plug top, unless otherwise stated and manufactured in accordance
with an approved sample.

Each socket outlet shall be finished either in metal or made from white aminoplastic urea powder
mouldings to Bs: 1322 as detailed in the attached schedule and/or Specification Section with
cover plate to match the lighting switches, suitable for flush or surface mounting as necessary.

Each 13amp socket outlet shall be complete with a pressed steel box, the metal plates being fitted
with white bakelite inserts.

In the plant, roof space and other similar areas switch socket outlets complete with protected type
dolly and galvanized finish shall be supplied and installed as detailed in the following
Specification sections and/or drawings.

Each socket shall be of the rectangular three-pin type complete with line and neutral shutters. The
shutters shall be manufactured from unbreakable insulating material which shall be non-ignitable
and track resistant.

The shutters shall effectively screen and isolate the line and neutral socket contacts to exclude
dust and interference and shall only be operable when the interlocked earth pin in the associated
plug top has been inserted.

Each switch associated with a socket outlet shall be complete with adequate ON and OFF
markings and be of the ‘ rocker’ type, unless otherwise stated.

Switch socket outlets complete with red neon indicating lamps shall be provided in the position
indicated on the attached drawings and/or Specification Section.

All socket plug tops shall be handed over to the Employers representatives and two copies of a
receipt obtained for them. One copy of the receipt shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
reference.

I/26
2.28 FUSED SPUR OUTLETS

Fused spur outlets shall be of the switched or unswitched type, where shown complete
with a red neon indicator light and positioned as indicated on the attached drawings
and/or Specification Section.

Each unit shall be complete with a sheet steel box adjustable top grid and plate finished to match
the lighting switches.

White bakelite inserts and fuse holders shall be fitted to each unit, together with an
appropriately rated cartridge fuse to BS: 1362.

2.29 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING

The wiring of the installation shall be carried out on the ‘loop-in’ system. Switch feed
wires for lighting circuits shall be looped at the switch points and common or neutral
wires and switch wires at lighting points.

Appliances other than lighting points which are on the same circuit shall loop from appliances.
No other joints shall be allowed. Junction boxes, three plate ceiling roses etc., shall not be used.

Other than at luminaries and accessories, joints in cables will not be permitted. Connections
between flexible cords and cables shall be made by means of an approved porcelain connector
block.

Any cables which fail to pass the specified tests during installation; at completion of the work
and/or completion of defects liability period shall be replaced. No extra charge shall be levied for
this work.

At termination points such as luminaries, switch or socket outlets etc., sufficient length shall be
left on cable ends to ensure that there is no tension on the connections.

When preparing cable ends, ensure that none of the conductor strands are damaged and that the
strands are twisted together with pliers, to ensure a neat and firm connection.

The conductor insulation shall be removed for a minimum length to facilitate connection, and no
excess length of exposed conductor shall be left.

Where p.v.c. cable are installed vertically, in either trunking or conduit, adequate supports for the
cables, shall be provided so that they may be clamped to relieve the stress, due to the cable
weight.

All cables entering distribution boards or terminals outlets such as switch socket outlets,
luminaries etc., shall be complete with a coloured identification sleeve to denote the phase,
circuit reference and/or terminal number to which it is connected.

No form of earth concentric wiring shall be allowed and the phase and neutral conductors shall be
effectively isolated from items of switchgear and enclosures which are at earth potential.
Connections between the neutral and earth conductors shall be made only at transformer or main
L.V.switchboards as indicated on the attached drawings and/or specification sections.

Phase and neutral conductors at all times shall be installed in continuous earth metal enclosures
in the form of conduit, trunking, cable sheaths and armouring, metal clad switchgear etc, unless
otherwise indicated.

I/27
The position and loading of all points shall be taken from the drawings for tender purposes, but
the exact setting out and runs of conduit and cables shall be agreed with the Engineer before the
work is carried out. Particular Attention shall be given to the position of switches with reference
to hanging of doors.

The Engineer’s attention shall be drawn to locations where switch positions are at variance with
drawings, consistent with the following conditions:-

Single doors: Switch shall be located adjacent to closing style.

Unequal two-leaf doors: Switches shall be located adjacent to hanging style of narrower
portion of doors.

Equal two- leaf doors: Switches shall be located adjacent to the left hand side of the doors
on entering.

Cable terminations to equipment shall be made by one of the following methods:-

Sweated lugs of the appropriate sizes for the cable used.

Compression type lugs.

Pinch screw type terminations of the type that do not spread the conductors.

Clamp type conductors.

In addition the cable conductors shall be doubled back on themselves for all single connections of
Conductor’s size up to and including.

2.30 CABLE IDENTIFICATION

Cable shall be coloured as in the latest edition of the I.E.E. Regulations i.e. respective phase
conductors shall be coloured red, yellow, and blue up to the final single pole and neutral
distribution boards and throughout all three phase circuits. Final single phase sub-circuits shall
have phase wires coloured red. Under all circumstances the neutral wire shall be black.

The cord of all flexible cords and cables shall be coloured brown for the phase conductor, blue
for the neutral conductor and green/yellow strips for earth conductor.

All ancillary service cable sheaths shall be coloured in accordance with the following:-

Impulse Clocks - Brown

Fire alarm - Grey

Extra-low voltage - Orange

Cable ends connected to items of equipment shall be complete with approved end seal markers, in
order to identify the circuit, phase and connections reference.

The cable markers shall be coloured in accordance with the following: -

Red Phase -Red

Yellow Phase -Yellow

I/28
Blue Phase -Blue

Neutral -Black

2.31 EARTHING & TESTING

Earth continuity tests on the conduit, trunking and cable installation, shall be executed under this
Contract to ensure that the resistance of the earth path is within the limits set out in the I.E.E.
Regulations before any wiring is commenced. Copies of the test certificates shall be forwarded to
the Engineer before wiring is commenced. Further tests shall be carried out after the total
installation has been completed.

The complete installation shall be earthed and tested in accordance with Section ‘E’ of the 14 th
Edition of the Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings, published by the institution
of Electrical Engineers.

All necessary labour and instruments for carrying out these tests shall be provided under this
contract. The Engineer shall be given at least seven days notice of the date when it is proposed to
carry out the tests, to enable him to be present during the tests if required.

Duplicate typewritten copies of the completed test reports shall be forwarded to the Engineer
within seven days of the date when the tests are carried out.

All metal, sinks, tanks, etc., shall be bonded under this Contract to the earth terminal of an
adjacent socket outlet using green P.V.C. insulated cable in accordance with Table D.3 of the
I.E.E. Regulations. The earth wire shall be installed in flush conduit terminating at low level with
50.8mm fixing center conduit box fitted with a bushed dome lid. The supply and installation of
all necessary bonding terminals to the sinks, tanks, etc., shall be included in this contract.

On completion and if considered necessary at the end of the defects liability period, the work
shall be inspected by the Engineer for compliance with the Specification.

The following tests shall be executed under the Contract in the pressure of the Engineer as
detailed in the I.E.E. Regulations:

• Insulation to earth and between phases,

• Polarity,
• Earth conductor continuity,
• Earth bonding,
• Line- earth loop impedance,
• Earth electrode resistance,

Full load test (1hour). During this test, voltage and current readings at the final sub-circuit, sub-
main and main intake positions shall be taken.

On completion of the test and inspection, the certificates described in Section ‘E” of the I.E.E
Regulations shall be completed and submitted in duplicate to the Engineer together with full
details of the test results.

I/29
SECTION 3

3. COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

3.1 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

All tests prescribed in the 14th Edition of the regulations for the electrical equipment of the
Institute of Electrical Engineers, together with all amendments as applicable, shall be carried out
by the Contractor on the completed installation. In addition testing of all special equipment to the
complete satisfaction of the Architect and such other persons or authorities concerned with the
installation shall be carried out by the Contractor.

Tests may also be required during progress of the Contract for insulation resistance, continuity of
all conduit and earth connections, and also the ability to withdraw all cables or any cables from
conduits.

In addition to any tests required by the Supply Company upon completion of the installation, tests
for polarity, insulation resistance, earth continuity and adequate operation of all parts of the
installation shall, as stated above, be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide
accurate instructions and apparatus and all labour required for such testing.

All tests must be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or such other person appointed for
the purpose, but the Contractor alone will be held responsible to the authorities as to the
installations compliance with rules and regulations.

The Contractor will be required to give all notices or details to enable the installation to be tested
or inspected.

All fees arising from the inspection and any subsequent inspection or re-testing shall be paid by
the Contractor.

Duplicate copies of the results of these tests shall be provided within 14days of the witnessed
tests, and the Contractor will be required to issue to the Engineer the Requisite Certificate upon
completion, as required under the regulations referred to above.

Any faults, defects, omissions or faulty workmanship, incorrectly positioned or installed made
apparent by such inspections or tests shall be rectified by the Contractor, at his own expense.

3.2 HANDING OVER

The Contract works shall be considered complete and the maintenance and defects liability
period shall commence only when the Contract Works and supporting services have been tested,
commissioned and operated to the satisfaction of the Engineer and officially approved and
accepted by the Employer, provided always that the handing over of the Contract Works shall
coincide with the completion of the Main Contract Works.

The procedure to be followed will be as follows:

a. On completion of the Contract Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall
request the Engineer to arrange for handing over.

b. The Engineer shall then arrange a handing-over meeting or a series thereof at the site.

I/30
c. The Contractor shall arrange with the Engineer and the Employer for a complete
demonstration to be carried out of each and every service, and for instructions to be given to
the relevant operating staff and other representatives of the Employer.

d. The Contractor shall prepare approved Handing Over Certificate and check lists of all
controls and items of equipment, tools, spares and the like.

e. In the presence of the Employer and the Engineer, handing over will take place, subject to
agreement upon the handing over Certificate and associated check lists.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

The Sub- Contractor shall maintain the complete electrical installation and associated equipment
for a period of minimum 12 months from the date the installation is handed over to the client.

The Contract shall be held responsible for and shall make good all defects in material and
workmanship that appear during the 12-month maintenance period. The period of liability shall
not end until all defects which appear during the maintenance period have been rectified.

Any item of material found to be defective shall be replaced by the Contractor within seven days
of his being notified and any results of defective workmanship shall be repaired including supply
of new parts if necessary immediately upon being notified.

If the Contractor fails to carry out such replacement or repair within a reasonable time, the
material or work so affected may be made good by the Contractor in such manner as the Architect
may direct, In which case the cost thereby incurred shall, upon the written certificate of the
Architect be recoverable by the Contractor as a liquidated demand in money.

If any defects be such that it shall be impracticable or inconvenient to remedy the same, the
diminution in value of the works due to existence of such defects shall be deducted from the sum
remaining to be paid to the Contractor or failing such remainder shall be recoverable as a
liquidated demand in money.

The Contractor shall allow in his tender price for this maintenance and inspection service and
shall provide for all tools, instruments, plant and scaffolding, and the transportation thereof, as
required for the correct and full execution of these obligations, and the provision, use or
installation of all materials whether they are normal maintenance materials such as oils, greases,
sandpaper etc. and parts which are periodically renewed such as relay contacts or parts which are
faulty for any reason whatsoever excepting always Acts of God such as storm, tempest or flood,
lighting and earthquakes and civil revolt, acts of war and vandalism.

I/31
SECTION 4
4. PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

4.1 EXTENT OF WORKS

The work to be carried out under this Contract includes the supply, delivery, installation,
commissioning testing energizing and leaving in a serviceable condition to the satisfaction of
the Engineer of the complete installation as herein specified on the drawings or as many to be
directed and shall include all such materials, and equipment which, although not expressly,
are required and are necessary to complete the installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The installation comprises the following items which are more fully described in other parts
of this specification:

a. Conduit, boxes and wiring for all lighting circuits.

b. Conduit, boxes and wiring for all power circuits.

c. Conduit, boxes and wiring for closed circuit television (CCTV) system.

d. The complete conduit system including conduit and outlet boxes for telephones.

e. All sub-distribution cables.

f. All earthing requirements.

g. Receiving delivery, handling and installation of lighting fittings.

h. Receiving delivery, handling and installation of all switchgear and accessories.

i. Power supply and connection equipment supplied by others such as fans, pumps and
lifts all as specified.

j. Complete Addressable Fire Alarm System as specified.

k. Making arrangements with the supply Company for testing and connecting main
power and metering.

l. Sub-main cables to Distribution Boards on all floors.

m. Receiving delivery, handling and installation of all external lighting.

n. Liaison with Kenya Power Authorities.

o. Supply and installation of cable trays.

p. Supply and installation of cable ladders.

I/32
4.2 EXCLUSIONS

The following work in connection with the carrying out the Electrical Installation will be
done by others.

a. Excavation of cable trenches.

b. Cable duct & manholes.

c. All structure penetration openings.

4.3 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING

All conduits for lighting circuit shall be concealed in walls, ceiling, slab and floors.

Lighting fittings shall be recessed and surface mounted in all the blocks and boxes for
switches shall be installed at 1350mm above finished floor level, unless otherwise stated.

All light fittings and shall be supplied by the Client, unless otherwise directed.

The Contractor shall include in the tender price for fixing of light fittings and for all
necessary accessories for fixing the fittings such as suspensions, glands, flexible cables,
connectors etc.

4.4 INSTALLATION FOR POWER

Conduits for circuits in the general areas shall be concealed in the walls and floors. All power
points in these areas shall be installed at 300mm above the finished floor level, unless
otherwise stated. All socket outlet plates, telephone outlets, DP switches and isolators shall
be supplied by the Client as per attached Schedule of Switches in Appendix A. Contractor is
to ONLY receive delivery, handling, installation, testing and commissioning.

The tender price for fixing of all switchgear shall be required. The Contractor shall also
include for all fixing accessories.

Suitable rated isolating switches shall be installed by the Contractor adjacent to all
Equipment.

4.5 LIGHTING FITTING

All lighting fitting including external lighting fitting shall be supplied by the Client. All
lamps shall be supplied by the Client.

Where a purpose made light fitting is shown as a locally made fittings, the Contractor shall
submit a detailed working drawing for approval by the Architect and Engineer reserves the
right to reject any fitting which in his opinion does not conform to the general standard of
finish and workmanship expected for his project.

I/33
4.8 FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEM

4.8.1 PART 1 GENERAL

01. Scope

The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment,
materials and services to furnish and install a complete fire alarm system of the zoned, non-
coded <general alarm> <two stage> type. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware,
software and memory specifically tailored for this installation. It shall be possible to
permanently modify the software on site by using a plug-in programmer. The system shall
consist of, but not be limited to, the following:

a) Addressable Fire alarm control panel.

b) Addressable break glass fire alarm stations.
c) Intelligent Addressable Multisensor Detector.
d) Audible notification appliances ; horns, .
e) Air handling systems shutdown control.
f) Battery standby.

02. Applicable Codes and Standards

- All equipment shall be UL listed for its intended use.

- NFPA Standards 72
- The National Electric Code.
- All other local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
- British Standard.

03. Related Documents

Secure permits and approvals prior to installation.

Prior to commencement and after completion of work notify Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
Submit letter of approval for installation before requesting acceptance of system.

04. Related Work

The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Work and/or
equipment provided in other Sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but
not be limited to:
a) Conduit.
b) Wire and Cables.

05. Submittals

Provide list of all types of equipment and components provided.

Provide description of operation of the system, similar to that provided in Part 2 of this
Section of the Specifications, to include any and all exceptions, variances or substitutions
listed at the time of bid. Any such exceptions, variances or substitutions which were not
listed at the time of bid and are identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate
disapproval without comment.
Provide manufacturer's printed product data, catalog cuts and description of any special
installation procedures.
Provide samples of various items when requested.

I/34
 Provide shop drawings as follows:
a) Drawing of the fire alarm control panel.
b) Single line riser diagram showing all equipment and type, number and size of all
conductors.

06. Warranty

Manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment for a period of one (1) year from date of
final acceptance of the system.
The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or
electrical defects for one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the system.
Upon completion of the installation of fire alarm system equipment, the electrical contractor
shall provide to the architect a signed written statement, substantially in form as follows:
"The undersigned, having engaged as the Electrical Contractor on the <Name of Project>
confirms that the fire alarm system equipment was installed in accordance with the wiring
diagrams, instructions and directions provided to us by the manufacturer."

I/35
4.8.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS

01. Acceptable Manufacturers

The catalog numbers used are those of Edwards Systems Technology (EST) or equal and
approved, and constitute the type and quality of equipment to be furnished.

02. Circuiting Guidelines

Each addressable analog loop shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but device loading
is not to exceed 80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. The loop
shall have Class <B> operation.

Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown on
the drawings but shall be typically as follows:

a) Audible Signals: Provide one (1) notification appliance circuit for each
FLOOR.

03. Fire Alarm System Sequence of Operation

The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the system
database as an event.

a) The system shall automatically display on the control panel Liquid Crystal Display the
first event of the highest priority by type. The priorities and types shall be alarm,
supervisory, trouble, and monitor.
b) The system shall have a Queue operation, and shall not require event acknowledgment by
the system operator. The system shall have a labeled color coded indicator for each type
of event; alarm - red, supervisory - yellow, trouble - yellow, monitor - green. When an
unseen event exists for a given type, the indicator shall flash. When all events of a given
type have been displayed, the indicator shall change from flashing to steady.
c) For each event, the display shall include the current time, the total number of events, the
type of event, the time the event occurred and up to a 40 character custom user
description.
d) The user shall be able to review each event by simply selecting scrolling keys (up-down)
for each event type.
e) New alarm, supervisory, or trouble events shall sound an silenceable audible signal at the
control panel.
Operation of any alarm initiating device shall automatically:
a) Update the control/display as described above (B.1.)
b) <Sound all alarm signals throughout the building at the evacuation.>
<or>
<Sound alarm signals in the area of alarm at the evacuation rate.>
c) <Turn on a red alarm zone LED at the fire alarm control panel.>

The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect
and report trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, grounds or
disarrangement of system wiring and shorts across alarm bell/strobe wiring shall
automatically:
a) Update the control/display as described above (B.1.)
b) <Operate the supervisory relay contacts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a
central station agency via leased telephone lines.> (Optional)

I/36
04. Support for Installer and Owner Maintenance

Provide a coded one man walk test feature. Allow audible or silent testing. Signal alarms
and troubles during test. Allow receipt of alarms and programmed operations for alarms
from areas not under test.
Provide internal system diagnostics and maintenance user interface controls to display/report
the power, communication, and general status of specific panel components, detectors, and
modules.
Provide loop controller diagnostics to identify common alarm, trouble, ground fault, Class A
fault, and map faults. Map faults include wire changes, device type changes by location,
device additions/deletions and conventional open, short, and ground conditions. Ground
faults on the circuit wiring of remote module shall be identified by device address.
Allow the user to display/report the condition of addressable analog detectors. Include
device address, device type, percent obscuration, and maintenance indicator. The
maintenance indicator shall provide the user with a measure of contamination of a device
upon which cleaning decisions can confidently be made.
Allow the user to report history for alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, smoke verification,
watchdog, and restore activity. Include Facility Name, Licensee, Project Program
Compilation date, Compiler Version, Project Revision Number, and the time and date of the
History Report.
Allow the user to disable/enable devices, zones, actions, timers and sequences. Protect the
disable function with a password.
Allow the user to activate/restore outputs, actions, sequences, and simulate detector smoke
levels.
Allow the service user to enter time and date, reconfigure an external port for download
programming, initiate auto programming and change passwords. Protect these functions with
a password.

05. Equipment

05.a Fire Alarm Control Panel

The fire alarm control panels shall be Edwards Systems Technology (EST) type or equal and
approved equivalent and shall incorporate all control electronics, relays, and necessary
modules and components in a <surface> mounted cabinet. The operating controls shall be
located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and
all zone locations shall be identified. The cabinet shall be steel, with a gray finish. The
assembly shall contain a base panel, system power supply and battery charger with optional
modules suitable to meet the requirements of these specifications.
System circuits shall be configured as follows: Addressable analog loops Class < <B>;
Initiating Device Circuits Class <B>; Notification Appliance Circuits Class <B>.
<Single> <Two> stage operation.
The system shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design with expansion
modules to serve up to <96> detectors and <94> remote modules, and <two> notification
appliance circuits (NACs) convertible to power risers to serve remote multiple NAC modules
for zoned signal applications.
The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile
memory. The system shall survive a complete power failure intact.
The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address and
map all system devices and provide a minimum default single stage alarm system operation
with support of alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls.

I/37
The system shall allow down loading of a job specific custom program created by system
application software.

It shall support programming of any input point to any output point. The system shall
support the use of Bar Code readers to assist custom programming functions. It shall allow
authorized customization of fundamental system operations using initiating events to start
actions, timers, sequences and logical algorithms.
The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following
operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic device mapping,
electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, dirty detector identification,
automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, dual normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and isolator
bases.
The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for
placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of “same type” devices
without the need of addressing and impose the “location” parameters on replacement device.
It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble
when the new device is mapped and defined into the system.
The system shall have a UL Listed Detector Sensitivity test feature, which will be a function
of the smoke detectors and performed automatically every 4 hours.
The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a
100% compliment of detector isolator bases.
All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or
removed.
The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail.
The system evacuation signal rate shall be <continuous>
Provide a signal silence inhibit feature set to < 2 minutes > and an automatic signal silence
timer set to < 2 minutes >. Audible notification appliances shall be affected by signal silence
features. Visual signal appliance shall not be affected by signal silence features.
The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards,
and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations.
The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to
automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic
battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection.
The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 4A continuous for notification
appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 10A to output circuits for
a maximum period of 50 ms. Auxiliary power shall be 24 Vdc at 500 mA. All outputs shall
be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for <24> <4> hours of
supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 5 minutes.
The LCD Display Module shall be of membrane style construction with a 4 line by 20
character Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD shall use supertwist technology and backlighting
for high contrast visual clarity. In the normal mode display the time, the total number of
active events and the total number of disable points. In the alarm mode display the total
number of events and the type of event on display. Reserve 40 characters of display space
for user custom messages.

The module shall have visual indicators for the following common control functions; AC
Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, disable, ground fault, CPU fail, and test. There
shall be common control keys and visual indicators for; reset, alarm silence, trouble silence,
drill, and one custom programmable key/indicator. Provide four pairs of display control keys
for selection of event display by type (alarm, supervisory, monitor and trouble) and forward /
backward scrolling through event listings. The operation of these keys shall be integrated
with the related common control indicators to flash the indicators when undisplayed events
are available for display and turn on steady when all events have been displayed. Allow the

I/38
 first event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that arriving fire fighters
can view the first alarm event “hands free”.

Provide system function keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and
test. The module shall have a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and enter keys.

The Main Controller Module shall control and monitor all local or remote peripherals. It
shall support the LCD Display Module, power supply, remote LCD and zone display
annunciators, strip and carriage printers, and support communication interface standard
protocol (CSI) devices such as color computer annunciators and color graphic displays. The
RS-485 port shall be capable of supporting up to 32 remote annunciators. The MCM shall
provide one loop controller circuit, two notification appliance circuits, and common form ‘C’
contacts for alarm, supervisory, and trouble. Contact ratings shall be 24Vdc at 1A.
<The panel shall have:
a) an Expander Loop Module with one additional loop controller circuit and two
notification appliance circuits to expand the system capability to 192 detectors and 188
modules. (Optional Capacity).
b) <an interface module option for remote site monitoring. The module shall have a local
energy municipal loop and reverse polarity connections for each of alarm, supervisory
and trouble.>

06. Components

06.a Intelligent Devices -- General

Each remote device shall have a microprocessor with non-volatile memory to support its
functionality and serviceability. Each device shall store as required for its functionality the
following data: device serial number, device address, device type, personality code, date of
manufacture, hours in use, number of alarms and troubles, time and date of last alarm,
amount of environmental compensation left/used, last maintenance date, job/project number,
current detector sensitivity values, diagnostic information (trouble codes) and algorithms
required to process sensor data and perform communications with the loop controller.
Each device shall be capable of electronic addressing, either automatically or application
programmed assigned, to support physical/electrical mapping and supervision by location.
Setting a device’s address by physical means shall not be necessary.

06.b Intelligent Detectors - ( Multisensor - 4D)

The System Intelligent Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both
broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent
fire detection algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal
dimensions, time patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and
distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal patterns
that are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters. Devices not capable of
combining different fire parameters or employing digital filters shall not be acceptable.
Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions based
on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall
improve response time by decreasing the data flow between detector and analog loop
controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions shall not be
acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be
0.5 seconds.
Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A
green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red LED
shall flash to display alarm status.

I/39
 The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32 diagnostic codes. This information shall
be available for system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector.
Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition
to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information.
It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may
be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings.
Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm which
identifies and sets ambient “Environmental Thresholds” approximately six times an hour.
The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature,
humidity, other contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall employ digital
compensation to adapt the detector to both 24 hour long term and 4 hour short term
environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation
value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the
allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain
a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the “learned” base line
sensitivity. The base line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at
the detector approximately once every hour.
The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any Signature Series
detector mounting base.
06.b.1 The Multisensor will be having three sensors:- Photoelectric, Imization and heat element.

06.c Intelligent Modules -- General

It shall be possible to address each Intelligent Signature Series module without the use of DIP
or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The
personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and
may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop
Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper
changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs
mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication
with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be
capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting
assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults.
The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:
• Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)
• Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

06.d Intelligent Manual Pull Stations/BREAK GLASS -- General

It shall be possible to address each Signature Series fire alarm pull station without the use of
DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable.
The station shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for
troubleshooting assistance. Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground
faults.

The fire alarm pull station shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:
• Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)
• Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

06.e Notification Appliances - General

All appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.

All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing
the “Equivalent Facilitation” which is allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act
Accessabilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed.
I/40
 All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Panel specified to
insure absolute compatibility between the appliances and the control panels, and to insure
that the application of the appliances are done in accordance with the single manufacturers’
instructions.
Any appliances which do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for use must
show written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such proof shall be in
the form of documentation from all manufacturers which clearly states that their equipment
(as submitted) are 100% compatible with each other for the purposes intended.

4.8.3 EXECUTION

01. Installation

The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with approved
manufacturer's wiring diagram. The contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes,
junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation. All
wiring shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer, approved by the local Fire
Department, and shall be installed in rigid, threaded conduit throughout.
All penetration of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local
fire codes.
End of Line Resistors shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the
manufacturer.
All wiring shall be color coded throughout, to National Electrical Code standards.
The system shall be arranged to receive power from one three wire 120 Vac, 15 A supply.
All low voltage operation shall be provided from the fire alarm control panel.

02. Field Quality Control

The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a trained
manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the
function as specified.

03. Tests

Reports of any field testing during installation shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
Each individual system operation on a circuit by circuit basis shall be tested for its complete
operation. The procedure for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be set forth with the
consent of the code enforcement official, the Engineer and the manufacturer.

04. Documentation and Training

The contractor shall compile and provide to the owners three (3) complete manual on the
completed system to include operating and maintenance instruction, catalog cuts of all
equipment and components, as-built wiring diagrams and a manufacturer's suggested spare
parts list.

In addition to the above manuals, the contractor shall provide the services of the
manufacturer's trained representative for a period of four (4) hours to instruct the owners'
designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system. An EST2 End-
User Training Video shall be included as part of the system documentation.

END OF SECTION

I/41
SECTION 5
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES AND PRICES

1. In all cases where quantities have been specified the unit rates given must include for
everything necessary to install that section of the works complete with testing and
commissioning.

2. It is important that tenderers fill in this section of Schedule of Quantities giving unit rates as
indicated.

3. The quantities filled in shall be as given in the Specifications and NOT as measured by the
Contractor without reference to the Consulting Engineer.

4. Where there is an omission which leads to the works not being possible to be given complete
and working, this omission shall be brought to the attention of the Consulting Engineer.

5. Prices quoted for the quantities given in the following pages shall be for the supply,
installation, connection, setting to work and all accessories. Where not separated out shall be
included in the Unit Rates and Total Prices.

I/42
 GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS

J/1
 PART B2

GENERAL PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

CLAUSE NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO

2.1 Material and Standards B2/1 –B2/15

2.2 Installation B2/6 –B2/22

2.3 Testing and Inspection B2/22 –B2/24

2.4 Sterilization of Hot and Cold Water System B2/24

2.5 Water Mains B2/24- B2/33

2.6 Cold Water Storage Tanks B2/33- B2/34

2.7 Water Heaters B2/34

J/2
 SECTION B2

GENERAL PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 MATERIALS AND STANDARDS

2.1.1 GENERAL

This section specifies the general requirements for plants, equipment and materials forming part
of the Plumbing and Drainage Installations.

PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

Pipe materials are to be used as follows:-

2.1.2 Cold Water Mains

Unplasticised PVC or galvanized steel medium or heavy grade, as specified on the drawings.

2.1.3 Black steel Pipework

All black steel pipework up to 65mm nominal bore shall be manufactured in accordance with
B.S. 1387 Medium Grade, with tapered place threads in accordance with BS 21. All fittings
Shall be malleable iron and manufactured in accordance with BS 143.

Pipe joints shall be screwed and socketed and sufficient couplings union shall be allowed so that
fittings can be disconnected without cutting the pipe. Running nipples and long screw shall not
be permitted unless exceptionally approved by the Engineer.

All black steel pipework, 80mm nominal bore up to 150mm nominal bore, shall be manufactured
to comply in all respects with the specification for 65mm pipe, except that screwed and bolted
flanges shall replace unions and coupling for the join of pipes to valves other items of plant.

All flanges shall comply with the requirements of BS 10 to the relevant classification contained
hereinafter under section C of the Specification.

2.1.4 Galvanized Steel Pipework

Galvanized steel pipework shall be manufactured to comply in all respects with the standards
described for black steel pipework in paragraph 2.1.3 above.

Galvanized shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 1387 and BS143
respectively.

2.1.5 Copper Tubing

All copper tubing shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 2871 from C.160 “Phosphorus
De-oxidized No- Arsenical Capper” in Accordance with BS 1172.

Pipe joints shall be made with soldered X] fittings and connections to equipment shall be
compression fitting manufactured in accordance with B.S 864.

B2/1

J/3
 Short copper connection tubes between galvanized pipework and sanitary figments shall not be
used because of the risk of galvanic action .

If ,as may occur in certain circumstances, it is not possible to make the connection in any other
way than the use of copper tubing, then a brass straight connector shall be positioned between
the galvanized pipe and the copper tube in order to prevent direct contact.

2.1.6 Cast Iron Pipework

(a) Internal Services

Cast iron pipework and fittings for use above ground in connection with internal building services,
shall be manufactured with spigot and socket joints of the weight required by the local authority
and shall fully with the required of B.S. 416.

All joints on cast iron spigot and socket pipes shall be made with an approved cold caulking
compound and so installed as to allow for any expansion or contraction, which may take place.

All cast iron pipe work, branches, tees bends and other fittings shall be supplied complete with
inspection covers for cleaning purposes. These inspection covers shall be included as parts of
the fittings and shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 416.

(b) External Services

Cast iron pipework, which is used in connection with buried external services, shall be
manufactured, coated and tested in accordance with the requirements of B.S.1211

All buried cast iron bends, elbows swept tees and other fittings, shall comply with the
requirements of B.S.1130.

Joining on external cast iron pipes shall be carried out in accordance with one of the methods
described in B.S. Code of Practice 301, Clause 505C (v), to the approval of the Engineer.

2.1.6 Pitch fibre Pipework

Pitch Fibre Pipework and fittings for use in connection with external drainage services shall be
manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 2760. Pipes shall be connected by
means of purpose tapered joints manufactured in accordance with B.S. 2760.

Until such time as the use of pitch impregnated fibre is covered by a code of practice, the
jointing laying and cutting of these pipes shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
of the notes contained under Appendix C of B.S. 2760.

2.1.7 Concrete Pipe

Where concrete pipe and fittings are used in connection with the conveyance surface water of
sewage under atmospheric pressure, they shall be manufactured in accordance with the
requirements of B.S. 556, Class 1, except where otherwise stated.

The joints of concrete pipe and fittings may be one of the following depending application and
conditions:

B2/2

J/4
 (1) Flexible spigot and socket type.

(2) Flexible rebated type (storm water drainage only)

(3) Ordinary spigot and socket type.

(4) Ordinary related type (Storm water drainage only)

Joints (1) and (2) shall be sealed with suitable rubber gaskets manufactured in accordance with
B.S. 2494 except where they are likely to be contained by oil products, in which case the gasket
be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 3514.

Joints (3) and (4) shall be made with approved cement mortar mix.

2.1.8 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipe

Where asbestos cement pressure pipes and fittings are used in connection with external, above
ground or buried water services, they shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirement
of B.S. 486.

The classification of these pipes fall into classes:

A,. B.,C., and D., respectively, and the class to be used shall depend upon the pressure
conditions pertaining at site.

Where cast iron detachable joints are used for connecting pipes, the material comply with the
B.S. Specification, then the materials used shall be of a quality not less than required by this
standard.

Rubber jointing rings shall be used for sealing purposes and shall comply with requirements of
B.S.2494, except where they are likely to be contaminated by oil products, in which case the
gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance with 3514.

2.1.9 Concrete Pipe

Where concrete pipe and fittings are used in connection with the conveyance of surface water or
sewage under atmospheric pressure, they shall be manufactured in accordance with the
requirement of B.S. 556 Class 1, except where otherwise stated.

The joints of concrete pipe and fittings may be of the following depending upon application:

1) Flexible spigot socket type

2) Flexible rebated type (Storms water drainage Only)

3) Ordinary Spigot and socket type

4) Ordinary rebated type (Storms water drainage only)

Joints (1) and (2) shall be sealed with suitable rubber gaskets manufactured in accordance with
B.S. 2494 except where they are likely to be contaminated in accordance with the requirement of
B.S. 486.

B2/3

J/5
 The Classification of these pipes fall into four classes:

A.,B.,C., and D., respectively, and the class to be used shall depend upon the pressure
conditions pertaining at site.

Where cast iron detachable joints are used for connecting pipes, the materials shall comply with
B.S. Specifications , then materials used shall #be of a quality not less than that required by this
standard.
Rubber jointing rings shall be used for sealing purposes and shall comply with the requirements
of B.S. 2494, except where they are likely to be contaminated by oil products, in which case the
gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance B.S. 3514.

2.1.10 P.V.C. (Hard ) Pressure Pipe and fittings

All P.V.C pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 3505: 1968 or the
relevant Kenyan Standard.

Fittings shall comply in all respects with British Standard 4346 part 1: 1969 or the relevant
Kenyan Standard. Pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths.

Thickness
The Minimum acceptable wall thickness of pipe and fitting shall be as follows:-

Nom.
10 12 20 25 32 40 50 75 100
Dia.(mm)

Thickness
1.5 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.7 3.1 3.9 5.7 7.3
(mm)

Jointing
The method of jointing to be employed shall be that of solvent welding, using the pipe and
manufacturers approved cement. Seal rings joints shall be introduced where it is necessary to
accommodate thermal expansion.
Anchoring
All bends, valves and hydrant tees etc, in the line of the water main shall be adequately
anchored to resist thrust due to internal water pressure. A concrete block shall be cast under
and around the pipe between it and sides of the trench. Well-rammed material shall be used to
support the pipe and either side of the concrete.
Workmanship
The installation method of jointing shall be solvent welding; and both jointing and fixing shall
comply in all respects to the manufacturer’ site-work instructions. The maximum interval
between pipe supports at 200c shall be as follows:-

Pipe diameter
10mm 15mm 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 75mm 100mm

1.20m 1.35.
Horizontal 0.75m 0.90mm 1.05m 1.65m 1.80m do do
m m

do
Vertical 1.50m 1.80m 2.10m 2.40m 2.70m 3.30m 3.60m do

B2/4

J/6
 Pipes passing through walls or floors shall be sleeved to allow unstricted movements.

The works shall be inspected and tested during installation.

All work, which will be concealed, shall be tested before it is finally enclosed and verified by the
clerk of works.

Pipe Bed

Pipes shall be uniformly laid on a 75mm thick bed, (Sand or red soil) must not be allowed to rest
on the joint or on stones etc.

Supports to fittings
In underground installations care shall be taken to ensure that heavy components such as valves
are fully supported so that the pipeline carries no weight

Backfilling
For the protection of the pipe initial Backfilling shall be carried out as soon as possible after
laying. The initial backfill shall be fine grained material thoroughly compacted around the pipe
and consolidated to depth of 6” above the crown of the pipe at no time shall heavy rocks, stones
or other objects be included in the balance of the backfill that might protrude the initial backfill
layer and come into contract with the pipe.

Testing
Pipelines shall be tested in sections under an internal water pressure one and a half times the
maximum allowed working pressure of the class of pipe used . Testing shall be carried out as
soon as practiced after laying and when the pipeline is anchored. Precaution shall be taken to
eliminate all air from the test section and the pipe slowly to avoid risk of damage to surge.

2.1.11 MuPVC Waste Systems

All pipes and fitting shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 5255: 1968 0r the relevant
Kenyan Standard.

Pipe shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths.

Thickness

The Minimum acceptable wall thickness of pipe and fittings shall be as follows:

Size Size Pipe and Fittings Wall Thickness

(in) (mm) (mm)

11/4 32 1.8
11/2 40 1.9
2 50 2.0

Jointing
The method of joining to be employed shall be that of solvent welding, using the pipe and
manufactures approved cement. Seal rings joints shall be introduced where it is necessary to
accommodate thermal expansion.

B2/5

J/7
Anchoring
All bends, valves and hydrant tees etc, in the line of the water main shall be adequately
anchored to resist thrust due to internal water pressure. A concrete block shall be cast under
and around the pipe and between it and sides of the trench. Well- rammed material shall be
used to support the pipe and either side of the concrete.

Workmanship
The installation method of jointing shall be solvent welding; and both jointing and fixing shall
comply in all respects to the manufacturer’ site-work instructions. The maximum intervals
between pipe supports at 200c shall be as follows:-

Nominal size Nominal size Horizontal Vertical

( in) (mm) (mm) (mm)

11/4 32 500 1200

11/2 40 500 1200

2 50 900 1200

3 80 900 2000

4 100 1000 2000

6 150 1000 2000

Pipes shall be fixed in straight runs and horizontal runs shall be laid to gradients in conformity
with BS 5572 of Practice for Sanitary and in any event not less than 18mm/m unless otherwise
specified.

Pipes passing through walls or floors shall be sleeved to allow unrestricted movements.

The works shall be inspected and tested during installation at any stage in accordance with
BS5572. All work, which will be concealed, shall be tested before it is finally enclosed and
verified by the Clerk of Works.

Pipe Bed
Pipes shall uniformly laid on a 75mm thick bed, (Sand or red soil) and not be allowed to rest on
the joint or on stones etc.

Supports to Fittings
In underground installations care shall be taken to ensure that heavy components such as valves
are fully supported so that the pipeline carries no weight.

Backfilling
For the protection of the pipe initial Backfilling shall be carried out as soon as possible after
laying. The initial backfill shall be fine grained material thoroughly compacted around the pipe
and consolidated to depth of 6” above the crown of the pipe at no time shall heavy rocks, stones
or other object be included in the balance of the backfill that might protrude the initial backfill
and come into contact with the pipe.

B2/6
J/8
 Testing
Pipelines shall be tested in section under an internal water pressure normally one and a half
times the maximum allowable working pressure of the class pipe used . Testing shall be carried
out as practicable after laying and when the pipeline is anchored. Precautions shall be taken to
eliminate all air from the test section and fill the slowly to avoid risk of damage due to surge.

2.1.12 A.B.S. Waste system

Where indicated on the drawings and scheduled , the Contractor shall supply and fix A.B.S.
Waste pipes and fittings.

The pipes traps and fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant British Standards, including
B.S. 3943, and fixed generally in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and B.S. 5572 :
1978.

Joining of pipe shall be carried out by means of solvent welding. The manufacturer’s
instructions, and B.S. 5572:1978.

Joining of pipe shall be carried out by means of solvent welding. The manufacturer’s
recommended method of joining preparation and fixing shall be followed.

Standard brackets, as supplied for use with this system, shall be used wherever possible. A
where the building structure renders this impracticable the Contractor shall provide purpose
made supports,

Expansion shall be provided as indicated. Supporting brackets and pipe clips shall be fixed on
each side these joints.

2.1.13 P.V.C Soil System

The Contractor shall supply and fix P.V.C soil pipe and fittings as indicated on the drawings and
schedules.

Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with relevant British Standards, including B.S.4514 and
fixed to the manufacturer’s instructions, and B.S. 5572.

The soil system shall incorporate synthetic rubber gaskets as provided by the manufacturer
whose fixing instructions shall be strictly adhered to.

Connections to W.C and pass shall be affected by the use of a W.C. connector gasket and
cover, fixed to suit pan outlet.

Suitable supporting brackets and pipe clips shall be at maximum of meter centers.

The Sub- contractor shall be responsible for the joint into the Gully Trap on Drain Trap as
indicated on the drawings.

2.1.14 UPVC Square Rainwater System pipe and Gutter

Gutter shall be a rectilinear section 116mm or 137mm wide.

Gutters shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths.

The minimum acceptable wall thickness of gutter shall be 2.20mm.

Rainwater pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths.

B2/7

J/9
 The minimum acceptable wall thickness or rainwater pipes shall be 1.80mm.

Pipe support brackets must be adequate to screen expansion gaps.

The grade of uPVC used for gutter and pipe shall have a minimum softening point of 75C when
tested by the vicat method as described in B.S, 2782.

The pipe and gutter shall be Colour Grey, to BS 5252, 10.A.07, black, white or rustic

2.1.15 uP.V.C. Rainwater Fittings

All fittings shall be injection mounded and shall be compatible with pipe and gutters and shall
conform to BS 456 or the appropriate Kenyan Standard.

All gutters pipe and fittings shall be Colour Grey to British Standard 5252, 12.A.07, or black,
white or rustic.

Gutter connecting fittings have integrally molded seal retaining cavities housing a rubber seal of
hollow section.

The fitting shall incorporate a gutter-retaining clip.

Gutter shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths.

The minimum acceptable wall thickness of gutter shall be 2.20mm.

Rain water pipes shall be circular in section, 65mm nominal diameter complying in all respects to
British Standard 4576 or the relevant Kenyan Standard.

Rainwater pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths. The minimum acceptable wall
thickness of rainwater pipes shall be 1.80mm

Pipe support brackets must be adequate to screen expansion gaps.

The grade of uPVC used for gutter and pipe shall have a minimum softening point of 75oC when
tested by the Vicat method as described in B.S.2782.

The pipe and gutter shall be Colour Grey, to BS 5252, 10.A.07, black, white or rustic.

2.1.16 uP.V.C. Underground Drainage System

(a) Pipes and fitting

The pipes and fittings shall comply in all respects to British Standard 46600 &5481 or the
relevant Kenyan Standards.

Pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths.

The minimum acceptable wall thickness of pipe and fittings will be as follows:

110mm pipe 3.0mm

160mm pipe 3.9mm
110mm junction only 3.50mm socket 3.80mm body
All other fittings 3.20mm socket 3.40mm body
160mm all fittings 4.30mm socket 4.70mm body

B2/8

J/10
 The method of jointing to be employed shall be by lip seal socketted fittings. Jointing to other
materials shall be made in the manner specified by the manufacturer.

The grade of uPVC used for the pipes shall have a minimum softening point of 82oC when
tested by the ‘Vicat’ method 102D as described in British Standard 2782, and for fittings 79oc.

The pipe and fittings shall be of Colour golden brown approximating to British Standard 381 C:
Bo.414. These seal reacting caps shall be black polypropylene.

The natural rubber for lip seal joints shall be to British Standard 2494: 1976.

Holderbats shall be made of mild steel protected from corrosion by galvanized or search coating
for optimum fit to fit to pipe supports a special purpose made P.V.C. packing piece may be used.

The base of soil and vent stack connection to the below ground drain shall be made with a bend
of minimum center lines radius of 250mm.

Minor changes of direction where permitted shall be made with a variable bend that has a
constant effective length.

(b) Excavation of Trenches

The installation, method of jointing shall confirm in all respects to the manufacturer’s site work
instruction.

Trenches shall be excavated to a sufficient depth to allow a 50mm minimum bed below the
underside of the pipe. Trenches width shall be not less than the outlet diameter of the pipe plus
300mm and not wider than necessary.

(c) Trench Invert

The base of the trench shall be such that even support is given to the pipe for its full length. Soft
spots shall be removed and replaced with compacted granular material as described below.
High spots and rock shall be removed to allow full 50mm-bed depth.

(d) Pipe bed

The bed shall be composed of granular material to the specification called for below and shall
cover the full trench width and length and boned to gradient

(e) Laying and jointing

Pipes and fitting shall be laid true to gradient in straight lines and joined in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. All pegs used for alignment and other purposes must be removed
after use and before side filling. All joints shall be watertight complying with CP.301 ,Clauses 5:3

Pipe barrels shall be in continuous contact with the trench bed when laid.

(f) Side Filling

The side filling of pipes shall be composed of hard granular material, which shall be to the
requirements below.

Side fillings must be placed equally on both sides of the pipe and compacted, so as to buttress
the pipes against the trench walls. Side filling shall continue up to pipe crown level as a
minimum and above this level if required by the Engineer.

B2/9

J/11
(g) Back Filling
The first 300mm of backfill above crown level shall be taken from selected trench spoil all
passing 25mm sieve. It shall be placed in two 150mm layers each firmly tramped. Above the
300mm level mechanical filling and compaction may be used.

Where cover is less than 450mm the pipe shall be covered with 75mm of selected material laid
to support a concrete tile or slab indicating the presence of a service.

(h) Granular Material for Bed and Side Fill

All material for bed and site fill shall be hard and granular passing 20mm sieve and shall contain
not more than 5 per cent fines passing 3mm sieve.

The material may be composed of crushed stone, clinker, quarry scalping, ballast, gravel, shingle
or all-in aggregate to British Standard 882.

The material shall have a compaction factor of 0.3 or less.

2.1.17 VALVES
(a) Draw-off Taps and Stops Valves (Up to 50mm Nominal Bore)

Draw off taps and valves up to 50mmnominal bore, unless otherwise stated or specified
for attachment or connection to sanitary fitment shall be manufactured in accordance with
requirement of B.S.1010.

(b) Gate Valves

All gates valves 80mm nominal bore and above, other those requires for fitting to buried
water mains shall be of cast iron construction, in accordance with the requirement of B.S.
3464. All gate valves required for fitting to the buried water mains shall be of cast iron
construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1218.

All gate valves up to and including 65mm nominal bore shall be of bronze construction in
accordance with the requirements of B.S1952.

The pressure classification of valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions
pertaining to the site of works.

(c) Globe Valves

All globe valves upto and including 65 mm nominal bore shall be bronze construction in
accordance with the requirements of B.S. 3061.

The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions
pertaining to the Site of Works.

(d) Check or Non-Return Valves

All check or non-return valves 80mm nominal bore and above shall be of the swing check
type of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirement of B.S. 4090

The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions
pertaining to the Site of works.

B2/10

J/12
 (e) Ball Valves
All ball valves for use in connection with hot and cold water services shall be of the
Portsmouth type in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1212, constructed from
bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. These valves fall into three pressure
classifications as follow:

(I) Low Pressure 3.52Bars maximum

(ii) Medium Pressure 7.72Bars maximum
(iii) High Pressure 12.62Bars maximum

The pressure classification required for each ball valve will be designated in the description of its
associated equipment contained in section C of the specification.

(f) Manually Operated Mixing Valves

Mixing valves for shower fittings and other appliances being provided under the Contractor
Works shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1415 from bronze or
other corrosion resistant materials.

2.1.19 WASTE FITMENT TRAPS

(a) Standard and Deep Seal P&s Traps
Where standard or deep seal traps are specified they shall be manufactured in suitable non-
ferrous materials in accordance with the full requirements of B.S. 1184

In certain circumstances, cast iron traps may be required for cast iron baths and in these
instances bath traps shall be provided which are manufactured in accordance with the full
requirements of B.S. 1291.

(c) Anti-Syphonic Traps

Where anti- syphon traps are specified, these shall be similar or to the range of traps
manufactured by Greenwood and Hughes Ltd., Deacon Works Littlehampton, Sussex, England.

The trade name for traps manufactured by this company is “Grevak”.

2.1.20 PIPE SUPPORTS

(a) General

This Sub- clause deals with pipe support securing pipes to the structure of buildings for above
ground application.

The variety and type of support shall be kept to a minimum and their design shall be as to
facilitate quick and secure fixings to metal, concrete, masonry or wood.

Consideration shall be given, when designing supports, to the maintenance of desired pipe falls
and the restraining of pipe movements to a longitudinal axial direction only.

The Contractor shall supply and install all steel forming part of the pipe support assemblies and
shall be responsible for making good any damage to builders work associated with the pipe
support installation.

The Contractor shall submit all his proposals for pipe supports to the Engineer for approval
before any erection work commences.

B2/11

J/13
 The Contractor shall submit all his proposals for pipe supports to the Engineer for approval
before any erection work commences.

(b) Steel and copper Pipes and Tubes

Pipe runs shall be secured by pipe clips connected to pipe hangers, wall brackets, or trapeze
type supports. ‘U@ bolts shall not be used as a substitute for pipe clips without the prior
approval of the Engineer.

An approximate guide to the maximum permissible support spacing in meters for steel and
copper pipe and tube is given in the following table for horizontal runs.

Size Copper Tube SteelTube

Nominal To BS 659 To BS 1287
Bore
15mm 1.25m 2.0m

20mm 2.0m 2.5m

25mm 2.0m 2.5m

32mm 2.5m 3.0m

40mm 2.5m 3.0m

50mm 2.5m 3.0m

6.5mm 3.0m 3.5m

80mm 3.0m 3.5m

100mm 3.0m 4.0m

125mm 3.5m 4.5m

150mm 4.5m 5.5m

The support spacing for vertical runs shall not exceed one and a half times the distances given
for horizontal runs.

(c) Cast Iron and Asbestos Cement Spigot and Socket Jointed Pipes

Cast iron and asbestos cement socketed pipes shall generally be supported at every socket joint
by means of either Holderbats secured rigidly to the structure, or purpose made scraps for
attachments to rigid steel support brackets.

When Holderbats are used, they shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 416
Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe directions, junctions and tees, to
counterpart the effect of end thrust loads.

(d) Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes

Asbestos Cement pressure pipes with either cast iron detached joints or asbestos cements
screw joints shall be supported and anchored on either side of the joints. The joints shall remain
free
B2/12

J/14
 Pipe hangers and trapeze type supports shall not be suitable for the suspension of asbestos
pressure pipes unless they are designated with suitable restrictions to prevent swinging at the
same time providing the necessary support requirements.

Within building, asbestos pressure pipes shall be carried either on concrete support on rigidly
fixed steel wall brackets.

Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe directions junctions and tees to
counterpart the effect of end thrust loads.

(e) Concrete and Pitch Pipes

These pipes shall not be used for above ground application.

(f) Expansion Joints and Anchors

Where practicable, cold pipework systems shall be arranged with sufficient bends and changes
of direction to absorb pipe expansion providing that the pipe stresses are contained within the
working limits prescribed in the relevant B.S. specification.

The Contractor shall pay particular care when supporting cast and asbestos cement pipes in
order to ensure that the settlement and building movement do not break the pipe joints.

Where piping anchors are supplied, they shall be fixed to the main structure only. Details of all
anchors design proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before erection
commences.

The Contractor when arranging his piping shall ensure that no expansion movements are
transmitted directly to connections and flanges on pumps or other items of plant

2.1.21 SANITARY APPLIANCES

All Sanitary appliances supplied and installed as part of the Contract works shall comply with the
general requirements of B.S. Specification.

2.1.22 PIPE SLEEVES

Main runs of pipework are to be fitted with sleeves where they pass through walls and Floors.
Generally the sleeve shall be of P.V.C. except where they pass through the structure, where they
shall be mild steel. The sleeves shall have 6 mm-12 mm clearance all around the pipe for
insulated pipework all around the installation. The sleeve will then be packed with slag wool or
similar

2.2 INSTALLATION

2.2.0 GENERAL
Installation of all pipework, valves, fittings and equipment shall be carried under adequate
supervision from skilled staff to the relevant codes and standards as specified herein. The
Contractor shall be responsible to the Main contractor for ensuring that all builders’ work
associated with his piping installation is carried out in a satisfactory manner to the approval of
the Engineer.

B2/13

J/15
2.2.01 ABOVE GROUND INSTALLATION
(a) Water Services

Before any joint is made, the pipes shall be hung in their supports and adjusted ensure
that the joining faces are parallel and any fails which shall be required are achieved
without springing the pipe.

Where falls are not shown on the contract drawings or stated elsewhere in the
Specification, pipe work shall be installed parallel to the line of the buildings and as close
to the walls, ceilings columns, etc.,as is practicable.

All water systems shall be provided with sufficient drain points and automatic air vents to
enable them to function correctly. Valves and other use equipment shall be installed with
adequate access for operation and maintenance. Where valves and other operational
eq1uipment are unavoidably installed beyond normal reach or in such position as to be
difficult to each from a short stepladder, extension spindles with floor or wall pedestals
shall be provided.

Screwed piping shall be installed with sufficient number of unions of facilitate easy
removal of valves and fittings, and to enable alterations of pipework to be carried out
without the need to cut the pipe.

Full allowance shall be made for the expansion and contraction of pipework, precautions
being taken to ensure that any force produced by the pipe movement are not transmitted
to valves equipment or plant.

All screwed joints to piping and fitting shall be made with P.T.F.E. Tape.

The pump shall maintain the test pressure for about one hour and if there is any leakage,
it shall be measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main in that time. A
general leakage of one gallon per 25mm of diameter, per 1.6 Kilometers per hours per 30
meters head, may be considered reasonable but any visible individual leak shall be
repaired.

(b) Sanitary Services

Soil, waste and vent pipe system shall be installed in accordance with the best standard
of modern practice as described in B.S. 5572 to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all ground floor waste fittings are
discharged to a gully trap before passing to the sewer via

The Contractor shall provide all necessary roding and inspection facilities within the
draining system in position where easy accessibility is available.

Where a branch requires roding facilities in apposition to which normal assess in

unobtainable, then that branch shall be extended so as to provide a suitable purpose
made roding eye in the nearest adjacent wall or floor to which easy access is available.

The vent stacks shall terminate above roof level and where stack passes through roof, a
weather skirt shall be provided. The Contractor shall be responsible for sealing the roof
after installation of the stacks.

B2/14

J/16
 The open end of each stack shall be fitted with a plastic coated, or galvanized steel , wire
guard.

Access for roding and testing shall be provided at the foot of each stack.

(c) Sanitary Appliances

All Sanitary appliances associated with the Contract works shall be installed in
accordance with the best standard of modern practice as described in B.S. 5572 to the
approval of the Engineer.

2.2.02 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION

(a) General

All underground water and drainage service installations shall be carried out in
accordance with the best Standard of modern practice as described in C.P.301 AND
C.P.310 respectively and the following clause.

(b) Sequence of o0peration for Underground /service Installation

(1) Setting out

As described in B.S. code of practice 301 Cause 502.

(2) Breaking Up Surface (If in Roads)

As described in B.S. code of practice 301 Clause 503.

(3) Excavation and Timbering

Excavation shall be made to such depths and dimensions as may be required by the
Engineer by the to obtain prior and firm foundations No permanent construction shall be
commenced on any bottom until the excavation to the correct level with concrete 1:4:8 to
38mm maximum aggregate sizes.

The Sub- contract’s price shall have included for excavation in all materials met, for
trimming bottoms to the necessary falls and for any extra excavation required for
planking, strutting and working space.

The Contractors shall keep the whole of the trenches or other excavation free from water
and shall execute such works and install such pumps as may be necessary to keep the
excavation dry at all times.

No Sub-soil water shall discharge into the sewage system without written permission of
the Engineer.

(4) Laying of Concrete Beds or Other Support for Pipes (if required )

As described in B.S. code or practice 301 clauses 504 and the following:-

All drains below buildings and roads shall be encased in concrete 150mm thick.

Concrete beds and supports shall be concrete 1:3:6 to 25mm maximum aggregate size.

B2/15

J/17
 (5) Pipe Laying and Jointing

Drainpipe shall be laid and jointed as described under B.S code of practice 310, clause
401, 402, 403 and 404.

(6) Manholes

(1) General

All manholes provided under the Contract works shall be constructed or approved
materials and in approved manner.

All manholes shall be watertight and if constructed of brickwork, solid blockwork or

stonework, they shall be rendered internally with a cement mortar of at least
12mm thickness and finished with a smooth surface.

The sides of all channels in every manhole shall be ought up vertically to a height
of not less than the diameter of the drain and shall be benched in good concrete
from the top of the channels at an surface with a coat of 1:1 cement mortar.

In all other respects, manholes shall be constructed in accordance with B.S. code
of practice 301

(ii) Rectangular and Square Manholes

Rectangular and square straight through manholes shall be constructed form
brickwork, solid blockwork, stone and concrete to comply with the following
minimum internal dimensions (millimeters)

Depth below Internal Sizeof Internal Height of wall

Ground of Access Main Shaft Chamber Chamber Thickness
Outgoing shaft Diameter Dimensions above
Invert Dimensions LXW Benching
LXW

Up to 740 100 to 150 610x460 150

Up to 740 230 to 460 760x760 150

Up to 1200 100 to 150 760x 760 150

160 to 1200 230 to460 910x910 150

1220 to1800 100 to 150 910x910 150

1220 to 1800 230 to 460 1070x910 150

1830 to 4550 760x760 100 to 150 1370x910 1370 230

1830 to 4550 760x760 230 to 460 1370x1070 1370 230

4570 & Over 760x760 100 to 150 1370x1140 1680 230

4570 & Over 760x760 230 to 460 1370x1140 1680 230

B2/16

J/18
 When branches are connected into the manhole, the length and width dimensions of the
chamber shall be increased as follows:-

Length
Branch Diameter

100mm 300mm/branch on the side with most branches.

150mm 380mm/branch on the side with most branches.

230 and 300mm 460mm/branch on the side with most branches.

460mm 610mm/branch on the side with most branches.

Width
Branches Diameter

100mm to 300mm for each side with branches plug

160mm 460mm or the diameter of the main drain which ever is the greater.

(iii) Precast Concrete Circular Manholes

Where specified straight through Precast concrete manholes shall be manufactured and
constructed to comply with B.S. 556 and the following dimensional requirements, (Dimension in
Millimeters).

Depth Internal Height

Size
Ground Access Chamber
Main Channel Chamber Diameter
of outgoing Shaft Above
Diameter
Invert Diameter Benching
Up to 740 - 100 to 460 910 -

760 to 2410 - 100 to 460 1070 -

2440to 4550 760 100 to 460 1220 1370

4570 & over 760 100 to 460 1370 2680

When branches are connected into manholes the internal diameter of the chamber shall
increased, as necessary, up to a maximum chamber diameter 1830.

(iv) Steps Irons and Covers

Access shaft to manhole of depth greater than 760mm shall be provided with approved
steps irons as suitable intervals.

Every manhole or manhole access shaft shall be fitted with a removable airtight cast iron
cover to adequate size and strength, fixed in a manner that prevents surface water
gaining into the system.

Cast manhole covers and frames shall be manufactured in accordance with the
requirements of B.S. 497 and shall generally into the following categories:

B2/17

J/19
 Heavy Duty : For Carriageway

Medium Duty : For Footpaths

Light Duty : For domestic premises or other places

Where they do not have to carry wheeled
Traffic.

(v) Back Drop Connections

Where the level of the branch drain entering the manhole is higher than can be suitably
accommodated by the normal type benching, then the branch drain shall be connected to
the manhole by means of a back drop or practice 301.

(vi) Channels
Where the branch channel connects to the main channel in the manhole, the invert of the
branch channel shall be a minimum of 38mm higher than the main channel.

(7) Testing of Pipelines

After pipelines are connected up and joints have been sealed, the pipeline shall be tested
before pipes are, if required, hunched or surrounded in concrete.

Methods of testing and inspection shall be in accordance with Clause 4 of the

Specification.

(8) Concrete Bedding, Hunching and Surround

Concrete3 bedding, hunching and surrounding shall be provided as necessary or where
called for by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements laid down in B.S. code of
practice 301, Clause 310.

(9) Backfilling

Backfilling of trenches, heading and manholes shall be carried out in accordance with the
methods described in B.S. code of practice 301, clause 508.

(10) Reinstatement of Surface

Following the final Backfilling of all trenches, headings, and manhole surrounds, the
surface of the excavated areas shall be fully reinstated to the approval of the Engineer.

Where excavation have been carried out in public highways or other areas are not
forming part of the site, the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his price for all
charges associated wi6th the temporary and final reinstatement requirements of the local
of highway Authority, whether this is carried out by the Contractor or by the Authority
concerned.

No Claims for extra in this respect will be accepted.

(11) Sewer Connection

Sewer Contractor shall pay all charges associated with the connection by the local
Authority of the drainage to the Main sewer, including necessary reinstatements.

B2/18

J/20
2.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION

2.3.01 SITE TESTS-PIPEWORK SYSTEMS

(a) Underground Water Mains

After laying and anchoring, the main shall slowly and carefully charged with water, so that all air
is expelled and allowed to stand full for three days before testing under pressure.

A long main shall be tested in section as the work of laying proceeds and all joints shall be
exposed for inspection during the testing.

The opened of the main may be temporarily closed for testing under moderate pressure by fitting
a water pipe expanding plug, of which several types are available. The end of the main and the
plug should be secured by struts or otherwise, to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in
the main.

If the section of the terminates with a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve shall not be used to
retain the water, instead the valve shall be fitted temporarily with a blank flange, or if a socket
valve with a plug and the wedge shall be placed in the open position while testing. The
Contractor shall provide suitable end support to withstand the end thrust of water pressure in the
main.

(b) Above Ground shall be tested hydraulically for a period of one hour not less than one and half
times the design working pressure.

If preferred, the Contractor may test the pipelines in section. Any such section found to be
satisfactory need not be the subject of a further test when system has been completed, unless
specifically requested by the Engineer.

During the test each branch and joint shall be examined carefully for leaks and any defects
revealed should be made good by the Contractor and the section re tested.

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage occurring to special
valves and fittings during the tests. Any item damaged shall be repaired or replaced at the
Contractor’s expenses.

(c) Underground Drainage

A site test shall be carried out on all drainage pipes before concrete hunching or surrounds are
applied. These shall be carried out preferably from manhole to manhole.

Short branch drains connected to a main drain between manholes shall be tested as one system
with the main drain. In long branches a testing junction shall be inserted next to the junction
with the main drain and the branch tested separately. After the test has been passed, the testing
junction shall be effectively sealed.

All tests on underground drains shall be permitted on cast iron drains at the discretion and to the
approval of the Engineer.

Water test shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described under B.S. code of
practice 301, Clause 601, (b) and (c) and the test pressure shall not be less than 1,5200mm
head at the highest point in the section and not more than 10,360mm head at any point in the
section.

B2/19

J/21
 The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of one hour during which time the pipe and
joints shall be inspected for sweating and leakage. Any leak discovered during the test shall be
made good by the Contractor and the section re-tested.

In addition to pressure tests, drainpipe runs shall also be tested for straightness where
applicable. This test shall be carried out in accordance with one of the two methods described in
B.S. Code of Practice 301, clause 601 (e).

Testing of manholes shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described under B.S.
code of practice 301, clause 601 (f)

(d) Above Ground Soil Waste and Ventilation System

All soil waste and ventilating pipe system forming part of the above ground installation, shall be
given appropriate test procedures as described in B.S. 5572 1972.

Smoke tests on above ground soil, waste and ventilating pipe system shall not be permitted.

Pressure tests shall be carried out before any work, which is to be concealed, is finally enclosed.

In all other respects, tests shall comply with the requirements of B.S.5572.

2.3.02 SITE TEST- PERFORMANCE

Following satisfactory pressure test on the pipework system, operational tests shall be carried
out in accordance with the relevant B.S. code of practice on the systems as a whole to establish
that special valves, gauges, control, fittings, equipment and plant are functioning correctly to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

All hot water pipework shall be installed with preformed fibre glass lagging to a thickness of
25mm where they runs above a false ceiling or in areas where the ambient temperature is higher
than normal with the results that pipe “seating”, due to condensation will cause nuisance.
All lagged pipes which run in a visible position after erection shall be given a canvas cover and
prepared for a painting as follows:-

(i) Apply a coating of suitable filler until the canvas weave disappears and allow drying.

(ii) Apply two undercoats of an approved paint and finish in suitable gloss enamel to colours
approved by the Engineer.

All lagging for cold and hot water pipes erected in crawl ways ducts and above false ceiling
which, after erection are not visible from the corridors of rooms, shall be covered with a
reinforced aluminum foil finish and banded in colours to be approved the Engineer.

In all respects, unless otherwise stated, the hot and cold-water installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the best standard of modern practice and described in C.P. 342 and C.P.310
respectively to the approval of the Engineer.

The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or in the case of
long main or mains or large diameter, by a power driven test pump which shall not be left
unattended. In either case precautions shall be taken to ensure that the required pressure is not
exceeded.

Pressure gauges should be recalibrate before the tests.

B2/20

J/22
 The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all test pumps, and other
equipment required under this clause of the specification.

The test pressure shall be one and a half times the maximum working pressure except where a
pipe is manufactured from a material for which the relevant B.S specification designates a
maximum test pressure should not exceed 120, 180 and 240 meter/head of clause B,C or pipes
respectively

2.4.0 STERILIZATION OF HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS

All underground water mains and above ground water distribution system, cisterns tanks,
qualifiers, pumps, etc shall be thoroughly sterilized and flushed out after the completion of all
tests and before fully commissioned for handover.

The sterilization procedures shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the
requirements of B.S. code of practice 310, clause 409, to the Engineer.

2.5.0 WATER MAINS

2.5.1 Piping
All piping shall be plain ended and suitable for a use with flexible mechanical couplings (e.g.
Viking Johnson, Dresser or Gibault). Steel pipes shall comply with B.S. 534-Galvanished steel
pipes for distribution system shall comply with B.S.-Galvanized steel pipes for distribution system
shall comply with B.S. 1387-1967 medium tubes and be supplied with flanges on pipes 75mm
diameter and over.

On pipes less than 75mm diameter shall be screwed and socketed, unless otherwise stated.

2.5.2 uP.V.C Pipes

uPVC piping shall be in accordance with B.S. 3505:1968.

The maximum sustained working pressure to which the pipes and fittings will be subjected is
based on water at a temperature of 20`C.

The Contractor shall submit full details of the Colour of the pipe he intends to supply. The Colour
of the pipe shall be such as to meet the requirements of Clause 2 ‘Material’ and Clause
8.5’opacity’ of B.S. 3505.

The pipes up to and including 50mm diameter shall be of solvent weld type. The pipe shall be
supplied with interchangeable sockets pre-formed at the factory and of such internal diameter
that it takes the plain and of the pipe with same nominal diameter.

The joint shall sustain the end thrust to which the pipe shall be submitted. The Contractor shall
supply sufficient quantity of the cleaner and adhesive which shall be required to make the joints
with the pipes.

The pipes of 75mm diameter and over shall consider of a grooved socket at one end of the pipe.
The socket shall be designed to give a clearance fit on the outside diameter of the parent pipe.
The sealing medium that shall seat in the groove shall be a rubber ring.

If the formation of the socket and groove results in the thinning of the original wall thickness of
the pipe, it shall be compensated for by shrinking on the outside of the socket area as reinforcing
sleeve of the same material as the pipe.

B2/21

J/23
 The socket and groove shall incorporate no sharp angles where the stress points are created.

The joint shall take 10% deformation of the spigot at the point where the stress points where it
enters the socket without leakage from the pipe when subjected to the test pressure specified for
the pipe. Thermal expansion of the pipe shall be
Accommodated in the joint. The joint shall be capable of lined deflection up to 30o.

The sealing ring shall supply be of first grade natural rubber and the physical properties of the
mix shall meet the requirements of B.S.2494.

The contractor shall supply sufficient quantity of any lubricant or other material that shall be
needed to make the joint, which shall be assembled by hand.

The fittings shall have the same type of joint and for the pipes to be used. The contractor shall
submit full of the materials, dimensions and test pressures of the fittings offered.

Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage of the pipes and fittings.

In handling and storing the pipes and fittings, every care shall be taken to avoid distortion,
flattening, scoring or other damage. The pipes and fittings shall not be allowed to drop or strike
objects. Pipe lifting and lowering shall be carried out by approved eq1uipment only.

Special care shall be taken in transit, handling and storage to avoid any damage to the ends.

All jointing of pipes and fittings shall be carried strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.

2.5.3 Manufacturer’s Instructions

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining copies of any manufacturer’s instructions for
pipe jointing and shall familiarize himself and his employees with these instructions.

All necessary tools and equipment required for the laying, jointing and testing of pipes and joints
shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost.

2.5.4 Fittings and Specials for Galvanized Steel Pipes

All special shall be of such dimensions will meet with piping supplied. Screw down stop valves
shall comply with B.S 1010. Specials shall comply with B.S. 1740.

2.5.5 Flanged Adaptors and Flanges

Flanged adaptors shall be piece suitable for connecting a flanged sluice valve to the type of
piping supplied. All flanged or special shall conform to B.S. 10 part 1 and shall be drilled to
Table ‘C’ and machined across the faces. The flanged adaptors shall comply with B.S. 78 and
B.S. 3961:1965. All P.V.C. flanged shall be supplied with metal backing rings jointing of flanges
shall be carried out using the joint rings, bolts and washers as necessary.

2.5.6 Tees
The spigot ends of all tees shall be suitable for connection to the pipework supplied using the
aforementioned flexible mechanical joints and branches shall be flanges drilled to B.S.10 Table
‘C’.

B2/22

J/24
2.5.7 Hydrants
Hydrants shall comprise a 75mm sluice valve and a 75mm Duckfoot bend with gunmetal screw
connection to details shown on the detailed drawings These specials shall comply with the
requirements of B.S.750:1964.

2.5.8 Gate Valves

All gate valves 800mm nominal bore above, other than those required for fitting to buried water
mains shall be of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 3463. All
gate valves required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction in
accordance with the requirements of B.S 1218.

All gate valves up to and including 65mm nominal bore shall be of bronze construction in
accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1952.

The pressure classification of all gate valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions
pertaining to the site of works.

2.5.9 Air Valves

Air valves shall be of cast iron conforming to B.S, 1452 Grade 14. They shall not be suitable for
working pressure nor less than that specified for the class of pipe to which they are connected.

2.5.10 Ball Float Valves

Ball float valves shall be to B.S. 1212 parts 1and 2 shall be suitable for working pressure not
than the working pressure for the class of pipe specified for connection to the ball float valve.

2.5.11 Non-Return Valves

Non-return valves shall be of cast iron with flanges and shall conform to B.S. 4090:1966.

2.5.12 Stop Cocks

Stopcocks up to 50mm diameter shall be brass and shall conform to B.S. 1010part 1: 1959 part
2;1973.

2.5.13 Rubber and Insertion Jointing

Rubber and insertion jointing for flange jointed shall comply with B.S. 2494 part 1 and jointing
rings shall be used inn the contract, which have not been supplied by manufacturer’s approved
by the Engineer.

2.5.14 Bituminous paints

All bituminous or tar paints for protection of buried steel bolts, pipes specials etc. shall be the
best of their respective kinds manufactured by approved makers.

2.5.15 Steel Pipe and Fittings for Rising Main

All piping shall be plain ended and suitable for used with flexible mechanical couplings(e.g.viking
Johnson, dresser). The grade of steel used shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 3601:
1964. Pipes shall be welded or seamless and shall conform to B.S.534: 1966 or an equivalent
acceptable standard.

All pipes shall be externally and internally protected with bitumen in accordance with clauses 5.4
and 5.5 of B.S. 534:1966.

The external protection shall be reinforced with oven glass ,cloth glass, tissue wrapping or by
other approved material.

B2/23

J/25
 The ends of all bitumen lined pipes, fittings and specials shall be closed by means of discs or
other suitable covers firmly held in place.

2.5.16 Drain-Off Taps, Stops Valves for Water Services

Fittings for mains of size 50mm or under shall comply with B.S. 1010. Samples must be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation of fittings.

2.5.17 Storage of Plants and Materials

The contractor shall, at his own expenses, make arrangements for dumps along the route of the
pipe line for a storage of pipes, his plant and materials to suit his own convenience, but such
arrangements shall be subjected to the Engineer’s approval.

2.5.18 Loading , Handling and Conveying of Pipes

The contractor shall before commencing to lay the pipes ,valves or other materials examine them
and ascertain that they are in perfectly sound condition and he shall be responsible for any
laying. The stocking of pipes and specials on site, loading and unloading etc. shall be carried out
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.5.19 Interference’s with Fences, Drains, Pipes property etc

The contractor shall ensure the proper reinstatement of fences, drains, telephone lines, Tanesco
cables etc where affected by his work. All service shall be adequately protected and propped to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The contractor shall be liable for any damage caused to the
services due to his failure to provide adequate protection.

2.5.20 Method of Excavation

(a) The Contractor shall excavate the pipe trenches in the line and to the depths indicated by
the Engineer. Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or indicated by the
Engineer, it is intended that the trench shall be excavated to such a depth as will allow of
a minimum cover of 500 mm over top of the barrel of the pipe when laid plus or minus a
tolerance of 75mm either way. All trenched be excavated in open cuttings.

(b) Where the trenches passes through grassland, arable land or garden, whether enclosed
or otherwise , the turf, if any shall be pared off and stacked, and the productive soil shall
be carefully removed for a width of 600mm greater than the nominated trench width or
equal to the overall width of track of the excavating machine, whichever is greater, and
laid aside to be subsequently used in reinstating the surface of the ground after the
trench has been refilled.

(c) The bottom of the trench shall be properly trimmed off, and all low places or irregularities
shall be leveled up with fine material where rock or large stones are encountered, they
shall be cut down to a depth of at least 75 mm below the level at which the bottoms of the
barrel of the pipes are to be laid, and covered to a like depth with materials, so as to form
a fine and even bed for the pipe.

(d) Joints holes shall be excavated to suit minimum dimension as it allow the joints to be well
and properly jointed.

The pipe trench shall be kept clear of water at all times.

B2/24

J/26
 (f) The contractor shall whenever necessary by means of timbering, or otherwise support
the sides of the trench so as to make them thoroughly secure, and afford adequate
support to adjoining, roads, lands buildings and property, during the whole time the trench
remains open and shall remove such timbering or other work shall be deemed to be
included in the rates for excavation. Incase the Contractor is instructed by the Engineer to
leave any portion of such timber in position, he will be paid for if accordingly.

(g) The clear width inside the timbering the in the case of single pipes shall at least 320mm
in excess of the external diameter of the pipe be laid, in order to allow it to be freely
lowered into position, in the trench without damage to the external protection.

(h) Where more than one pipe is to be laid parallel, then the clear width inside the timbering
shall be at least 520mm in excess of the combined external diameters of the pipes.

(i) Should the excavation be taken out to a greater depth than is specified the bottom shall
be made good to the correct level with Mix 1:3:6 concrete or other materials approved by
the Engineer. No payment shall be made for any other excavation carried out by the
contractor and the coat of filling up to required levels

(j) If a mechanical excavator is used by the contractor, he shall indemnify the employer
against all claims for damages that in the opinion of the Engineer, may be caused by the
used of this plant. When a mechanical excavator is used the bottom 230mm of
excavation shall be got out by hand to ensure an even bed for the pipes.

2.5.21 Main Laying

Mains shall be laid in straight lines and/or smooth curves as indicated on the drawings. The
vertical profile of the pipes shall be to even gradients. Any pipes not so laid shall be removed if
so directed by the Engineer, and re-laid in proper manner at the contractor’s expense.

In laying the pipes and specials care shall be taken not to damage the protective linings and the
pipes shall be handled with tackle as directed by the Engineer.

The pipes and specials shall be slug and sounded with hammer for flaws before they are lowered
into the trench. After the pipes or specials have been checked they shall be cleaned internally
and carefully lowered into trench and set to proper gradient and line so that there is a continuous
rise from each washout to air valve.

2.5.22 Temporary Bench Marks and Sight Rails.

The contractor shall fix rails for uses with boning rods at intervals of not more than 65 meters and
temporary Bench mark related to the survey of Kenya Datum shall be provided at intervals as
directed by the Engineer.

2.5.23 Curves and Bends

Large diameter curves of main shall wherever possible be formed by giving a set not exceeding
30 to each joint, bends being used only where large diameter curves are not possible.

2.5.24 Cutting of Pipes

The contractor shall, subject to approval of the Engineer, cut pipes to such lengths as directed.
Pipes should be cut off clean and square with the axis cuts should be made wit6h an approved
from the rotary cutting machine, Engineer may approve cutting by oxyacetylene cutters.

B2/25

J/27
2.5.25 Flanged Joints
In laying pipes and specials with flanged joints, flanges shall be brought together and bolted with
the faces absolutely parallel. A rubber jointing ring 3mm thick shall be used in each flange joint
and one washer with each bolt. The ring shall be a strip ring lying within the bolt circle and full
flange width ring.

The bolts shall be tightened up gradually and equally in customary manner in order to distribute
the stress eventually over the flange. If it is found necessary to slightly from the normal run of
the piping, the deflection shall be obtained by means of beveled gunmetal ringer washer
between the flanges.

2.5.26 Surface Boxes

Sluice valves, air valves and fire hydrants shall be covered with surface Boxes in accordance
with details as shown on the Drawings. In roads and footpaths the boxes shall be laid flush with
the surface.

2.5.27 Fixing of valves, Air Valves and Washout Pipes.

The contractor shall fix the sluice valves, air valves, washout pipes complete with iron casing for
spindles and surface boxes in accordance with and in position shown on the Drawings. As far
as possible the cutting of pipes for this should be avoided.

2.5.28 Support and Anchor Blocks

Concrete mix 1:3:6 shall be placed around and against bends and other specials in trenches.

2.5.29 Colour Coding

All underground pipes are to be wrapped with adhesive plastic tape at each meter in colours blue
for drinking water and green for untreated water. All pipework above ground and valves in
valves chambers and pits are to be painted in similar colours.

2.5.30 Lettering
a) The lettering for sluice valves, fire hydrants, air valve and washout abbreviated SV FH,,
and WO respectively shall be in accordance with their detail shown on the Drawings
Colour as detailed hereafter:-

Untreated water: White lettering on green background

Drinking water: White on blue background

Fire Hydrant: White lettering on yellow background

2.5.31 Testing
a) The test pressure shall be one and a half the maximum working pressure except a pipe
is manufactured from a material for which the relevant B.S. specification designates a
maximum test pressure should not exceed 120, 180 and 240 meter/head for clause B, C,
or D pipes, respectively.

The pump shall maintain the test pressure for about one hour and if there is any leakage
it shall be measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main that time.

B2/26

J/28
b) When a section of the main has been jointed, the ends shall be closed with caps plugs or
flanges, which must be strongly strutted against a solid backfilled to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The trench shall be properly backfilled and rammed as hereinafter specified
and as shown on the Drawings, for its whole length so as to cover the main to a depth of
not less than 500mm, except at the joints holes which shall be kept clear of all backfiring,
if necessary by the use of timbering, so that each joint is left fully exposed for inspection.
No Backfilling will be permitted before testing of each section.

As long a section of main as possible shall be tested at one time subject to the maximum
length of open trench approved by the Engineer or permitted by the Highway Authority,
and the test shall be carried out within 12 working days of the completion of such sections
of mains.

Where a main is laid across a road or in such a position as to interfere seriously with the
normal use of the road, the contractor may, with the consent of the Engineer and at his
own risk, fill in such joint holes as may be necessary.

He shall at his own expense, re-excavate any or all joint holes necessary to locate a leak
and carry out repair work should the results of his hydraulic test prove unsatisfactory.

The section shall then be filled with mains water, great care being taken to drive out all air
through air valves, ferrules or otherwise it the approval of the Engineer.
c) After the section to be tested has been charged and all air liberated it shall standing
underrate moderate pressure for several days’ final airing.

The leakage from the mains and connections from each section tested shall not exceed 4
litres per 25mm diameter of main, per 2km. Length each 24 hours, every 30meters head
of pressure, and any visible individual shall be repaired.

To determine the rate if leakage, the contractor shall furnish a suitable hydraulic test
pump, pressure gauge, connection and water meter or other appliance, for measuring the
amount of water pumped.

If the leakage were at a greater rate than that specified, the contractor should re-excavate
the trench where necessary and shall remake the joints and replace defective work until
the leakage shall be reduced to the allowable amount.

(d) The Employer shall charge the contractor the cost of any couplings required to join up
tested lengths of main if, in the Engineer’s opinion, greater lengths could reasonably
have been tested or if failure under test requires the pipe to be cut, or other methods of
laying should have been adopted.

The contractor shall supply water used by the contractor in testing the main. The
contractor shall carry out all work, which May be necessary for making temporary
connections to the existing mains to obtain water for testing at his own expense.
(e) In carrying out the test for waiter tightness the Engineer only shall authorize the operation
of all valves, but the contractor shall provide all the necessary labor to assist in the
opening and closing of the valves to the Engineer’s instructions, and he shall allow in his
price for all his expenses in connection with testing on completion.

(f) The Engineer shall be the sole judge of water tightness.

B2/27

J/29
2.5.32 Cleansing And Sterilizing The Main
When a pipeline is complete and where applicable, has successfully passed the test it shall be
thoroughly washed out using, if possible, an open end. Thereafter it shall be sterilized by being
filled with a suitable solution containing not less than 20 p.p.m. of free available chorine or such
other sterilizing agent as the Engineer shall approve. After standing for 24 hours the main shall
again be washed out6 and refilled with mains water prior to the taking of Bacteriological samples.

The contractor shall provide all necessary stop-ends fittings and chemicals for this work.

Emptying and washing out of the pipes shall be done in such a manner as not damage the
trench or cause due flooding of vicinity, and the contractor shall supply and use such piping,
specials and/or hose as may be necessary to facilitate the flow of water to the nearest drain or
watercourse. Water used for washing out and sterling will be supplied by the employer.

Before any section of the mains is put into use a bacteriological sample or samples will be taken
by the Engineer’s representatives and only on receipt of a satisfactory certificates from the
medical Research Laboratory of the Employer will the main or section of main be permitted to be
put into supply and be considered as having been substantially completed.

Any expenditure involved in providing facilities or materials for taking of samples shall be
included in the contractor’s tendered rates and Engineer will specify and shall be sole judge as to
the number of sample required and points at which they are to be taken.

The cost of the Bacteriological Examination will be borne by the employer but if the sample and
samples are not satisfactory the cost of any subseq1uent analyses will be borne by the
contractor.

2.5.33 Clearance of site

The contractor shall remove all surplus pipes, special and other fittings from the side as directed
by the Engineer. The site of works shall be leveled and all surplus excavation, debris, cut trees
or bushes shall be carted to the approved tip sites.

2.5.34 Existing Installations

(a) Cold Water
Where pipes for cold water are to be connected up to existing installations, the condition
of the existing installation is to be reported to the Engineer in order to establish if part of
the existing installation is to be replaced.

(b) Sanitary Fittings

Where existing sanitary fittings are to be removed or replaced, the fitting is to remove with
outmost care and fittings and taps to be handed over to the client.

(c) Sealing Off Existing Drains and Manholes

Existing foul, surface water and subsoil drains exposed during progress of wok are to be
recorded and reported for investigation by the Architect. Where not required to be
removed, seal off with concrete or grout solid as directed. Seal off connection to
manholes, demolish wall to 50mm below surrounding ground level and fill remainder of
manhole with consolidated approved rubber and cover to level of surrounding ground as
directed.

B2/28

J/30
2.6.0 COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS
Cold-water storage tanks shall include the ball valves and connectors for inlet, supply, washout,
and overflow and may also include fire reel system supply pipe. The Contractor shall also include
in his pricing the price of the overflow and amount pipes to a place to be indicated by the
Engineer. He shall also include the washout valve.

Where paints is required the Contractor shall use the paints, which will not be toxic.

The tanks shall be manufactured to the following British Standards:-

(a) Galvanized Mild Steel tanks to BS 417

(b) Sectional Steel tanks to BS 1564

Where non-standard sizes shall be used, they shall be manufactured to the relevant standard but
with the approval of the Engineer.

2.7.0 WATER HEATERS

Electrically Heated

Non-pressure and low-pressure types domestic electric water heaters shall comply with B.S. 843:
1964, high-pressure types shall be of a standard not less than the appropriate B.S.

Domestic heaters shall, if nothing else is pacified, be supplied with 25mm thick fibre glass
lagging and enclosed in the corrosion-proofed steel, finished in white stove enamel and be
similar to manufactured ‘HEATRAE’.

Electric thermostatically controlled immersion heaters shall comply with B.S. 3456: section
A8:1963 and C.P.324. 202:1948.

Purpose made storage water heaters of the specified size shall comply with B.S. 853 and shall
be to the specified working and test pressure. The heaters shall be provided w3ith all necessary
bosses, coils etc, and shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture. Installation shall, if nothing
else is specified, be fiberglass to the specified thickness with finish suitable for painting.

Domestic heaters for floors mounting shall, if not provided with legs, be mounted on a minimum
100mm high concrete plinth.

Floor mounted purpose made heaters shall be provided with minimum 225mm high legs of
sufficient strength welded to the heaters and to suitable floor plates before galvanizing wall
mounted heaters shall be supplied with all necessary brackets.

B2/29

J/31
 PART C

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND

RAIN WATER SYSTEMS

J/32
 PART C

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND RAIN WATER SYSTEMS

CLAUSE N0. INDEX PAGE No.

3.1 Introduction C/1

3.2 Included in the Contract C/1

3.3 Excluded from the Contract C/2

3.4 Extent of the Contractor’s Duties C/2

3.5 Finishing Painting C/3

J/33
 PART C

3.1 INTRODUCTION
These specifications cover the execution of plumbing, Drainage and Fire Fighting Installations
and should be read in conjunction with other relevant specifications, drawings and contract
documents issued to the contractor in conjunction with the Contract.

3.2 INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT

The works include, unless otherwise specified, supply, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning, cleaning-up and setting to work all the installations described in the
specifications and as shown on the contract drawings.

The provisions of all labour, materials, tools instruments testing apparatus and scaffolding
necessary to execute the work in a first class manner, even such labour, materials instruments or
apparatus which are not specifically mentioned in the contract but are necessary for the
satisfactory completion of the work , including such elements as:-

- Cold water supply pipework and fittings to the water storage tanks from the existing
water mains.

- Water storage tanks complete with all necessary covers, fittings, washout and overflow
pipes and supports. The Contractor is expected to take the overflow and washout pipes
to a reasonable discharge point.

- The water supply pipework to the functional and sanitary as shown on the drawing plus
the necessary fixing support and jointing materials from the water storage tanks.

- The sanitary and operational fittings together with the fixing supports and jointing of the
supply and discharge pipes.

- The waste and soil pipework from the sanitary and operational fittings to the first
manholes including all fixing, supports and jointing materials.

- All cutting away and all making good will if nothing else is specified, be carried out by the
main contractor but it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that this work is
kept to a minimum, be responsible for the correct marking out of all chasers and holes;
and will provide also necessary details to the main contractor.

- The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that runs for floor or wall chases,
holes ton be cut or left will be marked out at the appropriate stage of the structural work.

C/1

J/34
 - The Contractor shall undertake all notifications demanded by the Authorities in order to
comply with current regulations and produce all certificates, if any, the authorities without
extra charge.

- The Contractor shall as part of his Tender supply all necessary information such as
manufacture, catalogue or type numbers, brochures or copies of catalogue pages,
weight, and all other relevant information w3hich are necessary to classify the equipment
tendered for.

- All other materials labour ,tools, instruments, scaffolding, etc, which are necessary for
completion in a first class manner of the plants to the Engineer satisfaction. Excluded
are only materials and workmanship especially mentioned herein as “Excluded from this
Contractor”

- The sub- contractor shall include for cables, pipes etc from central facilities to working
area.

- Provide the Engineer for his approval complete working and manufacturing drawing as
specified.

- Commissioning and testing of the plants as specified.

- Supply of complete operation and maintenance manuals as specified as well as adequate

instruction of the Client’s maintenance personnel as specified.

- The Contractor shall include for full maintenance during initial maintenance period as
specified.

3.3 EXCLUDED FROM THE CONTRACT

- All concrete works, inclusive of necessary holes, plinths, etc

- All block work inclusive of necessary holes (to be marked by the Contractor) etc

- All electrical wiring up to and inclusive o isolators and switchboards.

- The main contractor will provide central located facilities for supply of water and power
during the construction period.

3.4 EXTENT OF THE CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES

At the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall investigate and report to the Engineer if
all materials and equipment to be used in the work, and not specified as supplied by others, are
available locally. If not available, the Contractor shall at these stage place orders for the
materials in question and copy the orders to Architect and/or the Engineer. Failure to do so shall
in no way relieve the Contractor from supplying the specified materials and equipment in time.

Any item or material found to be defective shall be replaced by the Contractor within seven days
of his being notified and any result of defective workmanship shall be repaired including supply of
new parts if necessary, immediately upon being notified.

C/2

J/35
 The Contractor shall furnish at his own cost any samples of materials or workmanship required
for the Contract works, that may be called for by the Engineer for his approval, and the Engineer
may reject materials or workmanship not in his opinion up to the approved standard. The
Contractor shall allow in his prices such samples.

The Contractor shall when authorized in writing by the Architect or the Engineer, make variations
from the specifications and drawings. No profit will be allowed on omitted items or works.

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect or to the Engineer claims for any work for which he
considers demanding extra payments before the beginning of such work.

The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions relative to his work by actual
measurements taken on the site.

The Contractor shall request any alteration to the building structures within 30days of the
awarding of the Contractor. Only such alteration as deemed unavoidable by the Engineer will be
considered.

The Contractor shall collaborate with the Engineer and the main contractor in planning the
installation before work is commenced. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that there is
close collaboration with the other Contractors when installing services.

The Engineer and Architect shall have full rights to inspect the work in progress and all materials
and equipment for use in the installation prior to its erection whether these are on site or the
Contractor’s workshop.

The Contractor shall allow for all reasonable access to the works for this purpose.

Where large items of equipment are to be installed, the Contractor shall advise the main
contractor in good time so that access is provided for installation before work is commenced on
site.

The Contractor or his responsible representative shall in all site meetings as and when required,
in order to discuss the works make necessary decisions, receiving relevant instructions confirm
fulfillment of time schedules.

3.5 FINISH PAINTING

When all the installations have been set to work, tested and commissioned, the Contractor shall
prime the pipework with an undercoat and paint 2 No. coats of paints in accordance to BS 1710
Colour coding and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Architect.

C/3

J/36
 PART I

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

J/37
CLAUSE NO. INDEX PAGE NO.

1.00 General A/1

1.01 Scope of Works A/1

1.02 Water/CO2 Fire Extinguishers A/1

1.03 Portable Carbon Dioxide Fire

Extinguisher A/2

1.04 Dry Powder Portable Fire

Extinguisher A/2

1.05 Foam Spray Portable Fire

Extinguisher A/3

1.06 Fire Blanket A/4

J/38
 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION

OF PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

1.0 General
The particular specifications details the requirements for the supply and installation and
commissioning of the portable fire extinguishers which shall conform to BS 5423 : 1977. The
Contractor drawings but which are necessary for the completion and satisfactory function of the
equipment.

1.01 Scope of works

The Contractor shall supply, deliver, erect, test and commission all the portable fire extinguishers
which are called for in this specification and shown on the contract Drawings and listened in
these Bills of Quantities.

1.02 Water/CO2 Fire Extinguishers

The portable 9-litre water filled CO2 cartridge operated portable fire extinguishers shall comply
with BS 1382 : 1977. Unless manufactured with stainless steel, bodies shall all have internal
surfaces completely coated with either a less tin, lead alloy, or zinc applied by hot dipping. There
shall be no visibly unallocated areas

The extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the following:-

a) Method of operation

b) The words ‘WATER TYPE’ (GAS PRESSURE) in prominent letters

c) Name and address of the manufactures or responsible vendor.

d) The nominal charge of the liquid in imperial gallons and litres

e) The liquid level to which the extinguisher is to be charged

f) The year of manufacture

g) A declaration to the effect that the extinguisher has been tested to a pressure of 350 Ib/sq
in (24.1 bar).

h) A declaration to the effect that the extinguisher has been tested to a pressure of 350 Ib/sq
in 24.1 Bar).

i) The number of the British Standard “BS 1382” or ”BS 5423”.

1.03 Portable Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers

The portable carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 3326 : 1960 and BS 5423:
1977

The body of the extinguishers shall be a seamless steel cylinder manufactured to one of the
following British Standards, BS 401, BS 1287 or BS 1288.

The filling ratio shall comply with BS 5355 with valves fittings for compressed gas cylinder to BS
341. Where a hose is fitted it shall be flexible and have a minimum working pressure of 3000
Ib/sq in (206.85 bar), the hose is not to be under internal pressure until the extinguisher is
operated.

A/1
J/39
 The nozzle shall be manufactures of brass gunmetal, aluminum or stainless steel and may be
fitted with a suitable valve for temporally stopping the discharge if such means are not
incorporated in the operating head.

The discharging horn shall be designed and constructed so as to direct the discharge and limit
the entertainment for air. It shall be constructed of electrically non-conductive material.

The extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the following:-

a) The words 5 kg carbon dioxide fire extinguishers and to include the appropriate nominal
gas content

b) Method of operation

c) The words “Re-charge immediately after use”

d) Instruction for periodical checking

e) The number of the British Standard BS 3326 : 1960

f) The manufacturers name or identification markings.

1.04 Dry Powder Portable Fire Extinguishers

The portable dry powder fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 3465 : 1962 and BS 1449 or
aluminum to BS1470 : 1972 and shall be suitably protected against corrosion.

The dry powder charge shall be non-toxic and retain its free flowing properties under normal
storage conditions. Any pressurizing agent used as an expelling shall be in dry state; in
particular compressed air.

The discharge tube and gas tube if either is fitted shall be made of steel, brass, copper or other
not less suitable materials. Where a hose is provided it shall not exceed 1.060 m and shall be
acid and alkali resistant. Provision shall be made for securing the nozzle when not in use.

The extinguisher shall be clearly marked with the following information :-

a) The words “Dry powder Fire Extinguisher”.

b) Method of operation in prominent letters
c) The working pressure and the weight of the powder charge in kilograms
d) Manufactures name or identification mark
e) The words “ RECHARGE AFTER USE “ if rechargeable type.
f) Instructions to regularly check the weight of her pressure container (gas cartridge ) or
inspect the pressure indicator on stored pressure types when fitted, and remedy any loss
indicated by either.
g) The year of manufacture
h) The pressure to which the extinguisher was tested .
i) The number of this British Standard BS 3465 or BS 5423 : 1977.
j) When appropriate complete instructions for changing the extinguisher shall be clearly
marked on the extinguisher or otherwise be supplied with the refill.

A/2
J/40
1.05 Foam Spray Portable Fire Extinguishers
The portable foam spray fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 3465 : 1962 and BS 5423. The
body shall be constructed of steel not less than the requirements of BS 1449 or aluminum to BS
1470 : 1972 and shall be suitably protected against corrosion.

The foam spray charge shall be non-toxic and retain its free flowing properties under normal
storage conditions. any pressurizing agent used as an expelling shall be in dry state; in
particular compressed air.

The discharge nozzle and gas tube if either is fitted shall be made steel, brass, copper or other
not less suitable material. Provision shall be made for securing the nozzle when not in use.

The extinguisher shall be clearly marked with the following information:-

a) The words “Foam Spray Fire Extinguisher”.

b) Method of operation in prominent letters.

c) The working pressure and the capacity of the foam charge in litres.

d) Manufactures name or identification mark.

e) The words “RECHARGE AFTER USE “ if rechargeable type.

f) Instructions to regularly check the weight of the pressure container or inspect the
pressure indicator on stored pressure types when fitted, and remedy any loss indicated
by either.

g) The year of manufacture.

h) The pressure to which the extinguisher was tested.

i) The number of this British Standard BS 3465 or BS 5423 : 1977.

j) When appropriate complete instructions for recharging the extinguisher shall be clearly
marked on the extinguisher or otherwise be supplied with the refill.

1.06 Fire Blanket

The fire blanket shall be made from cloth woven with pre-asbestos yarn or any other fire proof
material and to measure 1210x1800mm and shall be fitted with specialties folded so as to offer
instantaneous single action release blanket from storing jacket.

A/3
J/41
 PART II

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

HOSE REEL SYSTEM

J/42
 PART II

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR

HOSE REEL SYSTEM

CLAUSE NO. INDEX PAGE NO.

2.01 General B/1

2.02 Commencement of works B/1

2.03 Ordering B/1

2.04 Spares B/1

2.05 Scope of work B/1

2.06 Fire Hose Reel Pumps B/2

2.07 Pipework B/4

2.08 Pipe Fitting B/4

2.09 Flanges B/4

2.10 Gaskets B/4

2.11 Non-Return Valves B/4

2.12 Gate Valves B/5

2.13 Sleeves B/5

2.14 Hose Reels B/5

2.15 Earthling B/5

2.16 Finish Painting B/5

2.17 Testing and Commissioning B/5

2.18 Instruction Period B/6

J/43
 PART II

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE FIGHTING HOSE REEL SYSTEM

1.01 General
The particular specification details the requirements for the supply, installation and
commissioning of the hose reel installation. The hose reel installation shall comply in all respects
to the requirements set out in C.O.P. 5306 part 1: Lower Floors.

The Contractor shall include for all appurtenances and appliances not necessarily called for in
this specification or shown on the Contract Drawings but which are necessary for the completion
and satisfactory functioning of the works.

No claims for extra payment shall be accepted from the Contractor because of his non-
compliance with the above requirements.

If in the opinion of the Contractor there is a difference between the requirements of the
specification and the Contract Drawings, he shall clarify this difference with the Engineer before
tendering.

1.02 Commencement of works

The Contractor in submitting his tender shall be deemed to have included for commencing any
necessary work on site at such a time as will comply with the main contractor’s program or shall
be directed by the Engineer.

1.02 Ordering
The Contractor shall order materials from the quantities taken from his own approved working
drawings and not the quantities shown in the specifications.

1.03 Spares
Spares shall be presented to the client at hand over.

1.04 Scope of works

The Contractor shall supply, deliver, and erect test and commission all the automatic fire fighting
hose reel installation, which is called for in this specification and shown on the contract drawings.

In connection with the above works the Contractor shall lialise fully with the plumbing Contractor
who will be responsible for making a new connection to the existing water mains, supplying and
laying a metered service pipe, up to the connections to the water tank.

The Contractor shall handover to the Electrical Contractor all the electrical control gear for the
installation. The electrical Sub contractor shall supply electrical power, interconnecting cabling
and wiring to the hose reel installation.

The Contractor shall supply and handover all the wiring and control diagrams necessary for the
works when required to do so.

Though the electrical Contractor shall install the isolator and be responsible for the electrical
connections in compliance with electrical regulations, the Contractor for the works contained in
this documents shall supply and install the staring stopping gears, indication equipment and
retain full responsibility for the correct functioning of the installation.

B/1
J/44
1.05 Fire Hose Pumps
The fire hose reels pumps shall consist of a duplicate set of multi-line centrifugal pumps as
Lowara Sphere unit model CEM 80/55 or similar approved. The pumps shall be capable of
delivering 2.3 1/s (8.3 m/hr) against a head of 21m (22.1 bar). The complete specification of the
packaged pump set to be as follows:-

a) Pumps
High Efficient single impeller pump, enclosed type motor, enclosed in a stainless steel
shell.

b) Pump Materials
Suction and Discharge casing to be made from Grey Cast Iron. Pump body, back
plate,shaft, conveyor, diffuser and impeller made from stainless Steel Alsl 304.

c) Motors
T.E.F.C. Squirrel Cage Motors Conforming to metric standards suitable for 240 volts (+/-
6%), single phase, and 50 Hz supply. Windings insulated to class “F” Speed 2800 RPM,
permanent split capacitor, built-in thermal overload and IP 44 protection.

d) Mechanical seal
Self-adjusting type with carbon/ceramic with elastomer made of NBR and other
components in stainless steel.

e) Base Frame
Welded fabrication from Mild Steel sections with facility for lifting unit.

f) Flexible Connections
Flexible connections to be a fixed to suction and discharge connections of the pump.

g) Valves
Pump isolating valves shall be butterfly valves to B.S. 5155 with Cast Iron nylon coated
disc and black nitrile liner. Non-Return valves shall be vertical lift to be manufactured
from Cast Iron with nitrile seal

h) Control Panel
The control panel is to be located in the position on the contract drawings.

The control panel shall be constructed of mild steel with auto lacquer finish, be moisture,
insect and rodent proof shall be provided complete with spare fuses and a wiring diagram
enclosed in plastic laminate.

Standard panel cubicle to be manufactured to IP. 55 standards, containing Direct- On line

starters or Star Delta starters above 1.0 kW.

Safety features to include 240 volts low voltage controls for starter coils. Panel shall be
mounted on vibration isolators to minimize vibration to electrical equipment.

The panel shall incorporate HRC main fuses and thermal overloads for the pumps
motors, time control unit for minimum run period, start relay incorporating timing element
for standby pump delay, and set of voltage free changeover contracts to give remote
alarm/indication for the indicator lights mentioned.

B/2
J/45
 The pump shall be controlled by a pressure switch and the control panel shall include the
following facilities to IP 54 protection:-

(i) “On “ push button for setting control panel to live

ii) Green indicator light for indicating control panel live

iii) Duty/stand by pump auto-change over

iv) Duty pump, pump run green indicator light

v) Stand by pump, pump run green indicator light

vi) Duty pump fail red indicator light

vii) Stand by pump fail red indicator light

viii) HanA/off/Auto Switches

ix) Line and control circuit fuses

x) Low water condition pump cut out with red indicator light

i) Pressure Switch
It shall be of differential adjustment type manufactured to IP 44 standards

Multi-pump sequencing control to be effected from a single pressure instrument, utilizing

control circuitry specially for pressure boosting applications.

j) Pressure Gauge
4” Dial Bottom Connection to B.S 1780 calibrated in Bars and Kpa.

k) Member Tank-(24 litre Hydrosphere )

Fabricated Steel Construction housing a neutral rubber diaphragm ideally suited for
drinking water applications. Precharged with Nitrogen to correct pressure at least stage.

l) Low Level Water Cut-out

The pumps shall be protected by low level cut out to prevent dry pump run when low level
water conditions occur.

5.07 Pipework
The pipework for the hose reel installation shall be galvanized Wrought steel tubing “Medium “
Grade Class “B” to B.S. 1387: 1967 with pipe threads to B.S.21.

5.08 Pipe Fitting

The pipe fittings shall be galvanized wrought steel pipe fittings welded or seamless fittings
conforming ton B.S 1740 Part 1971 or malleable iron fittings to B.S.143/1256.

All changes in direction shall be with standard bends or long radius fittings no elbows will be
permitted.

5.09 Flanges
The flanges shall comply with B.S. 450004:1969. All flanges shall comply to a nominal pressure
rating of 16 bar (P.N. 16)

5.10 Gaskets
The gaskets for use with flanges to B.S. 4304: 1969 shall comply with B.S. 4865 Part 1: 1072 for
pressure up to and not exceeding 64 Bar.

B/3
J/46
5.11 Non-return Valves
The non-return valves up to and including 80 mm diameter shall be as Pelger to B.S. 5153: 1974
with flanges to B.S. 4504 P.N.16.

The valves shall be of iron construction with gunmetal seat and bronze hinge pin.

5.12 Gate Valves

The gate valves up to and including 80 mm shall be as pegler non-rising stem and wedge disc to
B.S. 1952: 1964 ( B.S. 5154:1974) with screwed threads to B.S. 21 taper thread.

5.13 Sleeves
Where pipework passes through walls,, floors or ceilings a sleeve shall be provided one diameter
of the pipe, the space between to be packed with mineral wool, to the Engineer’s approval.

5.14 Hose Reels

The hose reels to the installation shall consist of recessed automatic hose reels as Mather &
Platt Model 1065 standard swinging hose reel (recessed).

All the above hose reels shall comply with B.S : 1976 and B.S, 3169: 1970 and is to be installed
to the requirements of C.P 5306 Part 1 1976.

The hose reels shall be supplied and installed complete with first-aid non-kicking hose 30meters
long, with nylon spry jet/ Shut-of nozzle. A screw down chrome plate globe valve to B.S. 1010 to
the inlet of the reel shall be fitted. The orifice to the nozzle is to be not less than 4.8 mm to
maintain a minimum flow of 0.41/S to the jet.

The hose reels shall be installed at 1.5 metres center above the finished floor level in locations
shown on contract Drawings.

5.15 Earthing
The hose reel installation shall be electrical earthed by a direct earth connection.
The installation of the Earthing to be carried out by the Electrical Contractor.

5.16 Finish Painting

Upon completion of testing and commissioning of the hose reel installation the pipework shall be
premed and finish painted with 2 No. coats of red paint to the Architects requirements

5.17 Testing and Commissioning

The hose reel installation is to be flushed out before testing to ensure that no builder’s debris has
entered the system. The installation is to be then tested to one and a half times the working
pressure of the installation to be approval of the Engineer.

Simulated fault condition fault of the pumping equipment, is to be carried out before acceptance
of the system by the Engineer and Architect.

5.18 Instruction period

The Contractor shall allow in his contract sum for instructing of the use of the equipment to the
Clients maintenance staff. The period of instruction may be within the contract period but may
also be required after the contract period has expired.

The period of time required shall be stipulated by the Client but will not exceed two days in which
time, the client staff shall be instructed in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

B/4

J/47
 PART III

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

FOR

WET/DRY RISER INSTALLATION

J/48
 PART III

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR WET/DRY RISER INSTALLATION

INDEX

CLAUSE NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO

6.1 General F/1

6.2 Regulations F/1

6.3 Scope of Works F/1

6.4 Inlet F/1

6.5 Inlet Breaching F/2

6.6 Drain Valves F/2

6.7 Outlet Landing Valves F/2

6.8 Automatic Air Valve F/3

6.9 Pipework and Installation F/3

6.10 Pipe Fittings F/3

6.11 Flanges F/3

6.12 Gaskets F/3

6.13 Non-Return Valves F/4

6.14 Gate Valves F/4

6.15 Sleeves F/4

6.16 Floor and ceiling Plates F/4

6.17 Earthing F/4

6.18 Finish Painting F/4

6.19 Testing and Commissioning F/4

6.20 Instruction Period F/4

(i)
J/49
 PART III

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR DRY RISER SYSTEM

6.1 General
The particular specification details the requirements for the supply, delivery, installation, testing
and commissioning of the dry system.

The dry riser system shall comply in all respects to the requirements set out in C.O.P. B.S 5306
Part 1 1976 and BS 5041.

The Contractor shall include for all appurtenance and appliance not necessary called in this
specification or shown on the contract drawings but which are necessary for the completion and
satisfactory functioning of the works. No claims for extra payments shall be accepted from the
Contractor because of his non-compliance with the above requirements.

If in the pinion of the Contractor, there exists a difference between the requirements of the
specification and contract drawings, he shall clarify these differences with the Engineer before
tendering.

6.2 Regulations
The dry riser installation shall comply with al applicable clause in this specification and the
following codes of practice and Standards:-

1) F.O.C. Rules 29th Edition and subsequent revisions issued by Fire Officer’s Committee.
2) BS 5041, 5 parts. Fire Hydrant system equipment
3) BS 5306, 2 parts. Fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises.
4) Together with standards against each clause.

6.3 Scope Of Works

The Contractor shall supply, deliver, erect, test and commission the Dry Riser Installation which
is called for in this specification and as shown on the contract drawings.

6.4 Inlet Boxes

An inlet box shall be provided at the position indicated on the drawings, such that the center of
the box is 760 mm above ground level.

The box shall be constructed of sheet metal with Georgian wired glass doors with a spring
cylinder lock with key.

The size of the box shall be sufficient to allow easy access for maintenance and inspection
purposes and to operate the drain valve.

The inside face of the glass shall be suitably lettered with 50mm high letters so that it reads from
the outside as follows:-

FIRE BRIGADE
.
DRY RISER INLET

F/1
J/50
6.5 Inlet Breeching
A 100mm diameter riser shall be fitted with two inlets and 150mm diameter riser shall be fitted
with four inlets.

Each inlet shall consist of a 65mm diameter male instantaneous inlets to BS 366 with a non-
return valve, a blank cap with chain and a 25mm drain valve. The inlet shall be connected to the
riser main by a Breeching piece.

The Breeching body shall have a wall thickness not less than 3.5 mm and shall be tested to a
pressure of 20 bar after the fitting of the inlet drain valve. The breaching piece shall be marked
in accordance with BS 5041 upon successful completion of this test, and screws or flanged to the
eraser pipework.

6.6 Drain valves

Each Breaching piece shall be fitted with a 25mm wedge gate drain valve.

A 50mm drain valve shall be fitted at the lowest point of the riser. This should normally be the
inlet box but the pipework may fall below the box, in either case due regard shall be paid to
facilitate for conducting the water to a suitable drain. Where a low level drain is fitted there must
be a permanent notice near the drain valve “DRY RISING MAIN- DRAIN VALVE” and also a
notice near the inlet box “LOW LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN….(state location)”.

Low level drain valves must be kept closed and secured with a leather (or similar material) strap
and padlock.

6.7 Outlet Landing Valves

Outlet landing valves shall be installed 1000mm above floor level and must not project in a
manner likely to cause abstraction.

When required by the performance specification, the valve shall be enclosed in a box in
accordance with BS 5041: Part .

Each outlet shall comprise a wedge gate pattern valve 65mm bore constructed in good gunmetal,
screwed or flanged to the dry riser, and fitted with a standard 65mm instantaneous female outlet
to BS 336, blank cap and chain, strap and padlock.

The valve spindle shall not be less than 20mm diameter, which should be marked “OPEN” and
“SHUT”. The valve shall open in an anti-clockwise direction and in a clockwise direction.

The whole fittings shall be of sound construction and hydraulically tested to a pressure of 10 bar
before being connected to the rising main.

The valve on each outlet shall be kept strapped shut and secured by a padlock and the strap
must be of leather or similar material, which can be quickly cut in an emergency.

6.08 Automatic Air Valve

An automatic air valve shall be fitted at the top of the riser to release air when the riser is charged
with water or admit air when draining off.

It will be screws with 1”BSP male.

F/2
J/51
6.07 Pipework and Installation
Dry riser pipework shall be installed using heavy weight quality galvanized steel to BS 1387 and
shall be flanged as necessary using screw on flanges and be complete with all necessary
supports.

Where one outlet per floor is screwed from a single riser, the pipe diameter shall be 100mm.
When two outlets per floor are screwed from a single raiser, the pipe diameter shall be 150mm

Dry riser pipework should be installed progressively as the building is constructed, so as to

provide fire protection during operations. In buildings taller than 30.5m in height the riser must
be installed when the buildings exceeds 18.3 m in height.

6.09 Pipe Fittings

The fittings shall be wrought steel pipefitting welded or seamless fittings conforming to BS143.

All changes in direction will be standard bends or long radius fittings. No elbows will be
permitted.

6.11 Flanges
The flanges shall comply wi6th BS 4504: 1969. All flanges shall comply with a normal pressure
rating of bar (P.N. 16) and shall be of either cast iron or steel.

6.12 Gaskets
The gaskets for use with flanges to BS 5404: 1969 shall comply with BS 4865 part 1: 11972 for
pressure up to and not exceeding 64 bar.

6.13 Non-Return Valves

Non-return valve up to and including 100mm diameter shall be as pegler to BS 5153: 1974 with
flanges to BS 4503 P.N. 167. The valves shall be cast iron construction with gunmetal seat and
bronze hinge pin.

6.14 Gate Valves

The gate valves up to and including 100mm shall be as Pelger non-rising stem and wedge disc
to BS 5154: 1974 with screwed threads to Bs 21 taper threads.

6.15 Sleeves
Where pipes passes through walls, floors or ceilings, sleeve shall be provided, one diameter
larger than the diameter of the pipe, the space between to be packed with mineral wool to the
Engineer’s approval.

6.16 Floor and Ceiling Plates

Where pipe passes through walls, floors, walls and ceilings plates shall be secured around the
pipe. The plates shall be of stainless steel construction and will serve no other purpose to
present a neat finish, to the exposed installation.

6.17 Earthing
The dry riser pipework is to be electrically earthed.

This shall be achieved by a separate rod not via the electrical power earth. A test clamp shall be
provided in the connection between the dry riser and the earthing rod. Connection shall be made
at the lowest point of the pipework.

F/3
J/52
6.18 Finish Painting
Upon completion of test and commissioning of the dry riser installation, the pipework shall be
primed and finish painted with 2 coats of an appropriate red shade of paint to the Architects
requirements.

6.19 Testing and Commissioning

The dry riser installation is to be flushed out before testing to ensure that no builder’s debris has
entered the system. The installation is to be then tested to one and half times the working
pressure of the installation to the approval of the Engineer.

6.20 Instruction Period

The Contractor shall allow in his contract sum for instructing of the use of the equipment to the
client’s maintenance staff. The period of instruction may be within the contract period but may
also be required after the contract6 period has expired.

The period of time required shall be stipulated by the client not exceed two days in which time
the clients staff shall be instructed in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

F/4
J/53
 PART IV

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

FOR

SPRINKLER SYSTEM

J/54
 PART IV

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR

SPRINKER SYSTEM

CLAUSE NO INDEX PAGE

7.00 General G/1

7.01 Climatic Conditions G/1

7.02 Scope of work G/2

7.03 Automatic Sprinkle Pumps G/2

7.04 Installation Control Valves G/3

7.05 Spares G/3

7.06 Control Panel G/3

7.07 Sprinkler Heads G/3

7.08 Pipework G/4

7.09 Pipe Supports G/4

7.10 Pipe Fittings G/5

7.11 Flanges G/5

7.12 Gaskets G/6

7.13 Foot Valves G/6

7.14 Non-Return Valves G/6

7.15 Gate valves G/6

7.16 Finish Painting G/6

7.17 Approval of Automatic Sprinkler

System G/6

7.18 Instruction period G/7

J/55
 PART IV

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM

7.0 General

The particular specification details the requirements for the Supply, Installation and
Commissioning of the Automatic Sprinkler installation. The sprinkler installation shall comply in
all respects to the requirements set in the Fire Officers Committee Rules for Automatic Sprinkler
installation, 29th Edition for ordinary Group 111 Installation.

The Contractor shall include for all appurtenances and appliances not necessarily called for in
this specification or shown on the Contract Drawings built which are necessary for the completion
and satisfactory functioning of the works.

No claim for extra payments shall be accepted from the Contractor because of his non-
compliance with the above requirements

If the opinion of the Contractor there exists a difference between the requirements of the
specification and the Contract Drawings he shall clarify these differences with the Engineer
before tendering.

7.01 Climatic Conditions

The followings climatic conditions apply at the site of the works and all plant, equipment,
apparatus, materials and installations shall be suitable for these conditions.

Where not otherwise stated, all ratings of plant, equipment and apparatus shall be interpreted at
site rating and not sea level or ratings.

Maximum Design Temperature 27oC DB

Minimum Temperature 12oC DB

Average Diurnal Range 13.1-24.8oC

Relative Humidity Range 40-85%

Altitude 1683 m

Longitude 36o 49’E

Latitude 01o 19’S

Rainfall Extremely heavy at certain periods of

the year

The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken account of the above details in his prices and his
planning of the execution of the works.

7.02 Scope of works

The Contractor shall supply, deliver erect, test and commission all the automatic fire fighting
sprinkler installation which is called for in this specification and shown on the Contract Drawings.

G/1
J/56
 In connection with the above works the Contractor shall fully with the plumbing Contractor who
will be responsible for making a new connection to the existing Council water mains, supplying
and laying metered service pipe, upto making connections to the tank

The Contractor shall install al the electrical and diesel pumps called for in this Contract.

The Contractor shall handover to the Electrical Contractor all the Electrical control gear for the
installation. The Electrical Contractor shall supply Electrical power, interconnecting cabling and
wiring to the sprinkler installation.

The Contractor shall supply and handover all the wiring and control diagrams necessary for the
works when required to do so.

Though the Electrical Contractor shall install starting and stopping gears supply and install
indication equipment and responsible for the electrical connection in compliance with electrical
regulations, the Contractor for the works contained in this documents shall retain full
responsibility for the correct functioning of the installation.

The sprinkler system shall be fed by two sources of water supply described below:-

From 100mm diameter water service of water supply described below:-

From a 118,800 litre water storage tank through 2 No. automatic electric pumps.

7.03 Automatic Sprinkler Pumps

The automatic sprinkler pumps shall consist of 2 No. automatic horizontally mounted centrifugal
electrically driven pumps. Both pumps shall be connected to the normal incoming electrical main
and to the standby generator.

The pumps shall be capable of providing at installation control valve a running pressure of at
least 1.4 bar plus the pressure equivalent of the difference in height between the highest
sprinkler and the valves when the water is being discharge from the valves at a rate of 725 dm
3/min (16.6 L/S).
The pumps shall be constructed of cast iron with impeller of cast iron and are to have mechanical
seals.

The motor shall be there phase totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage continuously rated
complying in general with B.S 2613/1970.

Provision shall be made for low level cut outs to the pumps to prevent dry pumps run in the event
of low level water conditions.

The pumps shall be provided with a plate giving the output pressure at the nominal flow
specified. Where the performance characteristic with an orifice plate not integral with the pump
delivery, the pump name plate shall carry a reference to the fact that the performance given is
that of the pump and orifice plate combination, and reference shall be made to the orifice k
factor.

G/2
J/57
7.04 Installation Control Valves
The Contractor shall supply and install approved installation control valves called for on the
Contract Drawings and in this Specification. The installation control valves set shall comprise of
a main stop valve, wet pipe alarm valve, a water motor alarm and gong, and installation pressure
gauges.

7.05 Spares
The Contractor shall supply and fix a cabinet with 24 spare sprinkler heads together with a set of
sprinkler spanners.

7.06 Control Panel

The control panel is to be mild steel construction or other approved material, moisture-proof and
insect and rodent-proof and shall be provided complete with a wiring diagram that is moisture-
proof.

Pump operation shall be controlled by pressure switch, the control panel is there to include the
following:-
a) Manual Stop/Reset push button to No 1 duty pump connected to Electrical mains.

b) Manual stop/Reset push button to No. 2 standby pump connected to Electrical mains

c) Test push button with green indicator light to No.1 standby pump.

d) Test push button with green indicator light to No. 2 standby pump.

e) Electric Alarm bell provided for remote warning of systems operation during pumps run.

f) Red warning for indication of no water in storage tank.

7.07 Sprinkler Heads

The sprinkler heads shall be conventional pattern, designed with a universal deflector and similar
to “GRINNEL” Type F,quarziod bulb sprinkler heads as manufactured by Mather and Platt (UK)
Limited.

All sprinkler heads shall comply with the following requirements:-

Nominal size 15mm

K Factor 80+/-5%
Temperature rating 73/79.4oC (yellow colour)

7.08 Pipework
The pipework for the sprinkler system shall be black medium quality, steel tubing, high frequency
seam weld pipe to comply with B.S. 1387 and suitable for screwing to B.S.21 tapered pipe
threads.

7.09 Pipe Supports

The variety and type of pipe supports shall be kept to a minimum and their design shall be such
as to facilitate quick and secure fixing to both metals, concrete and wood.

Piping shall be secured in the normal manner with pipe clips.”U” bolts shall not be used as
substitute for pipe clips.

G/3
J/58
 Where the design of the structure is in reinforced concrete, pipe hangers and brackets shall be
secured to the structure by means of redheads, rawbolts or other approved means.

Where the structure is constructed of hollow clay pot and concrete fill the Contractor shall
arrange for his hangers and brackets to be supported from the concrete columns and beams. No
rawbolts and redheads shall be inserted in any clay pot construction unless specifically and
exceptionally approved by the Engineer.

An approximate guide to maximum permissible support spacing in feet for different classes of
pipe and tube is given for horizontal runs in the following table.

Vertical pipe runs shall be supported at intervals not greater than 1½ times the distance shown in
the table.

Size Copper Tube Steel Tube

N/Bore To B.S.659 To B.S
(mm) (mm) (mm)

15 1200 1800

20 1200 2000

25 1500 2500

32 1500 2500
40 1800 2700
50 1800 3000
65 1800 3400

80 2000 3400
100 2500 3400
125 2700 4000
150 2700 4300

The Contractor shall submit all pipe support designs for the Engineer’s approval.

Positions and type of the supports shall be shown on the working drawings and submitted to the
Engineer for approval.

7.10 Pipe Fittings

The pipe fittings for sprinkler systems shall comply with medium quality steel pipe fittings to B.S.
1740 part 1 with B.S 21 tapered pipe threads.

7.11 Flanges
The flanges shall comply with B.S.4504:1969. All flanges shall comply to a nominal pressure
rating of Bar (PN 16) and shall be either Grey cast iron or steel with raised faces.

7.12 Gaskets
The gaskets for use with flanges to B.S.4504: 1969 shall comply with B.S.4865 par 1 1972 for
pressure up to 64 bar.

G/4 J/59
7.13 Footvalves
The Footvalves shall be as Greenfield check valve No. 5803 to B.S. 5153:1974 incorporating
strainer, with flanges to B.S. 4504 PN 16

The strainer shall be Machined Cast iron with strainer area not less than twice the suction pipe
area.

7.14 Non-Return valves

The non-return valves shall be as Glenfield No.5003 conforming to B.S.5253 : 1974 with flanges
to B.S 4504 PN.16
The body, door covers are to be of Meehanite Cast iron construction with gun metal seat to
B.S.1400.

7.15 Gate Valves

The gate valves up to and including 150mm diameter shall be as Glenfield R.SD Gate valve
3500 series to B.SD 5163 with flanges to B.S. 4504 P.n. 16 with raised faces. The valve shall be
double flanged cast-iron wedge gate valve for water work purposes with Meehanite cast iron
body to V.S.1452 Gr.14 with rubber covered Meehanite cast iron gate. The stem is to be of
forged stainless steel to B.S. 9700 with Meehanite cast iron hand wheel.

7.16 Finish Painting

Upon completion of testing and commission, the sprinkler installation shall be primed with 1 No.
coat of primer and 2 No. coats of appropriate red shade of paint to the Architect’s requirements.

7.17 Approval of Automatic Sprinkler Systems

After the tender contract has been let, the Contractor shall prepare complete detailed working
drawings of the protection with plans of floor, details of water supplies upto the installation control
valve and any pressure reducing valves, water meters, water locks and any orifice plates. The
drawings shall be on an indicated scale not less than 1: 100. A key of any symbol used is to be
included. A summary schedule should be included:-

i) Total number of sprinkler heads on each installation.

ii) Height of highest sprinkler head in each installation
iii) Type of installation, in this case to be wet pipe system and the size of main control valves
to be indicated.

7.18 Instruction period

The Contractor shall allow in his contract sum of instructing of the equipment to the clients’
maintenance staff. The period of instruction may be within the contract period but may also be
required after contract period has expired.

The period of time required shall be stipulated by the client but will not exceed two days in which
time the clients staff shall be instructed in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

G/5
J/60